NEW PERSPECTIVES AND INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP PDF Free Download

1 / 349
0 views349 pages

NEW PERSPECTIVES AND INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP PDF Free Download

NEW PERSPECTIVES AND INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP PDF free Download. Think more deeply and widely.

Promoting Committee
Pencarelli Tonino (Editor in Chief), Cesaroni Francesca Maria (Co-Editor in Chief),
Demartini Paola (Co-Editor in Chief), Bocconcelli Roberta (Associate Editor), Del Baldo
Mara (Associate Editor), Pagano Alessandro, Sentuti Annalisa, Aureli Selena, Berti
Alessandro, Bravi Laura, Canestrari Silvana, Censoni Paolo Felice, Chamochumbi Diaz
Gail Denisse, Ciambotti Massimo, Cioppi Marco, Conti Emanuela, Curina Ilaria, Dini
Mauro, Ferrero Giancarlo, Francioni Barbara, Gabbianelli Linda, Giampaoli Daniele,
Murmura Federica, Musso Fabio, Palazzi Federica, Savelli Elisabetta, Sgrò Francesca.
Scientific Committee
Arcari Anna, Blackburn Robert, Cooney Thomas, Corsi Katia, Dagnino Giovanni
Battista, Dana Leo Paul, De Massis Alfredo, Del Chiappa Giacomo, Alex Douglas,
Dumay John, Susanne Durst, Esposito Emilio, Evangelista Pietro, Anestis Fotiadis,
Grandinetti Roberto, Paolo Gubitta, Guercini Simone, Luca Iandoli, Marchiori Michela,
Federica Pascucci, Passaro Renato, Parente Roberto, Pedrini Matteo, Perna Andrea,
Veland Ramadami, Silvia Ranfagni, Rippa Pierluigi, Ruisi Marcantonio, Santini Fabio,
Sciascia Salvatore, Songini Lucrezia, Tunisini Annalisa, Visconti Federico, Zanni
Lorenzo, Zucchella Antonella.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE PICCOLA
IMPRESA/SMALL BUSINESS 6TH WORKSHOP: “NEW
PERSPECTIVES AND INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES TO
ENTREPRENEURSHIP” 4
Full Papers 10
What can we learn from the first ‘like meat’ business Made in Italy?
New Business Models for the Vegan Production - Demartini, P,
Bernardi, C., Marii, A. 11
Food Safety: Exploring the Italian Agrifood case Cesaroni, F.M.,
Chamochumbi, D.G., Palazzi, F., Sgrò, F. 31
Food safety and Innovation in Italian Agri-Food Enterprises Del
Baldo, M., Ciambotti, M., Giampaoli, D., Sentuti, A. 48
The circular economy in the restaurant sector. The qualitative multiple
case study of piadinerias in Pesaro Murmura, F., Savelli, E., Pierli,
G.,Vedovi, V. 62
Sustainability practice in first-generation family firms. Some empirical
evidence from the Scanian wine sector Nilson, H., Sentuti, A.,
Cesaroni, F.M. 83
How is circular entrepreneurship created? Insights from a study on
Italian entrepreneurs Mauro, S., De Chiara, A., D’Auria, A. 106
How does communication in SMEs change in the digital era? Some
insights from the entrepreneurial perspective Conti, E., Savelli, E.,
Bocconcelli, R. 123
Crisis Management in SMEs: an empirical analysis in the Marche region
Savelli, E., Murmura, F., Pierli, G., Vedovi., V. 143
Russia-Ukraine invasion: a study on the geopolitical and energetic
scenarios and the effects on the Italian SMEs Strano, M.G., Rinaldi, S.
164
Financing innovative SMEs: has any progress been made? Vannoni,
V., Nadotti, L. 183
Entrepreneurship & Networks: A Literature Review Mutignani, F.,
Bocconcelli, R., Pagano, A. 195
Long Abstracts 210
Sustainable Business Models: the role of Collaborative and Integrated
Supply Chain Correggi, C., Di Toma, P. 211
Rethinking business models for sustainability-oriented innovation:
implementing collaborative logistics in manufacturing SMEs Galvani,
S., Carloni, E., Aiudi, A. 216
Enhancing SMEs’ resilience-building processes through business model
innovation. A systemic perspective to face entrepreneurial challenges in
times of crisis Ruisi, M., Cosenz, F., Damiano, R. 224
Integrating ambidexterity and family governance for business model
innovation: a case study Di Toma, P., Correggi, C. 229
Looking for factors doing migrant women successful entrepreneurs. An
exploratory study Floris, M., Atzori, R. 235
Fostering Women Entrepreneurship under the lens of Agenda 2030. A
closer look based on a systematic literature review D’Allura, G.M.,
Floris, M. 243
Does the sector matter? Italian Innovative SME’s and Board Gender
Diversity: impact on firms’ performance Schiffiliti, V., La Rocca, E.T.
248
Women Entrepreneurship under the lens of Social Theory: The Italian
case Bannò, M., D’Allura, G.M. 253
Design(ing) for the benefit of entrepreneurship Kuura, A., Tomast, R.
260
Community Entrepreneurship: a literature review and research agenda
Buratti, N., Albanese, M. 265
How Rural Entrepreneurship Benefits from Organic Consumers’
Personal Values for Peripheral Areas Development. The Case of
Girolomoni Travasi, A., Mutignani, F. 272
Tensions in SMEs’ networks for sustainable entrepreneurship
Cheschel, F., Lucarno, M., Marchiori, M., Tunisini, A. 280
The antecedents of entrepreneurial intention: A study of Albanian
university students Makarova, M., Depperu, D., Sirianni, C.,
Cambrea, R.C. 290
Obstacles and Enablers of the Adoption of E-commerce in SMEs
Mammadov, H., Del Baldo, M., Romero, I. 300
2
The role of Educational Digital Content Marketing in improving
customer engagement and small firms’ brand awareness Francioni, B.,
Curina, I., Cioppi, M., De Cicco, R., Sigismondo, G. 305
Equity crowdfunding platforms to support innovative small business:
the Italian scenario Paoloni, P., Modaffari, G. 312
Impact of resource interaction between a startup and a medium-sized
company in a business network Dominidiato, M. 320
Innovative startups and social goals: how far are Italian firms from an
effective impact assessment? Vannoni, V., Palazzi, F., Sentuti, A. 328
A case study of social impact evaluation in a regional non-profit
organisation: Identifying challenges and suitable measures. Handley,
K. 335
Review on the digitalization of occupational welfare services in Italy
before and after the COVID-19 pandemic Pezzolo, M., Del Baldo, M.,
Ascoli, U. 339
3
INTRODUCTION TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF
THE PICCOLA IMPRESA/SMALL BUSINESS 6TH
WORKSHOP: “NEW PERSPECTIVES AND
INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES TO
ENTREPRENEURSHIP”
Roberta Bocconcelli
Francesca Maria Cesaroni
Alessandro Pagano
Annalisa Sentuti
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Entrepreneurship has been recognized by the European Union as a powerful engine
for economic development, essential to seize opportunities, generating ideas and turning
them into financial, cultural, or social value for others (European Commission, 2013;
Bacigalupo et al., 2016; Mccallum et al., 2020). It is a key driver for the creation of new
businesses, but also for stimulating renewal and innovation in existing organisations
(Sharma and Chrisman, 1999). Entrepreneurship underpins all enterprising activity and
especially SMEs, which represent 99.8% of all businesses in the EU-27, employ around
83 million people, account for more than half of Europe’s GDP and have always been
essential for European economic competitiveness and prosperity (European Commission,
2022).
Contexts in which entrepreneurship takes shape and develops have been profoundly
changed by the Covid-19 pandemic (European Commission, 2022), the outbreak of war in
Ukraine (Accenture, 2022; EIU, 2022) and the increase in extreme events over the past
4
years (Rauch and Hulsink, 2023). Such phenomena, on the one hand, have put many
SMEs in crisis (OECD, 2022), at best forcing them to a fast reaction to rethink their
entrepreneurial and business models (Fasth et al., 2022); on the other hand, these events
have provided “the seeds for entrepreneurship” (Rauch and Hulsink, 2023, p. 662), as
they have generated new needs and new business opportunities (Pencarelli et al., 2020;
2022; Zutshi et al. 2021). Finding innovative solutions to deal with climate change and
improve resource efficiency, building social cohesion, speeding up transitions to a digital
and sustainable economy have become high priorities worldwide (Maglio et al., 2021).
Consequently, policies have to be adapted both for supporting existing entrepreneurs and
SMEs to deal with the new and challenging contextual situations, and for stimulating new
entrepreneurial initiatives, able to address the new challenges and needs.
The aim of the Conference was to draw a comprehensive and updated overview about
entrepreneurship, show the liveliness of this field of research and offer all
entrepreneurship scholars an opportunity for discussion and exchange useful for
generating interesting ideas for advancing research on this topic. Notably, we intended to
look deeper within the current complexity, aiming to understand the nature, meaning and
features of entrepreneurship in the current historical phase, in order to advance theory and
gain more insights that can be relevant for the knowledge of the entrepreneurial
phenomenon, even going beyond the mainstream views of the entrepreneurship field
(Welter et al., 2017). According to Welter (2011) context provides individuals
opportunities and sets boundaries for their entrepreneurial actions. Thus, it is crucial for
better understanding when, how, and why entrepreneurship takes place and who is
involved in the entrepreneurial process.
The first purpose of the PISB 2023 Conference “New Perspectives and
Interdisciplinary Approaches to Entrepreneurship” was thus to promote research on the
variety of contexts, their complexity and how they shape entrepreneurship. We intend
variety as the many facets of entrepreneurship within a plurality of contexts that includes:
- variety of setting: districts, communities, specific institutional and social
contexts;
- variety of sectors: creative industry, cultural industry, health care, digital
entrepreneurship, rural entrepreneurship, etc.;
- variety of values: green entrepreneurship, sustainable entrepreneurship, social
entrepreneurship, etc.
5
Each context is characterised by different levels of complexity and dynamics that can
be analysed with regard to antecedents, processes and outcomes of entrepreneurship.
A reciprocal relationship emerges between context and entrepreneurship (Welter,
2011): context influences entrepreneurship and in turn entrepreneurship shapes contexts
throughout individuals’ entrepreneurial actions, values and behaviours. A plurality of
subjects/actors can be involved in entrepreneurship: startuppers (Kuckertz et al., 2020),
young entrepreneurs, women entrepreneurs, entrepreneurial family (Randerson et al.,
2015), ethnic entrepreneurs, senior/silver entrepreneurs, benefit entrepreneurs, disable
entrepreneurs, etc. With this in mind, the second purpose of the workshop is to shed light
on the different traits of entrepreneurship by investigating different kinds of
entrepreneurs. Of course, contexts and actors cross each other and this gives rise to new
scenarios worthy to be better investigated: women entrepreneurs in the cultural industry,
digital entrepreneurship and social entrepreneurship, benefit entrepreneurs and sustainable
entrepreneurship, only to make a few examples.
Facing this complexity and variety means to deal with entrepreneurship by adopting
innovative and original methodological approaches and theoretical frameworks that look
outside the box, both from traditional disciplines including management, economics,
organisation studies, law, and finance and other disciplinary fields such as sociology,
psychology, anthropology, history. Thus the third purpose of the conference was to offer
insights into the ongoing debate on the need for a multidisciplinary approach to catch the
reality of contemporary entrepreneurship.
The eleven full papers and the twenty long abstracts in these proceedings have
contributed to the threefold aim in an original manner and with interesting results for
theory, practice and policy.
The variety of contexts in which entrepreneurship takes place emerges from many
contributions. They deal with a variety of sectors (i.e., food, energy, digital services) and
take a cross-sectorial view and thus witness the multifaceted nature of entrepreneurship in
different contexts: rural entrepreneurship, communities, starting-up, crisis, sustainability,
innovation, welfare. Overall, it emerges how entrepreneurship needs to invent new
business models and to rely on a new and evolving set of resources throughout networks
and relationships, that go beyond the traditional social capital perspective.
The current entrepreneurial scenario is characterised by different types of
entrepreneurs and different forms of entrepreneurship. On the one hand, papers presented
in this special issue show how particular types of entrepreneurs can affect the
6
effectiveness of processes such as innovation, digitization, and sustainability; SMEs,
small family firms, start-ups show a dynamic approach and flexibility to address
digitalization and innovation along with sustainability issues, despite the limitation due to
their size, even in times of economic downturn. On the other hand, the focus has been
placed on how the current challenging context impacts on the characteristics of specific
kinds of entrepreneurs who face the urgency to survive, adapt and evolve - as in the case
of woman entrepreneurship, migrant entrepreneurship or first-generation family firms.
In most articles, the need to enrich the field of entrepreneurship research by drawing
from other disciplines (sociology, psychology, economic geography, etc.) emerges. Many
authors also agree that a multidisciplinary, or interdisciplinary, approach can provide a
valuable contribution to the development of knowledge on entrepreneurship and to
shedding light on its multifaceted nature and current complexity. Contributions from other
disciplines can also stimulate the adoption of new theoretical perspectives and
methodological approaches. Also in this regard, the papers presented in this special issue
offer a wide variety of research approaches, methods, both qualitative and quantitative.
They show the variety of tools available to scholars to enrich this field of research and
pave the way for new directions for investigations concerning the various dimensions of
entrepreneurship: individual or team level, venture and firm level, and context and
macroeconomic level (Carlsson et al., 2013).
In conclusion, this volume confirms that, although entrepreneurship research has
flourished and experienced rapid growth in recent years, it still represents a challenging
and promising field of research. There is much room for future advances in knowledge, to
be realised through future theoretical as well as empirical and applied research.
Acknowledgments
The Scientific and Promoting Committees of the 6th PISB Workshop are grateful to all
the participants, the chairs, the keynote speakers, and the University of Urbino Carlo Bo
for having actively contributed to the success of the conference which dealt with a very
important topic for the economic and social development at the european, national and
local level.
7
References
Accenture (2022). The war in Ukraine: Addressing the crisis and preparing for its
impact. Available at
https://www.accenture.com/_acnmedia/PDF-176/Accenture-Ukraine-War-Addressi
ng-Crisis-Preparing-Impact-Apr22.pdf#zoom=40
Bacigalupo M, Kampylis P, Punie Y and Van Den Brande L. (2016). EntreComp: The
Entrepreneurship Competence Framework. EUR 27939 EN. Luxembourg
(Luxembourg): Publications Office of the European Union. JRC101581.
Carlsson, B., Braunerhjelm, P., McKelvey, M., Olofsson, C., Persson, L., &
Ylinenpää, H. (2013). The evolving domain of entrepreneurship research. Small
business economics,41, 913-930. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11187-013-9503-y .
EIU Economic Intelligence Unit (2022). Five ways in which the war in Ukraine will
change business. Available at
https://www.eiu.com/n/campaigns/five-ways-war-in-ukraine-changes-business.
European Commission (2013). Entrepreneurship 2020 Action Plan. Reigniting the
entrepreneurial spirit in Europe. Available at
https://ec.europa.eu/growth/smes/sme-strategy/start-procedures_en#modal.
European Commission (2022). Annual Report on European SMEs2021/2022. SMEs
and environmental sustainability. Available at
https://ec.europa.eu/growth/smes/sme-strategy/sme-performance-review_en.
Fasth, J., Åkerman, N., Elliot, V., & Hilmersson, M. (2022). Small and medium-sized
enterprises response to Covid-19: The effect of external openness and procedural
management. International Small Business Journal,41(5), 465-487.
https://doi.org/10.1177/02662426221101528.
Kuckertz, A., Brändle, L., Gaudig, A., Hinderer, S., Reyes, C. A. M., Prochotta, A.,
Steinbrink, K. M., & Berger, E. S. (2020). Startups in times of crisis A rapid
response to the COVID-19 pandemic. Journal of Business Venturing Insights, 13,
e00169. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbvi.2020.e00169.
Maglio, R., Rey, A., Agliata, F., & Cano-Rubio, M. (2021). Business Model,
Sustainability, and Intangible Resources: Challenges and Opportunities for SMEs.
Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (2), 10-12. https://doi.org/10.14596/pisb.2949.
Mccallum, E., Mcmullan, L., Weicht, R. and Kluzer, S. (2020). EntreComp at Work,
Bacigalupo, M. editor(s), EUR 30228 EN, Publications Office of the European
8
Union, Luxembourg, 2020, ISBN 978-92-76-19002-8, JRC120486.
https://doi.org/10.2760/673856.
OECD (2022). Financing SMEs and Entrepreneurs 2022. An OECD Scoreboard.
Available at
https://www.oecd.org/publications/financing-smes-and-entrepreneurs-23065265.ht
m
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., & Demartini, P. (2020). Covid-19 and Italian small and
medium-sized enterprises: consequences, threats and opportunities. Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, (3), 9-17. https://doi.org/10.14596/pisb.413
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., & Demartini, P. (2022), Italian SME’s and new
scenarios in the current geopolitical turmoil, Piccola impresa/Small Business, (1),
12-16. https://doi.org/10.14596/pisb.3436
Randerson, K., Bettinelli, C., Fayolle, A., Anderson, A. (2015), Family
entrepreneurship as a field of research: Exploring its contours and contents,
Journal of Family Business Strategy,6(3), 143-154.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jfbs.2015.08.002
Rauch, A., & Hulsink, W. (2023). Just one damned thing after another: Towards an
event-based perspective of entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurship Theory and
Practice,47(3), 662-681. https://doi.org/10.1177/104225872110617
Sharma, P., & Chrisman, J. J. (1999). Toward a reconciliation of the definitional issues
in the field of corporate entrepreneurship. Entrepreneurship theory and practice,
23(3), 11-28. https://doi.org/10.1177/1042258799023003
Welter, F. (2011). Contextualizing entrepreneurship—conceptual challenges and ways
forward. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice,35(1), 165-184.
https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6520.2010.00427.x
Welter, F., Baker, T., Audretsch, D. B., & Gartner, W. B. (2017). Everyday
entrepreneurship A call for entrepreneurship research to embrace entrepreneurial
diversity. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice,41(3), 311-321.
https://doi.org/10.1111/etap.12258
Zutshi, A., Mendy, J., Sharma, G. D., Thomas, A., & Sarker, T. (2021). From
challenges to creativity: enhancing SMEs’ resilience in the context of COVID-19.
Sustainability,13(12), 6542. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13126542
9
Full Papers
10
What can we learn from the first ‘like meat’ business
Made in Italy? New Business Models for the Vegan
Production
Paola Demartini
Department of Business Studies, Roma Tre University
Via S. D'Amico 77 - Rome (Italy)
E-mail: paola.demartini@uniroma3.it
Cristiana Bernardi
The Open University Business School, The Open University
Walton Hall, Milton Keynes MK7 6AA, UK
Adriana Marii
University of Roma Tre
Via S. D'Amico 77 - Rome (Italy)
Abstract
Recent years have seen a rise in the popularity of vegan or plant-based
consumption/production, which is deemed to reduce environmental burden (Fresán &
Sabaté, 2019) since the impacts of animal products can markedly exceed those of
vegetable substitutes (Poore & Nemecek, 2018).
Our research focuses on sustainable business models applied to vegan production with
the aim of scrutinising how companies positively impact people, the planet, and
sustainable economic performance. Surprisingly, academic studies by management
scholars on this matter are very rare, and we have discovered that most contributions
come from researchers with knowledge and expertise in other disciplines such as
environmental science or agricultural and biological sciences.
In light of the above-mentioned literature gap, first, our research offers an
understanding of how sustainable business models can be applied to vegan production.
Namely, we elucidate the concept of Circular Bioeconomy and its applications through
biocyclic vegan production and cultured meat production.
Then we focused on a paradigmatic case study, a small Italian company that produced
the first “vegan meat” Made in Italy, to find out if all the theoretical concepts we have
previously discussed can be used as a lens to understand the dynamics of the sector.
Our research has not only theoretical implications calling for an interdisciplinary
approach to advance management research in this field but also managerial implications
for vegan food production, which is undergoing a phase of evolution both in terms of
technologies and markets.
Keywords Sustainable Business Model, Vegan food production, Circular BioEconomy
Paper type Academic Research Paper
11
1. Background
The concept of vegan was “invented” in 1944 by Donald Watson, a founder of The
Vegan Society. It refers to a vegetarian diet that excludes eggs, dairy products and all
other animal-derived ingredients. Watson wanted to underline the importance of using not
only alternative non-animal products in general but also encouraging a vegan lifestyle that
avoids the use of any kind of product with any animal ingredients or components (Judge
& Wilson, 2015). The “veganism style” is not new but has raised awareness and attention
in the last few years (Statista, 2018). It is not applied only to food but also to general
products, like cosmetics or hygiene products, and it is considered a real lifestyle that
produces less harm for animals and the planet (Beardsworth, 1991; Loh et al., 2021;
Gendel-Guterman& Derqui, 2021).
Due to customers’ growing attention to health and climate change, the global vegan
food market is expected to grow in the following years, passing from $23.31 billion in
2020 to $61.35 billion in 2028 (Fortune Business Insights, 2020).
In Europe, the biggest and most important companies in this market are: Danone SA,
Hain Celestial Group, Inc, Conagra Brands, Inc., Beyond Meat, Inc., and Nestle SA;
companies like these sell their products to retailers, which are mainly
supermarkets/hypermarkets, online websites, convenience stores, etc. Most consumers
make their purchases in supermarkets or big retail stores, but since the pandemic started
in 2020, e-commerce for vegan products has also grown, based on data provided by
Google AdWords, which has shown a growth of 47% of vegan product searches since
2020 (Saari et al., 2021). In summary, the market for vegan food is continuously
expanding and is influenced by customers’ choices driven by both health and
environmental concerns (Apostolidis & McLeay, 2016; Dedehayir, 2017; Carfì et al.,
2018; Cooper et al., 2022).
In addition to these statistics and market trends, this paper will discuss the application
of business models based on the newest and recent Circular Economy principles for vegan
production with a focus mainly on the food system and the small business sector.
The purpose of our study is to investigate if innovative companies focusing on vegan
production engage circularity in their activities and strategies, multiplying their
opportunities to not only produce less harm for the environment, but also increasing
economic and social value.
Hence, the main research question of our research is the following:
12
- What are the main key aspects of new business models applied to vegan food
production?
Our research applies an exploratory research approach to analyse the application of
sustainable strategies derived from the Circular Economy to vegan production.
Subsequently, we focused on a paradigmatic case study, a small Italian company that
produces and sells vegan products, to find out if the theoretical concepts we have
discussed can be applied in the business model of a pioneering vegan business.
Our contribution as management scholars is to delve into a hot topic issue, such as the
production of vegetal substitutes and alternative proteins.
In this still gray field, the application of technological and process innovations to
business activity must follow principles of responsibility and impact assessment that
consider individual and collective and private and public interests. Food production is a
key issue for humankind’s survival and represents what we call a wicked problem.
Producing alternative proteins may be an option to reduce environmental impact and
respond to the problem of food scarcity, but the phenomenon must be studied in depth,
and from a multidisciplinary and interdisciplinary perspective. Without a thorough
understanding of the short, medium and long-term impact, the risk is that the interests of a
few will prevail over those of the community.
The reminder of the paper is structured as follows: section two presents the research
design and the methodological issues we faced; section three illustrates how companies
that produce plant-based food, or companies that decide to shift their strategy towards a
sustainable vegan one, can reduce the harmful effects of their processes and generate
positive impacts on the environment and human health; in section 4 those concepts are
used as a lens to analyse a paradigmatic case study; conclusions are drawn in section 5.
2. Research Design and Methodology
A preliminary literature review was conducted by using the following keywords:
“vegan production” and “circular economy” or “vegan company” and “business model”
or “sustainable production”. These keywords were selected to find as much information
and research, and as many case studies as possible, both on the SCOPUS database and
google scholar platform.
13
Surprisingly, academic studies by management scholars on this topic are very rare,
and we have discovered that most contributions come from researchers in other
disciplines such as environmental science or agricultural and biological sciences.
In light of this literature gap, our research, based on secondary data (i.e., academic
and grey literature), offers an understanding of how new business models may be applied
by vegan companies. The circular economy, in fact, has various variants and applications
(Brown et al., 2021; Alcade et al., 2022; Hofmann et al., 2022) which lead to the
possibility of developing new models applied to vegan companies.
The outcome of our study is an “explanatory journey”, which starting from the
Circular Economy applications, combined with the Green Economy principles, leads to
new business models for vegan companies. These concepts will be our lens in the analysis
of a paradigmatic case study that will help us to answer our RQs.
The case study we selected is the Italian vegan start-up Joy Srl., which was founded in
Piegaro (PG) by the Musacchio family in 2014 in order to bring a healthy, sustainable and
100% plant-based diet to Italy through a collaboration with the Wageningen University
and the development of a facility of High Moisture Wet Extrusion. These factors have led
to the creation of the first “vegan meat” Made in Italy.
Data on the case study were collected and put together from different sources, such as
interviews, articles, videos, etc. In particular, materials have been found through web
research on the main website and social network pages.
Moreover, articles and journal papers have been collected to study its past successes
and actions related to its strategy and work, which aided us in obtaining a clearer
overview of the company.
Lastly, a semi-structured interview with the owner of the company has been carried
out. Semi-structured interviews are characterised by a high level of flexibility and the
capability of disclosing important and hidden information and, furthermore, are useful to
introduce more detail and richness thanks to their more open-ended nature (George,
2022).
3. New Business Models for Sustainable Development Applied to Vegan
Production
Since new production systems, which are based on the application of the Circular
Economy principles have been implemented in the vegan sector in the last decade, in the
14
following section, the main features of new business models for sustainable development
will be briefly depicted before analysing the deployment of specific technology used in
vegan food production.
3.1. Circular Economy, Bioeconomy and Circular Bioeconomy
One of the most powerful tools and keys to changing the way of producing and doing
business has been the passage from the old business models and the old producing
mechanisms and processes to the new concept of “Circular Economy” (CE), which has
been defined as an economic system that emerges to oppose the linear open-ended
system (produce, consume, dispose), with the aim to accomplish sustainable development,
simultaneously creating environmental quality, economic prosperity and social equity to
the benefit of current and future generations (Homrich et al., 2018; Reike et al., 2018).
Connected to this concept, we can consider “bioeconomy”, which essentially relies on
biological inputs that are used in production instead of fossil fuels and non-renewable
resources. “Bio-based economy” or “knowledge-based bio-economy” (BE) underlines the
importance and power of biological resources from land and sea for the manufacturing of
products, by substituting fossil fuels with the biomass integrated with biotechnology
innovations.
Bioeconomy products consist of biomass and low-value products (i.e., biofuels) and
high-value products, such as bio-based chemicals or compounds (McCormick and Kautto,
2013).
If we think about the application of a BE in management production, for example,
food production, there must be proper management of the resources, which is often
characterised by a high level of uncertainty, in order to be truly sustainable.
Indeed, the use of biomass for unsustainable food production can lead to negative effects
on the environment, such as deforestation, and on society; for this reason, institutions
must release proper regulations and policies not only globally but also in Europe, in
particular, as BE policies tend to prioritise economic value rather than environmental and
social value (European Commission, 2018).
A BE, as understood from its definition, can be linked to the CE and transformed into
“circular bioeconomy” (CBE), which refers to the concept of bioeconomy integrated with
elements of CE (Institute for European Environmental Policy; Kershaw et al., 2021;
Muscat et al., 2021).
15
Since we are discussing vegan production, the Plant Based Products Council, which is
the leading organisation that promotes sustainable products derived from nature, firmly
promotes the circular bioeconomy through the creation of renewable products at the
market scale and supports policies that ensure vegan products become part of the circular
bioeconomy. Taken together, these actions reduce carbon emissions, improve water
quality, enrich our soil health and curtail solid waste destined for landfills (Plant Based
Products Council, 2022).
Some initiatives, such as “The Economics of Ecosystems and Biodiversity”, state that
all three concepts (Circular Economy, Green Economy and BioEconomy) are linked by
the interest and effort to preserve nature and, in general, are applied based on the same
concepts (D’Amato, 2021). It is necessary for these models to be adopted by companies
to substitute the old ones, so they can face environmental issues and meet the new
requirements established by policy makers and institutions.
For this aim, the inclusion of these principles in a company business model applied to
vegan production can ensure positive impacts on the planet and society.
3.2 Biocyclic-vegan Production
In the following section, we will discuss a new trend named the “biocyclic-vegan”
label that was introduced in Germany in 2017. It basically refers to the exclusion of any
animal by-product during production.
The concept is based on a vegan approach and, indeed, in 2016, the producer
association “Biocyclic-vegan cultivation” was founded. Their task is to support the
biocyclic vegan agriculture by following the guidelines provided by The International
Federation of Organic Agriculture Movements - Organics International (IFOAM Organics
International).
This new production methodology is based on the combination of organic agriculture and
stock-free agriculture, which emphasises the importance of using natural resources and,
meanwhile, enables them to ensure their availability in the future, meaning that they do
not have to be depleted.
Essentially, it is primarily based on excluding materials such as horn meal, blood meal
and composted manure from farming in the land cultivation, and, as it aims to re-establish
a healthy life cycle, coherent with the concept of a closed-loop approach, it is followed by
a compensation for the resources that are used to guarantee their availability in the future.
16
Biocyclic-vegan production, in particular in the agriculture sector, is strictly based on
the total exclusion of animal products and farm animals, a strategy which strives to persist
in the following years, in particular in Germany.
The first countries in which vegan biocyclic was introduced and applied are Germany,
Austria and Switzerland. They are also the ones which have followed the labelling
guidelines since 2016, to be transparent about their production methods (Jürkenbeck et
al., 2019)
3.3 Alternative Meat (plant-based and cultured meat) Production
Since is it expected that animal products will be requested even more by consumers,
there is an urgency to increase the production and distribution of alternative products,
especially alternative meat products made through innovative food technologies able to
reproduce the taste and texture of real meat and meat-based products.
The University of Nottingham (2018) has defined alternative protein as follows:
Alternative protein, such as plant-based meat substitute, or edible insects, provides a
substantial amount of protein, but requires less natural inputs (e.g., water) to produce,
compared to the most common and conventional protein sources (i.e., meat and fish).
They are also called ‘novel food proteins’ and are composed of different sequences of
amino acids, which are responsible for building lean body tissues and human health.
An alternative protein of plant-based meat basically refers to alternatives to
meat-based protein, which replace and replicate it not only in the taste and texture, but
also in nutritional characteristics, by trying to be even more economically convenient than
meat, contribute to the environment and decrease the negative health impacts derived
from meat production (Wild et al., 2014; BCG, 2021).
One of the most important reasons to produce alternative protein and to adopt a
different diet consists in the awareness of human health.
Meat causes diseases such as cancer and obesity in relation to its high level of
saturated fat and cholesterol, while AP proposes funnelling its same nutritional benefits
related to the level of protein and essential nutrients with relatively low levels of
cholesterol, saturated fats and nitrates. (Chen & Eriksson, 2019)
Cultured meat, instead, is produced by culturing animal cells in vitro using tissue
engineering techniques and is presented by its advocates as a good alternative for
consumers who want to be more responsible regarding the increasing demand for food by
17
the growing human population but do not wish to change their diet (Chriki & Hocquette,
2020; Reis et al., 2020).
Alternative meat (i.e., plant-based and cultured meat) produces smaller negative
environmental impacts with smaller GHG emissions, land use and water, but at the same
time, since it involves activities which are highly processed and request a huge amount of
energy, it can also be a threat for the environment (Tuomisto & Teixera de Mattos, 2011).
This new production system is expected to acquire more attention from companies
due to the growth of the demand for protein and the expected failure of traditional meat
production, which would allow for the creation of new opportunities (Mancini &
Antonioli, 2022).
Shifting to new sectors, plant-based meat can oer farmers the opportunity to
diversify or completely change to the production of plants, algae, mycoprotein, seaweed,
etc., and, at the same time, provide opportunities to companies by enlarging their offering
and their markets (Luiz Morais-da-Silva et al. 2022).
However, not all scholars agree on the positive impacts of the production of
alternative meat on people and the planet. Despite the promising purposes of these
products, at the same time, there are doubts about the processing activities of AP, which
can be considered as “ultra-processed food” (Monteiro et al., 2019). Indeed, health care
institutes recognise that processed food can be linked to some health issues and diseases
such as obesity, diabetes, etc, related to the presence of additives or flavour enhancers.
Moreover, by analysing a study conducted on the effects of the production of cultured
meat, (Tuomisto & Teixera de Mattos 2011) it has been seen that, by calculating the
energy input of cultured meat, this could be relatively high due to the additional processes
involved; however, this high energy consumption could be decreased by adding and
improving various technologies. Table 1 summarises positive and negative aspects of the
production of alternative meat.
Table 1. Positive and negative sides of the production of alternative meat
Health
Economic
Environmental
Positive
Benefits that come
from the reduction of
meat consumption.
Possibilities for companies
to expand their market;
possibilities for farmers to
enlarge their offering by
diversifying or completely
changing
Reduction of GHGs
18
Negative
Ultra-processed food
which is doubted to
be healthier
Increase in land use in
order to grow the inputs
necessary
A huge amount of
energy used
3.4. A Summary of Different Vegan Production Systems
In order to answer our RQs, table 2 summarises the characteristics of the three main
vegan and plant-based productions, which incorporate principles of Circular Economy,
Green Economy and BioEconomy in their business models. Other than proper vegan
products, it has been important to also take into account the newest production system for
cultured meat, which is done by using the same principles of AP products (i.e.,
bicyclic-vegan products), with the involvement of technologies to recreate protein
products and alternatives to the real meat.
Table 2. A picture of different vegan productions
Type
Benefits
Categories
Biocyclic-vega
n
using natural resources
and enabling them to
ensure their availability
in the future, which
means that they do not
have to be depleted.
aims to re-establish a
healthy life cycle
Algae protein; yeast;
mycoprotein
Plant-based
Eco-friendly, more
sustainable, nutritious
and healthy and more
affordability
Pulses/legumes;
Seeds; cereals;
Seaweed. e.g. Pea,
soy, chia seed, etc.
Cultured meat
environmental and
health benefits, reduced
risk of contamination
and food borne illness,
as well as being more
ethically acceptable
In vitro cultured
meat cells
19
4 The Case Study of the Italian Vegan Start-up Joy Srl
Our next step is to understand if the application of the circular economy in vegan
production is effective in terms of business sustainability.
Beyond the insight into new technologies for the production of alternative proteins,
we will describe the business model of the small enterprise selected as an innovative
start-up in plant-based production. Hence, for the purpose of our study, we have
conducted a semi-structured interview with the entrepreneur, on the basis of the following
research questions:
Materials, resources
Where do you find raw materials?
What are the main resources used in the process?
Is it sustainable? Is it harmful for our health?
Technologies and innovations
How do you produce the plant-based products?
How does your technological process work?
Is your production system sustainable?
Distribution channels,
Revenues streams, costs
Future expectations
What are your main distribution channels?
Do you collaborate with other companies?
What are your business costs?
What are your future projects and expectations?
4.1 The Context
The selected case study is the Italian vegan start-up Joy Srl., which was founded in
Piegaro (PG) by the Musacchio family in 2014 to bring a healthy, sustainable and 100%
plant-based diet to Italy through a collaboration with the Wageningen University and the
development of a facility of High Moisture Wet Extrusion. These factors have led to the
to the creation of the first “vegan meat” Made in Italy.
Looking back, the founder of the company, stopped eating meat when he was 19 years
old and later with his wife and family opened a hotel, where they offered only vegetarian
food to the customers. In 2002, the English Vegetarian Society even rewarded this Hotel
with the “Best Vegetarian Hotel Award”. Given that the world has started to be more
oriented to vegan food and that new technologies have been created to produce alternative
products to the traditional ones, the entrepreneur decided to create Joy Srl. in 2014.
In 2019 a food line based on plant-based protein products called “Food Evolution”
was launched (available at: About Food Evolution). The first product proposed by the
company was the “impossible chicken”, which is a plant-based chicken produced by a
technology able to reproduce the same texture of real meat with the same flavour.
20
This product is made with soy protein, vegetable fibres, sunflower oil, flavourings,
spices and aromatic herbs. These seem like basic ingredients, but the secret lies in the
technology as explained by the small entrepreneur in an interview done in 2019:
The products are made by using a technology developed in the Netherlands at the
Wageningen University. It stretches the protein cell into a filament. It's like making pasta:
a mechanical and thermal process but with gigantic machinery. You can have a product
with the same taste and texture as meat, but 100% plant-based. […] This technology
he adds allows the thermocoagulation of the product; that is, it is not altered if it is
soaked in a sauce or oil (Vegolosi.it, 2021).
As it happens, since Food Evolution was the first Italian and European company to
produce “fake meat” through this new process, an insight into this type of technology is
useful to understand why their products are sustainable for the environment and reflect
the principles of the Circular Economy.
In 2019 the products produced by the company with this technology were restricted
from 8 products (3 vegetarian and 5 vegan) to products that are only 100% vegan (i.e.,
fake chicken, beef, bacon, etc.), a choice primarily made due to the increase in their
request.
Indeed, they have stated that their fake chicken is 100% vegan, gluten-free and has a
high percentage of protein (from 22% to 25%). Furthermore, in 2019, all of their products
obtained the “Quality Award 2019” (available at: Joy presenta la linea Food Evolution |
Distribuzione Moderna, 2019).
The current company products, which are 100% vegan and include fake chicken, beef
and burgers, are made of simple ingredients, such as extruded soy protein (water, soy
protein 35%, vegetable fibre, natural flavour), sunflower oil, yeast extracts, salt
seasoning, natural flavours and spices (Food evolution website, 2022).
In 2021 TuttoFood rewarded the firm with second place in the innovation prize for
their fake chicken meat called “ParePollo” in the category “Better Future Award 2021”
organised by the Gdo Week and Mark Up.
Their products have become popular due to an increased demand from not only
vegetarians and vegans but also omnivores who care about the environment, animal
welfare and their own health (available at: Gli straccetti ParePollo di Food Evolution
vincono il premio Innovazione al TuttoFood 2021 - VEGANOK).
Based on an interview done with VEGANOK in 2019, the founder said that, in order
to get omnivores to approach or switch to this diet, it is not effective to provide only basic
21
products, such as tofu, tempeh, seitan or legumes; it is necessary to produce alternative
products which are as similar as possible to meat, and which replicate the same texture,
flavours and experience of real meat, with the main difference that is not as harmful as
meat-products (VEGANOK Speciale azienda: Food Evolution la vegan meat 100%
italiana VEGANOK TV).
The company is now also working on producing and developing products called
“fake-fish” because the entrepreneur believes that it is necessary to provide not only meat
substitutes but also fish substitutes to people that are used to consuming them (Table 3).
What has happened in the last year and a half with the pandemic should have taught
us that investing in plant-based products, by now, has become an obligation. However, we
must make sure that the products become better, push innovation on quality and
mainstream consumers: it is the only way for the plant-based counter at the supermarket
to be successful (interview made by Vegolosi.it)
Table 3. Chronological excursus of the most important events
Year
Event
2017
Foundation of Joy Srl., a company which produces only vegetarian and vegan products.
2019
Restriction from 8 products (3 vegetarian and 5 vegan) to products that are only 100%
vegan (i.e., fake chicken, beef, bacon, etc.)
2019
All of their products have obtained the “Quality Award 2019”
2020
Their products started to be sold in big supermarket chains, such as Esselunga
2021
TuttoFood rewarded the firm with second place in the innovation prize for their fake
chicken meat called “ParePollo” in the category “Better Future Award 2021”
4.2 A Sustainable Business Model for Vegan Production
In the figure below is the Business Model Canvas of the company which underlines
the most important key elements connected to the Circular Economy Model.
22
Overall, based on the entrepreneurs interview, the company is working on respecting
the ecosystem by minimising their CO2 emissions and using innovative technologies and
natural ingredients which replace the use of harmful and fossil raw materials.
4.2.1. Products and Market
“Soy is, by far, the cheapest legume that exists, and, to produce our products, we use
the cheapest production material that exists, and the most protein-based one, to satisfy the
requests of consumers, and, most of all, the health and nutritional requirements that
people need […] Humans need the protein to live, and this is the most controversial part
of the animal production industry. Indeed, if we give the animal the protein (i.e., soy) and
then we eat the animals, we lose a high percentage of the power and the benefits of the
protein contained in the legume (interview).
The philosophy of the firm is based on the necessity to make real changes by being
proactive and being part of the system, especially to make the real revolution through
being present in supermarkets and interfacing with the large associations of producers,
with the large-scale retail trade (e.g., Vegolosi.it, 2021).
Considering the retailers, their products are sold both through online and offline
channels.
In April 2020 their products started to be sold in big supermarket chains, such as
Esselunga (Esselunga: in arrivo la carne vegetale Food Evolution | Distribuzione
23
Moderna, 2020), vegan mini-markets or markets (i.e., “Vivi Bistrot Roma”, “De
Gustibus”, “IVegan Roma”, and “Aliper”) (Store Locator Food Evolution).
4.2.2 The Process
In 2019 it was made an interview on “NX-Food” in which the founder declared that
they managed “to create a ‘meat-like’ structure which is absolutely unique, and that their
industrial line meets the top efficiency criteria and features the most advanced technology
and hygienic conditions (i.e., high care chamber production).
To make the “fake meat” the owner explained again that they use “this process with a
high percentage of water in order to knead the protein flour; then, the proteic cellular has
to be stretched at around 120-150 degrees in order to pre-cook the product. Afterward,
the product goes through a laminator (i.e., a very cold stainless-steel tube), where the
exchange of temperature, from really cold to hot makes, the cell close and the result is a
product with high fibers. Indeed, this product has the exact texture of the meat due to the
high presence of these fibers with close cells, which makes the product highly resistant”.
Overall, “The process is similar to the one that is used to make pasta” (i.e., for
example, the one that uses Barilla), and to debunk the myth of the “highly processed
food” he affirms that it is a false belief because “every food, even basic pasta, is
processed.”
The company is actually independent in its activities since they do everything in its
plant in Perugia; for this reason, they do not collaborate or rely on other companies.
4.2.3 Weakness of the Business Model
The founder provided a quick summary of how the plant-based market has developed
by saying that it began to be “popular” when, a few years ago, people started to invest in
big companies, such as Beyond Meat, which led people to continue to invest even more in
the following years. However, this mechanism was not applied in Italy, and still
nowadays, there is not enough return on investment to develop the market like in the US.
The value of the total plant-based Italian market is only 50 million, which is really
low considering the fact that it also includes big and famous companies, such as Valsoia,
Kioene, Findus, etc”.
For example, Food Evolution has been working on producing a vegan sausage for two
years but is still not able to put it on the market because there is not enough financing
24
from outside the company. There is still a high amount of greenwashing which makes it
difficult for investors to see what is really sustainable and what is not.
The company, at its foundation, decided to invest around €10 million to build their
establishment in Perugia to be able to produce high-quality products independently.
Other firms, on the contrary, decided to invest their money in marketing advertising and
the production of their products in other countries where the cost of production is lower.
Food evolution would now require more €4 million to also develop marketing, but
nowadays it does not have a sufficient amount of money”.
This is a main weakness of the company because, in order to reach more consumers
and sell more products, the company should increase Italian people’s awareness to show
them that these kinds of products exist.
The owner added that a lot of people comply with the fact that plant-based products
are more expensive than meat. The prices of plant-based products sometimes are higher
than the meat ones because the amortisation costs are split on a smaller production. But
people do not consider that in order to produce meat products there are a lot of
investments involved to support it, but they are distributed over a large amount of
production, which reduces the final cost of the product for the consumers”.
During the interview, the owner said openly that the company is now suffering from a
high decrease in sales, which results in a lower income in comparison to previous years.
4 Discussion and Conclusions
This case study has helped us to integrate a new business model, based on vegan food
production, with the uncovering of the high moisture extrusion production system.
By analysing the processes and the strategies applied by the company, we can assert
that they are working through a circular model since they have aimed to optimise the
economic processes of production and consumption in the use of the resources that
underlie all the products.
Furthermore, the process of high moisture extrusion can be associated with the
“circular bioeconomy” (CBE), which we have seen refers to the concept of bioeconomy
integrated with elements of CE (Institute for European Environmental Policy).
We could say that the example of Food Evolution has confirmed our initial statements
since the starting point of our study focused on the possibility of using new technologies
and the overall effects on the environment.
25
Firstly, it is possible to produce products by using mostly natural raw materials (i.e.,
legumes, vegetables, soy, etc.) and natural resources; moreover, it may reduce the amount
of CO2 emissions which, as said before, are mainly methane and nitrous oxide. Hence,
the reduction of emissions and negative consequences on the environment has been
confirmed by the production of fake meat. However, as it happens when new technologies
are applied, there are some new environmental impacts to take into consideration, since
some scholars advocate that this process will require more energy levels and the
consumption would be on the higher side in order to maintain the moisture content.
This leads us to the open question of whether this process can be included in the
concept of “responsible innovation”, which can be realised with the contribution of
circular bioeconomy through the usage of innovations and technologies, across
sociotechnical systems, knowledge-producing and decision-making capacities, yet
involving a broader range of actors, such as societal stakeholders, humanities, and
sciences, with the aim of balancing social and environmental issues (Kershaw et al.,
2021).
This case study has helped us to integrate our analysis with the perspective of the
vegan production applied by a small Italian company and revealed some of the weak
points of the business. First and foremost, there is a need for funding to support a business
that has not yet reached break-even volumes. It is evident that if we want small start-ups
to be able to survive independently, without being swallowed up by large multinationals,
policies that support companies with plant-based products, and stimulate more
investments, should be implemented.
Our study opens up future research in three different but interrelated directions:
- First, as our case study shows that the application of new sustainable business
models is not a sufficient condition for a business to be economically sustainable.
This is especially true when new technologies require considerable investments;
small entrepreneurs alone do not have the financial resources to be able to realise
innovative projects. This aspect is worthy of an in-depth study and offers insights
both with regard to the search for partnerships between large and small
companies and the evaluation of public policies to support particular sectors of
our economy.
- Then, our need for an in-depth analysis is related to the technological production
process of AP products, especially of the high moisture extrusion applied not
only by the Food Evolution company but also by the majority of vegan food
26
producers. This process appears to be sustainable since it produces fake meat and
leads to the reduction of intensive farming, which is connected to the production
of CO2 emissions, However, at the same time, the process requires a
consumption of energy levels, for which the precise amount is still unknown. The
data that we have available right now are still not sufficient enough to provide
proper answers to these questions.
- Finally, there is still an ongoing discussion about alternative meat and its real
effects on the environment and human health, being “ultra-processed” food.
To deepen this debate, we deem future research should embed an interdisciplinary
approach with inputs from scholars in biotechnology, human nutrition, medicine
and management.
References
Alcalde-Calonge A., Francisco Jose Saez-Martínez, Pablo Ruiz-Palomino (2022). Evolution of
research on circular economy and related trends and topics. A thirteen-year review. Ecological
Informatics 70 (2022) 101716
Apostolidis, C., & McLeay, F. (2016). It's not vegetarian, it's meat-free! Meat eaters, meat reducers
and vegetarians and the case of Quorn in the UK. Social Business, 6(3), 267-290.
Arslan, F., Singh, B., Sharma, D. K., Regin, R., Steffi, R., & Rajest, S. S. (2021). Optimization
Technique Approach to Resolve Food Sustainability Problems. In 2021 International
Conference on Computational Intelligence and Knowledge Economy (ICCIKE) (pp. 25-30).
IEEE.
Beardsworth, A. D., & Keil, E. T. (1991). Vegetarianism, veganism, and meat avoidance: Recent
trends and findings. British Food Journal, 93(4), 19-24.
Boston Consulting Group & Blue Horizon (2021) Food for Thought: The Protein Transformation.
Available at: Food for Thought: The Protein Transformation | BCG
Brown, P.; Von Daniels, C.; Bocken, N.M.P.; Balkenende, A.R (2021). A Process Model for
Collaboration in Circular Oriented Innovation. J. Clean. Prod. 2021, 286,125499.
Carfì, D., Donato, A., & Panuccio, D. (2018). A game theory coopetitive perspective for
sustainability of global feeding: agreements among vegan and non-vegan food firms. In Game
Theory: Breakthroughs in Research and Practice (pp. 71-104). IGI Global.
Chen, A., & Eriksson, G. (2019). The mythologization of protein: a Multimodal Critical Discourse
Analysis of snacks packaging. Food, Culture & Society, 22(4), 423-445.
Chriki, S., & Hocquette, J. F. (2020). The myth of cultured meat: a review. Frontiers in nutrition, 7.
Cooper, K., Dedehayir, O., Riverola, C., Harrington, S., & Alpert, E. (2022). Exploring consumer
perceptions of the value proposition embedded in vegan food products using text
analytics. Sustainability, 14(4), 2075.
D'amato, D. (2021). Integrating the green economy, circular economy and bioeconomy in a strategic
sustainability framework. Ecological Economics 188 (2021) 107143
27
Dedehayir, O., Smidt, M., Riverola, C., & Velasquez, S. (2017). Unlocking the market with vegan
food innovations. In Paper presented at the ISPIM innovation symposium. Manchester.
European Commission, Bioeconomy Strategy available at
https://research-and-innovation.ec.europa.eu/research-area/environment/bioeconomy/bioecono
my-strategy_en
Fortune Business Insights (2020). Available at: Vegan Food Market Size, Share and Growth
Analysis [2028] (fortunebusinessinsights.com)
Fresán, U., & Sabaté, J. (2019). Vegetarian diets: planetary health and its alignment with human
health. Advances in nutrition, 10 (Supplement_4), S380-S388.
Geissdoerfer, M., Pieroni, M. P., Pigosso, D. C., & Soufani, K. (2020). Circular business models: A
review. Journal of Cleaner Production, 277, 123741.
Gendel-Guterman, H., & Derqui, B. (2021, June). The Vegetarian and Vegan Communities
Supporting Sustainability Through Responsible Consumption. In National Brand and Private
Label Marketing Conference (pp. 65-76). Springer, Cham.
Geng, Y., Zhu, Q., Doberstein, B., & Fujita, T. (2009). Implementing China’s circular economy
concept at the regional level: A review of progress in Dalian, China. Waste Management,
29(2), 996-1002.
Ghauri, P., Grønhaug, K., & Strange, R. (2020). Research methods in business studies. Cambridge
University Press.
Goal 12: Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns. Available at: Sustainable
consumption and production (un.org)
Hofmann A., Trevisana, Camila Gonçalves Castroa, L.A.V. Gomesb, J. Mascarenha, (2022),
Unlocking the circular ecosystem concept: Evolution, current research, and future directions,
Sustainable Production and Consumption 29 286–298.
Homrich, A. S., Galvão, G., Abadia, L. G., & Carvalho, M. M. (2018). The circular economy
umbrella: Trends and gaps on integrating pathways. Journal of Cleaner Production, 175,
525-543.
Institute for European Environmental Policy, Bioeconomy and bioresources available at
https://ieep.eu/bioeconomy-and-bioresources/
Judge, M., & Wilson, M. S. (2015). Vegetarian Utopias: Visions of dietary patterns in future
societies and support for social change. Futures, 71, 57–69.
Jürkenbeck K., Lara Schleicher and Stephan G.H. Meyerding (2019). Marketing Potential for
Biocyclic-Vegan Products? A Qualitative, Explorative Study with Experts and Consumers.
GJAE 68 (2019), Number 4 289
Kershaw, E. H., Hartley, S., McLeod, C., & Polson, P. (2021). The sustainable path to a circular
bioeconomy. Trends in Biotechnology, 39(6), 542-545.
Loh, H. C., Hoo, F. K., Kwan, J. N., Lim, Y. F., & Looi, I. (2021). A Bibliometric Analysis of
Global Trends in Vegan-Related Research. Global Trends, 3(2).
Lu, L. C., Chiu, S. Y., Chiu, Y. H., & Chang, T. H. (2022). Three-stage circular efficiency
evaluation of agricultural food production, food consumption, and food waste recycling in EU
countries. Journal of Cleaner Production, 343, 130870.
Luiz Morais-da-Silva R., Germano Glufke Reis, Hermes Sanctorum,Carla Forte Maiolino Molento
(2022). The social impacts of a transition from conventional to cultivated and plant-based
meats: Evidence from Brazil. Food Policy 111 (2022) 102337
28
Mancini, M.C., Antonioli, F., (2022). The future of cultured meat between sustainability
expectations and socio-economic challenges. In: Bhat, R. (Ed.), Future Foods: Global Trends,
Opportunities, and Sustainability Challenges. Academic Press - Elsevier, London, pp.
331–350.
McCormick, K., & Kautto, N. (2013). The bioeconomy in Europe: An
overview. Sustainability, 5(6), 2589-2608.
Mission (2015). Problems With Current Meat Production. Available at:
http://web.mit.edu/12.000/www/m2015/2015meat_production.html
Monteiro CA, Cannon G, Levy RB et al. (2019) Ultra-processed foods: what they are and Mordor
Intelligence (2020). Europe plant-based food and beverage market growth, trends and
forecasts (2022 - 2027). Available at: Europe Plant-Based Food and Beverage Market | 2022 -
27 | Industry Size, Trends, Growth (mordorintelligence.com)
Muscat, A., de Olde, E. M., Ripoll-Bosch, R., Van Zanten, H. H., Metze, T. A., Termeer, C. J., ... &
de Boer, I. J. (2021). Principles, drivers and opportunities of a circular bioeconomy. Nature
Food, 2(8), 561-566.
Newton, P., Blaustein-Rejto, D., (2021). Social and Economic Opportunities and Challenges of
Plant-Based and Cultured Meat for Rural Producers in the US. Front. Sustain. Food Syst.5.
NotCo, 2022. Available at: NotCo - Why Not NotCo. https://notco.com/us/#!
Plant Based Products Council, 2022 Available at https://pbpc.com/
Polly J. Ericksen (2008). Conceptualizing food systems for global environmental change research.
Global Environmental Change 18 (2008) 234–245.
Poore, J., & Nemecek, T. (2018). Reducing food’s environmental impacts through producers and
consumers. Science, 360(6392), 987-992.
Position paper on vegetarian diets from the working group of the Italian Society of Human
Nutrition. Nutrition, Metabolism, and Cardiovascular Diseases, 27(12), 1037–1052.
Reike, D., Vermeulen, W. J., & Witjes, S. (2018). The circular economy: new or refurbished as CE
3.0?—exploring controversies in the conceptualization of the circular economy through a
focus on history and resource value retention options. Resources, conservation and recycling,
135, 246-264.
Reis G., Marina Sucha Heidemann, Felipe Mendes Borini, Carla Forte Maiolino Molento (2020).
Livestock value chain in transition: Cultivated (cell-based) meat and the need for breakthrough
capabilities. Technology in Society 62 (2020).
Revell, B.J. (2015). One man’s meat . . . 2050? Ruminations on future meat demand in the context
of global warming. J. Agric. Econ. 2015, 66, 573–614.
Saari, U. A., Herstatt, C., Tiwari, R., Dedehayir, O., & Mäkinen, S. J. (2021). The vegan trend and
the microfoundations of institutional change: A commentary on food producers’ sustainable
innovation journeys in Europe. Trends in food science & technology, 107, 161-167..
Sadhukhan, J., Dugmore, T. I., Matharu, A., Martinez-Hernandez, E., Aburto, J., Rahman, P. K., &
Lynch, J. (2020). Perspectives on “game changer” global challenges for sustainable 21st
century: plant-based diet, unavoidable food waste biorefining, and circular
economy. Sustainability, 12(5), 1976.
Statista (2018). Veganism and vegetarianism in Europe. Dossier. Available at: https://www.statista.
com/study/41880/veganism-and-vegetarianism-in-europe/.
29
Tuomisto HL,M. Joost Teixeira de Mattos (2011) Environmental Impacts of Cultured Meat
Production. Environ. Sci. Technol. 2011, 45, 6117–6123.
University of Nottingham, (2018). Fact Sheet: Alternative Protein.
Vermeulen S., Bruce M. Campbell, and John S.I. Ingram (2012). Climate Change and Food
Systems. Annu. Rev. Environ. Resour. 2012. 37:195–222.
Wild, F., Czerny, M., Janssen, A. M., Kole, A. P., Zunabovic, M., & Domig, K. J. (2014). The
evolution of a plant-based alternative to meat. Agro FOOD Industry Hi Tech, 25(1), 45-49.
Wood, S., Ehui, S., Alder, J., Benin, S., Kassman, K.G., Cooper, H.D., Johns, T., Gaskell,J.,
Grainger, R., Kadungure, S., Otte, J., Rola, A., Watson, R., Wijkstrom, U., Devendra, C.,
Chapter 8-Food. Ecosystems and Human Well-being: Current State and Trends. Island Press,
Washington, DC.
Zucchella, A.& Previtali, P. Circular Business (2019). Models for Sustainable Development:
A“Waste Is Food” Restorative Ecosystem. Bus. Strategy Environ. 2019, 28, 274–285.
Websites
https://www.vegolosi.it/news/food-evolution/
https://startup-shelf.com/food-evolution:Food Evolution: Plant-based meat products from an Italian
vegetarian family
https://distribuzionemoderna.info/news/la-carne-vegetale-che-cambiera-il-mondo-arriva-da-esselun
ga
https://vegconomist.com/food-and-beverage/meat-and-fish-alternatives/plant-based-meat-texture-fo
r-chicken/
https://www.distribuzionemoderna.info/ricerca?q=Joy+presenta+la+linea+Food+Evolution+
https://www.facebook.com/joyfoodsrl/videos/food-evolution-store-locator/370607677642802/
VEGANOK Speciale azienda: Food Evolution la vegan meat 100% italiana VEGANOK TV
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UAAeMvcpckk
.
30
Food Safety: Exploring the Italian Agrifood case
Francesca Maria Cesaroni
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi, 42, Urbino, Italy
E-mail: francesca.cesaroni@uniurb.it
Gail Denisse Chamochumbi Diaz
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi, 42, Urbino, Italy
E-mail: gail.chamochumbidiaz@uniurb.it
Federica Palazzi
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi, 42, Urbino, Italy
E-mail: federica.palazzi@uniurb.it
Francesca Sgrò
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi, 42, Urbino, Italy
E-mail: francesca.sgro@uniurb.it
Abstract
The aim of this paper is to explore food safety in Italian agri-food firms. By adopting
five safety culture/climate components leadership, internal communication,
commitment, resources, and risk awareness we intend to provide an overview of the
firms’ attitude towards the importance of food safety and its barriers and drivers, with a
focus on their geographic localization. To achieve our goal, we analyzed a population of
4614 Italian firms by administering a questionnaire which yielded a response rate of 5.8%
(270 firms) Findings showed that the main differences concerning the food safety
culture/climate regard firms located in central Italy as opposed to those located in the
north of the country. Specifically, these differences concern the level of commitment and
of risk-taking awareness. Moreover, results showed that a lack of financial resources
represents a significant barrier to adopting food safety practices, especially for firms
located in the south. Finally, the values espoused by top management and the prospect of
improving performance appear to play a key role in promoting the introduction of food
safety systems in organizations. Relevant theoretical and practical implications emerged
from this study.
Keywords food safety, culture/climate food safety, agri-food, drivers, barriers, Italy
31
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1 Introduction
The global agri-food sector mainly composed of micro, small and medium-sized
firms is one of the most important industries worldwide, including Europe (FAO 2020,
Food Drink Europe, 2020). In the last decades, the industry had to address (and will
continue), a context fraught with challenges related to climate changes, geo-political
tension, pandemics, and food crises (OECD, FAO, 2022), all of which has resulted in an
increased focus on ‘food safety’ (FS) issues. Nowadays FS is recognized as a crucial
factor in achieving the goals of the 2030 Agenda, such as No Poverty (SDG 1), Good
Head and Well-being (SDG 3), and Responsible Consumption and Production, (SDGs 12)
(Yadav et al. 2021).
Governments and regulators, in Europe and around the world, have to include FS in
their quality assurance strategies (Hobbs et al., 2005; Brunori et al., 2013; Giannelli et al.,
2021); consumers have become more conscious of food hazards and ask for higher
standards of food-safe quality (Eurobarometro, 2019; Agnati et al., 2021); consequently
agrifood businesses have been forced to revise their business models (Del Baldo, 2022),
by integrating their corporate strategies, adopting public or private standards or
implementing food safety management systems (FSMS) (Asioli et al., 2014; De Boeck,
et. 2017; Corallo et al., 2020).
Despite the fact that governments/regulators and agrifood businesses are aware of the
existence of food risks and have respectively imposed and adopted many preventive
practices (such as standards and FSMS), the risk of food-borne diseases continues to be a
source of concern (Griffith, 2006; Onjong et al., 2014). That indicates the shortcomings of
preventive practices, raising questions about the efficacy of these systems to fully
guarantee food safety.
Faced with this dilemma, scientific literature has investigated, on the one hand, the
reasons for such failings. They might be found to result from the fact that FSMS are
elaborated differently in practice (FAO, 2007; Kirezieva et al., 2015) and are not always
well adapted to cope with the conditions inherent in the context in which the firm operates
(Luning et al., 2011; Kirezieva et al., 2015). However, others argue that the effectiveness
of standards adoption or FSMS appears to be very much dependent on the human factor,
responsible for the application of practices (Insfran-Rivarola, 2020). This has led to the
32
recognition of FS culture/climate as a key contributory factor to the FS performance of
food establishments (Yiannas, 2009; Griffith et al., 2010a, b; Powell et al., 2011).
On the other hand, literature has focused on the barriers and drivers which influence
the adoption of FS preventive practices. Several obstacles are identified, particularly in
agrifood SMEs (Asioli et al., 2014; Corallo et al., 2020, Palazzi, Sentuti, 2021), such as
lack of financial resources and funding; absence of qualified human resources; lack of
technological resources; lack of information and knowledge about standards or FSMS.
Scholars have also identified numerous drivers which encourage FS practices (Karaman
et al., 2012; Asioli et al., 2014; Corallo et al., 2020): obligation to comply with
regulations; pressure from the external environment (consumers, retailers, others
stakeholders).
Although FS is now subject to much discussion by scholars (Yiannas, 2009; Griffith
et al., 2010a, b; Powell et al., 2011; De Boeck et al., 2015; De Boeck et al., 2017) and
institutions at different levels, it remains a complex topic. The FS culture/climate is still
poorly understood (Jespersen et al., 2017; De Boeck et al., 2015), and empirical evidence
remains scarce, particularly regarding the Italian context. Furthermore, the scientific
literature is still limited on the question of barriers and drivers.
Taken all this into account, this study aims to explore food safety in Italian agri-food
firms. By adopting five safety culture/climate components leadership, internal
communication, commitment, resources, and risk awareness we intend to provide a
framework of the firms' perceptions with respect to the importance of food safety and its
driver and barriers, with a focus on their geographic localization. Italy represents an ideal
setting to explore food safety issues because the agri-food sector is one of the most
important industries in the Italian economy (Italian Coldiretti, 2021) and it is mainly
composed of micro, small and medium-sized firms (Giombini et al., 2021). Moreover, the
Italian economy is characterized by a marked North–South territorial divide (Istat, 2022),
which has led to differences in the development of economic activities over time (for
instance, firms in southern Italy are less productive and innovative with respect to firms
located in the North of the country), for this reason, food safety issues have been studied
based on firms’ geographic localization.
33
2 Literature background
2.1 Food safety and food safety culture/climate
Food safety as such is defined as “the condition of the foodstuffs in all stages of
production, processing and distribution, required to guarantee protection of consumer's
health, also taking into account normal circumstances of use and information available for
the food- stuffs concerned” (Baert et al., 2011, pp. 941).
The frequent incidence of food scandals associated with food safety failings has
prompted scholars to look closely at the human factors. This has involved shifting the
focus from managerial and technical practices so important for successful food safety
management and placing it squarely on the human component. For FS to be effective,
food safety culture and climate have been shown to be vital (Yiannas, 2009; De Boeck et
al. 2015, 2017).
“Food safety culture” and “food safety climate” are often perceived as more or less
synonymous in the literature, but some scholars have attempted a distinction: food safety
culture can be thought of as the big picture within which food safety climate operates.
Food safety climate can be described as the mood resulting from the individual
employees’ assessment of safety conditions within their company. So, it is the function of
food safety culture to promote a broad, generalized context of appreciation of the
importance of creating and maintaining sound beliefs and practices in FS, irrespective of
local and temporal variants (Zohar, 2011).
Griffith et al. (2010a) came up with a definition which acknowledges both the
differences and the areas of overlap between culture and climate: FS culture/climate
encompasses the aggregation of the prevailing, relatively constant, learned, and shared
attitudes, values, and beliefs that contribute to the hygiene behaviours practiced within a
specific food handling environment. Moreover, in their article authors have identified
several aspects or components of FS-culture, such as leadership, internal communication,
commitment, resources, and risk awareness. Leadership is understood as the perception of
the extent to which the organization’s leader(s) are able to involve staff in safety
performance and compliance to meet the organization’s goals/vision concerning FS
issues; communication which is the perception of the extent of transfer or diffusion FS
related information within the firms; commitment is defined as the perception of the
extent of engagement and involvement concerning FS of all parties within the firms;
resources intended as the perception of the extent to which physical and non-physical
34
means, necessary to operate in food safe way, are present in the firms (e.g. time,
personnel, infrastructure, education/training and procedures); finally, risk awareness,
being the perception of the extent to which the organization is aware of the risks regard
food safety and has these under control.
In their work, De Boeck et al. (2015) adopt the five FS climate components
highlighted by Griffith et al. (2010a) and use them as the basis for a questionnaire, which
they have devised and tested, as a means of assessing the FS climate. They conclude by
appealing for this new FS climate tool to be used more extensively in researches with a
view to supplementing the existing empirical evidence.
2.2 Barriers and drivers towards food safety practices
In recent decades an extensive part of management literature has focused on the
barriers and drivers which influence the adoption of FS preventive practices.
From the literature review, several obstacles are identified to the implementation of
FSMS or standards, particularly in agrifood SMEs (Asioli et al., 2014; Corallo et al.,
2020, Palazzi, Sentuti, 2021). The lack of financial resources and funding represents a
critical factor for minor enterprises (Tomasevic et al., 2013; Escanciano, Santos-Vijande,
2014b; Carmona-Calvo et al., 2016; Rincon-Ballesteros et al., 2019; Palazzi, Sentuti,
2021). Moreover, the so-called “food safety costs” are commonly perceived by
entrepreneurs as too high (Corallo et al., 2020; Casolani et al., 2018; Carmona-Calvo et
al., 2016; Escanciano, Santos-Vijande, 2014a; Mensah and Julien, 2011). Investments in
equipment and new technologies, staff training, consultancy services, maintenance costs,
etc. are some of the expenditures related to the introduction of FSMS. The perception,
“but it’s so expensive”, could be negatively affected by ignorance of the real benefits
stemming from FS systems. In fact, another obstacle is found in the lack of information
and understanding of FS practices, as well as in the scant knowledge of advantages
economic (i.e. increasing sales, reducing cost of non-compliance) and other (i.e.
improving the firm’s reputation) linked to them (Karaman et al. 2012; Escanciano,
Santos-Vijande 2014a; Mattevi, Jones 2016).
From this viewpoint, numerous studies have mentioned barriers associated to human
factors, placing considerable emphasis, in particular, on the role of top management. Lack
of management motivation regarding the relevance of food safety culture can generate a
half-hearted commitment overall (Escanciano, Santos-Vijande 2014a, b; Macheka et al.,
2013). In this case, the relative lack of interest and scant familiarity with the FSMS and
35
standards can restrict their adoption, resulting in oversize implementation costs.
Furthermore, the absence of qualified human resources (Karaman et al. 2012) is identified
as a common and significant barrier hindering the implementation of FS practices. These
barriers related to human factors can determine a generalized climate of resistance to
change (Escanciano, Santos-Vijande 2014b) which can both compromise the decision as
to whether to adopt an FS system and the performance obtained through the food safety
systems adopted (Corallo et al., 2020).
Finally, lack of appropriate infrastructure and technological resources (Corallo et al.,
2020) is recognized as an obstacle to the adoption of FS systems. It is often associated
with low investment and little concern for innovation (Karaman et al., 2012).
Scholars have also identified several drivers which encourage FS practices. According
to empirical studies drivers can be categorized on the basis of external and internal factors
(Mattevi and Jones, 2016; Carmona et al., 2016; Corallo et al., 2020).
As regards external drivers, the obligation to comply with regulations is crucial
(Mensah and Julien, 2011; Kirezieva et al., 2015; Corallo et al., 2020). For instance, in
developed countries, governments have implemented specific and detailed regulations to
address safety issues in the food sector (in all phases of production, transformation and
distribution). The existence of these regulatory pressures acts as a powerful stimulus for
firms to adopt FS systems and thereby operate in certain markets. The demands and
expectations of the consumer are another important external factor. In the last few years
consumers have become more sensitive to safety issues (Eurobarometro, 2019; Agnati et
al., 2021). This augmented awareness has an influence on the conduct of firms because it
encourages them to introduce FSMS and standards in order to avoid the risk to consumers
of food-borne diseases (Mensah and Julien, 2011; Karaman et al., 2012; Asioli et al.,
2014). Finally, pressure from the external environment is recognized as an important
driver (Corallo et al., 2020). Specifically, pressures might well be exerted by other
stakeholders belonging to the supply chain: for instance, retailers frequently impose their
own quality and safety standards on suppliers (Fulponi, 2006; Agnati et al., 2021;
Rincon-Ballesteros et al., 2021), constraining them to introduce FS systems.
Internal drivers, on the other hand, usually concern the perceived needs of the firm
(Mattevi and Jones, 2016; Corallo et al., 2020) which in turn derive from the convictions
of the management. The most important drivers are related to the improvement of the
firm’s operations. Among others we can list: improving performance, productivity and
efficiency, reducing the costs and time spent dealing with complaints in the case of a
36
product hazard (Mensah and Julien, 2011; Karaman et al., 2012; Escanciano and
Santos-Vijande, 2014b; Carmona et al., 2016); increasing sales and competitiveness, also
along the supply chain in which firms operate (Corallo et al., 2020); accessing
international markets where specific conditions obtain in terms of food safety (Casolani et
al., 2018); enhancing the firm’s reputation and legitimacy, meeting consumer expectations
and guaranteeing food quality (Mensah and Julien, 2011; Rincon-Ballesteros et al., 2019).
Moreover, internal drivers would also include the need to demonstrate a sense of social
responsibility and ethical values, such as ensuring the wellbeing of the consumer in
conformity with the firm’s beliefs and culture (Schwartz et al., 2012; Rincon-Ballesteros
et al., 2019).
3 Methodology
A sample of 4614 Italian firms belonging to the sectors of Agriculture,
Manufacturing, and Fishing was extracted from the Atoka database.A questionnaire
(Table 1) was administered by email investigating the firms’ characteristics, the food
safety climate in terms of leadership, commitment, internal communication, resources,
and risk awareness, and the factors able to foster and hinder this orientation, as shown in
table 1. Specifically, the components of FSC are assessed through a 1-to-7 Likert-type
scale (where 1= totally disagree and 7=totally agree) , and it represents the judgment
given by the respondent about the degree of food safety orientation; also barriers and
drivers are assessed through a 1-to-7 (where 1= very little and 7=very much) Likert-type
scale, and it represents the judgment given by the respondent about the influence that
these factors have on hindering or promoting the food safety culture. After the data
collection, a descriptive statistics analysis was performed, and one-way ANOVA was run
to test whether there were differences between FSC, barriers, and drivers depending on
geographic localization.
Table 1: Questionnaire design
Items
Description
Leadership
In your company
L1
we clearly defined objectives and expected results in terms of food
safety
L2
we encouraged employees to work in compliance with food safety
37
L3
we listened to employee comments and suggestions about food
safety
L4
we tackled food safety issues constructively and with a view to
continuous improvement
Commitment
In your company
C1
we considered food safety a matter of great importance
C2
we recognized and rewarded the contributions of those
safeguarding food security
C3
We set a good example by acting quickly to correct food safety
issues
C4
we engaged employees on food safety issues
Internal
communication
In your company
I1
we communicated regularly with employees/outsourcers about
food safety issues
I2
we communicated clearly and effectively with employees/external
collaborators on food safety issues
I3
employees/external collaborators spoke freely with managers and
with each other about food safety problems and issues
I4
the importance of food safety was highlighted through the
placement of food safety posters, signage, and/or icons
Resources
In your company
R1
the number of people employed was sufficient to ensure food
safety
R2
employees had adequate infrastructure (for example good
workspace, good equipment) to work in such a way as to ensure
food safety
R3
we had the necessary financial resources to support investments in
food safety (e.g., laboratory analyses, external consultants, extra
cleaning, and equipment purchases)
R4
staff had adequate food safety skills
Risk awareness
In your company
RA1
food safety risks had been clearly identified
RA2
food safety risks were regularly monitored
RA3
the staff closely monitored potential risks and problems related to
food safety
RA4
staff had adequate knowledge of potential food safety issues and
risks
Barriers
How much do the following barriers hinder the adoption of
practices and tools aimed at improving food safety?
38
BAR1
Absence of public contributions or difficulty in obtaining them
BAR2
Lack of financial resources (bank loans or own resources)
BAR3
Lack of technologies necessary for the implementation of food
safety
BAR4
Lack of skills, experience, and information
BAR5
Lack of time
Drivers
How much do the following factors favor the adoption of practices
and tools aimed at improving food safety?
DR1
Improvement of corporate image and reputation
DR2
Obligation to comply with the relevant legislation
DR3
Consistency with the values of the top management
DR4
Performance improvement prospects
DR5
Pressure from external subjects (e.g., retailers, consumers,
stakeholders) or internal to the company
DR6
Obtaining public funds
4 Findings
A final dataset of 270 questionnaires was collected, yielding a response rate of 5.8%.
The sampled firms mainly belong to the agriculture, forestry, and fishing sector with 111
organizations (41.11%), followed by 110 enterprises undertaking manufacturing activities
(40.75%). Table 2 shows firms' sector of activities by geographical localization. In
addition, these firms are mainly located in the northern region with 165 organizations
(61.11%), while, in the central and southern regions there are respectively 52 (19.26%)
and 53 (19.63%) firms. Firms' size has been defined in accordance with the EU
recommendation 2003/361. Therefore, the sample is composed of 18 large firms, 77
medium-sized enterprises, 163 small-sized enterprises, and by 12 micro-enterprises.
Moreover, the businesses that took part in the study had a range of employee sizes: 4%
had up to 9 employees, 73% had between 10 and 49, 21% had between 50 and 249, while
the remaining 2% had more than 250 employees. Table 3 shows the geographical
distribution of firms by size. Based on the end market, almost half of the enterprises
(51.48%) operate internationally, 27.03% run their activities only on the national territory,
while 21.48% make business within Europe. Table 4 shows the end market of firms by
geographical localization.
Table 2: Sector of activities by geographical localization
Sector of activities
North
Centre
South
%
39
A) Agriculture, forestry, and fishing
70
14
27
41.11
B) Extraction of minerals from quarries and
mines
1
0
0
0.37
C) Manufacturing activities
63
29
18
40.75
E) Water supply; sewerage, waste
management and remediation activities
1
0
0
0.37
G) Wholesale and retail trade; repair of
motor vehicles and motorcycles
14
4
3
7.77
I) Accommodation and catering service
activities
4
2
1
2.59
M) Professional, scientific, and technical
activities
1
0
0
0.37
S) Other service activities
10
3
4
6.30
U) Extraterritorial organizations and bodies
1
0
0
0.37
%
61.11
19.26
19.63
100
Table 3: Geographical distribution of firms by size
Size
North
Centre
South
%
Large
14
3
1
6.66
Medium
45
14
18
28.53
Small
99
32
32
60.37
Micro
7
3
2
4.44
%
61.11
19.26
19.63
100
Table 4: End market of firms by geographical localization
End market
North
Centre
South
%
National
43
15
15
27.04
EU
39
7
12
21.48
International
83
30
26
51.48
%
61.11
19.26
19.63
100
Regarding the respondent's characteristics, we find out the following information. The
questionnaire has been filled out by 139 women (51.48%) and by 131 men (48.52%). On
average, men result to have 22 years of experience in the industry, while women have 16
years. Based on educational level, about half of the respondents (51.85%) had a
bachelors or master’s degree, 34.81% declared that they had a high school diploma,
2.59% attended a middle school, and finally, only 10.74% had postgraduate training.
Table 5 shows respondents' educational background by gender.
40
Table 5: Educational background by gender
Educational background
Women
Men
%
High school diploma
54
40
34.81
Postgraduate training
15
14
10.74
Bachelors or masters degree
68
72
51.86
Middle school
2
5
2.59
%
51.48
48.52
100
Table 6 shows the descriptive statistics for food safety climate by the firms’
geographic localization. Through the one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA), we
discovered that, when it comes to food security climate, geographic localization matter.
The importance of food safety (item C1) seems significantly different between firms
located in the center (mean=6.62, p=0.002) and in the north (mean=6.28, p=0.002).
Therefore, the importance to guarantee food safety to consumers seems, on average, to be
more perceived by firms located in the center, than by firms located in the north.
Moreover, the territorial position seems to matter also when it comes to risk awareness on
food security. Specifically, the attention to the clear identification of food safety risks
(item RA1), seems significantly different between enterprises located in the center
(mean=6.48, p=0.04) and in the north (mean=6.11, p=0.04); the periodicity of risk
monitor (item RA2), seems significantly different between firms located in the center
(mean=6.52, p=0.03) and in the north (mean=6.13, p=0.03); and, the employment of
human resources with better knowledge of potential food safety issues and risks (item
RA4) seems significantly different between enterprises located in the center (mean=6.23;
p=0.00) and in the north (mean=5.75, p=0.00). Therefore, firms located in the center
compared to those located in the north, seem to consider factors such as risk
identification, monitoring, and the owner of adequate knowledge to face risks more
strategically.
41
Table 6: Food safety climate by geographic localization
North
Centre
South
Ite
ms
Mean
St.
dev
Min
Max
Mean
St.
dev
Min
Max
Mean
St.
dev
Min
Max
L1
5.84
1.32
1
7
5.90
1.418
1
7
5.98
1.39
2
7
L2
6.12
1.11
1
7
6.40
0.774
5
7
6.38
0.90
3
7
L3
5.82
1.30
1
7
5.94
1.211
1
7
5.98
1.29
2
7
L4
6.12
1.11
1
7
6.21
0.936
4
7
6.21
1.03
3
7
C1
6.28
1.07
1
7
6.62
0.661
5
7
6.49
0.75
4
7
C2
5.15
1.67
1
7
5.35
1.714
1
7
5.49
1.54
1
7
C3
6.15
1.14
1
7
6.46
0.753
5
7
6.28
0.95
2
7
C4
5.84
1.37
1
7
6.27
1.050
3
7
6.06
1.22
2
7
I1
5.68
1.34
1
7
6.06
1.145
3
7
5.92
1.31
2
7
I2
5.67
1.37
1
7
6.12
1.114
3
7
5.83
1.35
1
7
I3
5.67
1.37
1
7
5.88
1.096
4
7
5.64
1.44
1
7
I4
5.27
1.62
1
7
5.73
1.443
2
7
5.66
1.53
1
7
R1
5.69
1.35
1
7
6.12
1.078
2
7
5.60
1.47
1
7
R2
5.90
1.27
1
7
6.33
0.923
3
7
5.92
1.07
3
7
R3
5.87
1.34
1
7
6.12
1.022
3
7
5.66
1.37
2
7
R4
5.68
1.25
1
7
6.06
0.938
3
7
5.83
1.07
3
7
RA
1
6.11
1.14
1
7
6.48
0.779
4
7
6.19
0.94
4
7
RA
2
6.13
1.15
1
7
6.52
0.727
5
7
6.09
1.20
2
7
RA
3
5.88
1.21
1
7
6.31
0.981
2
7
5.81
1.33
2
7
RA
4
5.75
1.32
1
7
6.23
0.962
3
7
5.89
1.17
2
7
Table 7 shows the descriptive statistics for drivers and barriers able to promote or
hinder food safety. Through the one-way analysis of variance (ANOVA), we discovered
that, when it comes to drivers and barriers, geographic localization matter. Focusing on
the drivers, the fact that food safety is consistent with the values of top management (item
DR3) seems significantly different between enterprises located in the center (mean=6.21,
p=0.00) and in the north (mean=5.70, p=0.00). Also, the prospect of improving
performance (item DR4) seems significantly different between firms located in the center
(mean=6.23, p=0.00) and in the north (mean=5.55, p=0.00). Therefore, drivers such as the
alignment between entrepreneurial values and beliefs with food safety principles and the
42
importance of increasing performance seem, on average, more influencing for firms
located in the center than in the north. Regarding barriers, the lack financial resources
(item BAR2) seems significantly different between companies located in the south
(mean=3.96, p=0.02) and in the north (mean=3.30, p=0.02). Thus, for enterprises located
in the south, the difficulty to access or collect financial resources represent a greater
obstacle to meeting food safety than for firms in the north.
Table 7: Barriers and drivers by geographic localization
North
Centre
South
Items
Mean
St. dev
Mi
n
Max
Mean
St. dev
Mi
n
Max
Mean
St. dev
Mi
n
Max
BAR1
3.68
2.01
1
7
4.13
1.87
1
7
4.13
1.80
1
7
BAR2
3.30
1.89
1
7
3.35
1.80
1
7
3.96
1.64
1
7
BAR3
3.18
1.72
1
7
3.17
1.79
1
7
3.75
1.66
1
7
BAR4
3.05
1.76
1
7
2.96
1.81
1
7
3.57
1.72
1
7
BAR5
3.62
1.91
1
7
3.19
1.65
1
7
3.66
1.83
1
7
DR1
5.45
1.50
1
7
5.90
1.24
2
7
5.66
1.24
2
7
DR2
6.07
1.26
1
7
6.31
1.14
2
7
6.23
0.87
3
7
DR3
5.70
1.40
1
7
6.21
1.09
2
7
5.96
1.18
2
7
DR4
5.55
1.44
1
7
6.23
0.94
3
7
5.83
1.10
2
7
DR5
5.22
1.49
1
7
5.52
1.46
1
7
5.23
1.50
1
7
DR6
3.08
1.83
1
7
3.27
1.71
1
6
3.74
1.80
1
7
5 Discussion and conclusion
This study aims to explore food safety in Italian agri-food firms by providing a
framework of perceptions with respect to the importance of food safety and its driver and
barriers, with a focus on their geographic localization.
Data showed that the main differences concerning the food safety approach regard
firms located in the center with those located in the north. Specifically, these differences
concern the level of commitment and risk-taking awareness. Enterprises located in the
center seem to have integrated food safety into organizational culture and planning
activities more than those located in the north. These results suggest that for firms located
in the center, food safety is a key objective to be pursued as much as the economic one.
The relevance of this topic is also testified by the fact that these firms put great attention
on what concern the identification and monitoring of risk-food safety related. This risk
43
awareness means that firms, to guarantee food safety, are more inclined to consider all
aspects of the food chain as interrelated processes, starting from primary production to the
sale or delivery of food to the consumer. This approach facilitates risk assessment,
management, and communication. Therefore, firms located in the center seem to adopt a
strategic and systematic approach to defining measures, and interventions to protect
consumers' health, in a way effective, proportionate, and targeted. For these firms, the
human dimension plays an important role in food safety. These results suggest that for
these enterprises training activities and a shared and broadened culture at every level are
pivotal to implementing strategies devoted to increasing food safety. Thus, the set of
attitudes, values, and beliefs on food safety shared by the entrepreneur can be considered
an important driver to promote the commitment and robustness of an organization's food
safety management. Data also suggested that a proactive approach to food safety is
pushed by what firms expect to obtain in return: and for firms located in the center, the
prospect of improving their performance is fundamental to planning activities focusing on
food safety.
Data showed lack of financial resources represents a barrier to the achievement of
food safety, especially for organizations located in the south.
The main implications are the following. From a scholarly standpoint, this study
makes two main contributions to the extant literature regarding food security, especially
in the Italian context. First, it provides a framework for how Italian firms, especially
SMEs, manage leadership, commitment, internal communication, resources, and risk
awareness to feed the food security climate. The framework's identification could increase
entrepreneurs' and managers’ awareness of their key role in the spread of an
organizational culture able to set up paths focusing on food safety and on its contribution
to the firm’s value-creation mechanism. Second, this work attempts to provide a deep
understanding of the drivers and barriers that respectively push the firms or disincentivize
them from implementing food safety practices. This could incentive enterprises to plan
what they expect from food safety as well as undertake activities to overcome issues
related to its implementation. As for practical contributions, the empirical results suggest
that firms located in the south should be involved in training projects devoted to
increasing knowledge of food safety practices and systems, and governments should
support this learning process through specific public funds. Moreover, all firms,
regardless of their geographic localization, should promote a holistic and integrated
approach to food safety, from the firm's boundaries to the supply chain.
44
Two main limitations can be mentioned and may offer avenues for future research.
The main limitation is related to the restricted sample size, which means that the
generalizability of the results is limited to developing contexts in which the data were
collected. Therefore, the study should be replicated across other European countries.
Second, this study, as explorative, employed only a descriptive statistical analysis.
Therefore, further research could improve the analysis by exploring, for example by
ordinary least squares regression (OLS), what components of barriers and drivers can
positively or negatively affect the achievement of food safety.
References
Agnati, U. Aguti, A. and Bondi, D. (2021) “Salute, sicurezza alimentare, sviluppo sostenibile. Un
percorso tra filosofia e diritto”, Argomenti, Vol. 18, pp. 14-46.
Asioli, D., Boecker, A. and Canavari, M. (2014) “On the linkages between traceability levels and
expected and actual traceability costs and benefits in the Italian fishery supply chain”, Food
Control, Vol. 46, pp. 10-17.
Brunori, G., Malandrin, V. and Rossi, A. (2013) "Trade-off or convergence? The role of food
security in the evolution of food discourse in Italy", Journal Rural Studies, Vol. 29, pp.19–29.
Carmona-Calvo, M. A., Suárez, E. M., Calvo-Mora, A. and Periánez-Cristóbal, R. (2016) "Sistemas
de gestión de la calidad: un estudio en empresas del sur de España y norte de Marruecos",
European Research on Management and Business Economics, Vol. 22, No.1, pp. 8-16.
Casolani, N., Liberatore, L. and Psomas, E. (2018) "Implementation of quality management system
with ISO 22000 in food Italian companies", Calitatea, Vol. 19 No. 165, pp. 125-131.
Corallo, A., Latino, M. E., Menegoli, M. and Striani, F. (2020) "What factors impact on
technological traceability systems diffusion in the agrifood industry? An Italian survey",
Journal of Rural Studies, Vol. 75, pp. 30-47.
CREA (2020) Consiglio per la ricerca in agricoltura e l’analisi dell’economia agraria, Report 2020.
Available online at http://www.sinab.it/sites/default/files/REPORT%20CREA%202020.pdf.
De Boeck, E., Jacxsens, L., Bollaerts, M., Vlerick, P. (2015) “Food safety climate in food
processing organizations: Development and validation of a self-assessment tool”, Trends in
Food Science & Technology, Vol. 46, No. 2, pp. 242-251.
De Boeck, E., Mortier, A. V., Jacxsens, L., Dequidt, L. and Vlerick, P. (2017) “Towards an extended
food safety culture model: Studying the moderating role of burnout and jobstress, the
mediating role of food safety knowledge and motivation in the relation between food safety
climate and food safety behavior”, Trends in Food Science & Technology, Vol. 62, pp.
202-214.
Del Baldo, M. (2022) "When innovation rests on sustainability and food safety: Some experiences
from Italian agri-food start-ups", Frontiers in Sustainability, 91.
Escanciano, C. and Santos-Vijande, M.L. (2014a) "Reasons and constraints to implementing an ISO
22000 food safety management system: evidence from Spain", Food Control, Vol. 40, pp.
50-57.
Escanciano, C. and Santos-Vijande, M.L. (2014b) "Implementation of ISO 22000 in Spain:
obstacles and key benefits", British Food Journal, Vol. 116, No. 10, pp. 1581-1599.
Eurobarometro (2019) Food safety in the EU Report.
FAO (2007) In Bridging the gap between food safety policies and implementation. Rome: Thirty
fourth Session. C2007/INF/19.
45
FAO (2020) The State of Food and Agriculture 2020. Overcoming water challenges in agriculture.
Rome.https://www.fao.org/policy-support/tools-anpublications/resourcesdetails/en/c/1333955/.
Food Drink Europe (2020) Data and trends of the European Food and Drink Industry 2020.
https://www.fooddrinkeurope.eu/resource/data-trends-of-the-european-foodand-
drink-industry-2020/.
Fulponi, L. (2006) "Private voluntary standards in the food system: the perspective of major food
retailers in OECD countries", Food Policy, Vol. 31, pp. 1-13.
Giannelli, N., Paglialunga, E., and Turato, F. (2021) “Le politiche per la sicurezza alimentare e la
sostenibilità nel contesto europeo e degli accordi commerciali internazionali” Argomenti, Vol.
18.
Giombini G., Marin G., and Cesaroni F. (2021) “Dinamiche recenti del manifatturiero alimentare in
Italia”, Argomenti, Vol. 18, pp.77-104.
Griffith, C. J. (2006) “Food safety: where from and where to?” British Food Journal, Vol. 108, pp.
6-15.
Griffith, C. J., Livesey, K. M. and Clayton, D. (2010a) “The assessment of food safety culture”,
British Food Journal, Vol. 112, pp. 439-456.
Griffith, C. J., Livesey, K. M. and Clayton, D. A. (2010b) “Food safety culture: the evolution of an
emerging risk factor?”, British Food Journal, Vol. 112, pp. 426-438.
Hobbs, J. E., Bailey, D., Dickinson, D. L. and Haghiri, M. (2005) "Traceability in the Canadian red
meat sector: do consumers care?", Canadian Journal of Agricultural Economics/Revue
Canadienne D’agroeconomie, Vol. 53, No. 1, pp. 47-65.
Insfran-Rivarola, A., Tlapa, D., Limon-Romero, J., Baez-Lopez, Y., Miranda-Ackerman, M.,
Arredondo-Soto, K. and Ontiveros, S. (2020) “A systematic review and meta-analysis of the
effects of food safety and hygiene training on food handlers”, Foods, Vol. 9, No. 9, pp.1169.
Istat (2022) Rapporto sulla competitività dei settori produttivi.
Italian Coldiretti (2021) Covid: il cibo diventa la prima ricchezza del Paese, vale il 25% del Pil.
https://www.coldiretti.it/economia/covid-il-cibo-diventa-la-prima-ricchezza-del-paese-vale-il-2
5-del-pil.
Jespersen, L., Griffiths, M., Wallace, C. A. (2017) “Comparative analysis of existing food safety
culture evaluation systems”, Food Control, Vol. 79, pp. 371-379.
Karaman, A. D., Cobanoglu, F., Tunalioglu, R. and Ova, G. (2012) “Barriers and benefits of the
implementation of food safety management systems among the Turkish dairy industry: A case
study”, Food Control, Vol. 25, No. 2, pp. 732-739.
Karaman, A.D., Cobanoglu, F., Tunalioglu, R. and Ova, G. (2012) “Barriers and benefits of the
implementation of food safety management system among the Turkish dairy industry: a case
study”, Food Control, Vol. 25, pp. 732-739.
Kirezieva, K., Luning, P. A., Jacxsens, L., Allende, A., Johannessen, G. S., Tondo, E. C., et al.
(2015) “Factors affecting the status of food safety management systems in the global fresh
produce chain”, Food Control, Vol. 52, pp. 85-97.
Luning, P. A., Marcelis, W. J., Rovira, J., van Boekel, M., Uyttendaele, M., & Jacxsens, L. (2011)
“A tool to diagnose context riskiness in view of food safety activities and microbiological
safety output”,Trends in Food Science & Technology, Vol. 22, S67-S79.
Macheka, L., Manditsera, F.A., Ngadze, R.T., Mubaiwa, J. and Nyanga, K.L. (2013) “Barriers,
benefits and motivation factors for the implementation of food safety management system in
the food sector in Harare Province, Zimbabwe”, Food Control, Vol. 34, pp. 126-131.
Mattevi, M., Jones, J. A. and Griffith, C. (2016) "Food supply chain: are UK SMEs aware of
concept, drivers, benefits and barriers, and frameworks of traceability?". British Food Journal,
Vol. 118, No. 5, pp. 1107-1128.
Mensah, L. D., and Julien, D. (2011) “Implementation of food safety management systems in the
UK”, Food Control, Vol. 22, No. 8, pp. 1216-1225.
46
OECD (2021) Improving Regulatory Delivery in Food Safety: Mitigating Old and New Risks, and
Fostering Recovery, OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/bf34907e-en.
OECD/FAO (2022) OECD-FAO Agricultural Outlook 2022-2031, OECD Publishing, Paris.
Available online at
https://www.oecd-ilibrary.org/agriculture-and-food/oecd-fao-agricultural-outlook-2022-2031_f
1b0b29c-en.
Onjong, H. A., Wangoh, J. and Njage, P. M. K. (2014) “Current food safety management systems in
fish-exporting companies require further improvements to adequately cope with contextual
pressure: Case study”, Journal of Food Science, Vol. 79, M2031-M2039.
Palazzi, F. and Sentuti, A. (2021) “La sicurezza alimentare per le imprese italiane dell’agrifood:
barriere, driver e benefici percepiti”, Argomenti, Vol. 18, pp. 105-125.
Powell, D. A., Jacob, C. J., and Chapman, B. J. (2011) “Enhancing food safety culture to reduce
rates of foodborne illness”, Food Control, Vol. 22, pp. 817-822.
Rincon-Ballesteros, L., Lannelongue, G. and Gonzalez-Benito, J. (2021) "Effective implementation
of a food safety management system and its relationship with business motivations", British
Food Journal, Vol. 123, No. 3, pp. 990-1011.
Schwartz, S. H., Cieciuch, J., Vecchione, M., Davidov, E., Fischer, R., Beierlein, C., ... & Konty, M.
(2012). Refining the theory of basic individual values. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, Vol. 103, No. 4, pp. 663-688.
Yadav, D., Dutta, G. and Kumar, S. (2021) “Food safety standards adoption and its impact on firms’
export performance: A systematic literature review” Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 329,
129708.
Yiannas, F. (2009). Food safety Culture: Creating a behavior-based food safety management
system. New York, USA: Springer.
47
Food safety and Innovation in Italian Agri-Food
Enterprises
Mara Del Baldo
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: mara.delbaldo@uniurb.it
* Corresponding author
Massimo Ciambotti
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: massimo.ciambotti@uniurb.it
Daniele Giampaoli
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: daniele.giampaoli@uniurb.it
Annalisa Sentuti
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: annalisa.sentuti@uniurb.it
Abstract
Due to the recent pandemic linked to the Sars Cov-2 and the future challenges linked
to climate change emergency, globalization and the war in Ukraine the global Agrifood
system has suddenly become the protagonist of the political debate and has entered the
agenda of all Governments. A key issue for scholars and entrepreneurs is to understand
how to boost innovation in the Agri-food sector. Therefore, this paper investigates the
impact that each food safety climate component (leadership, internal communication,
resources and risk awareness) has on innovation performance. Data were collected from
168 Italian firms operating in the agri-food industry from March to May 2022 through an
online questionnaire. Results show that only leadership has a direct significative impact
on innovation performance and suggest that food safety climate, even if it is formed by
several components, has to be conceptualized and analyzed as a whole. This study is the
first one that analyses the impact of food safety component on innovation performance in
the context of Italian firms and is part of an interdisciplinary research project funded by
Urbino University focused on food safety in Italian Agri-food firms. The main limitation
48
of the present study is that we collected data from a single European Country and results
cannot be generalized.
Keywords food safety, food quality, food safety climate, innovation, Agri-Food
Enterprises
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1 Introduction
The 2020 pandemic linked to the Sars Cov-2, probably starting from a small wet
market in China, in a few months, cornered the whole humanity, highlighting the
problems related to global interconnection. Western countries have taken full awareness
of the link between the production, processing and consumption of food for and the
spread of possible pathogens (Santa Chiara Lab, 2020). In such a context, the global
Agri-food system has suddenly become the protagonist of the political debate and has
entered the agenda of all Governments (Palazzi and Sentuti, 2021).
Agri-food is defined as the combination of the primary sector and the food industry
(European Commission, 2007). As well known, this sector has been faced with countless
challenges in the past (e.g., geo-political tension and food crises (FAO, 2020) and the
years to come will not be outdone due to the climate change emergency, globalization and
the recent war in Ukraine. The growing attention paid by different stakeholders
(governments, NGOs, community, etc.) to sustainability, climate changes, etc., have
forced firms to revise their business models (Del Baldo, 2022) and adopt strategies
focused on food safety and food quality (Merola, 2015). In fact, consumers today express
very specific needs and demand more guarantees than in the past (Ajzen et al., 2007;
Boccia and Sarnacchiaro, 2015).
In the European Union Agri-food is one of the most important sectors in terms of
economic output and employment (Food Drink Europe, 2020) and is mainly composed of
SMEs (Cesaroni et al., 2021). Its importance has also been underlined by the European
Green Deal and the Farm to Fork (F2F) strategy, which aim to guide the transition
towards a fair, healthy, and respectful food system for people and the environment.
Moreover, the European partnership for research and innovation in the Mediterranean
area (PRIMA, 2018) sees for the first time a research programme dedicated specifically to
the Mediterranean, with concrete repercussions on an essential sector such as agri-food.
PRIMAs main goal is to devise new research and innovation approaches to improve
49
water availability and sustainable agriculture production in a region heavily distressed by
climate change, urbanisation and population growth”.
For the Italian economy, perhaps even more than in other countries, the primary sector
plays a leading role (Boccia, 2015). Indeed, the Italian agriculture does not occur only as
an economic activity, but as a real way of life, a tradition, a cultural identity. The
tradition, whose continuity is ensured using raw materials of excellent quality, is
increasingly supported by innovation, which provides instruments such as the fact
traceability, by which we can reconstruct the history of the product and meet the needs
guarantee consumer (Zouaghi and Sanchez, 2016). Therefore, for Italian firms operating
in the agri-food sector, food safety and quality became fundamental assets to develop
through both technological and organizational innovation. Producers, processors,
distributors and operators of the agrifood sector are called to adopt new practices in line
with the new requirements of food security regarding nutritional content, absence of
pathogens and contaminations, treatment of animals and reduced impact on the
environment.
Consequently, a key issue for scholars and entrepreneurs is to understand how to boost
innovation in the Agri-food sector. In particular, as empirical evidence is still limited, our
goal is to investigate if a food safety climate within firms enhances or hinders innovation.
By adopting the perspective of Griffith et al. (2010) we analyzed the impact that
each food safety climate component (leadership, internal communication, resources and
risk awareness) has on innovation performance. Results show that only leadership has a
direct significative impact on innovation performance confirming the assumption of De
Boeck et al. (2015) according to whom food safety climate components has to be
considered has a whole in order to be effective.
2 Literature Review
The growing attention paid by governments, NGOs and the civil community to food
safety and quality (Hartmann, 2011; FAO, 2020) agrifood companies have begun to adopt
food safety management systems (FSMS) (De Boeck et al., 2017). Food quality is defined
as a complex and multidimensional concept which is influenced by a wide range of
situational and contextual factors”, among others: safety, origin, nutrition, sensorial
properties, authenticity and convenience (Knowledge Centre for Food Fraud and Quality,
2021). A food “quality” must fully satisfy the customer, which now is interested also
50
interested in ethical values (Covino, 2014). Food safety has been defined as the
condition of the foodstuffs in all stages of production, processing and distribution,
required to guarantee protection of consumer's health, also taking into account normal
circumstances of use and information available for the food stuffs concerned (Baert et
al., 2011). As claimed by Casella (2001) food safety is an inherent part of food quality.
From this perspective a food can be considered safe if it is the result of a combination of
primary resources, healthy and controlled, with no risk to consumer health.
Recent events of consumer food poisoning and outbreaks (European Parliament, 2019;
Griffith, 2006) have shown that FSMS per se are not sufficient to guarantee food safety as
most of the accidents were due to food handler errors and/or non-adherence to food
hygiene or safety procedures (Powell et al., 2011; Wright et al., 2012). This drove several
scholars to shift their attention from FSMS to human-centric aspect of food safety, and
concepts like food safety culture and food safety climate begun to emerge (Powell et al.,
2011; Taylor, 2011; Yiannas, 2009).
While food safety climate is considered as the employees' perception of the situation
within an organization (vide infra), a ‘snapshot’ that reflects important aspects of an
organization's safety culture”, food safety culture is the bigger framework, of which food
safety climate is a component (De Boeck et al., 2015). More in detail they conceptualize
food safety climate through several variables that only taken together produce the desired
outcomes (a climate of food safety) (De Boeck et al., 2015). However, there is still a lack
of empirical research on this topic and the role played by each food safety climate’s
component is still not clear. This reason led us to investigate if and how each food safety
component enhances or hinder a firm’s ability to innovate.
According to Griffith et al. (2010) food safety climate includes four main components:
leadership, internal communication, resources and risk awareness. Leadership is the
ability to engage people in hygiene and safety procedures and meet the organization's
goals, vision, and food safety and hygiene requirements (Griffith et al. 2010). Leaders
should set food safety and hygiene goals and urge staff to follow them as an
organization's culture starts at the top and trickles down. Leaders should also consider
employees' feedback regarding hygiene and food safety, as employees are more engaged
and driven when their perspectives are recognised and respected (Yiannas, 2009).
In agri-food businesses, innovative performance is heavily influenced by the quality of
the leadership at the helm. Leaders who inspire curiosity and experimentation, encourage
lifelong learning, and promote teamwork can do wonders for the spread of novel concepts
51
and methods (Amabile et al., 2004; Mumford et al., 2002). Leaders can affect innovative
performance by providing a compelling vision and reasonable targets that motivate
workers to think outside the box and develop unique approaches to achieving the
organization's goals (Zhang and Bartol, 2010). Leaders can encourage employees to freely
share their ideas and try new things (Amabile et al., 2004). Transformative leaders can
boost their teams' creative potential by giving their employees a voice and helping them
grow professionally (Gumusluoglu and Ilsev, 2009). Leaders can foster an innovative
culture by promoting the free flow of information and ideas within the company (Carmeli
et al., 2013). Effective leadership in the agri-food industry can have a significant impact
on innovative performance by encouraging a culture of creativity and collaboration,
establishing tangible company goals and facilitating two-way communication at all levels.
Therefore, we hypothesized that:
H1: Leadership (LEAD) has a positive direct impact on innovation (INNP);
Hygiene and food safety information has to be shared through organization. Leaders
should regularly remind staff about cleanliness and food safety to ensure they understand
their duties and responsibilities. Leaders should use clear, education-appropriate
language. Food handlers (operators) should also be able to talk to their leaders about
hygiene and food safety. Organizational openness may improve food safety (Griffith et
al., 2010). Employees are more inclined to believe in hygiene and food safety if reminded
often and consequently, posters, signs, and other items should stress hygiene and food
safety (Yiannas, 2009).
When it comes to innovation performance internal communication is crucial. The
spread of information, expertise, and ideas within an organisation is greatly aided by
strong lines of communication, creating a setting in which collaboration and new ideas
may flourish (Carmeli et al., 2013). Employees are more inclined to participate in
innovative activities and provide novel ideas when they know they may voice their
thoughts and opinions without fear of retaliation. The creative activities of a company
might be better coordinated and aligned thanks to effective internal communication
(Cabrera et al., 2006; Giampaoli et al., 2021). Employees will be better able to understand
their position in the innovation process and work collaboratively to accomplish the
intended outcomes if the company's goals, values, and expectations surrounding
innovation are properly communicated (Cabrera et al., 2006). Finally, recognising and
52
celebrating creative successes through internal communication reinforces and motivates
staff to keep up their innovative work (Zhang and Bartol, 2010). Knowledge exchange,
alignment and coordination of innovation activities, and recognition and celebration of
inventive successes are all aided by strong internal communication, which is vital for
improving innovative performance. Therefore, we hypothesized that:
H2: Internal communication (COMINT) has a positive direct impact on innovation
(INNP);
Resources include time, personnel, infrastructure, and education or training. When an
organisation has enough and trained employees, each team member has ample time to
work hygienically and safely. Support may motivate hygiene and food safety (Griffith et
al., 2010). When employees aren't under pressure, their work may be better. Hygiene and
food safety infrastructure and enough funding show organisational support. An essential
resource affecting the effectiveness of innovation is human capital, notably the skills,
knowledge, and expertise of employees (Osterwalder and Pigneur, 2010). Businesses with
competent and diversified workforces may provide a wider range of innovative ideas and
solutions, which eventually results in higher levels of innovation (Laursen and Foss,
2003). Innovative performance is heavily influenced by technological capabilities,
particularly the organization's capacity to create, adopt, and adapt new technologies (Liu
et al., 2021; Paoloni et al., 2022). The culture, procedures, and systems of an organisation
make up its organisational infrastructure, which may help or inhibit innovation
(Giampaoli et al., 2021). Therefore, we hypothesized that:
H3: Resources (RES) have a positive direct impact on innovation (INNP);
Risk awareness concerns the organization's understanding of hygiene and food safety
issues and capacity to handle them (Griffith et al., 2010). Risk perception is essential to
food safety (Griffith et al., 2010). Risks should be known to employees so they can
consider them into their daily work decisions. When employees trust the food safety
management system, they feel less stressed, and the company is functioning well. This
trust might inspire them to maintain hygiene and food safety (Zhu and Akhtar, 2014). At
the same time, overconfidence might lead to underestimating food safety issues (Griffith
et al., 2010). To identify risks and respond correctly, executives and workers must be
53
risk-aware (Griffith et al., 2010). Leaders who exaggerate hygiene and food safety issues
may deter workers from working in a hygienical and safe way. A higher degree of risk
awareness enables firms to see and evaluate prospective possibilities and dangers,
empowering them to make innovation project decisions. Lendowski et al. (2022) found
that higher level of risk management lead to an increased innovation intensity. Therefore,
we hypothesized that:
H4: Risk awareness (RISK) has a positive direct impact on innovation (INNP).
3 Methodology
The population of Italian companies working in the agri-food industry was extracted
from the Atoka database, including firms from the sectors of Agriculture, Manufacturing
and Fishing. A total of 4614 companies were identified, of which 3178 had no
certifications and 1437 had certifications. Two questionnaires were utilized to gather
survey information, with the first directed to the entire population of companies, and the
second focused on certain aspects of companies with certifications. The survey ran from
March to May 2022, and a total of 168 companies—approximately 14% of the 3178 firms
from the ATOKA database—participated. The businesses that took part in the study had a
range of employee sizes: 4% had up to 9 employees, 73% had between 10 and 49, 21%
had between 50 and 249, while the remaining 2% had more than 250 employees. The
Food Safety Climate scales adopted for the study were taken from De Boeck et al. (2015),
while the innovation performance scale was taken from Kianto et al. (2017).
4Results
To test our hypotheses, we created and empirically tested a structural model using
PLS-SEM following the procedure of Hair et al. (2017). PLS-SEM is a variance-based
structural equation modelling method suitable for exploratory research (Benitez et al.,
2020). Moreover, PLS is the most appropriate technique when the data's nature (common
factor or composite) is unknown, as it produces less estimation bias compared to
covariance-based SEM. Measurement model was tested through reliability, convergent
and discriminant validity of the scales (Hair et al, 2017). Results are shown in Table 1 and
Table 2. No items were dropped because all the factor loading are above the
recommended threshold. To assess the statistical significance of the structural model we
54
employed a bootstrap algorithm (Hair et al., 2017). Both measurement and structural
model show good parameters and are suitable for our purpose.
Table 1: Reliability and convergent validity
Reliability and convergent validity
Inherent variables
Items
Loadings
Cronbach's
alpha
Dillon-Goldstein
rho
AVE
COMINT
0.909
0.919
0.789
COMINT1
0.948
COMINT2
0.949
COMINT3
0.858
COMINT4
0.788
INNP
0.892
0.904
0.755
INNP1
0.877
INNP2
0.902
INNP3
0.806
INNP4
0.888
LEAD
0.893
0.915
0.757
LEAD1
0.798
LEAD2
0.893
LEAD3
0.890
LEAD4
0.893
RES
0.891
0.914
0.752
RES1
0.838
RES2
0.887
RES3
0.870
RES4
0.874
RISK
0.958
0.964
0.888
RISK1
0.936
RISK2
0.953
RISK3
0.943
RISK4
0.938
55
Table 2: Discriminant validity
Fornell-Larcker
COMINT
INNP
LEAD
RES
RISK
COMINT
0.888
INNP
0.435
0.869
LEAD
0.824
0.436
0.870
RES
0.750
0.381
0.776
0.867
RISK
0.799
0.348
0.831
0.819
0.942
We found good parameter for innovation (R2=0.219) but only leadership has a
significant direct impact (β=0.295, p=0.045) on the latter. Results are shown in Figure 1
and Table 3:
H.1 LEAD -> INNP: evidence support H1 (β=0.295, p=0.045) confirming that
Leadership (LEAD) has a positive direct impact on innovation (INNP).
H.2 COMINT -> INNP: evidence does not support H2 as internal communication has
not a significative impact on a firm’s ability to innovate.
H.3 RESOURCES -> INNP: evidence does not support H3 as resources per se have
not a significative impact on a firm’s ability to innovate.
H.4 RISK -> INNP: evidence does not support H4 as risk awareness has not a
significative impact on a firm’s ability to innovate.
Figure 1: Results of the structural model
56
Table 3: Results of hypothesis testing
Hypothesis
Path
Path
Coefficient
t-value
p-value
Status
H1
LEAD -> INNP
0.295
2.001
0.045
Supported
H2
COMINT -> INNP
0.272
1.857
0.063
Not supported
H3
RES -> INNP
0.130
0.797
0.425
Not supported
H4
RISK -> INNP
-0.221
1.255
0.210
Not supported
5 Discussion and conclusion
Results confirm that innovative performance in agri-food companies depends on
leadership. Leaders who stimulate curiosity, experimentation, lifelong learning, and
cooperation may disseminate new ideas and methodologies (Amabile et al., 2004;
Mumford et al., 2002). Leaders may inspire innovation by setting clear goals and a
compelling vision (Zhang and Bartol, 2010), providing a secure area for employees to
express their ideas and try new things to inspire creativity (Amabile et al., 2004). Leaders
may support innovation by encouraging knowledge and idea sharing inside the firm
(Carmeli et al., 2013). By fostering creativity and cooperation, setting clear corporate
goals, and promoting two-way communication, agri-food executives can boost
innovation.
Contrary to what was assumed, internal communication has no significant impact on
innovation performance. The findings seem to contradict theoretical and empirical studies
showing that knowledge sharing stimulates innovation (Giampaoli et al., 2021). However,
we must underline that our focus was on the internal communication of food security
information and not knowledge-sharing per se. This may partly explain the results.
Also, the availability of resources (financial, infrastructure and human capital) does
not appear to have an impact on innovation performance. These findings are partly in line
with studies where human capital is the only component of intellectual capital that does
not facilitate innovation. It should be added that Italian agricultural enterprises are often
small and family-run, and therefore may have difficulty in accessing the resources needed
to innovate. The funding allocated to support innovation in the agricultural sector through
the PNRR (2021) is therefore an opportunity that is necessary to harness to modernise the
Agri-food sector.
Finally, risk awareness also does not appear to facilitate innovation. Probably, if this
on the one hand helps to establish a food safety climate and operate safely, on its own,
57
awareness of food security risks does not seem to be enough to stimulate creativity and
innovation. As Amabile (1988) argues, in order to find creative solutions, three basic
ingredients are needed: creativity, knowledge and motivation. It is therefore necessary to
actively engage all the staff of the organization and motivate them to food safety
objectives.
Having found that only leadership has a significant direct impact on innovation,
empirical evidence seems to support the assumption of De Boeck et al. (2015) according
to whom food safety climate is formed by several variables that only taken together
produce the desired outcomes. However, it is important to understand the dynamics
among food safety components to understand better if and how they enhance each other.
In conclusion our work contributes to food safety literature by analyzing the impact of
each food safety climate components on innovation performance in the Italian agri-food
sector. We offer valuable insights that can help agri-food firms to understand food safety
and its implications better. As said before, in the future innovation will have a key role in
addressing challenges and transforming the Agri-food sector to be ready to respond to the
new needs of an increasingly interconnected population, now conscious of the
implications that food has on health, environment and the whole society. The main
limitation of this paper is that data were collected from Italian firms and results cannot be
generalized.
References
Ajzen, I., Albarracin, D., Hornik, R. (2007), Prediction and change of health behavior: Applying the
reasoned action approach. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Amabile, T. M., Schatzel, E. A., Moneta, G. B., & Kramer, S. J. (2004). Leader behaviors and the
work environment for creativity: Perceived leader support. The Leadership Quarterly, 15(1),
5-32.
Amabile, T.M. (1988), “A model of creativity and innovation in organizations”, in Staw, B.M. and
Cummings, L.L. (Eds), Research in Organizational Behavior, JAI Press, Greenwich, CT, pp.
123-167.
Baert, K., Van Huffel, X., Wilmart, O., Jacxsens, L., Berkvens, D., Diricks, H., et al. (2011).
Measuring the safety of the food chain in Belgium: development of a barometer. Food
Research International, 44.
Benitez, J., Henseler, J., Castillo, A. and Schuberth, F. (2020), “How to perform and report an
impactful analysis using partial least squares: Guidelines for confirmatory and explanatory IS
research”, Information and Management, Vol. 57, No. 2, 103168.
Boccia, F. (2015), Genetically Modified Organisms: What Issues in the Italian Market?, Quality
Access to Success, 16 (145), pp. 105-110.
Boccia, F. and Sarnacchiaro, P. (2015), Genetically modified foods and consumer perspective,
recent patents on food, nutrition, and agriculture, 7 (1), pp. 28-34.
58
Cabrera, E. F., Collins, W. C., & Salgado, J. F. (2006). Determinants of individual engagement in
knowledge sharing. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 17(2),
245-264.
Carmeli, A., Gelbard, R., & Reiter-Palmon, R. (2013). Leadership, creative problem-solving
capacity, and creative performance: The importance of knowledge sharing. Human Resource
Management, 52(1), 95-121.
Casella, A. (2001), Product standards and international trade. Harmonization through private
coalitions?, Kyklos, 54 (2-3), pp. 243-264.
Cesaroni, F. M., Giombini, G., and Marin, G. (2021). Recent trends of the Italian food
manufacturing sector. Argomenti, 18, pp. 77–104.
Covino, D. (2014), Health, rights and European legislation on GM food, Quality - Access to
Success, 15 (142), pp. 98-100.
De Boeck, E., Jacxsens, L., Bollaerts, M., & Vlerick, P. (2015). Food safety climate in food
processing organizations: Development and validation of a self-assessment tool. Trends in
Food Science & Technology, 46(2), pp. 242-251.
De Boeck, E., Mortier, A.V. Jacxsens, L., Dequidt, L., & Vlerick, P. (2017), “Towards an extended
food safety culture model: Studying the moderating role of burnout and jobstress, the
mediating role of food safety knowledge and motivation in the relation between food safety
climate and food safety behavior”, Trends in Food Science & Technology, Vol. 62, pp.
202-214.
Del Baldo, M. (2022) When innovation rests on sustainability and food safety: Some experiences
from Italian agri-food start-ups DOI 10.3389/frsus.2022.889158, pp 1-15, Frontiers in.
Sustainability.
European Commission. (2007). Economic Analysis of EU Agriculture: The Importance and
Contribution of the Agri-Food Sector to the Sustainable Development of Rural Areas.
DEV-RU 27295, European Commission, Directorate- General for Agriculture and Rural
Development, Brussels, Belgium.
European Parliament. (2019). Eurobarometer. Food safety in the EU Report. Brussels: ESFA
European Food Safety Authority.
https://www.efsa.europa.eu/sites/default/files/corporate_publications/files/
FAO (2020). The State of Food and Agriculture 2020. Overcoming water challenges in agriculture.
Rome.
Food Drink Europe (2020). Data and trends of the European Food and Drink Industry 2020.
https://www.fooddrinkeurope.eu/resource/data-trends-of-the-european-foodand-
drink-industry-2020/
Giampaoli, D., Sgro, F., Ciambotti, M. and Bontis, N. (2021), “Integrating knowledge management
with intellectual capital to drive strategy: a focus on Italian SMEs”, Vine Journal of
Information and Knowledge Management Systems, Vol. ahead-of-print No. ahead-of-print,
doi: 10.1108/VJIKMS-04-2021-0059
Griffith, C. J. (2006), “Food safety: where from and where to?”, British Food Journal, Vol. 108, No.
1, pp. 6-15.
Griffith, C. J., Livesey, K. M., & Clayton, D. (2010). The assessment of food safety culture. British
Food Journal, 112(4), 439-456
Gumusluoglu, L., & Ilsev, A. (2009). Transformational leadership, creativity, and organizational
innovation. Journal of Business Research, 62(4), 461-473.
Hair, J.F., Jr, Hult, G.T.M., Ringle, C.M. and Sarstedt, M. (2017). A Primer on Partial Least Squares
Structural Equation Modeling (PLS-SEM), 2nd ed., Sage, Thousand Oaks, CA.
Hartmann, M. (2011), “Corporate social responsibility in the food sector”, European Review of
Agricultural Economics, Vol. 38, No. 3, pp. 297–324.
Kianto, A., Sàenz, J. and Aramburu, N. (2017). Knowledge-based human resource management
practices, intellectual capital and innovation. Journal of Business Research, Vol. 81, pp. 11-20.
59
Knowledge Centre for Food Fraud and Quality (2021). Food Quality. Retrieved from
https://knowledge4policy.ec.europa.eu/food-fraud-quality/topic/food-quality_en.
Laursen, K., & Foss, N. J. (2003). New human resource management practices, complementarities
and the impact on innovation performance. Cambridge Journal of Economics, 27(2), 243-263.
Lendowski, E.V.A., Oldeweme and A., Schewe, G. (2022), “Drivers of innovation performance and
firm performance: examining the inter-relationship of risk-taking, risk management and open
innovation, International Journal of Innovation Management, Vol. 26, No. 2.
Liu, Y., Ji, D., Zhang, L., An, J. and Sun, W. (2021), “Rural financial development impacts on
agricultural technology innovation: evidence from China”, International Journal of
Environmental Research and Public Health, Vol. 18 No. 3, p. 1110.
Merola, E. (2015), Quality, food safety and innovation in agri-food enterprises: The Ferrero case,
Quality - Access to Success, 16 (149), pp. 85-87.
Mumford, M. D., Scott, G. M., Gaddis, B., & Strange, J. M. (2002). Leading creative people:
Orchestrating expertise and relationships. The Leadership Quarterly, 13(6), 705-750.
Osterwalder, A. and Pigneur, Y. (2010), Business Model Generation: A Handbook for Visionaries,
Game Changers, and Challengers, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey.
Palazzi, F., and Sentuti, A. (2021), La sicurezza alimentare per le imprese italiane dell’agrifood:
barriere, driver e benefici percepiti, Argomenti, Vol. 18, pp. 105-125.
Paoloni, P., Modaffari, G., Paoloni, N. and Ricci, F. (2022), “The strategic role of intellectual capital
components in agri-food firms”, British Food Journal, Vol. 124 No. 5, pp. 1430-1452.
PNRR (2021). Piano Nazionale di Ripresa e Resilienza #NextGenerationItalia (National Recovery
and Resilience Plan), MISE, Ministero Sviluppo Economico, Roma, 12 gennaio 2021.
https://www.mise.gov.it/images/stories/documenti/PNRR_Aggiornato.pdf
Powell, D. A., Jacob, C. J., & Chapman, B. J. (2011), “Enhancing food safety culture to reduce
rates of foodborne illness”, Food Control, Vol. 22, No. 6, pp. 817-822.
PRIMA. (2018). Research and Innovation.
https://research-and-innovation.ec.europa.eu/research-area/environment/prima_en
Report Santa Chiara Lab (2020), Scenari e prospettive delle imprese agroalimentari fra sostenibilità
e innovazione,
https://santachiaralab.unisi.it/agroalimentare/attivita/scenari-e-prospettive-delle-imprese-agroal
imentari
Taylor, J. (2011). An exploration of food safety culture in a multi-cultural environment: next steps?
Worldwide Hospitality and Tourism Themes, Vol. 3, No. 5., pp. 455-466.
Wright, M., Leach, P., & Palmer, G. (2012), A tool to diagnose culture in food business operators,
In Report from Greenstreet Berman Ltd for the Food Standards Agency (pp. 100). United
Kingdom: Greenstreet Berman Ltd.
Yiannas, F. (2009), Food safety Culture: Creating a behavior-based food safety management
system. New York, USA: Springer
Zhang, X., & Bartol, K. M. (2010). Linking empowering leadership and employee creativity: The
influence of psychological empowerment, intrinsic motivation, and creative process
engagement. Academy of Management Journal, 53(1), 107-128.
Zhu, Y., & Akhtar, S. (2014), “How transformational leadership influences follower helping
behavior: the role of trust and prosocial motivation”, Journal of Organizational Behavior, Vol.
35, No. 3, pp. 373-392.
Zouaghi, F., & Sanchez, M. (2016). Has the global financial crisis had different effects on
innovation performance in the agri-food sector by comparison to the rest of the economy?
Trends in Food Science & Technology, 50, 230-242.
60
61
The circular economy in the restaurant sector. The
qualitative multiple case study of piadinerias in
Pesaro
Federica Murmura
Department of Economics, Society, Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: federica.murmura@uniurb.it
Elisabetta Savelli
Department of Economics, Society, Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: elisabetta.savelli@uniurb.it
Giada Pierli
PhD Student in Global Studies. Economy, Society and Law
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: g.pierli@campus.uniurb.it
Valentina Vedovi
Department of Economics, Society, Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: v.vedovi@campus.uniurb.it
Abstract
Objectives: This study seeks to investigate and understand the current degree of
diffusion and application of circular economy practices in small and medium-sized
enterprises (SMEs) in the Marche region engaged in the piadineria service, highlighting
the limits and benefits of implementation.
Literature review/Theoretical Framework: The circular economic model is
increasingly gaining the attention of the academic, professional, and institutional world
(Zhang et al., 2022). In this framework, the restaurant sector, among others, emerges,
whose environmental impact appears to be highly significant (Camilleri, 2021). Several
scholars state that this sector largely contributes to climate change, generating pollution,
wasting energy and using plastic and other harmful detergents and chemicals (Milindi et
al., 2022). Moreover, the restaurant industry is a huge generator of food waste and other
resources, resulting in greenhouse gas (GHG) pollution, wasted materials and huge
investment costs (Kim et al., 2020).
62
Approach/Method: A qualitative multi-case study was conducted, as this is one of the
most widely used instruments for carrying out qualitative research. To this end, a
structured questionnaire consisting of 43 questions divided into four main sections was
created and administered in interviews to seven food establishments offering piadineria
service and located in the city of Pesaro.
Main Results: The choices and actions taken by SMEs in the restaurant sector appear
to vary according to their different sustainability orientations and are strongly dependent
on economic and financial determinants. The food service establishments under
investigation have just taken the first steps towards the goal of a fully sustainable
operational approach, much still needs to be done for circular economy practices to
become an integral part of the way of thinking and managing internal activities and
processes.
Value and Implications for Theory and Practice: This study contributes to enriching
the literature on the circular economy applied to the restaurant sector by offering an
overview of the current degree of implementation and diffusion of sustainable practices
within SMEs. Furthermore, managers and practitioners could use the developed
framework as a tool to assess their current level of maturity in terms of circular economy.
Similarly, politicians could become aware of the need to introduce measures to promote
environmentally friendly investments, which could address the typical difficulties of
SMEs in the sector.
Keywords Circular economy, Food service sector, Sustainability, Circular restaurant,
SMEs.
Paper type Practical Paper
1 Introduction
The current historical period is characterised by the pressing issues of the climate
crisis and the depletion of the planet's available resources, while the world's population
numbers are increasing year by year. Nowadays, almost one third of global greenhouse
gas (GHG) emissions come from food systems, which require large amounts of resources
to run, thus compromising the biodiversity of natural environments (Camilleri, 2021). For
a long time, and even more today, the food sector has been facing challenges such as food
loss and waste, food safety, supply chain traceability, product quality and environmental
degradation (Al-Obadi et al., 2022). In this regard, restaurants and related production and
consumption practices play a not insignificant role. Several scholars state that this sector
largely contributes to climate change, generating pollution, wasting energy, and using
plastic and other harmful detergents and chemicals (Milindi et al., 2022). In addition to
this, the restaurant industry is a huge generator of food waste and other resources,
resulting in greenhouse gas pollution, wasted materials and huge investment costs (Kim et
al., 2020). In this framework, the linear economic model, based on the perpetuation of the
63
“extract-produce-use-throw away” mechanism, represents an outdated paradigm (Greer et
al., 2020) that risks seriously compromising the chances of survival and well-being of
future generations. To cope with these difficulties and prevent them from turning into
irreversible consequences, a change of path is therefore imperative, which requires the
adoption and introduction of a new economic paradigm, namely the circular one. The
analysis of opportunities and barriers to increasing the environmental performance of the
food service industry through the implementation of circular business models has thus
gained much attention within the academic, managerial, and institutional debate (Zhang et
al., 2022). However, most studies and interventions focus on issues related to food waste
and healthiness (Greer et al., 2020). Similarly, Dani et al. (2021) point out the scarcity of
empirical evidence on the topic of food ethics and sustainable restaurant practices,
compared to more exploratory interest on different circular economy (CE) approaches
applied to businesses in other sectors (Kirchherr and van Santen, 2019). Furthermore,
circular models appear predominantly examined with reference to large companies
(Walker et al., 2021), although small and medium-sized enterprises represent a substantial
part of the restaurant sector (Iraldo et al., 2017).
To fill these gaps, this study aims to investigate and understand the current degree of
diffusion and application of circular economy practices within the Italian restaurant
industry and, more specifically, within the small and medium-sized food establishments in
the Marche region that provide piadineria service. Therefore, a qualitative multiple case
study was carried out involving seven piadinerias in Pesaro - an important urban centre in
the Marche region in terms of gastronomic culture and culinary experiences - investigated
by using a structured interview. In particular, the following research questions were
addressed: (i) How much importance is given to the implementation of CE practices
within the restaurant sector, especially by the piadinerias in the city of Pesaro? (ii) What
is the current degree of progress with respect to the implementation of circular practices
and which of these do the premises under investigation prefer to adopt? (iii) What are the
advantages and limitations related to the implementation of CE practices encountered by
the interviewees? (iv) What kind of incentive(s) to support the implementation of these
practices do the interviewees need?
The paper is organised in three sections. Section 1 presents a review of the literature
on the circular economy in the restaurant sector. In Section 2, the research methodology
used, and the results of the study are described. Finally, Section 3 presents the main
64
conclusions, contributions of the analysis conducted, limitations and future research
directions.
2 Literature Review
The concept of Circular Economy (CE) has been declined over time in a multifaceted
way (Yuan et al., 2006; Lieder and Rashid, 2016; De Angelis, 2021), assuming multiple
meanings depending on the context and its economic, socio-cultural, and
political-institutional change. In the face of an ever-evolving body of scientific
knowledge, many studies relate and reduce the concept of CE mainly to issues concerning
the efficient use of materials and natural resources, mostly dealing with purely notional
and regulatory aspects (Alhawari et al., 2021). Nevertheless, de Leonardis (2019, p.7)
emphasises that the circular economy is "a concept with revolutionary potential", which
implies the adoption of a radically new perspective on issues that are not only
environmental, but also socio-economic and related to both production and consumption
systems of goods and services. Therefore, it is necessary to investigate CE also from a
more operational point of view, as a tool that would allow the concept of sustainable
development to be implemented systematically and effectively (Ghisellini et al., 2016;
Murray et al., 2017) within different business activities. To this end, it is needed to draw
up an operational definition of CE, which possesses clear and measurable characteristics
capable of creating a common language among scholars and practitioners (Alhawari et al.,
2021), with consequent effects on the practices to be performed towards a sustainable
transition. In this perspective, particularly comprehensive appears to be the formulation of
Kirchherr et al. (2017, pp. 224-225), according to which the circular economy may be
understood as “an economic system that is based on business models which replace the
‘end-of-life’ concept with reducing, alternatively reusing, recycling and recovering
materials in production/distribution and consumption processes, thus operating at the
micro level (products, companies, consumers), meso level (eco-industrial parks) and
macro level (city, region, nation and beyond), with the aim to accomplish sustainable
development, which implies creating environmental quality, economic prosperity and
social equity, to the benefit of current and future generations”.
Over the last few years, the circular economic model is increasingly gaining the
attention of the academic, professional, and institutional world (Zhang et al., 2022), both
in terms of the conceptualisation of its theoretical paradigm and the complex practical
65
implementation of its fundamental principles. In this framework, the restaurant sector
emerges, among others, whose extensive and varied business and the plurality of actors
involved in it contribute to making its environmental and social impact highly significant
(Kim and Hall., 2020; Camilleri, 2021). Several scholars state that this industry largely
contributes to climate change, generating pollution, wasting energy and using plastic and
other harmful detergents and chemicals (Milindi et al., 2022).
Restaurants can be quick-service restaurants (QSR, or more commonly known as fast
food), they can be themed, multi-cuisine, or simple cafés. Regardless of their
classification, every restaurant is structured into three main departments (Dani et al.,
2021): the first is production, in which purchased raw materials are combined, cooked and
transformed into attractive and appetising dishes; the second relates to the activity of
serving food and beverages to customers; the third concerns cleaning and maintaining the
hygiene of all the spaces in the restaurant. To perform this complex set of complementary
activities in the best and most coordinated way, each restaurant must possess a wide range
of equipment made of different materials, from plastic and wood to metals such as iron,
stainless steel and aluminium, while the equipment, especially those located inside the
kitchen, run on electricity, coal, gas and water (Dani et al., 2021). Hence, the restaurant
business primarily involves a high and sometimes careless consumption of conventional
resources, which results in the release of large amounts of highly polluting carbon
emissions into the environment (Liu et al., 2022); in addition, the restaurant industry can
be qualified as a huge generator of food waste, which results in material waste and high
investment costs (Kim et al., 2020). Specifically, Dani et al. (2021) distinguish between
the impact on the environment resulting from food preparation and that generated by the
food and beverage service within the restaurant. The food preparation and cooking phase
involves (ElSharkawy and Javed, 2018; Nawaz et al., 2019; Dani et al, 2021): (i) air
pollution, caused by the use of traditional man-made fuels such as wood and charcoal, but
also oils and organic substances subsequently aerosolised and vented into the outside air
by the kitchen exhaust system; (ii) plastic pollution, related to the fact that most raw food,
perishable and non-perishable, is marketed in plastic packaging, which is then dispersed
into the environment and the atmosphere; (iii) water pollution, resulted from the disposal
of cleaning products in lakes and rivers, many of which contain substances that are toxic
to humans, animals and plants and which, being able to remain in the environment for
long periods of time, end up contaminating the food chain; (iv) resource depletion, due to
excessive use of natural and mineral resources, especially in the cooking of food.
66
Similarly, food and beverage service generates (Chaabane et al., 2018; Kim et al., 2020;
Dani et al, 2021): (i) noise pollution, premises may produce more than 100 dB of noise,
exceeding the 65 dB threshold set by the World Health Organisation (WHO); (ii) waste
generation, whether solid such as food waste, paper, disposable plastic, or liquid, which
contain suspended materials, oils and fats, leftovers, chemicals and biochemicals; (iii)
energy consumption, deriving from air conditioners, lighting or other elements; (iv)
indoor air pollution, caused by combustion smoke, building materials, furniture, cleaning
products, room fragrances, centralised air-conditioning systems and so on.
The adoption of circular and responsible business practices thus becomes an
imperative for restaurant operators, whose choices and behaviour are increasingly being
discussed by public authorities and consumers (Yoon et al., 2020; Chaturvedi et al.,
2022). A growing number of people recognize the issue of sustainability as an important
selection criterion on where to enjoy a meal outside home, prompting restaurateurs to
revise and transform their business in response to a more environmentally conscious and
sensitive audience (Jones et al., 2014; Han et al., 2020). Recent studies show that
consumers have begun to demand sustainable food services with a reduced carbon
footprint (Price et al., 2016), thus preferring restaurants that adopt green measures (Park
et al. 2020).
Despite the obvious importance of adopting a circular economy approach to restaurant
business management, there are still few studies on food ethics and sustainable business
practices applicable to the restaurant sector (Dani et al., 2021). Main focus has been on
identifying and reducing food waste as well as issues related to the quality and healthiness
of the food offered (Greer et al., 2020; Yang et al., 2019). Furthermore, most scholars
have focused on the application of the circular economy within large manufacturing
industries (Kirchherr and van Santen, 2019; Principato et al., 2019; Walker et al., 2021),
despite the undeniable impacts of food service provision in terms of energy and water use,
waste and carbon footprint. To address these gaps, a deeper knowledge on how the
circular model can be declined in food service practices becomes crucial. This aspect
appears even more relevant in the context of small and medium-sized enterprises that
represent a substantial part of the restaurant sector (Iraldo et al., 2017), thus playing a key
role in making the entire ecosystem sustainable.
As specifically regards Italy, it is also worth considering not only the importance of
businesses in the food service industry for national economic development, but also their
strong roots in the country's historical and socio-cultural heritage. Within the current
67
Italian food supply chain, restaurant plays a leading role; according to the Restaurant
Annual Report of the Italian Federation of Public Establishments (FIPE, 2019), it ranks as
the first sector in the supply chain generating an economic value of 46 billion euros per
year, followed only by agriculture with 25 billion euros. In 2019, there are about 285,000
bars and restaurants that employ 1.2 million people, with an impact on national GDP of
1.4 percent (FIPE, 2019). Despite the less positive data recorded in 2020 due to the
pandemic crisis from COVID-19, the restaurant remains to date a sector that must be
actively involved in the process of sustainable transition, also as an element of connection
and intermediation between the production and consumption systems. As a result,
investigating the current application of circular economy practices within the Italian food
service could act as a stimulus for the development and diffusion of more sustainable
models, both among restaurants and consumers.
3 Research Methodology and Results
In order to investigate the diffusion of circular economy practices within the
restaurant sector and, more specifically, within the piadineria service, the analysis was
conducted through the methodology of the qualitative multiple case study, which is one of
the most widely used tools in carrying out qualitative research. The decision to use the
multiple case study, as a research method in which each case is treated as a single
autonomous unit with its own structure and peculiarities, enables the collection of data
that is more reliable than the single case, thus attributing more rigour to the study of the
observed phenomenon; in addition to this, the replication of the case study on several
realities enables them to be compared and the results obtained to be analysed from a
broader viewpoint. Furthermore, qualitative research provides insight into the opinions,
motivations, and trends with respect to the phenomenon under investigation, aspects that
could not be captured by the purely numerical data of quantitative research (Bryman and
Burgess, 1994).
The study was carried out by means of a questionnaire consisting of 43 questions
divided into four main sections and administered in interviews to seven establishments
belonging to the restaurant sector and located in the city of Pesaro. All these food service
establishments offer piadineria services, but while some are classifiable as small
handicraft businesses with only a take-away service, others have a more complex
organisation and are to be understood as “true” restaurants.
68
3.1 Selection of cases
The food establishments involved in the survey were selected according to the
following precise and pre-defined selection criteria:
sector: food service establishments need to belong to the restaurant sector, and in
particular offer piadineria service;
size: food service establishments need to be small or medium-sized, defined in terms
of turnover and number of employees consistent with the European Commission
Recommendation 2003/361/EC on 6 May 20031;
location: food service establishments need to be in the city of Pesaro.
Based on these criteria, 10 food service establishments were identified, 7 of which
participated in the study.
The focus on small and medium-sized companies in the Pesaro restaurant sector
derives from the relevance that these businesses have in terms of promoting and
enhancing the city's food and wine heritage. Investigating the application of circular
economy practices by these companies is therefore of significant importance, given the
role they could play in encouraging the adoption of sustainable consumption models not
only locally, but also regionally.
3.2 Questionnaire
The research questionnaire used for the conduct of the interview, which was
administered guaranteeing the anonymity of the respondents, consists of 43 questions
(mainly open-answer and 1 with a 5-point Likert scale) divided into four main sections.
The first relates to the profile of the respondent and collects information on age,
educational qualification and the role played in the management of the establishment. The
second concerns the profile of the establishment and includes general questions on the
year of opening and the type of service provided, but also questions on whether the
1The European Commission Recommendation 2003/361 states that the category of micro,
small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) includes those with the following
characteristics: i. number of employees less than 250; ii. annual turnover not exceeding
EUR 50 million or annual balance sheet total not exceeding EUR 43 million. In addition,
it should be noted that small enterprises are defined as enterprises which employ fewer
than 50 persons and whose annual turnover or annual balance sheet total does not exceed
EUR 10 million; micro enterprises are defined as enterprises which employ fewer than 10
persons and whose annual turnover or annual balance sheet total does not exceed EUR 2
million (https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/IT/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32003H0361,
last accessed on 22 March 2023).
69
business is family-run, the number of employees and the annual turnover. The third one
investigates the current level of adoption and implementation of circular economy
practices addressed in relation to 4 thematic categories, which recall the sustainability
practices for the restaurant sector indicated by Dani et al. (2021) and Camilleri (2021);
these have been organised in sub-sections, namely raw materials and ingredients used,
materials used in service delivery and cleaning products, energy and water consumption
and architecture of the premises, surpluses and food waste. Finally, the fourth section
focuses on the approach to circular practices trying to understand the attention paid to the
issue of environmental sustainability within their operational processes, the importance
recognised to these practices, the main areas of application, the advantages, limitations
and incentives related to their implementation, and future prospects.
3.3 Data collection and analysis
The survey, which was carried out in October 2022, started by consulting the websites
and collecting the contact details of the food service establishments selected using the
criteria described above; in total, 10 establishments were phone contacted and with 7 of
these it was possible to make an appointment for an interview. The number of cases
considered is consistent with the multiple case study theory (Yin, 2003), according to
which it is recommended to analyse between four and twelve units, as a lower number of
units is insufficient for the purposes of structured research, while a higher number makes
data analysis complex. The interview through the administration of the survey
questionnaire, as the only source of data collection, was carried out by personally meeting
the interviewees; this direct interaction enabled an enrichment of the survey from a
qualitative point of view, as it was able to detect sensitivity and interest in the topic
studied.
All interviews were transcribed and validated. The analysis of the interviews was
conducted through the interpretation and content analysis of the answers obtained from
the different food service establishments investigated, following the questionnaire
structure.
3.4 Results
3.4.1 Interviewee profile
The data collected in the first section of the questionnaire, concerning the interviewee
profile, are summarised in Table 1 and show that the respondents are on average 45, 28
70
years old. Most of them have a high school degree (5 out of 7), while only two have a
middle school degree; all of them are owners of the food service establishment, excluding
one person who works as a staff coordinator.
Table 1: Interviewee profile.
Food
service
establish
ment 1
Food
service
establish
ment 2
Food
service
establish
ment 3
Food
service
establish
ment 4
Food
service
establish
ment 5
Food
service
establish
ment 6
Food
service
establish
ment 7
Age
(years)
45
36
49
34
64
56
33
Educatio
nal
qualificat
ion
High
school
degree
High
school
degree
High
school
degree
High
school
degree
Secondary
school
degree
High
school
degree
Secondary
school
degree
Position
held in
the
company
Owner
Owner
Owner
Staff
coordinato
r
Owner
Owner
Owner
Source: own elaboration
3.4.2 Company profile
As shown in Table 2, all the establishments investigated have been in business since
the 2000s and thus opened relatively recently, except in the case of establishment 6,
which is older. Food service establishments 3, 5 and 6 are take-away and family-run
piadinerias, with no or at most one employee and a turnover of much less than EUR
500,000 per year, thus constituting small businesses of an artisanal nature and presenting
a rather simple business organisation. Conversely, venues 1, 2 and 4 offer not only a
piadineria service, but also a restaurant service: their menus include appetisers, first and
second courses, side dishes and desserts; they also provide a table service. The latter are
not family-owned and have up to 11, 8 and up to 60 employees respectively. Even these
establishments have an annual turnover of less than EUR 500,000, apart from food
71
establishment 4. In addition to achieving a turnover of between EUR 3 and 5 million per
year and employing up to 60 employees, establishment 4 in fact has several premises
located in the Pesaro area and beyond. Finally, food establishment 7 is in an intermediate
situation since, although it only provides a take-away piadineria service, it is not a
family-run business and up to 14 persons are employed in its two establishments,
registering a turnover of less than EUR 500,000 per year.
Table 2: Company profile.
Food
service
establish
ment 1
Food
service
establish
ment 2
Food
service
establish
ment 3
Food
service
establish
ment 4
Food
service
establish
ment 5
Food
service
establish
ment 6
Food
service
establish
ment 7
Openi
ng
year
2022
2018
2021
2004
2020
1983
2008
Servic
e type
Piadineria
and
restaurant
Piadineria
and
restaurant
Takeaway
piadineria
Piadineria
and
restaurant
Takeaway
piadineria
Takeaway
piadineria
Takeaway
piadineria
Family
run
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
Numb
er of
emplo
yees
Up to 11
8
1
Up to 60
0
1
up to 14
Turnov
er
range
(2021)
< 500.000
< 500.000
< 500.000
3-5 million
< 500.000
< 500.000
< 500.000
Source: own elaboration
3.4.3 Circular Economy practices
The third section of the questionnaire focuses on the level of adoption and
implementation of circular economy practices by the food establishments surveyed. As
indicated above, these practices are considered in relation to four main thematic
categories. The data emerging from this analysis provide interesting qualitative
information, which can be described as follows:
72
raw materials/ingredients/products: all the premises interviewed use raw materials,
ingredients and products from local (Km 0) and/or regional suppliers in the
preparation of their food proposals, in high percentages (at least 50% and up to 90%)
of the total raw materials purchased, with the exception of establishment 2, which
uses only 20%. All the establishments use seasonal raw materials by offering a menu
that is partly fixed and partly composed of proposals that vary according to the
seasonal availability of products (especially vegetables). It should be emphasised that
the data reported shows, in a positive and encouraging manner, an attentive attitude
by all the premises to the purchase of local and seasonal raw materials. As previously
mentioned, local and seasonally-based sourcing processes are among the
sustainability-oriented good practices described by Camilleri (2021), which are
increasingly embraced by businesses in the restaurant (and hotel) sector, as they are
able to guarantee a high quality of the chosen products and reasonable purchasing
costs, especially where restaurateur and supplier work together on an ongoing basis.
Slightly more than half of the premises interviewed (1, 2, 3 and 4) use certified raw
materials and/or products in percentages ranging from 10% to 60% of the total raw
materials purchased, with BIO, IGP, DOP, DOCG, Gluten-Free and ICCAT
certifications prevailing; the remaining premises (5, 6 and 7) do not use certified raw
materials, and in particular premises 7 expresses scepticism on the issue of certified
products, especially BIO ones. From the interviews, it emerges that the choice of
whether or not to use certified raw materials is not only guided by sustainability
reasons but is also closely linked to their cost and the need to satisfy the demands of
those consumers who are more demanding with respect to the authenticity of the
products they consume. None of the restaurants use raw materials and/or products
deriving from socially committed realities, except for restaurant 3 which claims to
purchase its dairy products from a neighbouring therapeutic rehabilitation
community. It can therefore be stated that among the interviewees there is a low
propensity to use alternative supply channels than those with which they usually
interact. At least one vegetarian and/or vegan proposal (sometimes even more than
one) is present in the menus offered by the seven premises interviewed, a sign of the
desire to meet the new consumer dietary trends, which have increased since the
pandemic and are characterised by a lower consumption of processed foods in favour
of healthy foods, such as those of vegetable origin;
73
service delivery materials and cleaning products: regarding service delivery, most of
the premises surveyed do not use washable tablecloths and/or napkins or those made
of certified ecological paper. Only three of them (1, 2 and 4) use washable or
non-plastic dishes, glasses and crockery since the opening of the business. For
take-away service, all premises use compostable paper or cardboard packaging
instead of plastic, and in two cases biodegradable bags are also used. In all
establishments, washable towels and/or certified ecological hand dryers are used in
the kitchen, while only three of them have hand dryers instead of paper in the
bathrooms. Only establishment 1 employs the digital menu with the use of QR codes
instead of the traditional paper menu; in all other cases, the menu is made of paper,
sometimes recycled. It is clear, therefore, that premises do not have a uniform and
consistent behaviour in implementing solutions to avoid the use of plastic or reduce
paper consumption in their operations. Although Dani et al. (2021) state that
replacing plastic packaging, wrapping, glasses, dishes, bowls, cutlery, and straws
with those made of environmentally friendly, recyclable or biodegradable materials is
one of the initiatives that a sustainable restaurant should implement, the data show
that such a measure is only partially adopted by the surveyed venues and mostly in
the take-away service. Only establishments 2, 3 and 4 perform the take-away service
by relying on food delivery operators who mainly use polluting means of transport
(scooters or cars). None of the premises purchase certified ecological cleaning
products and only some of these products have an automatic dispenser. This finding
identifies a behaviour that is not in line with what Dani et al. (2021) suggest,
according to which an environmentally sustainable approach includes the use of
organic or natural detergents without toxic chemicals in cleaning processes and the
proper treatment of these;
energy consumption, water consumption and premises architecture: concerning
energy consumption, only in the case of establishment 4, solar panels have been
installed in one of its premises to help save energy. Most of the interviewed
establishments use energy-efficient household appliances (at least class A++), only
some of them (1, 2, 3 and 4) use sensors with switch-off timers for less used rooms,
while premises 1 and 7 are the only ones with at least 80% class A energy-efficient
lighting. None of the surveyed premises generate renewable energy. In this regard, it
is specified that the minimisation of electricity consumption through the exploitation
of alternative energy sources such as water, wind, and sun, as proposed in the study
74
by Dani et al. (2021), represent practical actions that require the availability of
adequate infrastructure and ample space, two conditions that almost all the premises
investigated do not possess. With regard to water consumption, on the other hand,
most of the establishments state that they do not have water-efficient flushing
systems in their bathrooms, and only in a few cases are water flow reducers or pedal,
time or photocell control mechanisms applied to bathroom and kitchen taps, denoting
a largely inefficient management of water consumption. None of the premises has
ever achieved voluntary environmental certification for reasons of lack of interest
and/or scarcity of resources (financial or time), preferring in all cases to invest these
resources in achieving mandatory certification. Neither of the premises studied has an
infrastructure built using green building materials and only in the case of
establishment 4 were second-hand furnishings used to equip one of its premises;
surplus and food waste: in all the premises studied, waste is sorted into at least four
fractions in accordance with municipal regulations and staff are given clear, simple,
and comprehensible instructions on the correct identification of the different types of
waste. All the establishments also collect used cooking oil and fats in special
containers and deliver them to a company specialised in their treatment. Even though
none of the interviewed premises is equipped with a composter or digester, they all
manage waste disposal appropriately and in compliance with the rules imposed by
law. The main strategies adopted to prevent the production of surpluses and food
waste are the management of supplies in relation to production needs and the
decision to keep a minimum amount of stock in the warehouse. These practices are
perfectly consistent with the Just-In-Time purchasing systems and responsible
stock-taking practices described by Camilleri (2021), which are combined with the
careful and no-waste use of raw materials, made-to-order production and, in the case
of the establishment 4, centralised and standardised production. Regarding the
management strategies of any food surpluses produced, these include the provision of
doggy bags for customers, internal reuse, internal redistribution (this is the case of
establishments 4 and 7 which have more than one premises) and joining initiatives to
tackle food waste (this is the case of establishment 5 which uses the Too Good To Go
platform). The use of sharing economy platforms and the use of food-boxes for
customers are not only responsible practices referred to in the literature but represent
sustainability-oriented solutions that are easy to implement, while confirming
themselves as fundamental in limiting food waste.
75
3.4.4 Approach to circular economy practices
The survey questionnaire concludes with a fourth section whose questions seek to
understand the importance given to the issue of environmental sustainability by the
interviewees and their willingness to introduce circular economy practices in their daily
activities and operational processes. With respect to the importance attributed to circular
practices, respondents were asked to express their opinion using a Likert scale, where 1
indicates not at all important and 5 indicates very important. In this regard, Table 3 shows
that all the analysed premises attribute enough importance (4.43) to the adoption and
implementation of circular economy practices within their establishment(s). The reasons
that primarily motivate these answers are of an economic nature and refer to the
possibility of achieving significant cost savings; secondly, all the interviewees express
interest and personal involvement in the issues of fighting food and resource (especially
energy) waste, respect for the environment, commitment to operate in a sustainable way,
and show a sense of responsibility towards social welfare and that of future generations.
Table 3. Importance given to the implementation of circular economy practices within the
food service establishment's activities and operational processes.
Importance given to the implementation of circular economy practices within
operations and processes
Food service
establishment 1
4
Food service
establishment 2
4
Food service
establishment 3
5
Food service
establishment 4
5
Food service
establishment 5
5
Food service
establishment 6
4
76
Food service
establishment 7
4
Mean
4,43
Standard Deviation
0,534
Source: own elaboration
Concerning the areas of circular economy practices application considered most
important, Table 4 shows that all premises indicate energy and water consumption as the
prevailing one, followed by raw material consumption, tied with the area related to the
production of food surpluses and waste. The choice of these specific areas of application
is based on the same motivations as above, to which is added the attention paid to the
quality, freshness and genuineness of the ingredients used in the preparations and
therefore the care dedicated to the selection of the raw materials purchased, which are
mainly local and seasonal.
Table 4. Areas of circular economy practices application considered most important by
interviewees.
Food
service
establish
ment 1
Food
service
establish
ment 2
Food
service
establish
ment 3
Food
service
establish
ment 4
Food
service
establish
ment 5
Food
service
establish
ment 6
Food
service
establish
ment 7
Raw
materials/
ingredient
s/
products
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
Service
delivery
materials
and
cleaning
products
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Energy
and water
consumpti
on,
infrastruct
ure
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
77
Food
surpluses
and waste
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
Source: own elaboration
Finally, the interviewees were asked to express their opinion on the advantages and
limitations of implementing circular economy practices within their premises, and then to
indicate the incentives potentially useful to support the adoption of these practices, and to
describe their future perspectives on the topic.
The benefits mentioned are mainly economic (cost savings), followed by the
possibility of offering customers a higher quality product and ensuring greater
environmental protection by promoting sustainability and reducing all forms of waste
within their operations.
Regarding limitations, all of the premises cite cost constraints (which in the case of
raw materials determine in turn an increase in the final price to the customer, who is not
always willing to recognise a premium price for a sustainable product), time and
regulatory-bureaucratic constraints; in addition, they highlight the problems of
implementing some eco-friendly solutions (with specific reference to the lack of
effectiveness of certified ecological cleaning products), the need for qualified staff for
efficient management of purchasing processes and warehouse stocks, the difficulty of
scheduling production to avoid the generation of surpluses.
On incentives to support the implementation of circular economy practices,
interviewees point to: the introduction of tax relief on the purchase of modern and
environmentally friendly professional equipment, certified raw materials and ingredients
(e.g. organic), compostable or biodegradable packaging; the need for bureaucratic
streamlining, especially in the process of obtaining certifications; lower taxes as a
stimulus to investment due to more available financial resources.
Finally, with respect to future perspectives, premises 1, 2 and 6 express their intention
to introduce further circular economy practices in their operations; in particular,
establishment 1 states that it would like to commit to the complete elimination of plastic
and the use of environmentally friendly cleaning products; establishment 2 expresses
interest in obtaining a voluntary environmental certification in the near future;
establishment 6 would like to renew its equipment and install solar panels. Establishment
4 is inclined towards improving the circular economy practices already implemented,
78
while premises 3, 5 and 7 do not intend to implement further circular economy practices
in their operations.
It is therefore evident that it is not possible to identify a single direction of future
development valid for all establishments regarding the implementation of circular
economy practices within their operational processes, due to the heterogeneity that
characterises the orientations and approaches of the various interviewees to the issue of
environmental sustainability.
4 Conclusions
The choices and actions taken by small and medium-sized enterprises in the restaurant
sector appear to vary according to their different sustainability orientations and are
strongly dependent on economic and financial determinants. The food service
establishments under investigation have just taken the first steps towards the goal of a
fully sustainable operational approach, much still needs to be done for circular economy
practices to become an integral part of the way of thinking and managing internal
activities and processes. The most widespread and implemented circular economy
practices concern the selection of raw materials and the management of food surplus and
waste. As stated by Camilleri (2021), local and seasonal purchasing processes and good
procedures to deal with food waste enable a higher quality product and lower operating
costs, while protecting the environment.
Conversely, in the fields of energy and water consumption and the architecture of
restaurant establishments, only a few measures are taken to promote a more sustainable
operational approach. Dani et al. (2021) point out that practices such as the use of
alternative energy sources (e.g., water, wind, and sun) require the availability of adequate
infrastructure and ample space; these are two conditions that most of the establishments
investigated do not possess. Although all the interviewed business owners recognise the
importance and benefits of adopting circular economy practices, there are still many
difficulties that these small and medium-sized enterprises encounter in their
implementation; these include cost, time and regulatory-bureaucratic constraints and the
lack of proper sustainable management skills. This result appears to be in line with what
has been found in the literature with respect to the main barriers faced by Italian SMEs
with respect to their circular transformation, namely the limited human, economic and
time resources (Salvioni et al., 2022). To cope with these limitations, the analysed
79
piadinerias emphasise the need for more support from local and national authorities in
terms of economic incentives, reduction of bureaucratic procedures and green investments
in the restaurant industry.
This study contributes to enriching the literature on the circular economy applied to
the restaurant sector by offering an overview of the current degree of implementation and
diffusion of sustainable practices within small and medium-sized enterprises, which to
date have been little explored, although they constitute a crucial part of this industry. In
this perspective, several important aspects were explored and highlighted, such as the
importance given to the implementation of circular economy practices within its own
business, their degree of diffusion, the advantages and limitations associated with them.
The research also provides interesting managerial implications for restaurant operators
and public authorities. Managers and practitioners could use the developed framework as
a tool to assess their current level of maturity with respect to the implementation of
circular economy practices, identifying critical areas, needs for improvement and
priorities for action. Similarly, politicians could become aware of the need to introduce
measures to promote environmentally friendly investments, which could address the
difficulties faced by small and medium-sized enterprises in the sector and encourage the
adoption of a sustainable management approach.
The paper also presents some limitations. Specifically, the sample consists of
establishments operating exclusively in the city of Pesaro. Similarly, the premises
considered are mainly specialised in the piadineria service. In the future, it would be
interesting to extend the research to other businesses in the restaurant sector and to
consider different Italian geographical areas, to identify similarities, differences and main
priorities for intervention.
References
Alhawari, O., Awan, U., Bhutta, M. K. S., Ülkü, M. A., (2021) “Insights from circular economy
literature: A review of extant definitions and unravelling paths to future research”,
Sustainability, Vol. 13, No. 2, 859.
Al-Obadi, M., Ayad, H., Pokharel, S., Ayari, M. A., (2022) “Perspectives on food waste
management: Prevention and social innovations”, Sustainable Production and Consumption,
Vol. 31, pp. 190-208.
Bryman, A., Burgess, R.G., (1994) Analyzing Qualitative Data, Routledge, London.
Camilleri, M. A. (2021), “Sustainable production and consumption of food. Mise-en-place circular
economy policies and waste management practices in tourism cities”, Sustainability, Vol. 13,
No. 17, 9986.
80
Chaabane W, Nassour A, Nelles M., (2018) “Solid waste management key indicator development
for hotels: A Tunisian case study analysis”, Recycling, Vol. 3, No. (4), 56.
Chaturvedi, P., Kulshreshtha, K., Tripathi, V., Agnihotri, D., (2022) “Investigating the impact of
restaurants' sustainable practices on consumers' satisfaction and revisit intentions: a study on
leading green restaurants”, Asia-Pacific Journal of Business Administration, (ahead-of-print).
Dani, R., Juyal, D., Rawal, Y. S., (2021) “A critical analysis of the restaurant industry's effect on
environment sustainability”, Science Progress and Research (SPR), Vol. 2, No.4, pp. 464-471.
Dani, R., Tiwari, K., Negi, P., (2021) “Ecological approach towards sustainability in hotel
industry”, Materials Today: Proceedings, Vol. 46, pp. 10439-10442.
De Angelis, R., (2021) “Circular economy: Laying the foundations for conceptual and theoretical
development in management studies”, Management Decision, Vol. 59, No. 6, pp. 1209-1227.
de Leonardis, F., (2019) Studi in tema di economia circolare, EUM - Edizioni Università di
Macerata, Macerata.
ElSharkawy MF, Javed W., (2018) “Study of indoor air quality level in various restaurants in
Saudi Arabia”, Environmental Progress & Sustainable Energy, Vol. 37, No. 5, pp. 1713-1721.
Ghisellini, P., Cialani, C., Ulgiati, S., (2016) “A review on circular economy: the expected transition
to a balanced interplay of environmental and economic systems”, Journal of Cleaner
production, Vol. 114, pp. 11-32.
Greer, R., von Wirth, T., Loorbach, D., (2020) “The diffusion of circular services: Transforming the
Dutch catering sector”, Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 267, 121906.
Han, H., Moon, H. and Hyun, S.S. (2020), “Uncovering the determinants of pro-environmental
consumption for green hotels and green restaurants: a mixed-method approach”, International
Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, Vol. 32, No. 4, pp. 1581-1603.
Iraldo, F., Testa, F., Lanzini, P., Battaglia, M., (2017) “Greening competitiveness for hotels and
restaurants”, Journal of Small Business and Enterprise Development, Vol. 24, No. 3, pp.
607-628
Jones, P., Hillier, D., Comfort, D., (2014) “Sustainability in the global hotel industry”, International
Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, Vol. 26, No. 1, pp. 5-17.
Kim, M. J., Hall, C. M., Kim, D. K., (2020) “Predicting environmentally friendly eating out
behavior by value-attitude-behavior theory: does being vegetarian reduce food
waste?”, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, Vol. 28, No. 6, pp. 797-815.
Kim, M.J. and Hall, C.M., (2020) “Can sustainable restaurant practices enhance customer loyalty?
The roles of value theory and environmental concerns”, Journal of Hospitality and Tourism
Management, Vol. 43, pp. 127-138.
Kirchherr, J. W., van Santen, R., (2019) “Research on the circular economy: A critique of the
field”, Resources, Conservation and Recycling, Vol. 151.
Kirchherr, J., Reike, D., Hekkert, M., (2017) “Conceptualizing the circular economy: An analysis of
114 definitions”, Resources, conservation and recycling, Vol. 127, pp. 221-232.
Lieder, M., Rashid, A., (2016) “Towards circular economy implementation: a comprehensive
review in context of manufacturing industry”. Journal of cleaner production, Vol. 115, pp.
36-51.
Liu, P., Segovia, M., Tse, E. C. Y., Nayga, R. M., (2022) “Become an environmentally responsible
customer by choosing low-carbon footprint products at restaurants: Integrating the elaboration
likelihood model (ELM) and the theory of planned behavior (TPB)”, Journal of Hospitality
and Tourism Management, Vol. 52, pp. 346-355.
Milindi, P. S., De Lieto, F., Chopra, S. S., (2022) “Food waste-Energy-Water-Emissions (FEWE)
nexus in the food service sector: Comparing a restaurant meal from imported ingredients
versus an imported ready-to-eat meal”, Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 380, 134871.
81
Murray, A., Skene, K., Haynes, K., (2017) “The circular economy: an interdisciplinary exploration
of the concept and application in a global context” Journal of business ethics, Vol. 140, pp.
369-380.
Nawaz, M. A., Azam, A., Bhatti, M. A., (2019) “Natural resources depletion and economic growth:
Evidence from ASEAN countries”, Pakistan Journal of Economic Studies (PJES), Vol. 2, No.
2, pp. 155-172.
Park, E., Olivia, Chae, B., Kevin, Kwon, J., Kim, W.-H., (2020) “The effects of green restaurant
attributes on consumer satisfaction using the structural topic model on online consumer
reviews”, Sustainability, Vol. 12, No. 7, 2843.
Price, S., Hartwell, H., Hemingway, A., Chapleo, C., (2016) “Workplace foodservice; perception of
quality and trust”, Appetite, Vol. 97, pp. 169–175.
Principato, L., Ruini, L., Guidi, M., Secondi, L., (2019) “Adopting the circular economy approach
on food loss and waste: The case of Italian pasta production”, Resources, Conservation and
Recycling, Vol. 144, pp. 82–89.
Raccomandazione della Commissione, del 6 maggio 2003, relativa alla definizione delle
microimprese, piccole e medie imprese, available online at
https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/IT/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A32003H0361 (last accessed:
22 March 2023).
Ristorazione Rapporto Annuale (2019), Federazione Italiana Pubblici Esercizi (FIPE), available
online at https://www.fipe.it/wp-content/uploads/2021/12/Rapporto_PE_Sito_2019-2.pdf (last
accessed: 8 March 2023).
Salvioni, D. M., Bosetti, L., Fornasari, T., (2022) “Implementing and monitoring circular business
models: an analysis of Italian SMEs”, Sustainability, Vol. 14, No. 1, 270.
Walker, A. M., Opferkuch, K., Lindgreen, E. R., Simboli, A., Vermeulen, W. J., Raggi, A., (2021)
“Assessing the social sustainability of circular economy practices: Industry perspectives from
Italy and the Netherlands”, Sustainable Production and Consumption, Vol. 27, 831-844.
Yang, Y., Bao, W., Xie, G.H., (2019) “Estimate of restaurant food waste and its biogas production
potential in China”, Journal of cleaner production, Vol. 211, pp.309-320.
Yin R.K., (2003) Case study research: design and methods, Sage Publishing, Newbury Park.
Yoon, B., Chung, Y., Jun, K., (2020) “Restaurant industry practices to promote healthy sustainable
eating: a content analysis of restaurant websites using the value chain
approach”, Sustainability, Vol. 12, No. 17, 7127.
Yuan, Z., Bi, J., & Moriguichi, Y., (2006) “The circular economy: A new development strategy in
China”, Journal of Industrial Ecology, Vol. 10, No. 1-2, pp. 4-8.
Zhang, Q., Dhir, A., Kaur, P., (2022) “Circular economy and the food sector: A systematic literature
review”, Sustainable Production and Consumption, Vol. 32, pp. 655-668.
82
Sustainability practice in first-generation family firms.
Some empirical evidence from the Scanian wine
sector
Henrietta Nilson
Department of Business, Innovation and Sustainability
Halmstad University
Krisitan IV:väg 3, Halmstad (Sweden)
E-mail: henrietta.nilson@hh.se
Annalisa Sentuti
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino
Via Saffi 42, Urbino PU (Italy)
E-mail: annalisa.sentuti@uniurb.it
Francesca Maria Cesaroni
Department of Economics, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino
Via Saffi 42, Urbino PU (Italy)
E-mail: francesca.cesaroni@uniurb.it
Abstract
In family business studies, sustainability is an upcoming subject. The wine sector is an
industry in which family firms and sustainable practices are deeply intertwined and
widely analysed. Prior research focused on long-lasting family businesses in old and
mature wine districts. This study aims to identify and understand sustainability practices
in first-generation family firms in the emerging Scanian wine sector, with a particular
focus on copreneurial ventures.
By embracing a micro-foundational lens, the research focuses on the individual level,
i.e., the family members at the head of the business, and aims to answer the following
research questions: (RQ1) How do first-generation family firm members in a nascent
wine country make sense of sustainability practices? and (RQ2) How do they integrate
sustainability into their family firms?
We have adopted a qualitative approach based on multiple case studies and collected
data from three copreneurial ventures. Using Gioia method to analyse data, we have
identified two aggregate dimensions: foundations of sustainability and sustainability
development. “Foundations of sustainability” refers to RQ1 and concerns how
first-generation family firm members make sense of sustainability practices. This
dimension includes three themes: values, well-being and living in nature, more than
organic. The “sustainability development” dimension refers to RQ2 and concerns how
first-generation family firm members integrate sustainability practices into their family
83
firms. This dimension includes two themes: experiencing sustainability and spreading
sustainability.
The paper contributes to deepening knowledge of how family members interpret
sustainability and translate it into their business and aims to get to the root of
sustainability by providing a theoretical explanation of how firm-level outcomes
(sustainability practices, in our case) emerge from the values, beliefs and behaviours of
individuals.
Keywords First-generation family firms, Copreneurial ventures, Sustainability, Wine
sector, Sweden.
Paper type Academic Research Paper [work in progress]
1 Introduction
Family firms build the backbone of every society; they are highly heterogeneous
(Westhead & Howorth, 2007) and the predominant form of enterprise in the world
(Sharma et al., 2012). Family firms are strongly influenced by the family’s binding social
ties, emotional attachment and assuring longevity (Gómez-Mejía et al., 2007;
Gómez-Mejía et al., 2010; Gómez-Mejía et al., 2011). Therefore, sustainability in the
sense of firm survival is included as a natural concept in family firms (Abdelzaher et al.,
2018).
Looking at recent research within family business, sustainability is an upcoming
subject: see Adomako et al. (2019); Broccardo et al. (2019); Dayan et al. (2019); Mullens,
(2018) among others.
There are several definitions of sustainability in family firms that refer to different
meanings e.g. serving stakeholders over time (Gunry et al., 2014), the business’s effects
(Huseh, 2018) and long-term effects for future generations (Jayakumar, 2017). As the
dominating form of business, family firms have a huge responsibility to accelerate their
sustainability work into practices that embrace sustainable thinking throughout the whole
working process (López-Perez et al., 2018) and ensure it to be both profitable and
environmentally friendly (Jayakumar, 2016).
Sustainability in family business studies has been discussed from mainly two different
perspectives: 1) the survival and longevity of the family firm (Canovi & Lyon, 2020) and
2) social and environmental sustainability, such as sustainable processes, products and
practices (Miroshnychenko & De Massis, 2022) This study focuses on the latter
perspective.
84
Sustainability business practices can be defined as a business that both improves
profitability and embraces a business strategy that keeps the environment healthy and
sustainable (Larson et al., 2000). It can be divided into internal sustainability practice
(pollution prevention and green supply chain management) and external sustainability
practices (green product development) (Miroshnychenko & De Massis, 2022).
Le-Breton Miller & Miller (2016) reason that family firms’ relationship to
sustainability on one hand must consider family values and long-term orientation and, on
the other, family conflicts, private socio-emotional wealth and performance (Le-Breton
Miller & Miller, 2016; Adomako et al., 2019). However, family firms’ longevity is not a
prerequisite for sustainability practices (Memili et al., 2018); instead, differences have
been identified among early and later generations in how environmentally and socially
responsible family firms act (Adomako et al., 2019).
According to Broccardo et al. (2019), small and medium sized, young family firms
have a more positive impact on sustainable and green practices (Dayan et al., 2019). The
fact that later-generation family firms are keener on sustainability investments (Mullens,
2018) points in a direction that sustainability becomes more of a mindset.
Despite that, we know very little about first-generation family firms and their
understanding of, and attitude towards, sustainability practices (Sharma & Sharma, 2021)
and how they are integrated and distributed in the family business from the start
(Miroshnychenko & De Massis, 2022).
The wine sector is an industry in which family firms and sustainable practices are
deeply intertwined and widely analysed. Extant literature shows that old, mature wine
districts such as France, Italy, South Africa, Australia, New Zealand, US and Chile
(Corbo et al., 2014; Flores, 2018) have been broadly explored. However, a knowledge gap
exists on first-generation family firms’ work in sustainability practices in the cool climate
wine sector like Sweden. Sweden is a country in Scandinavia, famous for being one of the
most sustainable countries in the world (Mänsson, 2016). Due to climate change, Sweden
has surprisingly become a wine country with a commercialised wine production and
growth. It is an award-winning country for its wine and has started building a wine region
in Sweden’s southernmost part Scania. The region holds approximately 55 registered
vineyards out of which 35 are commercial and the major part are family firms
(Livsmedelsföretagen, 2020; Föreningen svenskt vin, 2020).
In this regard, Broccardo et al., (2019) states that family business research needs to
accelerate empirical qualitative studies on drivers and obstructions to sustainability
85
practices and create an understanding of family firms´ sustainable behaviour (Dayan et
al., 2019) and the entire distribution of sustainability practices (Miroshnychenko & De
Massis, 2022). Still, there is very little knowledge about sustainability practices in young
family firms in emerging markets (Adomako et al., 2019), those active in related
industries (Le-Breton Miller & Miller, 2016) or how sustainability practices are
implemented (Lopez-Perez et al., 2018; Memili et al., 2018).
Therefore, this study aims to identify and understand features of sustainability
practices in first-generation family firms in the Scanian wine sector. Specifically, the
study embraces a microfoundational lens (De Massis & Foss, 2018), providing a
theoretical explanation of how firm-level outcomes (sustainability practices, in our case)
emerge from the values, beliefs and behaviours of individuals (family members, in our
case) (Felin et al., 2015). Namely, the research focuses on the individual level, i.e., the
family members at the head of the business, and aims to understand how their values,
motivations and expectations give rise to and shape the sustainability practices adopted by
the family business. In this sense, the study aims to get to the root of sustainability
practices by understanding how family members interpret this concept and translate it into
their business. On this basis, the paper will answer the following research questions:
(RQ1) How do first-generation family firm members in a nascent wine country make
sense of sustainability practices? and (RQ2) How do they integrate sustainability into
their family firms?
2 Theoretical background
2.1 Family firms
Family firms can be defined by their unified system of economic resources and
capabilities that affect performance (Basco, 2013; Frank et al., 2010) and bring wealth for
coming generations (Habbershon et al., 2003; Reay, et al., 2015). What family firms have
in common is the capacity to capitalise on preservation and knowledge creation within the
firm and with external stakeholders (Carney, 2005). This in turn influences cash holding,
gives room for flexibility (Caprio et al., 2020) and makes family firms less sensitive to
financial shocks (Škare & Porada-Rochoń, 2021).
Whilst family firms have been synonymously categorised into one domain of
businesses, there are studies that focus on the differences among family and non-family
firms; albeit those differences, there are even greater differences among family firms
86
(Chua et al., 2012). This creates a family firm heterogeneity that can be defined as “[…]
the range of categorical and/or variational difference(s) between or among family firms at
a given time or across time” (Daspit et al., 2021, p. 298). Albeit family business literature
explains heterogeneity through succession, firm size and growth, and family-based
capital, the level of analyse has been focused on the firm. Studies using the controlling
family as the level of analyse is still very scarce (Daspit et al., 2021).
The composition of the controlling family could be an interesting element of
heterogeneity (Zellweger, 2017). Among the various possible combinations, the so-called
copreneurial venture can be considered a subset of family businesses, one of many
expressions of the heterogeneity of family business as a phenomenon. A copreneurial
venture is a family firm owned and managed by ‘a male and female couple, integrated as
a working team’ (Kuschel and Lepeley, 2016). Living and starting a business together as a
couple is a specific situation that has also been labelled co-preneurship (Fletcher, 2010).
Coupreneurs are often the foundation and starting point of many family businesses
(Nieman, 2006). Studies on copreneurs highlights work/family relationships (Wu et al.,
2010), how copreneurship operates (Fletcher, 2010) and the link between
entrepreneurship and family business (Hedberg and Danes, 2012). Sentuti et al. (2019)
found that copreneurial ventures is an overlooked theme that needs further investigation,
because it offers an important and novel perspective on family business studies.
2.2 Sustainability practices in family firms
Sustainability practices in family firms has been defined as “those that work towards
the long-term benefit of all of an organisation’s stakeholders the broader community
included” (Le-Breton Miller & Miller, 2016, p. 26) and have been discussed from several
perspectives, such as long-term orientation (Kallmuenzer et al., 2018), long term
investment (Memili et al., 2018) and the size of the firm (Broccardo et al., 2019).
Studies about family firms and sustainability was widely neglected until 2020 (Curado
& Mota, 2021; Clauß et al., 2022). Most of the studies have focused on countries like
Italy and Spain and mainly used quantitative methods. Scholars have acknowledged that
social inclusion, economic development and environmental protection play relevant roles
in sustainable business development and adopting sustainable practices (Curado & Mota,
2021).
What is shown is that firm age does not seem to have any significance regarding
family firms environmentally sustainable orientation (Adomako et al., 2019); however,
87
what does seem to affect sustainability practice is the generation of the family firm.
Sharma et al. (2021) have pointed out some advantages that differentiate first-generation
family firms from other generations when it comes to sustainability practices. For
instance, the possibility of integrating sustainability principles daily instead of changing
an established culture, and at the same time looking after the family´s sustainability core
values. First-generation family firms can further enhance sustainability practices by
designing the business in a way that can ensure sustainability as a driver for expansion
and growth (Sharma & Sharma, 2021) as well as be a ground for the core of the business
(Seow & José Parada, 2021). The challenge however is the need to sacrifice short-term
returns and customer investment in favour of long-term orientation. Other forms of
long-term orientation are to keep employees over time by fair treatment and sharing a
sustainable mindset (Sharma et al., 2021).
One sector that is deeply involved in sustainability is the wine industry, in which
extant literature has mainly focused on three different areas of interest. First,
environmental impact such as water footprint (Aivazidou & Tsolakis, 2020),
environmental effects (Bartocci et al., 2017; Ferrari, et al. 2018) and carbon footprint
(Carrasco et al., 2021; D’Ammaro, et al., 2021). Second, the agricultural phase such as
life cycle assessment (Arcese et al., 2017) and viticulture (Chiriaco, et al. 2019). Finally,
the winemaking phase such as waste (Ahmad et al., 2020) or packaging (Ferrara et al.,
2020).
In this regard, studies on New Zealand’s wine producing family firms show that
family influence, such as family ownership, recourses, identity and values, are affecting
their work on environmental sustainability. Positive drivers for biodynamic practices are
health for family, coworkers, and external contacts (Kariyapperuma & Collins, 2021).
In the Italian wine sector, researchers highlight that compared to private non-family
firms, family firms are more prone to investing in sustainability projects such as
production, organic farming, employee’s benefits and product quality. They further
articulate that taken sustainability actions indicate better economic results (Broccardo &
Zicari, 2020).
In this vein, a study between Spanish family and non-family wine making firms has
revealed that family firms return on assets and operating margin are higher and the debt
and debt ratio is lower. The authors suggest that it depends on advantages in the product’s
price and lower agency costs. This in turn results from lower risk exposure and increased
long-term financing in family firms. What is highlighted further is that the profitability is
88
generated from family firm’s greater efficiency, e.g., key competencies, family culture
and strategic flexibility (Soler et al., 2017).
As studies have shown, heterogeneity in sustainability is primarily affected by
founding owners and their families’ values; specifically when two or more generation
family members are working together (Kariyapperuma & Collins, 2021). However,
research does not show how heterogeneity occurs among first-generation family firms.
Specifically, scholars have acknowledged that specific types of family firms such as
copreneurial ventures, working in related industries (as the wine sector), need to be more
investigated (Breton-Miller & Miller, 2016; Sentuti et al., 2019), in addition to the
relationship between family firms and sustainable wine production (Soler et al., 2017).
Researchers have taken into consideration that primary data needs to be used to
understand how family logics and commercial logics coexist and its influences on
environmental sustainability (Kariyapperuma & Collins, 2021). What calls for further
investigation is how sustainability options guide family business strategies and how
family business decisions influence sustainability work (Curado & Mota, 2021).
In their call for papers, Clauß et al., (2022) have indicated that how sustainability is or
can be integrated into family business, what drivers motive sustainability initiatives and to
what extend family firms contribute to sustainable innovation are still neglected in
research. Conducted research has also highlighted the ethical and economical mindset to
improve viticulture (Mancuso, et al. 2022) to empirically investigate internal drivers and
the learning potential in relation to sustainability (Flores, 2018) and proactive strategies
with sustainability in the centre of firm logic (Broccardo & Zicari, 2020).
The above-mentioned call for research in its whole or in its parts stimulated this study,
which aims to fill some of the gaps identified in the literature.
3 Method
3.1 Context
Scania, in the southern part of Sweden, is has a typical landscape for agriculture with
mild winters and medium hot summers. As global climate change has affected Sweden, it
has become a great opportunity for viticulture.
For most winegrowers, interest in wine started as a hobby but emerged over time,
resulting in a business startup after retirement or during a career change. The
89
winegrowers in this study are engaged or married couples working together in family
firms.
3.2 Data Collection
To address the research questions, the study has focused on three Scanian coupreneurs
in first-generation wine making family firms Kallerud’s vineyard, Frosarp’s vineyard
and Alnarp’s vineyard. The study draws on firsthand data (Holstein & Gubrium, 2000)
collected from the couples’ narratives about their experience (Riessman & Quinney,
2005). As narratives reveal how people perceive themselves in a context (Josselson &
Hopkins, 2015), they help us to understand the meaning of (Dalpiaz et al., 2014; Gabriel,
2015; Kostera, 2006), and how, sustainable practices are implemented into the family
firm. The empirical research is still ongoing to collect further data and expand the number
of case studies.
3.3 Data Analysis
The data has been analysed according to Gioia et al’s (2012) three-step structure.
First, a close reading of the narratives to unravel 1st order concepts and understand the
coupreneurs’ context in which they integrate sustainability into their everyday business.
Second, as the study sought a deeper understanding of how the coupreneurs are
constructing the meaning (Bruner, 1990) of sustainability, an analysis of 2nd order themes
(Gioia, et al., 2012) helped to identify their invisible processes and underlying aims
(Gabriel, 2015). The third step analysed and pulled forth the aggregated dimensions of the
themes into an aggregate dimension as foundation for theory building. Because of space
restrictions, the complete data structure generated and analysed in the study is not
included in the paper but is available on request from the authors.
4 Findings
4.1 Case A Kallerud´s vineyard
Kallerud´s vineyard started in 2001 and became a family firm in 2005 and was a sole
trader until April 2022 when it was changed to a limited company. The vineyard is owned
by the couple Leya and Martin (55 and 56 years old), who have one external employee
90
working full time. During high seasons extra staff is hired and Martin’s father (now over
80) helps the couple with the extra he can manage.
The start of Kallerud is grounded in the couple’s genuine interest in wine. They liked
to drink and learn about wine. They were active in a nonprofit association about wine and
gradually wanted to grow their own wine. The initial idea was to buy a vineyard abroad,
but in 1999 they read in a paper that it was possible to grow wine in Denmark. “If they
can grow wine in Denmark, then we can also.”
They went to Denmark and talked to the Danish farmer Mikael Bondesson. In 1999
they put their first 500 plants on Leyas’s sister´s land. Then in 2001 they started to grow
plants on Martin´s parent’s farm, where they now live and work: “We are here to stay”.
Sustainability at Kallerud means keeping the crop organic and as non-toxic as
possible. It is not necessary that the whole business chain is organic; however, the aim is
to be as organic as possible and use locally produced items and goods. “… it is important
to buy, for example, cardboard boxes locally, and not just order something that is cheaper
from China.”
The word sustainability is connected to well-being, which means that all involved in
their business chain shall feel and be well. Well-being includes everything from the land
and soil to the bottle producer. “The thoughts of sustainability in our world would have
been broken if we would have ordered cheap cardboard boxes from China just because of
the price.” The couple is thinking about sustainability in every step of the business chain;
however, sustainability is also deeply connected to good quality. “Sustainability is quality
for us, not any throw-away; it should be something that is worthy and add something.”
In practice, Kallerud has established sustainability as they use no toxics and do all the
work and harvest by hand, compared to international vineyards that use machines. “[…]
we sort out the bad grapes manually so that there are only fine ones left. The wine will be
bad if you mix bad and good grapes.”
The biggest obstacle for sustainability practices at Kallerud is logistics and
transporting. Unlike foreign vineyards, Swedish vineyards, due to the Swedish State
monopoly, are not allowed to have cellar door sales. The sale is regulated and allows them
to sell only to Systembolaget (the monopoly shop) and restaurants. The couple transports
wine themselves to restaurants nearby; however, for longer transportation they need to
hire a transporter.
“If we could have our sales here then we could avoid heavy transports that are
both expensive, complicated and pollute nature.”
91
The firm has existed for 20 years, and their philosophy from the start has always been
to work along and with nature. Therefore, one example is to give back to the soil what has
been taken. “[..] when we pressed the grapes, we throw the peel back into the vineyard
again; what we take we give back.”
The learnings of 20 years of wine producing is that weather is a factor you cannot
change; you must do your best with what you have. The mix of plants is a lesson they also
had to learn, e.g., grapes are not suitable for the Swedish climate, or plants sensitive to
diseases, that accordingly need to be treated with toxics (which is something they don’t
want to do) or plants late in their growth, which is not appropriate together with plants
that grow faster.
Having a family business works fine for the couple, even if, at times, it is difficult to
draw a line between their work and private life. “During high season you have to
prioritise work that’s it ”. The only time of the year the couple take off work is during
winter.“[…] we just jump into our car with dogs and everything and drive away.”
The family firm affects family life in different ways; however, it doesn’t bother them.
“We have nothing to compare our life to; however, you get stronger as partners[...]”.
Even if the family firm demands hard work that limits the possibilities to take vacation, it
is in some strange way a sort of security, which other people don’t get. “If you compare
yourself to other people that have 5 weeks of paid vacation and can go anywhere, they
don’t understand that this is freedom to us.” Freedom is being outdoors, in nature, and
planning the administrative work as we please. “If we wake up at 5 in the morning, I can
do the administrative work and then be outdoors. It is another kind of freedom to plan
our time as we please.”
What is most important for the couple is to be healthy and feel well, instead of having
a stressful job and be tightly scheduled. The family has never been interested in chasing
money or buying stuff such as the latest car or a fancy TV in every room they are
happy with one TV and one computer. “We have food on the table; that’s more important
than stuff […] it is an honour and privilege to live this life[..]. We live our dream.”
Leya proudly showed us the vineyard and the surrounding land. She talked about the
bees and how they (Leya and Martin) have put a flower meadow beside the vineyard so
that the bees have something to collect and that they also built bee-houses. This was not
something special for the grapevine; it’s a way of “living along with nature”.
92
4.2 Case B Frosarp’s vineyard
Andrew and Bella became interested in wine when they lived in England. They lived
next door to a wine dealer who bought wine directly from producers. He told stories about
how the wine was made and knew everything about those vineyards. The couple were
interested and fascinated about the big difference between various vineyards. Their wine
interest started in London. But then they moved home to Sweden, to a ranch, and started a
new business. Their profession was personal efficiency in big companies.
As their ranch (Bella and Andrew’s) was big enough for viticulture, they thought it
would be fun to try to grow wine themselves. The only problem was that their village was
situated in a hinterland climate zone which sometimes causes frost in May after a warm
period. So, after 3 years they realised that this is not working. As their interest in wine
growing increased, they started to look for properties suitable for growing grapes.
In 2010, at 60 years old, they moved to a new farm. They ran their business until 2011
and sold it to one of their employees. And after that they decided to dedicate their time to
wine. However, in the meantime, they took summer classes in Nordic viticulture, went on
trips to Germany to learn more about vinification and got engaged at the Swedish wine
association. Since then, they have tried to learn as much as possible; personal
development is their driving force. At the age of 61 they retired. Nowadays they have a
commercial vineyard, where they sell their wine and have wine tastings. However, they
do not earn their living on it.
They have been working together for a very long time. As they have different
competences and backgrounds, they have different skills, which make them a unique
combination. “Even if we sometimes have our conflicts, it works very well we always
have something to talk about.” Compared to couples that have different jobs and
occupations, they may have fewer problems.
Knowledge is the main thing for the couple. Due to the overload of knowledge you
need to grasp viticulture, Andrew has focused on the winery, and Bella has concentrated
on the vineyard. They usually discuss how to proceed but as Andrew is more into
chemistry and Bella is interested in doing other things, it ended up that way. “We always
enjoy each others company and have a pleasant time together. There is always something
to do. We also have a mutual interest in marketing.”
The first and most important value that guides their firm is honesty with their
customers. The couple tries to be available, and as they have a small-scale business, they
are keen on highlighting just that.
93
“The family aspect of our firm is important in relation to our customer, and as we try
to bring on a personal approach, it also generates friends.”
Since they have a lot of experience running businesses and handling the bookkeeping,
it was easy for them starting up and name a new one. Bella has been working as a former
bank manager; however, Andrew has become the one who does all the bank business and
Bella has become more of a controller. The upside of running a business as a family is
that they always develop and grow personally and become nerdy about it, so nerdy that all
their holiday trips are at vineyards. However, the downside is that it can be seen as
insular.
“The fascinating part about wine is that a lot of people are interested, feel the same
way and want to know everything. However, since we are so into wine, it can just as well
be our interest that guides the conversation when meeting new people.” The goal of
running a family business is the journey in itself; the couple are going to continue as long
as they can manage.
The couple grows special plants to assure regrowth; it is all about not poisoning the
soil. “Sustainability is about the wellness of the ground and soil.” However, the bottles
are an issue, too. They have now changed to glass corks. They are thinking that the next
step could be PET bottles. They are minimising the use of recourses and the imprint on
the environment; for example, in the last 3 years, they have used an electric car for the
delivery of their wine to Systembolaget (monopoly liquor shop) and the surrounding
restaurants. They are also using solar cells to charge the winery, car and their house.
Everything from the vineyard that they cut down goes into the compost and then they
mulch it back into the soil. They have also switched from chemical fertiliser to manure,
which they can get from their neighbours cows. “Depending on the cow’s diet, some
work and others don’t.”
On the vineyard they have a pond where they let meadow-flowers grow. As the wine
is self-pollinating, the aim is to contribute to the pollination of other plants and flowers
and, as a result, support insects and animals. “We love nature and our garden.” Bella’s
main interest is nature, animals and birds.
In Sweden grapes cannot be sprayed due to strict regulations; so, they have
concentrated on decease resistant grapes. “Our vineyard is completely clean and more
than organic because we do not spray the grapes with copper as they do in Europe.”
Their wine is not certified due to the extra costs. The viticulture could be organic,
biodynamic or “krav” certified. “We could get certified to be an organic vineyard;
94
however, if our neighbour sprayed their crop and some got on our grapes, the
certification would be withdrawn for three years. Many vineyards’ grapes were ruined
because of that.” Therefore, they made a list of hormones that can damage grapes and
gave it to the surrounding farmers. Even though the neighbours are following all the rules
and keeping a distance, some spray evaporates and spreads throughout the air, which
means it can come down on crops from a distance. The only thing the couple can do is to
plead to the farmers. “However, as farmers risk penalty for damaged crops, the problem
is increasing in Sweden due to the entrance of many small vineyards. As a result, the
vineyards can pave the way for a poison free viticulture.”
“For years, you had no clue what the farmers were up to; however, now there are
vineyards popping up, and by spreading their lists, knowledge is reaching farmers
everywhere, and it has increased their interest in sustainable agriculture.”
One problem for the couple is finding staff that can learn the handicraft of wine
growing. At this moment, they are trying to get schools and institutions to help educate
more people about viticulture. The branch of industry is growing, and they need more
staff, both for the vineyard and the winery. They have discussed having a continuation
course about viticulture with educational actors.
The couple is positive about the distribution of wine to Systembolaget in combination
with cellar door sales, which at the moment are not allowed in Sweden. For example, if
they have visitors on a Sunday from the northern part of Sweden and they would like to
bring their favourite wine home, and the wine has sold out on Systembolaget, it would be
idiotic not to have the opportunity to buy it from us. Now a proposition has been brought
to the Swedish parliament to allow customers to buy 3-litres of wine when visiting a
vineyard.
Their children are not interested in taking over the vineyard. One of their
grandchildren tried working there; however, he decided to be a lawyer. “Previously it was
common that you started a vineyard when you retired; nowadays things have changed,
and young people are starting with the aim of their children taking over. What they can
see further is that investors are putting a lot of capital into the business and going big
from start. To solve the issue with employees, they are hiring staff from China, America,
France, Argentina and Australia. “One problem with foreign workers is the challenge of
getting them to stay longer than 2 years. To solve this problem, the vineyards have
advertised for couples to come and work on Swedish vineyards.” The strategy went very
well and they got more than 60 responses. One example is a Frenchman and his Swedish
95
wife who moved here, so, as a result, they may stay permanently. To sum up, there are
two different kinds of vineyards in Sweden—the small ones and the big with a lot of
invested capital. The latter are owners but not working on the vineyards themselves.
“There’s a nice atmosphere among vineyard owners; we are more colleagues than
competitors, and we call each other and talk about different issues and things.”
4.3 Case C Alnarp’s vineyard
The couple, Anna (18 years) and Josef (23), met very young. Josef was running his
own firm and Anna started working there during her studies. Anna did the bookkeeping
and Josef worked in the store. The couple has always worked together. They work in
different areas and talk a lot about the firm and what to do.
Anna went to university to become a teacher in biology and science, and Josef is a
self-made builder and entrepreneur. “I talked to my husband and said I think I want to
work with wine in some way.” During her education to become a teacher Anna and her
schoolmates visited a place called Alnarp in Scania. The place was so beautiful that when
the couple were looking for a farm to buy, they focused on, and found one, in Alnarp. The
farm was in bad shape and needed continuously renovation. “Josef needs to be busy and
work on new projects for the house otherwise he will be sad.”
Every penny the couple made was re-invested into the house, a job that continued for
10 years. The investment of the house paid off so when the couple were about to start
their vineyard, they could hypothecate the house to get funding for plants and equipment
needed for wine production. At that time the couple were 28 and 33 years old. “We had
our full time jobs and everything we earned we reinvested into the house.”
The wine growing started on a small scale from one hectare and has expanded to 30
hectare throughout the years and is increasing each year. The income from the vineyard is
re-invested into the farm. They never had any investors; they wanted to build it on their
own. They can now make a living and they quit their part-time jobs 4 years ago.
During wintertime they have one winemaker, one viticulturist and 4 people cutting the
grapevine; they pay salary to about 10 employees in February. On the other hand, in July,
they pay about 60 employees who work in the vineyard, restaurant, hotel and glamping.
During off season the guests stay at the vineyard; however, in the summer, there are a lot
of tourists that own summer houses, so they visit to drink, eat food and have guided tours.
“The wine is attracting people to come; however, it is the other businesses that makes it
profitable.” Now, at first, they made a living on the wine production, but without the
96
profit from the restaurant and hotel they could not expand. The couple takes a minimum
salary and the rest is re-invested into the business. There are always holes to fill with
money in a business.”
Big vineyards often have investors that also have a say in each decision and a
comment on return on investment. The couple wants to keep the business in the family.
“We don’t want to give anything away, we want to build.”
It took 5 years to get the first harvest of grapes. In the beginning, the couple had no
plans to run a restaurant and hotel. However, they are happy they changed their minds to
avoid bankruptcy. The first few years the vineyard produced very little wine, almost
nothing. Now the vineyard produces approximately 50,000-70,000 litres a year.
The wine is sold to Systembolaget (the authorised liquor shops), other restaurants and
for consumption on the vineyard. As soon as the regulation of cellar door sales is
released, the couple will start selling. The current government is working on a decision.
“It would make a huge difference for the vineyard, with opening hours during the
whole year, and the guests could buy some wine to take home.”
The couple has 4 children. The eldest daughter is 21, and she manages the restaurant
during summers. She is in charge of scheduling and she is really competent. The next
child is their 19-year-old boy. He has started studying architecture at university, so he will
end up doing all the design and calculations on up-and-coming building projects like his
dad. He enjoys working in the restaurant during summer break; however, he is not a very
social person, so he is a wedding-planner and is really competent. The youngest daughter
is 17 and works in the restaurant during weekends; she and her boyfriend are servers. The
youngest boy is 9, and he enjoys helping out by carrying things.
During off season the family takes vacations 3 to 4 times a year. Everybody in the
family that wants to come, and their boyfriends are even welcome to join. “There is much
work if you stay at home, but when you travel it is another thing it’s so cosy.”
The vineyard ought to be as sustainable as possible. The couple cultivates to keep the
soil as healthy as possible when the time comes for the kids to take over and avoid sprays.
“Sustainability is the biggest thing for us”, and for the couple it means integrating it in
every step and every development of their firm.
“Sustainability means not destroying anything on the land while harvesting grapes
and keeping the quality of the soil as high or higher as when we started.” At the moment
the couple is working on creating zero carbon dioxide. A lot of carbon is produced during
the fermentation process, and if they can capture and compress the carbon, they would be
97
negative in carbon emission. It would then be possible to sell it to others that use carbon;
however, their hope is that the sustainability evolution will make it possible to press it
back down to the ground instead of letting it out into the atmosphere. They also brought
up the discussion with Atlas Copco.
The couple is way ahead the movement on sustainability (which is one of those things
that Josef is spending his nights thinking about), and when the movement has caught up
the couple can easily join.
Between the grapevine they grow plants rich in nitric, and their roots nourish the
grapevine. They have also tried mini sheep, a type called Baby Doll. They are so small
that they can walk under the grapevine and graze. As a result, the couple saves some
diesel from the cutting machines; however, sheep also spread methane gas so the carbon
footprint will not be that much lesser. “Our vineyard can be seen as one of the most
sustainable vineyards in the world.” The couple doesn’t use any sort of spray and doesn’t
need to as they grow grapes that are immune to diseases. They also have zero carbon
imprint, don’t use chemical fertiliser, use light bottles, refuse to export their wine and use
big plastic bottles (30 litres) for wine delivery to restaurants and bars. They don’t have
any certifications as some of them are less sustainable than the vineyard already is. “We
are more than organic.”
The only issue the couple experience is how they are going to sell their wine. The
customers are visiting the vineyard and the couple would have been able to sell off the
whole production to them, however cellar door sales are not allowed in Sweden. If
changes in regulations are not coming any time soon the couple finds themselves forced
to export their wine. “It´s idiotic to export our wine to New Zealand, Japan or China and
at the same time thinking about sustainability.”
5 Discussion
This preliminary analysis of the narratives has allowed us to offer an initial answer to
the research questions that motivate our study: (RQ1) How do first-generation family firm
members in a nascent wine country make sense of sustainability practices and (RQ2) How
do they integrate sustainability practices into their family firms?
Although the three vineyards are first-generation family firms in the same industry
(Le-Breton Miller & Miller, 2016), during the same time, in the same district,
heterogeneity (Daspit et al., 2021) between copreneurs became visible (Chua et al., 2012).
98
We identified two aggregate dimensions to describe these differences and similarities:
foundations of sustainability and sustainability development.
The “foundations of sustainability” dimension refers to RQ1 and concerns how
first-generation family firm members make sense of sustainability practices. This
dimension includes three themes: values, well-being and living in nature, more than
organic. They represent the main aspects that emerged from the narratives to explain the
meaning, in terms of sense and signification of implementing sustainability practices, to
the interviewees.
Being sustainable means, first of all, giving substance to specific values (Schwartz et
al., 2012) that are particularly clear in the narratives: the willingness to preserve the
natural environment, the freedom to cultivate one’s own ideas and abilities and the
freedom to determine one’s own actions. These shared values represent an element that in
each family firm ties the couple together in doing business. This is consistent with prior
research that pointed out that a family shares common values as key factor in tying the
family together and acting like cultural drivers (Gómez-Mejía et al., 2011).
Furthermore, sustainability means well-being and living in close contact with nature,
in tune with it. We decided to put these two aspects together because they are closely
linked, as for the interviewees their well-being is strongly related to “living along with
nature”. Although working in a vineyard is demanding with a heavy workload during
high seasons, the opportunity to be outdoors in nature is worth the while. The couples
often mention well-being and wellness, which includes everything that has to do with the
environment (land, soil, plants and animals) and all people involved in their business
chain. Consistent with the values underlying sustainability, the latter is not limited to
respect for the environment but becomes a lifestyle. Sustainability means personal
freedom, respect for oneself, one’s own rhythms, one’s own times and also doing without
having interest in luxury living in order to invest in the realisation of one’s dreams. These
concepts go beyond the classical work-life balance because it is not only about reaching
an equilibrium between life and work but also finding harmony with values and deep
well-being in what one does. It is a kind of “personal sustainability”.
Finally, sustainability means going beyond the concept of organic in wine making and
the strict Swedish regulations on toxic for viticulture. “More than organic” are the words
interviewees often used to describe what adopting sustainable practices in wine
production means to them and their business. All three vineyards work eagerly with a
state of mind of a non-toxic environment. For them, being sustainable means adopting a
99
series of measures, behaviours and practices that affect the entire supply chain in order to
create a product that is not “only organic” but also deeply respectful of the environment.
The sustainability development dimension refers to RQ2 and concerns how
first-generation family firm members integrate sustainability practices into their family
firms. This dimension includes two themes: experiencing sustainability and spreading
sustainability.
Experiencing sustainability refers to all practices specifically adopted by couples in all
business processes. It implies paying attention to the entire supply chain and integrating
sustainability practices from the start (Mirshnychenko & De Massis, 2022) by controlling
environmental impact (Aivazidou & Tsolakis, 2020) in the wine-making phase (Ahmad et
al., 2020) and packaging (Ferrara et al., 2020). They are all keeping their vineyards
completely clean by not using toxic spray, using plants rich in nitric between the
grapevine to assure regrowth, not using chemical fertiliser and refusing organic
certification as it allows, within certain limits, spraying which none of them use today.
Moreover, in one case, they also use light, big plastic bottles to transport wine to
restaurants and try in any way to cut down the carbon footprint (D´Ammaro et al., 2021).
Finally, concerning selling wine, some copreneurs feel that they have to choose between
export and sustainability. This is especially interesting for vineyards that produce bigger
amounts of wine than they can sell to restaurants and visitors on the vineyard. Due to the
strict Swedish regulation and alcohol monopoly, cellar door sales are not allowed. Despite
this, some copreneurs prefer avoiding wine exports because not only is it very complex
and expensive, but above all they believe that transporting wine around the world is not
sustainable from an environmental pollution point of view.
Spreading sustainability concerns all practices adopted by the respondents to promote
sustainability practices outside their family business and cooperate with others to develop
new sustainability practices. This can be considered in line with Clauß et al.’s (2022)
question regarding the extent to which family firms contribute to sustainable innovation.
To this regard, Frosarp spreads information about hormones, which has created an interest
among farmers, and, as a result, they have started paving the way for poison free
viticulture and agriculture. Along that line, Alnarp has contacted industries and discussed
ideas on inventions for capsuling and compressing carbon, which can be seen as
interactive innovation (Muñoz-Rojas, et al. 2022).
100
6. Conclusions, implications and limitations
Despite heterogeneity in running their family businesses, these couples have
something in common: doing something beautiful for themselves, nature and for coming
generations. Their love for nature pushes them in directions for a sustainable viticulture
that also have a spillover effect on agriculture. Their work and interest are bringing
something new to the Swedish landscape and also awareness of how to treat mother earth.
Not only are they forerunners for health, honesty and sustainability but they also bring
something fine to the table wine.
Theoretically, this paper contributes to the wine sector research about the meaning of
sustainability (Flores, 2018; Maesano et al., 2022), the drivers for sustainability work
(Flores, 2018) and startup wineries in the cool climate wine sector. Furthermore, it adds to
family business research about sustainability practices in first-generation family firms
(Sharma, Sharma & Steiner, 2021) and copreneurial ventures (Sentuti et al., 2019) and to
understanding heterogeneity among families and family specific differences in family
firms (Chua et al., 2012; Daspit et al., 2021).
In practice, this paper contributes to how viticulture in Sweden can accelerate
sustainability practices in other branches in agri-business.
As the study moves forward to gather more narratives and deepen the analysis, this
paper should be considered a first step in the research. Limitations are related to the small
number of cases analysed and the need to reach theoretical saturation (Eisenhardt, 1989)
and deepen the analysis before results can be considered as definitive.
References
Abdelzaher, D., Abdelzaher, A., & Harrison-Walker, L. (2018) Understanding the relationship
between family member Employees´ Resilience Capacity and family firm sustainability: A
look at organizational factors. Small Business Institute Journal, 14(2): 16-40.
Adomako, S., Amankwah-Amoah, J., Danso, A., Konadu, R, & Owusu-Ayei, S. (2019)
Environmental sustainability orientation and performance of family and nonfamily firms.
Business Strategy and the Environment, 1-10.
Ahmad, B., Yadav, V., Yadav, A., Rahman, M. U., Yuan, W. Z., Li, Z., & Wang, X. (2020).
Integrated biorefinery approach to valorize winery waste: A review from waste to energy
perspectives. Science of The Total Environment.
Aivazidou, E., & Tsolakis, N. (2020). A water footprint review of Italian wine: Drivers, barriers,
and practices for sustainable stewardship. Water, 12(2).
Arcese, G., Lucchetti, M. C., & Massa, I. (2017). Modeling social life cycle assessment framework
for the Italian wine sector. Journal of Cleaner Production, 140: 1027-1036.
101
Bartocci, P., Fantozzi, P., & Fantozzi, F. (2017). Environmental impact of Sagrantino and Grechetto
grapes cultivation for wine and vinegar production in central Italy. Journal of Cleaner
Production, 140: 569-580.
Basco, R. (2013) The family´s effect on family firm performance: A model testing the demographic
and essence approaches. Journal of Family Business Strategy, 4: 42-66.
Broccardo, L., Truant, E., & Zicari, A. (2019). Internal corporate sustainability drivers: What
evidence from family firms? A literature review and research agenda. Corporate Social
Responsibility and Environmental Management, 26(1): 1-18.
Broccardo, l., & Zicari, A. (2020) Sustainability as a driver for value creation: A business model
analysis of small and medium enterprises in the Italian wine sector. Journal of Cleaner
Production, 259, p. 120852.
Canovi, M., & Lyon, A. (2020). Family-centred motivations for agritourism diversification: The
case of the Langhe region, Italy. Tourism Planning & Development, 17(6): 591-610.
Caprio, L., Del Giudice, A., & Signori, A. (2020). Cash holdings in family firms: CEO identity and
implications for firm value. European Financial Management: The Journal of the European
Financial Management Association, 26(2): 386–415.
Carney, M. (2005). Corporate Governance and Competitive Advantage in Family–Controlled
Firms. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 29(3): 249–265.
Carrasco, I., Castillo-Valero, J. S., Córcoles, C., & Carchano, M. (2021). Greening Wine Exports?
Changes in the Carbon Footprint of Spanish Wine Exports. International Journal of
Environmental Research and Public Health, 18(17).
Chiriaco, M. V., Belli, C., Chiti, T., Trotta, C., & Sabbatini, S. (2019). The potential carbon
neutrality of sustainable viticulture showed through a comprehensive assessment of the
greenhouse gas (GHG) budget of wine production. Journal of Cleaner Production, 225:
435-450.
Chua, Jess H., Chrisman, James J.,Steier, Lloyd P. & Rau, Sabine B. (2012). Sources of
Heterogeneity in Family Firms: An Introduction. Entrepreneurship theory and practice. 36(6):
1103-1113.
Clauß, T., Kraus, S., Jones, P. (2022) Sustainability in family business: Mechanisms, technologies
and business models for achieving economic prosperity, environmental quality and social
equity. Technological forecasting & social change, 176: 121450.
Curado, C & Mota, A. (2021). A systematic Literature Review on Sustainability in Family firms.
Sustainability, 13(7): 3824.
Corbo C., Lamastra L., & Capri E. (2014). From environmental to sustainability programs: a review
of sustainability initiatives in the Italian wine sector. Sustainability, 6: 2133-2159.
D’Ammaro, D., Capri, E., Valentino, F., Grillo, S., Fiorini, E., & Lamastra, L. (2021).
Benchmarking of carbon footprint data from the Italian wine sector: A comprehensive and
extended analysis. Science of The Total Environment, 779: 146416.
Dalpiaz, E., Tracey, P. & Phillips, N. (2014) Succession Narratives in Family Business: The case of
Alessi. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 1375-1394.
Daspit, Joshua J. ; Chrisman, James J. ; Ashton, Triss ; Evangelopoulos, Nicholas. (2021). Family
Firm Heterogeneity: A Definition, common Themes, Scholarly progress, and directions
forward. Family business review, 34(3): 296-322.
Dayan, M., Yen, Ng, P., & Ndubisi, N. (2019) Mindfulness, socioemotional wealth, and
environmental strategy of family businesses. Business strategy and The Environment, 28(3):
466-479.
De Massis, A., & Foss, N. J. (2018). Advancing family business research: The promise of
microfoundations. Family Business Review, 31(4): 386-396.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989). Building theories from case study research. Academy of Management
Review, 14(4): 532–550.
102
Felin, T., Foss, N. J., & Ployhart, R. (2015). Microfoundations for management research. Academy
of Management Annals, 9: 575-632
Ferrara, C., Zigarelli, V., & De Feo, G. (2020). Attitudes of a sample of consumers towards more
sustainable wine packaging alternatives. Journal of Cleaner Production, 271, 122581.
Ferrari, A. M., Pini, M., Sassi, D., Zerazion, E., & Neri, P. (2018). Effects of grape quality on the
environmental profile of an Italian vineyard for Lambrusco red wine production. Journal of
cleaner production, 172: 3760-3769.
Fletcher, D. (2010), “Life-making or risk taking? Co-preneurship and family business start-ups”,
International Small Business Journal, 28(5): 452-469.
Flores, S. S. (2018). What is sustainability in the wine world? A cross-country analysis of wine
sustainability frameworks. Journal of cleaner production, 172, 2301-2312.
Frank, H., Lueger, M., Nosé, L & Suchy, D. (2010) The concept of “Familiness”: Literature review
and systems theory-based reflections. Journal of Family Business Strategy, 1(3), 119-130.
Föreningen Svenskt vin (2020), “Svenska viner. Sverige - ett “vinland” som andra?”, available at:
http:// svensktvin.se/svenska-viner/ (accessed 15 December 2020).
Gabriel, Y (2015) Narratives and Stories in Organizational Life. (pp.275- 292), in: De Fina &
Georgakopoulou, (Eds) The Handbook of Narrative Analysis. John Wiley & Sons
Incorporated.
Gioia, D., Corley, K., & Hamilton, A. (2012) Seeking Qualitative Rigor in Inductive Research:
Notes on the Gioia Methodology. Organizational Research Methods, 16(1): 15-31.
Gomez-Mejia, L.R., Cruz, C., Berrone, P., & De Castro, J. (2011) The Bind that Ties:
Socioemotional Wealth Preservation in Family Firms, The Academy of Management Annals,
5(1): 653-707.
Gómez-Mejía, L., Makri, M., & Larraza Kintana, M. (2010) Diversification Decisions in
Family-Controlled Firms. Journal of Management Studies, 47: 2.
Gómez-Mejía, L., Takács Haynes, K., Núñez-Nickel, M., Jacobson, K., & Moyano-Fuentes, J.
(2007) Socioemotional Wealth and Business Risks in Family-controlled Firms: Evidence from
Spanish Olive Oil Mills. Administrative Science Quarterly, 52: 106–137.
Gundry, L., Kickul, J., Iakovleva, T., & Carsrud, A. (2014) Women-owned family businesses in
transitional economies: key influences on firm innovativeness and sustainability. Journal of
Innovation and Entrepreneurship, 3(8): 1-17.
Habbershon, T., Williams, M., & MacMillan, I. (2003). A unified systems perspective of family
firm performance. Journal of Business Venturing, 18(4), 451–465.
Jayakumar, T. (2016) From philanthropy to strategic corporate sustainability: a case study in India.
Journal of Business Strategy, 37(6): 39-50.
Josselson, R., & Hopkins, B (2015) Applications of Narrative Theory and life story Research. In
Martin, J., Sugarman, J., & Slaney, K. L. (Eds.). The Wiley handbook of theoretical and
philosophical psychology: Methods, approaches, and new directions for social sciences. John
Wiley & Sons, Incorporated.
Kallmuenzer, A., Nikolakis, W., Peters, M., & Zanon, J. (2018). Trade-offs between dimensions of
sustainability: exploratory evidence from family firms in rural tourism regions. Journal of
Sustainable Tourism, 26(7): 1204-1221.
Kariyapperuma, N., & Collins, E. (2021) Family logics and environmental sustainability: A study
of the New Zealand wine industry. Business strategy and the environment, 30(8): 3626-3650.
Kostera, M. (2006). The narrative collage as research method. Storytelling, Self, Society. 2(2): 5-27.
Kuschel, K., & Lepeley (2016) Copreneurial women in start-ups growth-oriented or lifestyle? An
aid for technology industry investors. Academia Revista Latinoamericana de Administración,
29(2): 181-197.
Larson, A. L., Olmsted Teisberg. E., & Johnson, R. R. (2000). Sustainable business: Opportunity
and value creation. Interfaces, 30 (3), 1-12. Retrieved from
103
http://ezproxy.bib.hh.se/login?url=https://www-proquest-com.ezproxy.bib.hh.se/scholarly-jour
nals/sustainable-business-opportunity-value-creation/docview/217126740/se-2?accountid=112
61
Le-Breton Miller, I., & Miller, D. (2016) Family firms and practices of sustainability: A
contingency view. Journal of Family Business Strategy, 7: 26–33.
Le Breton–Miller, I., & Miller, D. (2006). Why Do Some Family Businesses Out–Compete?
Governance, Long–Term Orientations, and Sustainable Capability. Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice, 30(6): 731–746.
Livsmedelsföretagen (2020), “Dryckesbranschrapporten 2020. En översikt av en ung och växande
livsmedelsbransch”, available at: www.lrf.se/om-lrf/organisation/branschavdelningar/lrf-lokal-
mat-och-dryck/fortsatt-stark-tillvaxt-for-dryckesbranschen-trots-covid-19/
Lopez-Perez, M., Melero-Polo, I., Vazquez-Carrasco, R., & Cambra-Fierro, J. (2018) Sustainability
and Business outcomes in the Context of SMEs: Comparing Family Firms vs. Non-Family
firms. Sustainability, 10(11): 1-16.
Mancuso,T., Arfo, S., Di Mauro, M., Matarazzo, A., Froio, AP., & Scuderi, A. (2022) Application
of SOSTAIN to Wine Sector in Sicily as Sustainability Management Tool. Journal of
Biomedical research & environmental sciences, 3(3): 302-306.
Memili, E., Fang, C., Koc, B., Yildirim-Öktem, Ö., & Sonmez, S. (2018). Sustainability practices of
family firms: the interplay between family ownership and long-term orientation. Journal of
Sustainable Tourism, 26(1): 9-28.
Miroshnychenko, I., & De Massis, A. (2022) Sustainability practices of family and nonfamily
firms: A worldwide study. Technological Forecasting & Social Change, 174 (121079).
Mullens, D (2018) Entrepreneurial orientation and sustainability initiatives in family firms. Journal
of Global Responsibility, 9(2): 160-178.
Muñoz-Rojas, J., Méndez, M. R., da Veiga, J. F. F., Barroso, J. L., Pinto-Correia, T., & Thidell, Å.
(2022). Interactive innovation is a key factor influencing the sustainability of value chains in
the wine sector. In Improving Sustainable Viticulture and Winemaking Practices (461-483).
Academic Press.
Mänsson, M. (2016), “Sweden, the world’s most sustainable country: Political statements and goals
for a sustainable society”, Earth Common Journal, 6(1).
Nieman, G. (2006), “Managing the small business”, Small Business Management: A South African
Approach, Van Schaik Publishers, Pretoria, 17-26.
Reay, T., Jaskiewicz, P., & Hinings, C.R. (2015). How Family, Business and Community Logics
Shape Family Firm Beaviour and “Rules of the Game” in an Organizational Field. Family
Business Review, 28(4): 292-311.
Riessman, C., & Quinney, L. (2005) Narrative in Social work. A critical review. Qualitative Social
Work, 4(4): 391–412.
Sentuti A., Cesaroni F.M., Cubico S. (2019), Women and Family Firms: a State of the Art Literature
Review, in (Edt) Laveren, E., Blackburn, R., Hytti, ., Landström H. Rigour and Relevance in
Entrepreneurship. Research, Resources and Outcomes. Frontiers in European Entrepreneurship
Research, 48-68. Edward Elgar Publishing, Cheltenham, UK, Northampton, MA, USA.
Seow, C., & José Parada, M. (2021) Biofilter: A Hungarian champion for the circular economy and
stakeholder capitalism. In Sharma, P., & Sharma, (Edt) in Pioneering Family Firms
‘sustainable Development strategies, Edward Elgar Publishing: Northampton.
Sharma, P., Chrisman, J., & Gersick, K. (2012) 25 Years of Family Business Review: Reflections
on the Past and Perspectives for the future. Family Business Review, 25(1): 5-15.
Sharma, P., Sharma, S., & Schuetz, A. (2021) Supreme Creations and Wings of Hope: A symbiotic
care of environment and society. Sharma, P., & Sharma,S. (Edt) in Pioneering Family Firms’
sustainable Development strategies, Edward Elgar Publishing: Northampton.
104
Sharma, P., Sharma, S., & Steiner A. (2021) Sustainability comes naturally at the purpose-driven
Rocky Mountain Soap company. Sharma, P., & Sharma, (Edt) in Pioneering Family Firms´
sustainable Development strategies, Edward Elgar Publishing: Northampton.
Sharma, P., & Sharma S. (2021) Pioneering business families committed to sustainable
development. In Sharma, P., & Sharma, S., Pioneering Family Firms´ sustainable Development
strategies, Edward Elgar Publishing: Northampton.
Škare, M., & Porada-Rochoń, M. (2021). Measuring the impact of financial cycles on family firms:
how to prepare for crisis? International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11365-020-00722-6
Soler, I,P., Gemar, G., & Guerrero-Murillo, R. (2017) Family and non-family business behaviour in
the wine sector: A comparative study. European Journal of Family Business, 7(1-2): p.65-73.
Schwartz, S. H., Cieciuch, J., Vecchione, M., Davidov, E., Fischer, R., Beierlein, C., Ramos, A.,
Verkasalo, M., Lönnqvist, J. E., Demirutku, K., Dirilen-Gumus, O., & Konty, M. (2012).
Refining the theory of basic individual values. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
103(4): 663–688.
Westhead, P., & Howorth, C. (2007). ‘Types’ of private family firms: An exploratory conceptual
and empirical analysis. Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, 19: 405–431.
Wu, M., Chang, C. and Zhuang, W. (2010), “Relationships of work family conflict with business
and marriage outcomes in Taiwanese copreneurial women”, The International Journal of
Human Resource Management, 21(5): 742-753.
Zellweger, T. (2017). Managing the family business: Theory and practice. Edward Elgar Publishing.
105
How is circular entrepreneurship created? Insights
from a study on Italian entrepreneurs
Sofia Mauro2
Department of Human and Social Sciences
University of Naples “L’Orientale”
Largo S. Giovanni Maggiore, 30, Naples, Italy
smauro@unior.it
Alessandra De Chiara
Department of Human and Social Sciences
University of Naples “L’Orientale”
Largo S. Giovanni Maggiore, 30, Naples, Italy
adechiara@unior.it
Anna D’Auria
Department of Human and Social Sciences
University of Naples “L’Orientale”
Largo S. Giovanni Maggiore, 30, Naples, Italy
adauria@unior.it
Abstract
Circular economy (CE) can be considered as a new approach for the production and
consumption of goods, through the pursuit of social and environmental values, as well as
the achievement of economic profit. Although studies on CE are increasing in number,
the debate on circular entrepreneurship does not seem to be sufficiently exploited, as well
as studies on the profile of the promoters of innovative and circular ideas and on the
intra-organizational collaboration among founders. Therefore, the present paper intends to
contribute to reducing this gap through a literature review on the theoretical strands of
sustainable and circular entrepreneurship and through an empirical study based on 234
Italian circular organizations, and carried on through a qualitative approach adopting the
content analysis method.
The results highlight the presence of complementary skills in the ownership structure of
circular companies, with a prevalence of scientific skills. Indeed, it emerges that the
contamination and collaborative learning, that favours innovative initiatives, is based on a
continuous exchange of knowledge and technical skills and is favoured by a considerable
differentiation of academic and job knowledge.
2This paper was produced while attending the PhD programme in International Studies at the
University of Naples “L’Orientale”, Cycle XXXVII, with the support of a scholarship financed by
the Ministerial Decree no. 1061 of 10th August 2021, based on the PON-Research and Innovation
2014-2020, on Innovation and Green issues (Action IV.5).
106
Finally, the present study provides future research trajectories and implications that will
be further deepened through an empirical analysis that involves professionals and key
informants.
Keywords Circular economy, sustainable entrepreneurship, circular entrepreneurship,
Italian circular companies, skills, knowledge
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1 Introduction
In recent years, the attention to sustainability issues is constantly growing, as it is the
pillar of the current global framework of the Agenda 2030 for sustainable development
(United Nations and General Assembly, 2015). According to sustainability definitions,
achieve the sustainable development means to integrate economic, social and
environmental goals, through innovation, ensuring the satisfaction of the primary needs
for present and future generations (WCED, 1987). Within the sustainability paradigm, an
essential role is played by the circular economy approach (Murray et al., 2017;
Geissdoerfer et al., 2017). The circular economy is an economic model that is clearly in
contrast with the current linear economy, now considered ineffective in facing problems
such as climate change and pollution, driven by an irrational usage of resources and a
strong negative impact on the natural environment in terms of environmental damages
and waste inefficient management. In fact, CE can be considered a new approach to the
production and consumption of goods, through the pursuit of social and environmental
values, as well as the achievement of economic profit. It relies on closing loops (Yong,
2007) through material recycling and reuse practices, to achieve a greater efficiency in
resource management (Klettner et al., 2014), and in the production, distribution, and
consumption processes (Manea et al., 2014). One of the main objectives of CE is to
transform waste into new resources, keeping products and materials at the maximum level
of utility and value over time (EC, 2015; Bocken et al., 2016), as well as reducing waste
production.
In this approach a key role is played by entrepreneurs that can take the opportunity
offered by the CE (Geissdoerfer et al., 2017). According to Schumpeter (1934),
“entrepreneurs main function is to allocate existing resources to new uses and new
combinations” since “innovations are essential to explaining economic growth, and the
entrepreneur is the central innovator (…) that does not retreat from engaging in risky
107
business ventures (…) His disposition to face risks makes him an entrepreneur” (Śledzik,
2013, p. 91). Hence, the context where the entrepreneur operate has a crucial value, since
very often entrepreneurs are inspired by it to identify new opportunities and, in line with
the sustainable approach, identify practices to employ natural resources efficiently and
with a low level of wastage (Dean and McMullen, 2007).
Although these issues are spreading rapidly, the debate on circular entrepreneurship
does not seem to be sufficiently exploited. Therefore, the present paper intends to
contribute to reducing this gap through a literature review on the theoretical strands of
sustainable and circular entrepreneurship and then through an empirical study based on
234 Italian circular enterprises.
In particular, the paper aims to study the sustainable businesses or, more properly,
circular businesses, analysing the profile of the promoters of innovative and circular ideas
and focusing on the combination, integration, and contamination of their skills and on the
intra-organizational collaboration. Intra-organizational collaboration (Huxham, 1993)
appears to be an interesting research perspective but still scarcely investigated, in contrast
to the external relations entertained by the enterprises (Pinelli et al., 2021), that is widely
investigated in the literature.
Thus, the core of this work is to understand entrepreneurship in the circular economy
in order to identify the characteristics and skills the sustainable entrepreneur should have.
In line with this, the work considers the following research question (RQ): Who are the
promoters of circular enterprises?
The paper is organized as follows. In section 2 we present the literature review on
sustainable and circular entrepreneurship, on the perspective of collaborative learning and
on the importance of sharing knowledge; in section 3 we describe the research process; in
section 4 we present the results; in section 5 we provide the implications of the study and
the conclusions.
2 Literature review
2.1 Circular business and entrepreneurship
The circular economy is an approach based on the so-called closed-loop production
systems (Ellen MacArthur Foundation, 2012; Murray et al., 2017), through the adoption
for innovative solutions that can partially repair the environmental damages due to the
linear production systems, and improve resource efficiency (Maglio et al., 2021).
108
Enterprises adopting a sustainability vision play an active role in the circular
economy, as they can generate concrete responses to many social and environmental
concerns (Hall et al., 2010; Geissdoerfer et al., 2018) by embracing the "triple bottom
line" approach (Henry et al., 2019). Indeed, in line with the SDGs of the 2030 Agenda
(Preston and Lehne, 2017), they are responsible for implementing innovative strategies to
reduce and properly manage waste, reutilising materials and products, and to educate
consumers to a responsible consumption behavior and the use of ecological products
(Veleva and Bodkin, 2018).
Circular entrepreneurship is based on the circularity of ideas, knowledge and skills,
the aim of which is to create innovation through the design of goods and services needed
by people, promoting the incorporation of recyclable materials and minimising waste
production (Zucchella and Urban, 2019).
The debate on the circular businesses has analysed various issues concerning the
creation of these companies. Some scholars have underlined the key role played by
collaborations and the importance to adopt a responsible approach in using and managing
resources (Aaboen et al., 2017, Pagano et al., 2018). Others have underlined the
importance of social ties in the development of the innovative idea, which play a
significant role in facilitating the culture of circular economy (Dantas et al., 2022).
Very often, entrepreneurs specific skills and competences, dictated by previous
studies and experience in certain fields, are needed to enable them to undertake a
successful circular initiative (Dantas et al, 2022). The debate also underlines the
importance of the complementarity of knowledge and skills of all the individuals within
the enterprise for the creation of new circular enterprises (Dodd et al., 2021), since it
favours the promotion of a flexible mentality, readiness for change, the implementation if
innovative solutions to take new opportunities (Trokić, 2016; Bailey et al., 2020; Triguero
et al., 2022).
With special reference to the sustainable entrepreneur, the debate underlines some
characteristics and motivations that characterize him/her, such as a strong sense of
environmental and social responsibility, strong links between environmental protection,
human dignity and market success, strong personal ambition and commitment, ability to
share knowledge, a spirit of adventure and innovation (Schaltegger and Wagner, 2011;
Welter et al., 2017; Sawe et al., 2021). The combination of these characteristics can
favour the generation of innovative products and services, also aiming at reducing the
environmental impacts and increase people quality of life (Schaltegger and Wagner,
109
2011), in line with the definition provided by Masurel (2007), that describes the
sustainable entrepreneur as an individual focused on people, planet and profit (Zamfir et
al., 2017).
These characteristics can also be attributed to the so-called “circular entrepreneur” (Henry
et al., 2021). Indeed, the debate associate the circular entrepreneur to other forms of
sustainable entrepreneurship, such as: “organic entrepreneurship”, focused on health and
well-being; “green entrepreneurship”, mainly focused on the climate issues and
ecosystems; and “blue entrepreneurship” focused on clean water and marine life
(Crecente et al., 2021; Suchek et al., 2022). The above-mentioned approaches have some
common elements with the CE, in fact, according to them, "the components and materials
keep their value and are recycled, remanufactured or reabsorbed by the natural
environment" (Inigo and Block, 2019, p. 283).
Anyway, some scholars provided a distinction between the circular entrepreneur and the
social entrepreneur, defining the latter as an individual who seeks opportunities to
increase social wealth, through the creation of new businesses or the innovative
management of existing organizations, in order to promote the reinvestment of positive
outcomes in respective communities, groups and stakeholders (Zahra et al., 2009; Phillips
et al., 2015).
Alongside the studies that reveal the characteristics of the entrepreneur, others studies
underline the driving force of the entrepreneurial fabric for economic development at
local, regional and national levels (Ferreira et al., 2017; Iacobucci and Perugini, 2021;
Suchek et al., 2021), as well as the importance of the circular businesses as they play a
multiplier role for the implementation and diffusion of circular business models (De
Chiara, 2020).
2.2 Collaborative learning perspective in circular enterprises
According to the academic debate, the complementarity of individuals' knowledge and
skills is necessary to implement circular economy initiatives (Dodd et al., 2021). Starting
from this need, the perspective of collaborative learning is fundamental (Van Hoof and
Thiell, 2014), as it explains the advantages of the complementarity of knowledge. People
with different backgrounds, skills and knowledge influence each other in a positive way,
giving a strong boost to the company's innovative processes. The existence and
combination of a various forms of knowledge and skills within a company generates a
110
positive effect on absorptive capacity (Van Hoof and Thiell, 2014) and on the firm's
ability to create value and generate innovation.
The concept of absorptive capacity has been extensively investigated; for example,
Zahra and George (2002) defined it as a set of routines and organizational processes
through which companies acquire, assimilate, transform, and exploit knowledge to
produce organizational capacity dynamics (Zahra and George, 2002).
Austin (2010) stated that the higher is the level of collaboration and the transfer of
tangible and intangible resources within the company, the greater is the innovative value
of its final product and service (Austin, 2010); other scholars highlighted the various
benefits that derive directly from the exchange of know-how between different
individuals who, through the establishment of forms of collaboration within the
organizational model, integrate their knowledge, favouring the processes of aggregation
and improving the competitiveness of the company (Cao and Zhang, 2011; Alguezaui and
Filieri, 2014).
The debate also highlighted the opportunities deriving from the contribution of
diversified knowledge, considered the result of the collaboration among different profiles
and backgrounds (Martínez-Pérez and García-Villaverde, 2019), and underlined that a
wide variety of knowledge, experiences and skills can fuel and promote the development
of knowledge in other fields (Fantoni et al., 2006), improving the exploitation of internal
knowledge (Quintana-Garcia and Benavides-Velasco, 2004) and making companies more
competitive (Marcelino-Jésus et al., 2020).
Regarding sustainable companies, given the strong innovative profile that characterize
them, it has been argued that internal collaboration and the integration of knowledge and
skills positively influence the creation of innovative processes (Schaltegger and Wagner,
2011). Clarke and Roome (1999) underlined the impact of the interaction between the
actors directly interested in the activities on sustainability practices. In this regard, a
particularly interesting contribution can be found in the study by De los Rios and
Charnley (2017), who identified a set of skills useful for defining sustainable production
strategies. Similarly, Charnley et al. (2011) highlighted that the transversality of skills and
knowledge is crucial in the development of circular economy practices. To sum up, the
generation of new or innovative ideas can be considered the lifeblood for firms, even
more for those that, like circular companies, base their core business on the proposal of
innovative products or services. Therefore, in these companies, the study of mixed
competences appears to be important, since the fundamental element within these
111
companies appears to be the human capital, made up of different professional profiles,
experiences, cultures and values. This diversity in the ownership structure should be
considered as a specific area of research as it can explain the birth and success of circular
companies.
3 Methodology
The empirical analysis was carried on through a qualitative approach and adopting the
content analysis method (Krippendorff, 2012), namely a method based on the analysis of
reliable documents to detect the most relevant topics with the use of a software to ensure
the objectivity of the study.
The sample analysed is represented by 234 circular organizations located in Italy; data
related to the organisations have been collected over the period between January and
November 2022.
To collect secondary data, we considered the information provided by the companies
through the Italian Atlas of the Circular Economy platform, a continuously updated
digital platform that collects and reports on companies, associations and research
organisations and promotes circular economy and sustainable practices. In addition, we
considered the organisations official websites.
The analysis was performed through the software NVivo (Krippendorff, 2012), that is
one of the most adopted tools when performing this kind of investigation (Harwood and
Garry, 2003; Houghton et al., 2015). Due to the characteristics of the software, we
selected documents in one language (Italian) and with a similar length, to guarantee the
reliability of the analysis and avoid any bias. We collected and classified the information
detected through a set of variables concerning: i) the description of the ownership
structure; ii) the professional profiles of the partners promoting. Figure 1 illustrates the
survey elements.
112
Figure 1: Structure survey elements
4 Results
The first phase of analysis shows that the companies we investigated give a
considerable importance to the description of their ownership structure. In fact, 80% of
the circular companies clearly describe the composition of the ownership team (figure 2).
More in detail, it emerges that members of the ownership team possess predominantly
mixed skills (42%), since belonging to different branches of knowledge (figure 3). The
combinations of knowledge and skills refer to the set of all three different types of
academic and job backgrounds previously described. However, it should be noted that,
within the "mixed skills" in most cases there is a strong predominance of the so-called
hard skills, namely scientific skills, often mixed with sectorial competences.
Furthermore, significant results are detected with reference to individuals with specific
sectorial competences (38%), i.e. individuals from the same sector, who, by pooling their
specific skills, are able to develop circular ideas. On the other hand, 17% of the
companies examined have only founding partners with highly scientific skills, such us
engineers, chemists, biologists, biotechnologists, etc.
Finally, a very low percentage is registered for economic and humanistic skills, namely
economists, jurists, sociologists, marketing and communication experts, etc...
113
Figure 2 Description of the ownership
Figure 3 Profile of promoters of circular ideas
As concerns the composition of ownership structure, the results of the content analysis
show that the combination of competences and multidisciplinary visions is important for
circular organizations. Indeed, to point up this phenomenon, in the table below we list
114
some quotes related to the relevance given to the combination of different academic and
job backgrounds (table 1).
Table 1: The importance of mixed skills in circular companies
Name of circular company
Sentences
Alisea
To transform ideas into commercial successes, it is
necessary to create a network of actors with
different knowledge and to open up to a new way of
working based on sharing, in order to regain
competitiveness on a global market.
Circularity
Circularity, thanks to its team of expert
professionals on sustainability and materials
engineering and to its network of qualified partners,
is able to accompany companies along the path of
integrating the circular economy within their
business model.
Krill design
Innovative startup born from the desire of a group
of sustainability, technology and design enthusiasts
to do something that would have a concrete impact
on (business) models that are not compatible with
sustainable development.
RiMaflow
The interaction between artisanal and industrial
activities and rural activities, with the aim of
overcoming the division between city and
countryside and between producer and consumer
across the board.
Mediterranea
Mediterranea is born at the beginning of 2018
thanks to the synergy between the Vincentian
Family, the Medihospes Social Cooperative, the
non-profit association Linaria and Margherita
Grasselli.
The Circle
Team of expert professionals on highly scientific,
economic and social issues.
115
Isa
It was born with the support of the PIN regional
tender, from the dream of a group of women who
put together their values, experiences and resources
to establish themselves as a female artisan
company founded on: innovation, reuse, creativity
and relationship.
The strength of ISA is in the contamination of
creativity, techniques and materials: it combines
different skills and materials, traditional and
innovative craftsmanship.
Orange Fiber
Italian company made up of two women with two
very different curricula, one specialized in textiles,
especially textiles with innovative materials, and the
other a graduate in International Cooperation for
Development and in Communication.
R.ED.EL. Srl
Since 2014, the company has had a Research &
Development department with an organization
chart of experts, with the aim of developing new
solutions for improving company efficiency and
launching activities in the circular economy sector.
ScartOff
Designers, marketers and creatives have combined
their experiences and values to create this project.
Progeva
Progeva, the very name of the company contains
the common thread that has linked together
research, passion and the ability to do business,
under the common aegis of an essential
prerequisite: to love one's land and want to
preserve it, re-educate the prevention and
treatment of nature.
5 Discussion, implications and conclusions
The paper addresses an emerging issue, delving into the topic of circular
entrepreneurship focusing on the characteristics of the ownership team of a CE company.
116
In particular, the focal point is represented by the circular entrepreneur, and the
knowledge possessed by the owners of a circular company, as well as the
intra-organizational exchanges among founders.
The results highlight the presence of complementary skills in the ownership structure
of circular companies, with a prevalence of scientific skills. Indeed, contamination and
collaborative learning is based on a continuous exchange of knowledge and technical
skills and is favoured by a considerable differentiation of academic and job knowledge.
The benefits related to the integration and combination of skills and abilities emerge
both in the literature and in empirical evidence, an aspect that, in general, characterizes
companies with a strong propensity for innovation, but which is also evident in circular
companies. This confirms that circular entrepreneurship is the result of processes of
connection of experts in different fields, where new ideas are fuelled by the exchange and
contamination of the different skills of the founders (Van Hoof and Thiell, 2014). Besides,
the combination of different competences and knowledge not only allows the creation of
innovative initiatives, but also favours the dissemination of knowledge and awareness of
the importance of adopting a responsible and sustainable approach, expanding the social
role of companies.
In addition, combining different perspectives and knowledge, owners manage to
innovate facing social and environmental challenges, by embracing the principles of
sustainable development. Indeed, the social role of circular companies can also be
detected in the fact that, as listed in some official reports and sector studies (Eldar, 2017;
Bauwens et al., 2020), there are many non-profit or hybrid companies that embrace the
circular approach. An important element is represented by the role played by non-profit
organizations and, in particular, by the relationships they are able to create and maintain
with other economic actors in the context of CE, implementing models of convergence
between profit and non-profit. However, studies on this aspect are still scarce - and most
of them are focused on the second-hand markets (Valor et al., 2022; Persson and Hinton,
2023), this highlights the importance of further investigating this aspect. Indeed, this
perspective appears to be an interesting context of investigation with reference to CE, in
contrast to the inter-collaborative approach widely investigated in literature.
Another interesting research trajectory that emerges concerns to the ability of circular
companies to transfer individual knowledge at the organizational level. In fact, in the
theoretical debate, multidisciplinary is considered as fundamental for the passage from
individual knowledge to the assimilation, transformation, and exploitation of knowledge
117
at the organizational level (Sun and Anderson 2008). This aspect should be deepened in
the future also for the important managerial implications deriving from it.
Alongside the theoretical implications highlighted, the study provides policy
implications, considering the important role that institutions have in directing the
transition towards the circular economy (Ellen MacArthur Foundation, 2015). For
example, in Italy, the recent institutionalization of the Minister of the Ecological
Transaction bodes well for the planning of specific policies for supporting the
reconversion of production and consumption models. The commitment of the
policymakers must be aimed primarily at supporting the training of human capital with
scientific-technological skills, in line with what emerged from the present study, namely
that many entrepreneurs have an educational background in STEM disciplines (science,
technology, engineering and mathematics). Investing in education appears to be an
essential condition for supporting the development of industrial processes based on
innovation, such as circular economy models, but at the same time it represents an
important premise for helping to improve the quality of life of people, reducing the
environmental impact of the industrial activities, as well as intervening on inclusion and
social cohesion.
Institutions must be prepared to support new entrepreneurs but also SMEs, to make
them able to face this challenge and take part to this process. It is believed that initiatives
to develop digital solutions that enable internal and external collaboration for innovation
are important. Spreading knowledge on digital platforms that make it possible to support,
accelerate and orchestrate the entire innovation process of companies, from the generation
of new ideas to their launch on the market, and to support open innovation processes, are
initiatives that represent an important challenge since the circular economic can provide
new employment opportunities and favour community wellbeing, ensuring the
improvement of the economic, environmental, and social performance.
In conclusion, the main limitation of the study is due to the adoption of secondary
data to perform the analysis. This allow us to a partial investigation that does not include
some intangible aspects that are scarcely investigated in literature and that need to be
furthered. In line with the above, our main contribution is to provide research trajectories,
mainly related to the role of policymakers and the role of the owners and founders in
terms of implementing innovative initiatives and adopting a CE approach.
The present study will be further exploited through on-field research following the
grounded theory (GT) approach, thanks to the involvement of entrepreneurs,
118
professionals and key informants, with the main aim to observe intangible factors
affecting knowledge exchanges and intra-organizational collaboration and their
consequences.
References
Aaboen, L., Rocca, A.L., Lind, F., Perna, A., Shih, T. (2017) “Introduction: Starting Up in Business
Networks—Why Relationships Matter in Entrepreneurship”. In: Aaboen, L., La Rocca, A.,
Lind, F., Perna, A., Shih, T. (eds) Starting Up in Business Networks. Palgrave Macmillan,
London.
Ahn, J.M., Ju, Y., Moon, T.H., Minshall, T., Probert, D., Sohn, S.Y., & Mortara, L. (2016) “Beyond
absorptive capacity in the open innovation process: the relationships between openness,
capacities and firm performance”, Technology Analysis & Strategic Management, Vol. 28, No.
9, pp. 1009-1028.
Alguezaui, S., & Filieri, R. (2014) “A knowledge-based view of the extending enterprise for
enhancing a collaborative innovation advantage”, International Journal of Agile Systems and
Management, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 116-131.
Assembly, G. (2015). Resolution adopted by the General Assembly on 11 September 2015. New
York: United Nations.
Austin, J.E. (2010) The collaboration challenge: How non-profits and businesses succeed through
strategic alliances, John Wiley & Sons.
Bailey, D., Pitelis, C., & Tomlinson, P.R. (2020) “Strategic management and regional industrial
strategy: Cross-fertilization to mutual advantage”, Regional Studies, Vol. 54, No. 5, pp.
647-659.
Bauwens, T., Huybrechts, B., & Dufays, F. (2020) “Understanding the diverse scaling strategies of
social enterprises as hybrid organizations: The case of renewable energy cooperatives”,
Organization & Environment, Vol. 33, No. 2, pp. 195-219.
Bocken, N.M., De Pauw, I., Bakker, C., & Van Der Grinten, B. (2016) “Product design and business
model strategies for a circular economy”, Journal of industrial and production engineering,
Vol. 33, No. 5, pp. 308-320.
Cao, M., & Zhang, Q. (2011) “Supply chain collaboration: Impact on collaborative advantage and
firm performance”, Journal of operations management, Vol. 29, No. 3, pp. 163-180.
Charnley, F., Lemon, M., & Evans, S. (2011) “Exploring the process of whole system design”,
Design Studies, Vol. 32, No. 2, pp. 156-179.
Clarke, S., & Roome, N. (1999) “Sustainable business: learning–action networks as organizational
assets”, Business Strategy and the environment, Vol. 8, No. 5, pp. 296-310.
Crecente, F., Sarabia, M., & del Val, M.T. (2021) “Climate change policy and entrepreneurial
opportunities”, Technological Forecasting and Social Change, Vol. 163, p. 120446.
Dantas, R.M., Ilyas, A., Martins, J.M., & Rita, J.X. (2022) “Circular Entrepreneurship in Emerging
Markets through the Lens of Sustainability”, Journal of Open Innovation: Technology, Market,
and Complexity, Vol. 8, No. 4, p. 211.
Dean, T.J., & McMullen, J.S. (2007) “Toward a theory of sustainable entrepreneurship: Reducing
environmental degradation through entrepreneurial action”, Journal of business venturing, Vol.
22, No. 1, pp. 50-76.
De Chiara, A. (2020) “Sustainable Business Model Innovation vs.“Made in” for International
Performance of Italian Food Companies”, Agriculture, Vol. 11, No. 1, p. 17.
De los Rios, I.C., & Charnley, F.J. (2017) “Skills and capabilities for a sustainable and circular
economy: The changing role of design”, Journal of cleaner production, Vol. 160, pp. 109-122.
119
Dodd, S., Wilson, J., Karampela, M., & Danson, M. (2021) “Crafting growth together”,
Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, Vol. 33, No. 9-10, pp. 789-815.
Eldar, O. (2017) The role of social enterprise and hybrid organizations, Colum. Bus. L. Rev., 92.
Ellen MacArthur Foundation (2012) Towards the circular economy vol. 1: an economic and
business rationale for an accelarated transition.
Ellen MacArthur Foundation (2015) Delivering the circular economy: A toolkit for policymakers,
Ellen MacArthur Foundation, Cowes, UK.
European Commission (2015) Closing the Loop - An Eu action Plan for the Circular Economy,
COM, Bruxelles.
Fantoni, G., Bifulco, A., & Santoro, R. (2006, June). Problem classes and collaborative methods: a
new approach to product innovation. In 2006 IEEE International Technology Management
Conference (ICE) (pp. 1-8). IEEE.
Ferreira, J.J., Ratten, V., & Dana, L.P. (2017) “Knowledge spillover-based strategic
entrepreneurship”, International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal, Vol. 13, pp.
161-167.
Geissdoerfer, M., Savaget, P., Bocken, N.M., & Hultink, E.J. (2017) “The Circular Economy–A
new sustainability paradigm?”, Journal of cleaner production, Vol. 143, pp. 757-768.
Geissdoerfer, M., Morioka, S.N., de Carvalho, M.M., & Evans, S. (2018) “Business models and
supply chains for the circular economy”, Journal of cleaner production, Vol. 90, pp. 712-721.
Hall, G.M., & Howe, J. (2010) “Sustainability of the chemical manufacturing industry—Towards a
new paradigm?”, Education for Chemical Engineers, Vol. 5, No. 4, pp. e100-e107.
Henry, L.A., Buyl, T., & Jansen, R.J. (2019) “Leading corporate sustainability: The role of top
management team composition for triple bottom line performance”, Business Strategy and the
Environment, Vol. 28, No. 1, pp. 173-184.
Harwood, T.G., & Garry, T. (2003) “An overview of content analysis”, The marketing review, Vol.
3, No. 4, pp. 479-498.
Houghton, C., Murphy, K., Shaw, D., & Casey, D. (2015) “Qualitative case study data analysis: An
example from practice”, Nurse researcher, Vol. 22, No. 5, pp. 8-12.
Huxham, C. (1993) “Collaborative capability: An intraorganizational perspective on collaborative
advantage”, Public Money & Management, Vol. 13, No. 3, pp. 21-28.
Iacobucci, D., & Perugini, F. (2021) “Entrepreneurial ecosystems and economic resilience at local
level”, Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, Vol. 33, No. 9-10, pp. 689-716.
Inigo, E.A., & Blok, V. (2019) “Strengthening the socio-ethical foundations of the circular
economy: Lessons from responsible research and innovation”, Journal of cleaner production,
Vol. 233, pp. 280-291.
Klettner, A., Clarke, T., & Boersma, M. (2014) “The governance of corporate sustainability:
Empirical insights into the development, leadership and implementation of responsible
business strategy”, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 122, No. 1, pp. 145–165.
Krippendorff, K. (2012) Content Analysis: An Introduction to its Methodology, Sage, Beverly Hills,
CA.
Maglio, R., Rey, A., Agliata, F., & Cano-Rubio, M. (2021) “Business Model, Sustainability, and
Intangible Resources: Challenges and Opportunities for SMEs”, Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, No. 2.
Manea, D.I., Istudor, N., Dinu, V., & Paraschiv, D.M. (2021) “Circular economy and innovative
entrepreneurship, prerequisites for social progress”, Journal of Business Economics and
Management, Vol. 22, No 5, pp. 1342-1359.
Marcelino-Jesus, E., Nazarenko, A.A., Sarraipa, J., Martins, J., & Jardim-Gonçalves, R. (2020)
Digital Manufacturing Cluster Evaluation Methodology. In I-ESA Workshops.
120
Martínez-Pérez, Á., Elche, D., & García-Villaverde, P.M. (2019) “From diversity of
interorganizational relationships to radical innovation in tourism destinations: The role of
knowledge exploration”, Journal of destination marketing & management, Vol. 11, pp. 80-88.
Masurel, E. (2007) “Why SMEs invest in environmental measures: sustainability evidence from
small and mediumsized printing firms”, Business Strategy and the Environment, Vol. 16, No.
3, pp. 190-201.
McCusker, K., & Gunaydin, S. (2015) “Research using qualitative, quantitative or mixed methods
and choice based on the research”, Perfusion, Vol. 30, No. 7, pp. 537-542.
Murray, A., Skene, K., & Haynes, K. (2017) “The Circular Economy: An Interdisciplinary
Exploration of the Concept and Application in a Global Context”, Journal of Business Ethics,
Vol. 140, pp. 369-380.
Pagano A., Petrucci F., Bocconcelli R. (2018), “A business network perspective on unconventional
entrepreneurship: A case from the cultural sector”, Journal of Business Research, Vol. 92, pp.
455–464.
Persson, O., & Hinton, J.B. (2023) “Second-hand clothing markets and a just circular economy?
Exploring the role of business forms and profit”, Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 390, p.
136139.
Phillips, W., Lee, H., Ghobadian, A., O’regan, N., & James, P. (2015) “Social innovation and social
entrepreneurship: A systematic review”, Group & Organization Management, Vol. 40, No. 3,
pp. 428-461.
Pinelli, M., Lechner, C., Kraus, S., & Liguori, E. (2021) “Entrepreneurial value creation:
conceptualizing an exchange-based view of entrepreneurship”, Journal of Small Business and
Enterprise Development, Vol. 29, No. 2, pp. 261-278.
Preston, F., & Lehne, J., (2017) A wider circle? The circular economy in developing countries.
Quintana-Garcia, C., & Benavides-Velasco, C.A. (2004) “Cooperation, competition, and innovative
capability: a panel data of European dedicated biotechnology firms”, Technovation, Vol. 24,
No. 12, pp. 927-938.
Sawe, F.B., Kumar, A., GarzaReyes, J.A., & Agrawal, R. (2021) “Assessing peopledriven factors
for circular economy practices in small and mediumsized enterprise supply chains: Business
strategies and environmental perspectives”, Business Strategy and the Environment, Vol. 30,
No. 7, pp. 2951-2965.
Schaltegger, S., & Wagner, M. (2011) “Sustainable entrepreneurship and sustainability innovation:
categories and interactions”, Business strategy and the environnement, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp.
222-237.
Schumpeter, J.A. (1934) The theory of economic development: An inquiry into profits, capital,
credit, interest, and the business cycle, Transaction Books.
Śledzik, K. (2013) “Schumpeter’s view on innovation and entrepreneurship”. Management Trends
in Theory and Practice, (ed.) Stefan Hittmar, Faculty of Management Science and Informatics,
University of Zilina & Institute of Management by University of Zilina.
Suchek, N., Fernandes, C.I., Kraus, S., Filser, M., & Sjögrén, H. (2021) “Innovation and the circular
economy: A systematic literature review”, Business Strategy and the Environment, Vol. 30,
No. 8, pp. 3686-3702.
Suchek, N., Ferreira, J.J., & Fernandes, P.O. (2022) “A review of entrepreneurship and circular
economy research: State of the art and future directions”, Business Strategy and the
Environment, Vol. 31, No. 5, pp. 2256-2283.
Sun, P., Anderson, M. (2008) “An examination of the relationship between absorptive capacity and
organizational learning, and a pro- posed integration”, International Journal of Management
Reviews, Vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 130-150.
Triguero, Á., Cuerva, M.C., & SáezMartínez, F.J. (2022) “Closing the loop through
ecoinnovation by European firms: Circular economy for sustainable development”, Business
Strategy and the Environment, Vol. 31, No. 5, pp. 2337-2350.
121
Trokić, A. (2016) “Entrepreneurial project management–cross-fertilization between the fields”, PM
World Journal, Vol. 5, No. 2, pp. 1-5.
Valor, C., Ronda, L., & Abril, C. (2022) “Understanding the expansion of circular markets:
Building relational legitimacy to overcome the stigma of second-hand clothing”, Sustainable
Production and Consumption, Vol. 30, pp. 77-88.
Van Hoof, B., & Thiell, M. (2014) “Collaboration capacity for sustainable supply chain
management: small and medium-sized enterprises in Mexico”, Journal of Cleaner Production,
Vol. 67, pp. 239-248.
Veleva, V., & Bodkin, G. (2018) “Corporate-entrepreneur collaborations to advance a circular
economy”, Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 188, pp. 20-37.
WCED, S.W.S. (1987) World commission on environment and development, Our common future,
Vol. 17, No. 1, pp. 1-91.
Welter, F., Baker, T., Audretsch, D.B., & Gartner, W.B. (2017) “Everyday entrepreneurship—a call
for entrepreneurship research to embrace entrepreneurial diversity”, Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice, Vol. 41, No. 3, pp. 311-321.
Yong, R. (2007) “The circular economy in China”, Journal of material cycles and waste
management, Vol. 9, pp 121-129.
Zahra, S.A., & George, G. (2002) “Absorptive capacity: A review, reconceptualization, and
extension”, Academy of management review, Vol. 27, No. 2, pp. 185-203.
Zahra, S.A., Gedajlovic, E., Neubaum, D.O., & Shulman, J.M. (2009) “A typology of social
entrepreneurs: Motives, search processes and ethical challenges”, Journal of business
venturing, Vol. 24, No. 5, pp. 519-532.
Zamfir, A.M., Mocanu, C., & Grigorescu, A. (2017) “Circular economy and decision models
among European SMEs”, Sustainability, Vol. 9, No. 9, p. 1507.
Zucchella, A., & Urban, S. (2019) Circular entrepreneurship, Cham: Springer International
Publishing.
122
How does communication in SMEs change in the
digital era? Some insights from the entrepreneurial
perspective
Emanuela Conti
Department of Economy. Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
Via Aurelio Saffi 2 61029 Urbino PU Italy
E-mail: emanuela.conti@uniurb.it
Elisabetta Savelli
Department of Economy. Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
Via Aurelio Saffi 2 61029 Urbino PU Italy
E-mail: elisabetta.savelli@uniurb.it
Roberta Bocconcelli
Department of Economy. Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
Via Aurelio Saffi 2 61029 Urbino PU Italy
E-mail: roberta.bocconcelli@uniurb.it
Abstract
The aim of the paper is to present an empirical study that examines digital communication
in small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) from the entrepreneurial perspective. The
academic literature is mainly focused on digital transformation in large companies and
more research on communication in SMEs is required. An exploratory study was carried
out in 205 Italian manufacturing SMEs, using the questionnaire method to fill this gap.
Data analysis was conducted with descriptive statistics. The preliminary results show that
SMEs still do not exploit the benefits offered by digital communication as the adoption of
digital communication tools and the level of marketing and communication skills are still
very low although some little gaps by company size (small and medium) and type (B2C
and B2B) emerge. The value of our paper can be traced to the broad perspective adopted
to investigate digital communication, including the analysis of the digital communication
mix, social media areas and scopes, and digital skills in SMEs, by company size and type.
Keywords Digitalization, Communication skills, Entrepreneurship, SMEs
Paper type Academic Research Paper
123
1 Introduction
The digital revolution has radically changed marketing and communication activity
(Bala and Verma, 2018; Kolter et al., 2021). New services, touchpoints, and
communication instruments through which customers interact are increasing and new
digital marketing skills and professionals have grown exponentially (Pagani and Parco,
2017; Cham et al., 2022). Within this context, SMEs struggle to invest in digital
marketing and communication because of structural and cultural limits (Dethine et al.,
2020).
The entrepreneurship literature has mostly analyzed the obstacles and facilitating
factors to the digitalization of SMEs (Kergroach, 2020). Empirical research on digital
transformation is more extensively focused on large companies and further research on
SMEs is required (Raimo et al., 2021).
While large companies are fully seizing the opportunities and challenges of
digitalization, SMEs lack managerial vision and resources to fully understand the impact
of digitalization and start adopting it properly (Moeuf et al., 2018).Although the recent
pandemic crisis and geopolitical upheavals (Pencarelli et al., 2020) have forced
companies to use digital tools, SMEs risk not being able to take advantage of all the
potentialities of going digital compared to larger enterprises also because they are often
still poorly connected to high-speed broadband internet and have a lesser chance of fully
exploiting cloud computing for data archiving and processing (Pencarelli, 2022).
The impact of the digital revolution on the communication strategy of SMEs has
received little attention, and the academic investigation on the digitalization of marketing
activities refers mainly to large companies (Caliskan et al., 2021; Rosario and Dias,
2022). However, as SMEs contribute heavily to the world economy and consumers are
spending increasing time online, it is important to understand better how SMEs approach
and use digital marketing and communication.
The aim of this research is to contribute to filling this gap, by describing how
communication is changing in SMEs. In particular, this paper aims to answer to the
following research questions: (RQ1) Which digital communication mix do SMEs adopt?
(RQ2) What digital skills are required to improve marketing communication?
Specifically, we investigated the digital communication mix with a focus on social
media and the digital communication skills adopted and needed by SMEs, trying to
understand the existence of any differences between company size (small and medium)
and types (B2B and B2C). It is our aim, therefore, to expand the research on the current
124
and required adoption of digital communication tools and skills, in order to understand
the actual and required approach to digital communication and marketing strategy.
To answer the research questions a survey on manufacturing SMEs of the Italian
Marche region was carried out. Italy is a country characterized by a very high presence of
SMEs and Internet and social media users. Data analysis is in progress and we present the
preliminary results of descriptive statistics.
The paper is structured as follows: the first section reports the theoretical background
on digital marketing and communication strategy and skills, with reference to SMEs. The
methodology is stated in the third section. Then, the analysis of the results is presented.
The last part discusses the findings and presents the conclusions, highlighting the
theoretical contribution of the study, managerial implications, and future research
directions.
2 Theoretical background
2.1. Digital communication and social media
Marketing literature has investigated digital marketing from different perspectives:
themes and trends in the sector (Rosario et al., 2021), the impact of Industry 4.0 (Sunday
and Vera, 2018), of artificial intelligence, augmented reality, IoT, and robotics on
marketing practices (Kotler et al., 2021).
Further studies have investigated specific aspects, including the impacts of
digitalization on marketing mix theory (Caliskan et al., 2021), the relationship between
supply chain management and marketing integration (Ardito et al., 2019), and the
transformation of the organizational aspects of the marketing function (Vassileva, 2017).
According to Chaffey and Ellis-Chadwick (2019, p. 10), digital marketing may be
defined as follows: “Achieving marketing objectives through applying digital media, data,
and technology”. In a similar vein, Bala and Verma (2018, p. 323) proposed the following
definition: “Digital marketing is the use of technologies to help marketing activities in
order to improve customer knowledge by matching their needs”.
All marketing activities (Sunday and Vera, 2018); Kotler et al., 2021) from
informative ones (e.g., analysis of customers and competitors) to strategic ones (market
segmentation and brand positioning), as well as marketing tools (Caliskan et al., 2021)
have been impacted by digitalization.
125
Among marketing policies, communication has been strongly impacted by
digitalization (Cham et al., 2021; Kotler et al., 2021; Rosário and Dias, 2022).
In the digital context, communication can be managed more effectively as messages
can be created for very specific targets and there are numerous new digital
communication instruments to relate with consumers (Kotler et al., 2021). Artificial
intelligence (AI), machine learning, augmented reality, IoT, and robotics strongly affect
communication. These technologies allow market-driven approaches that involve the
acquisition of accurate and timely information on customers, markets, and products
(Rosário and Dias, 2022). Then, big data analysis with AI and machine learning (Ardito
et al., 2019a) allows to manage segmentation and targeting activities more effectively,
discover patterns, and gives insightful inputs based on customer needs and expectations
(Kagermann, 2015). All company types (B2B and B2C) can quickly understand
customers’ needs, predict their behaviors and respond to their desires (Ardito et al., 2019).
Contemporary internet-based communication allows consumers to connect instantly
with businesses, share feedback and opinions on a product or brand and be directly
involved in developing marketing strategies (Cham et al., 2021; Rosario et al., 2022).
Marketers can use many online communication instruments to offer users a total
digital experience, such as websites, mobile apps, communication techniques, including
search engine marketing, online public relations, online partnerships (e.g., affiliate
marketing and co-marketing), online display advertising, email marketing (Cham et al.,
2022; Rosario et al., 2022) and social media marketing (Tuten and Solomon, 2018).
Hence, digital communication contributes to develop a strong customer relationship and
brand image (Chaffey and Ellis-Chadwick, 2019).
Within marketing automation, content automation is considered one of the marketing
activities with the greatest commercial impact (Bala and Verma, 2018). In fact, it is
possible to personalize communication for each customer and develop promotional
activities for them (Başyazicioğlu and Karamustafa, 2018). Through marketing data
analysis tools (e.g., Google Analytics), marketers can optimize marketing campaigns and
reduce the costs of promotional activities (Cham et al., 2022).
Social media (social network, podcast, forum., wiki, virtual words, blog, etc) are part
of the more general digital marketing communication tool which include web site,
corporate blog, search engine, e-mail, mobile (Tuten and Solomon, 2018). Social media
deserves a specific focus as time spent by consumers on these platforms is constantly
increasing. In 2022, Internet users were 64.4 % of world population (+1.9% on 2021),
126
unique mobile users were 68.0% (+3.2% on 2021) and active social media users were
59.4% (+ 3.0% on 2021).
The marketing literature has provided different definitions and classifications of social
media and definitions of social media marketing. For example, Kaplan and Helein (2019)
consider social media as platforms on which people build networks and share information
and/or sentiments. Tuten and Solomon (2018) affirm that social media are “the online
means of communication, conveyance, collaboration, and cultivation among
interconnected and interdependent networks of people, communities, and organizations
enhanced by technological capabilities and mobility”. Similarly, Peters et al. (2013, p.
281) focussed on their distinctive nature of being “dynamic, interconnected, egalitarian,
and interactive organisms” social media have generated three fundamental changes in the
market (Li et al., 2020): 1) social media enable firms and customers to connect in ways
that were not possible in the past; 2) social media have transformed the way firms and
customers interact and influence each other. Social interaction involves “actions” (e.g.
word of mouth); 3) they allow companies to better manage customer relationships and
enhance decision making in business.
Social media can be grouped in four areas (Tuten and Solomon, 2018): social
community, social publishing, social entertainment, and social commerce. Further, they
can be used to different objectives by firms (Li et al., 2020): promote and sell, connect
and collaborate, listen and learn, empower and engage.The Authors define social media
marketing strategy (SMMS) as “an organization’s integrated pattern of activities that,
based on a careful assessment of customers’ motivations for brand-related social media
use and the undertaking of deliberate engagement initiatives, transform social media
connectedness (networks) and interactions (influences) into valuable strategic means to
achieve desirable marketing outcomes”. Therefore, SMMSs may differ depending on the
firm’s strategic objectives, social media engagement initiatives, and consumers
motivations and behaviours (Venkatesan, 2017), as well as the different degrees of
interactivity and interconnectedness in yielding sound marketing outcomes (Harmeling et
al., 2017). Futher, firm benefit from such customer engagement in both tangible (e.g.,
higher revenues, market share, profits) and intangible (e.g., feedbacks or new ideas that
help to product/service development) ways (Pansari and Kumar, 2017).
Among new technologies, social media are particularly interesting to investigate since
they can be more easily adopted by smaller firms, even those located in lagging areas
(Aronica et al., 2021). According to the Authors, their usage could even stimulate
127
economic convergence, or at least mitigate divergence, between core business and lagging
regions.
Recent literature shows that social media can play a strategic role also in B2B
contexts (Lamberton and Stephen, 2016; Bocconcelli et al., 2017) and that sales people
increasingly use social media in their work (Itani et al., 2017; Lacoste, 2016). For
example, Fraccastoro et al. (2020) investigated the importance of the integrated use of
social media digital, and traditional communication tools in the B2B sales process of
international SMEs stressing that digital communication tools seem to be most prevalent
in the persuasion phase, whereas more traditional communication tools still prevail in
customer relationship management.
2.2 Studies on digital communication and skills of Italian SMEs
To investigate digital communication and social media, qualitative analyses and pilot
studies have been adopted, while a lack of quantitative studies is observed (Aronica et al.,
2021). Further, most of the studies on digital communication tools and social media refer
to large companies.
A study on a sample of Italian SMEs (Cesaroni and Consoli, 2015) shows that,
although social media are quite common among small businesses. they are not always
able to use these tools in a truly profitable way. Social media are often introduced because
they are "fashionable", because companies feel "forced" to use them. as "all competitors
do it". However, there are different situations and an entrepreneur mentality makes the
difference.
A recent study on the digitalization of Italian companies (Bettiol et al., 2017) have
stressed that marketing is one of the most impacted business functions, both in large and
small companies and that it is a strategic function for the digitalization of the whole
organization.
An empirical investigation on a large sample of firms and specifically focusing on the
lagging regions of Italy, namely, the southern regions (Aronica et al., 2021) indicates that
smaller firms in lagging areas are more likely to adopt social media but at the same time
less likely to use them at a professional level. This reflects poor strategic targets of social
media adoption and lower probabilities of entering international markets.
A recent survey carried out by Italiaonline in 2021 stressed that the investments in
digitalization of a representative sample of about ten thousand Italian SMEs has increased
128
by 22% with respect to 2020. The 73% of the sample have a website, 12% have an
e-commerce around 200.000 companies have carried out online communication and
advertising campaigns on search engines. Further, 49.9% of the sample use social media.
in particular Facebook (94.6%) and Instagram (44.8%). In 2021, in particular, both the
number of companies that made investments in digital increased, equal to 1.2 million
units (+7.5%). and the average investment per company, which reached 2.3 thousand
euros (+13%). The study shows the consolidation of digital communication compared to
traditional media: in comparison. the growth of the market of traditional means of
communication (e.g. TV, Radio, press, billboards, fairs, etc.) is still significantly lower
than the pre-pandemic values of 2019. It is important to underline that the overthrow of
digital communication investment in traditional ones took place in 2020. However, the
use, even commercial, of communities is more exploited by medium/large companies
which rely on social interactions for 55.2% and 59.9% respectively. Influencer marketing
strongly increased (+50% in terms of investments compared to 2020) and while initially it
was considered the prerogative of medium-large companies, now it is increasingly used
by small businesses too. Technology together with strategy can give business answers
already in the short term even without large investments and with few resources.
However, this study underlines the lack of competencies to use these new tools.
The demand for digitally competent personnel in marketing and communication has
increased with the digital revolution and the new ICT (Kotler et al., 2021; Sassoon, 2022).
The role of managers and employees is widely recognized as central to the successful
adoption of digital technologies by SMEs and studies have shown the importance of
(senior) managerial commitment and support (Ko et al., 2021). Indeed, managers and
employees need to develop digital skills, together with the use of digital tools, to
collectively develop a digital capability in SMEs (Proksch et al., 2021) and remain
competitive (Ko et al., 2021).
Thus, one relevant digital revolution’s implication is the need for new skills and
professionals. The academic (Gregori and Pascucci, 2018) and practitioner literature
(Cantamaesse and Ferrero, 2022) identified many new professionals in digital marketing
and communication such as digital content manager, social media manager, SEO
manager, Web analyst, e-commerce manager, digital PR, data scientist and community
manager.
Recent studies on the impact of digital transformation on human resources are focused
on large companies (Conte and Siano, 2023). However, personnel in small and medium
129
firms (SMEs) have a much lower likelihood to participate in adult learning activities than
workers in large firms. According to the OECD Survey of Training in SMEs (2022) - that
reviews initiative in Italy that can expand the up- and re-skilling efforts of SMEs to
accompany their digital and green transition - three out of four Italian SMEs trained their
workers informally in 2018-19, while only 46% offered a formal or non-formal training
activity. Furthermore, the share of firms offering more structured forms of training is
increasing in size, with 61% of medium firms offering it in 2018-19, as opposed to 38%
of micro firms. Three main barriers prevent SMEs from investing further in their
workforce’s skills: the lack of a learning culture in these firms, their relative inability to
identify skill gaps and attract appropriately qualified workers, and the high sensitivity to
the cost of training.
3 Methodology
To answer the research questions, a quantitative study based on a structured
questionnaire was conducted with the entrepreneur of a selected sample of Italian SMEs.
Based on the concepts and models of the digital revolution in marketing and
communication identified in the literature, a questionnaire was designed. The research
questionnaire used for the survey, which was administered guaranteeing the anonymity of
the respondents, consists of 15 questions (multiple choices and with a 7-point Likert
scale, dichotomous questions and one open question) divided into three parts.
The first part of the questionnaire contains questions to identify the company profile:
company type (B2B and B2C) company size (small and medium), sector (metal, furniture,
leather, textile and clothing, food, wood and cork, etc.), and revenues (five discrete
categories calculated in millions of euros: < 1, 1–4, 5–9.9, 10–49.9, > 50).
The second part is aimed at identifying the new digital communication tools and
online metrics adopted by companies. In particular, questions were related to identify the
composition of the digital communication mix and the major social media areas adopted
the main scopes of using social media platforms. The following digital communication
mix was adopted (Gregori and Pascucci, 2018): corporate website, corporate blog, social
media, email marketing, display advertising, google advertising, paid advertising on
social media and chatbot.
Furthermore, the classification of social media proposed by Tuten and Solomon
(2018) was adopted: social community, social content, social entertainment, and social
130
commerce. the scopes of social media were taken by Li et al. (2020): to promote and sell,
to connect and collaborate, to listen and learn, to empower and engage. A list of the most
commonly used online metrics was also taken from the marketing literature (Gregori and
Pascucci, 2018): like, share, comments, number of fans, engagement, website visits,
average time spend on web site, Cost through rate (CTR), cost per click (CPC), and
conversion rate.
The third part of the research questionnaire consists of questions aimed at identifying
the current and desired level of digital skills. One question refers to the evaluation on a
1-7 Likert scale of the current digital marketing and communication skills and the skills
they need to develop to compete in a digital context. Furthermore, respondents were
asked to indicate the most important digital professionals for the company. In particular, a
list of new digital professionals was taken from the literature (Cantamesse and Ferrero,
2022) and respondents were asked to select maximum three options among digital content
manager, social media manager, SEO manager, Web analyst, e-commerce manager,
digital PR, data scientist and community manager. An open-ended question is aimed at
identifying the level of investment in digital communication, measured as the percentage
of digital communication budget on the total communication budget. In the last question,
respondents were asked to indicate whether a data-driven marketing approach is used.
The sample is made up of 205 manufacturing companies from the Marche region and
is stratified by company size and province. It was extracted from the iCribis database of
July 2021. Data was called in August and September 2021. The survey process was
web-based and descriptive statistics were performed.
4 Results
4.1 Sample characteristics
The sample is made up of 205 manufacturing companies from the Marche region and
is stratified by company size and by provinces. Table 1 shows the distribution of
companies by type (B2C and B2B), size and sector. The sample reflects quite well the
distribution of the overall manufacturing companies in the Marche region since the
universe/sample variations are almost irrelevant. It is made up of 62% B2B companies,
38% B2C companies. Most of the companies are small (61%) and among medium-sized
companies (39%), the companies with 51-100 employees prevail (27%) followed by
companies with 101-200 employees (10%) while the largest companies with 201-249
131
employees are very scant (2%). Companies that manufacture metal products (16%),
leather and similar articles (11%), textile and clothing (9%) wood and cork (8%) prevail,
followed by companies of the following sectors: rubber and plastic (7%), mineral (7%),
food (7%) furniture (6%) computer and electrotechnics (5%) and electronics (5%).
Table 1: Sample descriptive statistics
Company Type
N
%
B2B
127
62
B2C
78
38
Company Size
Small (11-50 employees)
126
61
Medium (51-250 employees)
79
39
Sector
Metal
33
16
Leather
22
11
Textile and clothing
19
9
Wood and cork
17
8
Rubber and plastic
15
7
Minerals
15
7
Food
15
7
Furniture
13
6
Computer and electronics
11
5
Electrical appliances
11
5
Other
25
3
Revenue (million euros)
< 1
25
12
1 - 4.9
77
38
5 - 9.9
34
17
10 - 49.9
61
30
> 50
8
4
N=205
4.2 Digital communication mix, social media and metrics
132
The respondents of the sample show that the digital communication mix (tab. 2) is
still scant (the average value is 2.72 on a 1-7 Likert scale). Table 18 shows that the main
digital communication tools is email marketing (6.09), followed by the corporate website
(4.49), whatsapp (3.75) Facebook (3) LinkedIn (2.81) and Instagram (2.67). Despite the
fact that e-mail is widely used, there is a very low use of e-mail marketing software
(2.39), especially by small companies. Among the other suggested communication tools,
four companies indicated virtual fairs and events, Google ads, Google News and direct
contact. Medium companies use more digital tools on average (3.01) than small
companies (2.55).
In particular, medium companies use much more paid advertising on social media
(3.04), google ads (2.76) and LinkedIn than small companies, while small companies use
WhatsApp (Var. -1.03) more than medium ones. B2C companies use on average slightly
more digital communication tools (3.13) to communicate with customers than BtoB
companies (2.62). As expected, B2B companies use more paid adv on social media,
google ads, display advertising (e.g. banner) and Linked and e-mail than B2C companies
which use much more Facebook and Instagram.
Table 2: The digital communication mix
Digital
communication
tools
Company size
Company type
SMEs
Small
Medium
Var.
B2B
B2C
Var.
Corporate website
4.49
4.18
4.99
0.81
4.43
4.60
0.17
Corporate Blog
1.70
1.67
1.76
0.09
1.57
1.92
0.35
Youtube
2.01
1.76
2.41
0.65
1.97
2.08
0.11
Facebook
3.00
2.77
3.37
0.6
2.60
3.65
1.05
Instagram
2.67
2.39
3.11
0.72
2.31
3.24
0.93
LinkedIn
2.81
2.45
3.39
0.94
3.00
2.51
-0.49
E-mail
6.09
6.07
6.13
0.06
6.24
5.85
-0.39
Whatsapp
3.75
4.14
3.11
-1.03
3.77
3.71
-0.06
Chatbot and/or AI
tools
1.31
1.21
1.46
0.25
1.19
1.50
0.03
Google advertising
2.40
2.17
2.76
0.59
2.20
3.09
0.89
Paid adv on social
media
2.53
2.21
3.04
0.83
2.26
4.56
2.3
Display advertising
2.02
1.70
2.54
0.84
31.81
2.91
1.1
PR and online
events
2.06
1.77
2.52
0.75
2.08
2.71
0.63
Other
1.30
1.19
1.48
0.28
1.20
1.46
0.26
Mean
2.72
2.55
3.01
0.46
2.62
3.13
0.49
133
Similarly, the level of adoption of software to digitally manage customers
relationship is scant. Medium-sized companies use more CRM for marketing and sale,
marketing automation and email marketing software than small companies, while B2C
use more marketing automation, but, both B2B and B2C companies use CRM and email
marketing software in a similar way.
Table 3: Software adopted to digitally manage customers
Software
Company size
Company type
SMEs
Small
Medium
Var.
B2B
B2C
Var.
CRM
2.38
1.94
3.06
1.12
2.39
2.36
-0.03
Marketing
automation
1.99
1.80
2.28
0.48
1.72
2.65
0.93
Email marketing
software
2.39
2.02
2.99
0.97
2.23
2.65
0.42
Mean
1.69
1.44
2.08
0.64
1.59
1.92
0.33
The use of social media is quite scant as the average value is mostly under three on a
1-7 Likert scale (table 4). As expected, the most used areas of social media are a social
community (2.84) and social publishing (2.72). with a considerable gap between medium
and small companies. and between B2C and B2B companies where the former makes
greater use of them. Social commerce is underutilized (1.78) but B2C companies use it
mostly (2.35). The use of social entertainment (1.76) is very low even in medium-sized
enterprises. The data suggests that there is still ample room for improvement by local
SMEs in exploiting the potential of social media in all four dimensions. Owning or using
them does not guarantee that social media are also well used in the processes of value
creation and co-creation.
Table 4: The four areas of social media (average value 1-7 Likert scale)
Social media area
Company size
Company type
SMEs
Small
Medium
Var.
B2B
B2C
Var.
Social community
2.84
2.52
3.35
0.83
2.57
3.28
0.71
Social publishing
2.72
2.47
3.11
0.59
2.55
2.99
0.44
Social
entertainment
1.53
1.38
1.76
0.38
1.48
1.69
0.21
Social commerce
1.78
1.65
1.97
0.32
1.43
2.35
0.92
134
Mean
2.22
2.01
2.55
0.53
2.01
2.58
0.57
Social media (tab. 5) are mainly used to “connect and collaborate” (4) especially by
medium-sized (4.38) and B2C (3.09) firms and less to “promote and sell” (2.71) and to
“listen and learn” (2.60). They are used even less to “empower and engage”, that is to
involve customers in projects (2.25), especially by small businesses (2.15) and B2B
companies (1.71). Therefore, communication (to connect and collaborate) represents the
most advanced form of use of social media of the SMEs analysed.
Table 5:Scope of social media
Online metrics are still poorly adopted (tab. 6) by SMEs (28.82%), especially by
small companies (23.45%). The most popular metric is website visits (56.59%) followed
by like (37.07%), number of fans (32.20%), comments, share and average time spent on
website (37.71%). The Click Through Rate (CTR) (30.24&), and the engagement rate per
post 27.80% are also used by three out of ten companies. Again, medium companies
(37.40%) use more metrics than small companies (23.45%). Similarly, B2C companies
(37.67%) adopt metrics more than B2B companies (24.27%). In particular, the former use
more the number of fans, like, abandoned carts, and time on website and conversion rate
metrics than the latter.
Table 6: Level of adoption of online metrics (%)
135
Social media scope
Company size
Company type
SMEs
Small
Medium
Var.
B2B
B2C
Var.
To promote and sell
2.71
2.58
2.91
0.33
2.04
3.09
1.05
To connect and
collaborate
4.00
3.76
4.38
0.62
2.93
4.56
1.63
To listen and learn
2.60
2.43
2.89
0.46
2.06
2.91
0.85
To empower and
engage
2.25
2.15
2.42
0.27
1.71
2.47
1.03
Mean
2.89
2.73
3.15
0.42
2.19
3.26
1.14
Metric
Company size
Company type
SMEs
Small
Medium
Var.
B2B
B2C
Var.
Like
37.07
25.40
55.70
30.30
30.71
47.44
16.73
Share
31.71
26.98
39.24
12.26
25.98
39.74
13.76
Comments
31.71
26.98
39.24
12.26
31.50
44.87
13.38
Number of fans
32.20
24.60
44.30
19.70
23.62
44.87
21.25
4.3 Marketing and communication personnel and new digital skills
The manufacturing companies of the sample adopt mostly both internal and external
(tab. 7) marketing and communication skills (47.3%) followed by internal personnel
(43.9%). Small companies show a slightly higher level of internal marketing skills than
medium companies, while B2B companies use more internal skills (47.24%) than B2C
companies (38.46%). B2C companies use the highest level of external professionals in
communication and marketing (10.26%).
Table 7: Marketing and communication personnel (%)
In the entrepreneurs perspective the most important professionals digital marketing
and communication (tab. 8) in their business are digital content manager (46.3%), social
media manager (42.4%) and SEO manager (34.6%). Social media manager is much more
important for B2C companies (55.13%) than B2B context, and for medium companies
(54.4%) than small ones. Furthermore, e-commerce is much more important for B2C
companies than B2B companies, as well as web analyst and community manager.
Table 8: The most important digital marketing and communication professionals
136
Engagement
27.80
23.02
35.44
12.43
25.20
33.33
8.14
Website visits
56.59
49.21
68.35
19.15
55.12
58.97
3.86
Time on web site
31.71
24.60
43.04
18.43
25.98
41.03
15.04
CTR
30.24
25.40
37.97
12.58
24.41
38.46
14.05
Cost per click
17.07
13.49
22.78
9.29
13.39
24.36
10.97
Conversion rate
14.15
13.49
15.19
1.70
8.66
23.08
14.42
Abandoned carts
6.83
4.76
10.13
5.36
2.36
17.95
15.59
Mean
28.82
23.45
37.40
13.95
24.27
37.65
13.38
Marketing and
communication personnel
SMEs
Small
Medium
B2B
B2C
Internal
43.9
50
34.2
47.24
38.46
External
8.8
8.7
8.9
3.94
10.26
Both internal and external
47.3
41.3
57
48.82
51.28
Total
100
100
100
100
100
Professionals in
digital marketing
and communication
Company type
Company type
Small
%
Medium
%
Var.
%
SMEs
%
B2B
%
B2C
%
Var.
%
Digital content
manager
40.6
54.4
13.8
46.3
49.61
41.03
-8.58
Focussing on digital marketing and communication skills, the study reveals that all the
respondents affirm that the current digital skills (2.96) and the digital skills companies
need to develop (3.32), as well as current training costs (2.85) are very low, on a 1-7
Likert scale.
Table 9: Digital marketing and communication skills (1-7 Likert scale)
Company size and
type
Current skills
Skills to develop
Training costs
Small SMEs
2.96
3.32
2.85
Medium
3.56
3.94
3.52
SMEs
3.19
3.56
3.11
B2B
3.00
3.31
2.87
B2C
3.49
3.95
3.49
Furthermore, the investment in digital communication, measured by the percentage of
the digital communication budget on the total communication budget, (tab. 10) is still low
in SMEs (26.57%), especially in small (15.44%) and B2B (16.24%) enterprises.
Table 10: Digital communication budget
Company size and type
Digital communication budget (%)
Small
15.44
Medium
26.57
SMEs
19.73
B2B
16.24
B2C
26.44
Consistently, table 11 shows a scant use of data to develop marketing and
communication strategies. Indeed, all the companies seem not to use sufficiently big data
to take decisions and are not aware of the importance of adopt data-driven marketing in
the near future, except for medium-sized companies (4.29).
137
Social media
manager
34.4
54.4
20
42.4
34.65
55.13
20.48
SEO manager
32.5
38.0
5.5
34.6
33.86
35.90
2.04
Web analyst
14.3
13.9
-0.4
14.1
13.39
19.23
5.84
E-commerce
manager
14.3
17.7
3.4
15.6
10.24
24.36
14.12
Digital PR
11.9
12.7
0.8
12.2
10.24
15.38
5.14
Data scientist
6.3
13.9
7.3
9.3
11.02
6.41
-4.2
Community
manager
5.6
5.1
-0.5
5.4
3.94
7.69
5.14
Table 11: Data-driven marketing approach
Company size and type
Current use of data
Importance to use data
SMEs
3.40
3.45
Small
3.06
2.92
Medium
3.92
4.29
B2B
3.37
3.37
B2C
3.43
3.57
5 Discussion and conclusions
The aims of this paper were to understand how manufacturing small and
medium-sized companies communicate in a digitalized business environment and which
digital skills are adopting. As the academic and practitioner literature are mainly focused
on digital transformation of large firms, this study investigated digital communication
strategy and skills in small and medium-sized companies, identifying gaps between B2C
and B2B contexts.
Three main results answer the research questions. First, the level of adoption of digital
communication in SMEs is generally very low (2.72 in a 1-7 Liker scale). This result, in
line with the previous literature (among others, Dethine et al., 2020; Cesaroni and
Consoli, 2015; Caliskan et al., 2021), can be explained by the fact that the structural limits
of SMEs, especially the lack of financial resources and poor managerial and digital
culture can prevent them from exploiting the opportunities of digital transformation.
Second, medium sized firms adopt a slightly higher level of digital communication
mix than medium-sized firms, as well as B2C firms with respect to B2B firms. On the one
hand, this result confirms that medium-sized firms have more resources and culture in
comparison to small firms and can better face the challenges and seize the opportunities
of digital transformation. Therefore, most likely, medium-sized companies could adopt a
more strategic approach to digital marketing and communication. On the other hand, this
result shows that communication in B2B firms is increasingly digital.
Among digital communication channels, B2C companies are mainly adopting the
major social media platforms. Only LinkedIn is more popular in B2B context. All
respondents state that the main purpose of social media, especially social networks, is “to
connect and collaborate”. This means that main purpose is still the basic one, which is to
communicate. More demanding and ambitious goals suggested in the literature (Tuten and
Solomon, 2018; Li et al., 2021), such as “to empower and engage”, which require a strong
138
commitment and an active role of the company, are the least adopted among the
companies in our sample. Furthermore, this result indicates that small enterprises may
adopt social media but are less likely to use them with a clear strategy. Hence, this result
is in line with the main literature (Aronica et al. 2021; Fraccastoro et al., 2020).
Furthermore, the average values of the use of metrics, the percentage of the digital
communication budget on the total communication budget and the use of data to develop
a data-driven strategy are very low.
Third, the actual level of digital communication and marketing skills is very low
(2.96) compared to the skills needed in a digitalized environment. In the entrepreneurs
perspective, the digital skills required (3.32) and the actual training costs (2.85) are also
very low. Therefore, respondents underestimate the importance of properly developing
new skills. This result may be interpreted with the structural limitations of SMEs and the
low awareness of management of the benefits associated with the digital transition (Ko et
al., 2022; Conte and Siano, 2023; OECD report, 2022).
The main preliminary theoretical contribution of the study consists in the attempt to
take a broad perspective on the topic, since we investigated the digital communication
strategy of SMEs both in terms of the digital communication mix adopted - with a focus
on social media - online metrics, budget and digital communication skills and by size and
type.
The small size of the sample and the geographic origin of companies imply limited
generalizability and further research on the topic is recommended.
This study has several preliminary managerial implications. The results suggest that
entrepreneurs and their collaborators should be more aware of the importance of investing
in digital communication and developing marketing and communication skills. Italian
companies are very good at manufacturing “beautiful and well-made” products, but they
should learn more to effectively communicate their offer. This means that SMEs should
be open to cooperate with new digital marketing professionals, especially digital natives.
Furthermore, some institutional implications are provided. Policymakers could provide
financial resources, training and advice in digital communication to help the digital
transformation process of SMEs. Universities could help to increase awareness and
knowledge of digital marketing and communication and develop appropriate skills
through ad hoc training programs with entrrpreneurs.
The research is in progress and futher analysis will include Anova analysis of variance
and cluster analysis in order respectively to calculate the significativity of differences of
139
means between groups and to create clusters of companies with similar digital
communication strategies and skills.
Due to its exploratory design, future studies should focus on both qualitative research,
such as case studies, in order to gain a deep understanding of the most successful
communication strategies, and quantitative research (e.g. with a longitudinal design).
References
Ardito, L., Petruzzelli, A. M., Panniello, U., and Garavelli, A. C. (2019) “Towards Industry 4.0:
Mapping digital technologies for supply chain management marketingintegration”, Business
Process Management Journal, Vol. 25, No. 2, pp. 323-346.
Aronica, M., Barney, J.B., (1991) “Firm Resources and Sustained Competitive Advantage”, Journal
of Management, Vol. 17, No. 1, pp. 99-120.
Davenport, T. H. and Prusak, L., (1998) Working knowledge: How organizations manage what they
know, Harvard Business School Press, Boston.
Bonfanti, R. C. and Piacentino D. (2021) “Social media adoption in Italian firms.
Opportunities and challenges for lagging regions”, Papers in Regional Science published by
John Wiley & Sons Ltd on behalf of Regional Science Association International.
Başyazicioğlu, H. and Karamustafa, K. (2018), “Marketing 4.0; Impacts of technological
developments on marketing activities”, Kirikkale University Journal of Social Sciences
(KUJSS), Vol. 8, No. 2, pp. 621-640.
Bala, M., and Verma, D. (2018) “A Critical Review of Digital Marketing”. International Journal of
Management. IT & Engineering,Vol. 8, No. 10 pp. 321-339.
Bettiol, M., Capestro, M. and Di Maria, E. (2017) “Industry 4.0: The Strategic Role of Marketing”,
Vol. 213, Marco Fanno Working Papers.
Caliskan, A., Özkan Özen, Y. D., and Ozturkoglu, Y. (2021) “Digital transformation of traditional
marketing business model in new industry era”, Journal of Enterprise Information, Vol. 34, No.
4, pp. 1252-1273.
Cesaroni, F. M., and Consoli, D. (2015) “Are small businesses really able to take advantage of
social media?” Electronic Journal of Knowledge Management, Vol. 13, No. 4, pp. 257–268.
Chaffey, D., and Ellis-Chadwick, F. (2019) Digital Marketing (7th ed.), Pearson, Harlow, England.
Cham, T.-H., Cheah. J.-H., Memon. M. A., Fam. K.-S., and László. J. (2022) “Digitalization and its
impact on contemporary marketing strategies and practices”. Journal of Marketing Analytics.
Vol. 10. No. 2. pp. 103-105.
Conte, F. and Siano, A. (2023) "Data-driven human resource and data-driven talent management
in internal and recruitment communication strategies: an empirical survey on Italian firms and
insights for European context". Corporate Communications: An International Journal,
doi.org/10.1108/CCIJ-02-2022-0012
Dethine, B., Enjolras, M., and Monticolo, D. (2020) “Digitalization and SMEs’ Export
Management: Impacts on Resources and Capabilities”, Technology Innovation Management
Review, Vol. 10, No. 4, pp. 18-34.
European Commission (2022) Report “Digital Economy and Society Index (DESI) 2022 Human
Capital”.
Gregori G. L. and Pascucci F. (2018) “Il digital marketing come fattore competitivo verso un
approccio integrato ‘strumenti’ e ‘strategia’ ”, Franco Angeli, Milano.
Italiaonline (2022) Presenza e Comunicazione digitale”, report.
140
Itani, O. S., Agnihotri, R. and Dingus, R. (2017) “Social media use in B2b sales and its impact on
competitive intelligence collection and adaptive selling: Examining the role of learning
orientation as an enabler”, Industrial Marketing Management, No. 66, pp. 64-79
Kagermann, H. (2015) Change Through Digitization - Value Creation in the Age of Industry 4.0, In
Albach H., Meffert H., Pinkwart A., and Reichwald R., (Eds.), Management of Permanent
Change, pp. 23–45, Springer Fachmedien Wiesbaden, Wiesbaden.
Kaplan, A.M. and Haenlein, M. (2010) “Users of the world, unite! The challenges and opportunities
of social media”, Business Horizons, Vol. 53, No. 1, pp. 59-68.
Kergroach, S. (2020) “Giving momentum to SME digitalization”. Journal of the International
Council for Small Business, Vol. 1 No.1. pp.28-31.
Kotler, P., Kartajaya, H. and Setiawan, I. (2021) Marketing 5.0: Technology for Humanity, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., NY.
Ko, A., Feher, P., Kovacs, T., Mitev, A. and Szabo, Z. (2022). “Influencing factors of digital
transformation: management or IT is the driving force?”, International Journal of Innovation
Science, Vol. 14. No. 1, pp.1-20.
Lacoste (2016) “Perspectives on social media and its use by key account managers”, Industrial
Marketing Management, No. 54, pp. 33-43.
Lamberton, A. and Stephen T. (2016) “A thematic exploration of digital, social media, and mobile
marketing: Research evolution from 2000 to 2015 and an agenda for future inquiry”, Journal of
Marketing, Vol. 80, No. 6, pp. 146-172.
Li, F., Larimo, J. and Leonidou, L.C. (2021) “Social media marketing strategy: definition,
conceptualization, taxonomy, validation, and future agenda”, Journal of the Academy of
Marketing Science, No. 49, pp. 51-70.
Moeuf, A., Pellerin, R., Lamouri S., Tamayo-Giraldo, S. and Barbaray, R. (2018) “The industrial
management of SMEs in the era of Industry 4.0”, International Journal of Production
Research, Vol. 56, No. 3, pp. 1118-1136.
OECD report (2022) “Raising skills in SMEs in the digital transformation. A review of policy
instruments in Italy”
Osservatori.net Digital innovation (2023) “Il digitale chiama: l’Italia risponde?”, Resport
Osservatorio Agenda Digitale, January 2023.
Pagani, M., and Pardo, C. (2017) “The impact of digital technology on relationships in a business
network”. Industrial Marketing Management, Vol. 67, pp.185-192.
Pagano, A., Bocconcelli, R., Cioppi, M. (2017) “Social media as a resource in SMEs' sales
process”, Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing”, Vol. 32, No. 5, pp. 693-709.
Pansari, A., and Kumar, V. (2017) “Customer engagement: The construct, antecedents, and
consequences”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Vol. 45, No. 3, pp. 294–311.
Pencarelli, T. (2022) Digital Transition: what are the challenges facing Small and Medium-sized
Enterprises?”. Piccola Impresa/Small Business, No. 3, pp. 9-20.
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., and Demartini, P. (2022) “Italian SMEs and new scenarios in the
current geopolitical turmoil”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, No. 1, pp. 12-16.
Peters, K., Chen, Y., Kaplan, A. M., Ognibeni, B., & Pauwels, K. (2013) “Social media metrics - a
framework and guidelines for managing social media”, Journal of Interactive Marketing, Vol.
27, No. 4, pp. 281–298.
Proksch, D., Rosin, A.F., Stubner, S. and Pinkwart, A. (2021) “The influence of a digital strategy on
the digitalization of new ventures: the mediating effect of digital capabilities and a digital
culture”, Journal of Small Business Management, pp. 1-29.
Raimo, N., Turi, I.D., Rubino, M. and Vitolla, F. (2022) “Which Italian SMEs fall in love with
digitalization? An exploration into the determinants”, Meditari Accountancy Research, Vol. 30,
No. 4, pp. 1077-1092.
141
Rosário, A. T. and Dias, J. C. (2022) “Industry 4.0 and Marketing: Towards an Integrated Future
Research Agenda”, Journal of Sensor and Actuator Networks, Vol. 11, No. 30.
Tuten, T. L. and Solomon. M. R., (2018) Social Media Marketing, SAGE Publications Ltd.
Vassileva, B. (2017) “Marketing 4.0: How technologies transform marketing organization”, Obuda
Univdersity eBulletin, Vol. 7., No. 1, pp. 47-56.
Venkatesan, R. (2017) “Executing on a customer engagement strategy”, Journal of the Academy of
Marketing Science, Vol. 45, No. 3, pp. 289–293.
We are social and Meltwater, (2023) “Digital 2023 Global overview Report”, special report.
142
Crisis Management in SMEs: an empirical analysis in
the Marche region
Elisabetta Savelli
Department of Economics, Society, Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: elisabetta.savelli@uniurb.it
Federica Murmura
Department of Economics, Society, Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: federica.murmura@uniurb.it
Giada Pierli
PhD Student in Global Studies. Economy, Society and Law
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via A. Saffi, 42 - 61029 Urbino (PU) - Italy
E-mail: g.pierli@campus.uniurb.it
Abstract
Objectives: Due to the continuous and rapid changes in economic, political and social
scenarios, the centrality of the crisis and its management in the life path of enterprises has
been increasingly recognised. In this perspective, the study aims to analyse how the
discipline of crisis management can be applied to the context of Italian small and
medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), with particular focus on those operating in the Marche
region.
Literature review/Theoretical Framework: Crisis management is understood as an
ongoing process that develops within the company and makes it aware of its vulnerability
to certain negative events, thus supporting it to deal with them effectively (Khodarahmi,
2009). The continuous unexpected and traumatic events have made crisis management
indispensable for the long-term survival of companies, especially small and medium-sized
ones. In Italy, 160,000 companies fit into the European definition of small and
medium-sized and generate a total added value of EUR 204 billion (Rapporto regionale
PMI, 2022). In the Marche region, SMEs account for 99.9% of the regional industrial
fabric (Le imprese nella regione Marche, 2020).
Approach/Method: A quantitative analysis was developed by means of a survey
questionnaire, carried out through computer-assisted web interviewing (CAWI)
methodology. The target population included SMEs operating in the Marche region. A
total of 134 companies took part voluntary in the survey.
Main Results: As regards the first phase of crisis management, namely pre-crisis, the
investigated SMEs are still far from having developed a proactive attitude to business
crises. Concerning the crisis phase, on the other hand, the results obtained denote a
143
positive attitude by SMEs, especially about crisis communication, which seems to play a
fairly important role. Finally, with regard to the post-crisis phase, the level of readiness of
the SMEs under study can be considered positive overall; in fact, most of them recognise
the importance of post-crisis learning.
Value and Implications for Theory and Practice: This study contributes to enriching
studies on the topic of crisis management by deepening SMEs, which represent an
interesting setting of analysis for both academics and practitioners. It also offers
managerial implications. First, it would be particularly useful to involve heterogeneous
tools in monitoring the internal and external environment. Second, a crisis management
plan could be crucial, as it allows for a disciplined and timely response to the crisis.
Third, a crisis management team could prove very useful in coping with the complexity
involved in a crisis management process.
Keywords Company crises, Crisis management, SMEs, Crisis management process,
Crisis management tools.
Paper type Practical Paper
1. Introduction
Due to the continuous and rapid changes in economic, political, and social scenarios,
the centrality of crisis and its management within the business environment has been
increasingly recognised. Historically, the life path of a company has always been
characterised by alternating phases of success and crisis (Doern et al., 2019), which must
be addressed with the right readiness to achieve positive evolutionary results. Over the
years, growing attention has been given to the topic of crisis and its management by
entrepreneurs, moving from the concept of crisis as a particular moment in the lifetime of
a company to that of crisis management. In particular, crisis management is understood as
a continuous process that develops within the company and makes it aware of its
vulnerability to specific negative events, thus supporting it in dealing with them
effectively (Khodarahmi, 2009). In the context of small and medium-sized enterprises
(SMEs), this process takes on extreme relevance due to the lack of adequate resources and
skills (Marullo et al., 2020), which makes them particularly fragile in the face of adverse
and traumatic phenomena (Pencarelli et al., 2020).
Considering the crucial role of SMEs for the development and well-being of national
and regional economies (Björklund et al., 2020; Brown and Cowling, 2021; Doern, 2021),
deepening the topic of crisis management within this type of organisation is extremely
important. In the European Union (EU) there are 25 million SMEs, which make up 99%
of all enterprises, employ around 100 million people and generate around 56% of the EU
144
gross domestic product3. Only in Italy, 160,000 companies fit into the European definition
of small and medium-sized enterprises and generate a total added value of EUR 204
billion (Rapporto regionale PMI, 2022). Despite this evident relevance, SMEs approaches
to crisis management still appear to be poorly explored and investigated (Kurschus et al.,
2017; Eggers, 2020; Fasth et al., 2022; Salamzadeh and Dana, 2022). In this perspective,
the aim of the study is to analyse how the discipline of crisis management may be applied
within the framework of Italian small and medium-sized enterprises, with particular focus
on those in the Marche region. More specifically, the research questions that this work
intends to address are: (i) Do SMEs in the Marche region adopt a reactive, proactive or
passive attitude with respect to crisis management? (ii) In SMEs in the Marche region,
who is responsible for crisis management? (iii) How do the SMEs in the Marche region
behave when the crisis occurs? (iv) How important is taking care of the communication
aspects during a crisis for the SMEs in the Marche region? (v) How do the SMEs in the
Marche region behave once the crisis is over? To answer these questions, a quantitative
analysis was developed by means of a survey questionnaire; a total of 134 companies
located in the Marche region participated in the study.
The present paper is organised as follows. The first section offers a theoretical
framework on business crisis and crisis management, paying particular attention to the
tools that companies have at their disposal to effectively cope with crisis events. In the
second section, the research methodology deployed, and the results achieved are
presented. Finally, the third section provides the main conclusions and academic and
managerial implications, as well as limitations and suggestions for future research.
2. Literature Review
The economic-managerial literature has developed multiple definitions of business
crisis over time (Guatri; 1995, Pearson and Clair, 1998; Sciarelli, 2011; Coombs, 2007;
Pencarelli, 2013), thus making it complex to develop a unitary formulation. To fully
understand the topic, it is therefore useful to start from the distinction between the
concepts of business decline and crisis. The first can be understood as a phase of erosion
of the company's profitability and weakening of its image towards stakeholders, in which
3Stato dell’Unione delle PMI (2021), available online on
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/ATAG/2021/690633/EPRS_ATA(2021)6
90633_IT.pdf (last access on 20 March 2023).
145
there is a decay that affects both the quality of products or services and relations with
customers and suppliers (Guatri, 1995). During the decline, there is a negative impact on
the entire vitality of the company (Pencarelli, 2013), which inevitably leads to a state of
general instability. When this instability becomes systemic and irreversible and effective
recovery measures are not implemented (Guatri, 1995; Sciarelli, 2011; Pencarelli, 2013),
the state of decline turns into a crisis. The latter can thus be qualified as the acute phase of
a particular pathological situation that compromises the company's economic and
financial equilibrium, seriously compromising its ability to generate value (Sciarelli,
2011; Ciambotti, 2005; Pencarelli, 2013).
A crisis state is not always reached along a path of progressive escalation of critical
dimensions for the long-term survival of the company (Pencarelli, 2013). Sometimes,
there are sudden changes of scenario, both internal and external, that place the company
directly in the crisis phase. In general, the factors underlying the decline and crisis of
enterprises can be mainly referred to two opposing approaches, namely the
subjective-behaviourist and objective ones (Guatri, 1995). According to the first strand,
the main cause of the crisis is ascribable to the human factor, which becomes responsible
for mismanagement, managerial inadequacy, and incompetence, as well as incorrect
decision-making assessments (Paoloni, 2003; Pencarelli, 2013). On the contrary, the
objective approach recognises the vulnerability of the company to the occurrence of
specific and complex external phenomena, such as drastic decreases in demand, increases
in production factors, catastrophic events, global economic crises, sector issues,
exacerbation of stakeholder relations, changes in the competitive, legislative, social and
technological environment (Pencarelli, 2013; Provvisiero, 2014; Mayr et al., 2017). In
this perspective, the business crisis is thus the result of adverse events that can occur both
inside and outside the business context (Sciarelli, 1995). Despite this distinction, it should
be stressed that the internal and external variables at the origin of the crisis are strongly
interconnected (Palazzi et al., 2018). The crisis process, in fact, is triggered by the
inability of top management to effectively combine the turbulence and instability of the
external environment with the complex internal dynamics, due to a lack of adequate
resources and skills (Peterson et al., 1983; Coda, 1983; Pencarelli, 2013).
In addition to distinguishing between internal and external causes, the literature has
also identified different types of business crises. Although this is not an exhaustive list,
the classification formulated by Guatri (1995) is particularly useful in understanding the
different crisis situations that a company may face during its lifetime. Specifically, it is
146
possible to identify (Guatri, 1995): (i) inefficiency crisis, which occurs when one or more
company functions operate with returns that are not in line with those of competitors; (ii)
overcapacity crisis, which is caused by an excessive production capacity that is not
absorbed by the surrounding environment due to a decrease in demand, a sector crisis,
and so on; (iii) product obsolescence crisis, which manifests itself when the product is no
longer attractive to consumers. This, leads to a loss of market share and a reduction in
margins between prices and costs; (iv) crisis from lack of planning/innovation, which
arises from the inability to adapt the conditions of management to environmental changes,
accompanied by insufficient and/or ineffective innovation processes (v)
economic/financial crisis, which translates into an imbalance in the income dimension
that generates economic losses affecting the value of the company's capital and into a
compromised solvency capacity in the short and medium-long term from a financial point
of view (Pencarelli, 2013). Moreover, crises may be temporary or irreversible. In the first
case, timely remedial action or favourable environmental and market conditions can
reverse the trend and return the company to a state of regular operation; irreversible
crises, on the other hand, lead to situations of instability that inevitably lead to the end of
business activity (Pencarelli, 2013). Finally, Hahn (1988) divides crisis into: (i) potential,
that is, manifestation linked to the developments of the company's reality and contexts;
(ii) latent, meaning the occurrence is highly probable and is linked to the existence of
specific implicit and adverse conditions; (iii) acute, namely actual appearance.
Regardless of the different peculiarities and possible forms of manifestation, the crisis
has always accompanied the enterprise throughout its life path (Doern et al., 2019).
Recent years have been characterised by a deep and long recessionary phase, which has
severely challenged enterprises and their competitive capacity. Furthermore, there have
been many crises resulting from unexpected natural phenomena such as earthquakes,
floods and, most recently, the coronavirus pandemic. The instability of the environment,
both socially and naturally, has made it essential for companies to implement useful plans
to cope with any phenomenon capable of generating imbalances (Coombs and Laufer,
2018). In this scenario, the concept of crisis management finds affirmation, not only in the
sphere of large, structured, and rigid companies, but also in smaller companies (Spillan
and Hough, 2003), which are more exposed to all kinds of difficulties and with limited
resources. Over the years, the centrality of the crisis and its management by entrepreneurs
has been increasingly recognised, moving from the concept of crisis as a particular
moment in the life of a company to that of crisis management. In particular, crisis
147
management is understood as an ongoing process that develops within the company and
makes it aware of its vulnerability to certain negative events, thus supporting it to deal
with them effectively (Khodarahmi, 2009). Hence, crisis management does not only deal
with management activities during a crisis, but includes activities before, during and after
a crisis event occurs. In this sense, scholars agree that the crisis management process
consists of three phases: pre-crisis or research, crisis or response, and post-crisis or
recovery (Coombs, 2007). The pre-crisis phase is aimed at anticipating, avoiding or
eventually minimising a possible crisis. To this end, the drafting of a crisis management
plan and the establishment of a crisis management team become essential (Barton, 2001;
Coombs, 2007). The crisis management plan is not a guideline on how to manage the
crisis, but rather a tool that defines in advance several tasks, gathers key information and
serves as a reference source to optimise timing during the onset of a crisis (Barton, 2001;
Fearn-Banks, 2001; Coombs, 2007). To pre-assign tasks and responsibilities, a crisis
management team should therefore be created. The members of this team must be
adequately trained in the roles to be filled and the activities to be performed during a
crisis (Mitroff et al., 1996; Coombs, 2007). In addition, it is necessary to identify one or
more people who will be in charge of communicating with all media during the crisis;
their role will be crucial for corporate reputation and credibility (Lerbinger, 1997,
Fearn-Banks, 2001; Coombs, 2007). Other particularly useful tools to intercept and
promptly manage the first signs of danger may be the indicators contained in the New
Code on Business Crisis and Insolvency (Legislative Decree No. 14 of 12 January 2019),
strategic analysis tools and techniques such as the business formula model, planning and
control systems and the balance scorecard (Bazzerla, 2018; Baldissera, 2019; Bogarelli,
2020). In the response phase, the crisis manifests itself concretely so the company should
mobilise to contain the damage through the implementation of the crisis management
plan. There are three objectives to be pursued: (i) rapidity in providing a valid response to
stakeholders on the incident; (ii) accuracy in the information to be disclosed; (iii)
consistency in the communication of news and content (Coombs, 2007). The company
will thus be able to demonstrate its control over the crisis situation that has arisen, while
safeguarding its credibility and reputation (Carney and Jorden, 1993; Coombs, 2007). The
possibility of successfully managing a crisis situation is strongly linked to the
organisation's ability to communicate correctly and proactively with its stakeholders
(Mazzei and Ravazzani, 2015; Diers-Lawson, 2019). Although crisis management
depends primarily on the company's capacity for strategic management, the
148
communication factor plays a decisive role in the chances of ultimate success. This
communication must not only be directed externally, namely to institutions, customers,
suppliers, and associations, but also and above all internally, that is to employees and
trade unions (Adriani, 2013). Nowadays, it is also increasingly important to be able to
manage crisis dissemination on social media (Civelek et al., 2016; Maal and
Wilson-North, 2019; Wang and Cai, 2021), avoiding the sharing of incorrect content that
compromises the corporate image. In addition to crisis management and communication,
the Master Events Log (MEL), the Briefing Cycle and the Emergency Operations Room
(EOR) can also be valuable support tools (Burton, 2016; 2017). Finally, the post-crisis
phase is designed to verify the ex-post effectiveness of the actions taken in the previous
steps, to communicate the results achieved in order not to lose stakeholders' trust and to
initiate a learning process to improve the internal crisis management process (Coombs,
2007; Cucculelli, 2017). A careful evaluation of the actions taken in managing the crisis
that has just ended is essential to identify strengths and weaknesses on which to intervene
to better face possible future crises. In this sense, the tool elaborated by Folsom and
Garrettson (2020) is particularly interesting, which subdivides the post-crisis review into
four main moments: (i) basic analysis on the preparedness of the crisis management
action; (ii) assessment of responsibilities; (iii) review of company performance; (iv)
examination of the future usability of the implemented crisis management plan.
It is therefore clear that crisis management is a necessary and fundamental process for
reacting to crisis situations in a disciplined and timely manner, thereby significantly
reducing the scope of its impact. The continuous succession of unexpected and traumatic
events has renewed the interest of academics and practitioners in the topic of crisis
management. However, implementing an adequate and efficient crisis management
process appears to be quite complex, especially for small and medium-sized enterprises
(Hong et., 2012; Alves et al., 2020). Although such organisations have the inherent ability
to be flexible and to adapt quickly to sudden changes in the market (Cesaroni and Sentuti,
2016; Pencarelli et al., 2020), the frequent scarcity of financial, technological, and
organisational resources and adequate skills (Pace, 2013; Marullo et al., 2020)
significantly weakens their response to negative phenomena. Given the extreme
importance of SMEs for the development and prosperity of national and regional
economies (Björklund et al., 2020; Brown and Cowling, 2021; Doern, 2021), delving into
the topic of crisis management within this category of organisations is highly valuable
149
and could make important contributions to the literature on the subject, as well as offer
interesting food for insights for entrepreneurs and managers of such companies.
3. Research Methodology and Results
To observe the level of preparedness with respect to crisis management, the
conception of the event and the way in which the different phases of the crisis
management process are dealt with in small and medium-sized enterprises in the Marche
region, a quantitative analysis was developed by means of a survey questionnaire. The
questionnaire, carried out through computer-assisted web interviewing (CAWI)
methodology, is structured in four main sections. Specifically, the first section was
dedicated to the collection of anagraphic-descriptive information concerning the company
and the history of company crises. The remaining three sections of the questionnaire were
defined following the phases into which Crisis Management is divided, in line with what
is presented in the literature. Therefore, a section focused on the pre-crisis phase, one
dedicated to the crisis phase and finally another section on the post-crisis phase was
developed. In the section dedicated to the pre-crisis phase, the monitoring tools used by
SMEs to catch the premonitory signs of the crisis were investigated; the possible
preparation of the crisis management plan and the establishment of a crisis management
team; and the knowledge of the New Business Crisis and Insolvency Code (Legislative
Decree 14/2019). The latter aspect was analysed with the aim of assessing whether SMEs
are aware of the novelties introduced by this decree and, if so, to obtain their opinion with
respect to the usefulness that the hierarchical system of alert indexes may actually hold in
preventing a crisis. The section on the crisis, on the other hand, explores the habit of
SMEs of keeping track of all the main stages that develop as the crisis evolves, for
example by putting them in writing in a special document; the importance attributed to
internal and external communication of the crisis, especially in terms of rapidity, accuracy
and consistency; and the holding of periodic meetings within the company to discuss and
debate the crisis situation. The last section of the questionnaire refers to the post-crisis
phase and explores the management of post-crisis communication with respect to
stakeholders; the importance given by SMEs to obtaining feedback on the management of
crises that have now ended; the organisation of post-crisis meetings with their employees
in order to highlight both best practices and failures.
150
The research questionnaire was sent - from June to August 2021 - to a sample of
1,600 small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) operating in the Marche region. Such
SMEs were selected according to the definition proposed in the European Commission
Recommendation 2003/361/EC on 6 May 2003; therefore, the research target included all
those companies with registered offices in the Marche region, employing less than 250
people and with an annual turnover not exceeding EUR 50 million (or alternatively an
annual balance sheet not exceeding EUR 43 million). Based on this consideration, an
online search was conducted to identify a group of SMEs for each of the five provinces in
the Marche region. Afterwards, the different company websites were consulted to collect
the necessary contact information for the administration of the questionnaire by e-mail. A
total of 134 companies took part in the survey.
The decision to limit the research to SMEs in the Marche region stems from the
importance of these companies for the region's economy, which represent 99.9% of the
regional industrial fabric (Le imprese nella regione Marche, 2020).
3.1 Results
3.1.1 General information on the sample
The questionnaire data concerning the biographical-descriptive profile of the 134
SMEs participating in the survey are presented in Table 1. Regarding the sector, it
emerged that most of them operate in the secondary sector (69.40%), followed by those
operating in the tertiary sector (19.40%) and finally those active in the primary sector
(11.19%). About age, only two companies were founded before 1900 (specifically, in
1897). In the other cases, the year of foundation ranges from 1950 onwards, up to the
youngest, which was founded in 2020.
Table 1: Economic sector and foundation year of SMEs.
Sector
%
n.
PRIMARY SECTOR:
11,19%
15
-Primary unspecified
6,67%
1
-Agriculture
80,00%
12
-Livestock farming
6,67%
1
-Renewable energies
6,67%
1
SECONDARY SECTOR:
69,40%
93
-Unspecified industry
1,08%
1
-Textile industry
7,53%
7
151
-Food industry
4,30%
4
-Cosmetics industry
3,23%
3
-Shoe and leather industry
8,60%
8
-Wood-furniture industry
10,75%
10
-Glass industry
2,15%
2
-Plastic industry
6,45%
6
-Marble industry
1,08%
1
-Paper industry
1,08%
1
-Metal industry
32,26%
30
-Electronics industry
4,30%
4
-Marine industry
1,08%
1
-Building industry
9,68%
9
-ICT
6,45%
6
TERTIARY SECTOR:
19,40%
26
-Services not specified
23,08%
6
-IT consultancy services
15,38%
4
-Translation services
3,85%
1
-Trade services
26,92%
7
-Distribution
3,85%
1
-Transport services
3,85%
1
-Tourism services
3,85%
1
-Housekeeping
3,85%
1
-Healthcare
7,69%
2
-Graphics and advertising
3,85%
1
-Environmental Surveys
3,85%
1
Foundation year
%
n.
1897
1,49%
2
1950 1959
4,48%
6
1960 1969
5,22%
7
1970 1979
11,19%
15
1980 1989
15,67%
21
1990 1999
17,91%
24
2000 2009
14,93%
20
2010 2019
28,36%
38
2020 today
0,75%
1
Source: own elaboration.
In addition, the history of crises faced by companies over time was explored (Table
2). The majority of the SMEs participating in the study (76.12%) had to face between 1
and 5 crises during their corporate life. Moreover, among those SMEs that had faced at
least one crisis, the majority (88.50%) believed that such events were effectively
managed. This confirms what has been pointed out in the literature, which shows that no
152
company is exempt from crisis risk and that one should ask not so much if a crisis will
occur, but rather when and what kind of crisis will occur (Brown, 2019).
Table 2: History of SME company crises.
Total crises managed
%
n.
No crisis
15,67%
21
From 1 to 5 crises
76,12%
102
More than 5 crises
8,21%
11
Effectiveness of past crisis management
%
n.
Yes
88,50%
100
No
11,50%
13
Source: own elaboration.
3.1.2 Pre-crisis section
With respect to the pre-crisis phase, 62.69% of the surveyed SMEs stated that they
monitor the internal and external environment to catch pre-crisis warning signs (Table 3).
Specifically, the tools mainly used to carry out such monitoring are those of planning and
control (58.33%). This is followed by activities concerning the calculation and evaluation
of budget indices (17.86%), strategic analyses and evaluations (13.10%) and the use of
the Balanced Scorecard tool (2.38%).
Table 3: Detection of premonitory signs of crisis by SMEs.
Implementation of internal/external environment
monitoring activities to detect premonitory signs of crisis
%
n.
Yes
62,69%
84
No
37,31%
50
Type of activities carried out to monitor the
internal/external environment and to catch premonitory
signs of crisis
%
n.
Planning and control
58,33%
49
Calculation and evaluation of balance sheet ratios
17,86%
15
Strategic analysis and evaluation
13,10%
11
Balanced Scorecard
2,38%
2
Other
8,33%
7
Source: own elaboration.
Despite the importance given to the drafting of a crisis management plan and the
creation of a crisis management team to effectively deal with negative phenomena
153
(Barton, 2001; Coombs, 2007), the majority of SMEs (86.57%) stated that they do not use
such tools. Many of them (88.06%) also specified that it is the entrepreneur himself who
manages any crisis (Table 4).
Table 4. Definition of Crisis Management Plan and Crisis Management Team by SMEs.
Definition of Crisis Management Plan
%
n.
Yes
13,43%
18
No
86,57%
11
6
Definition of Crisis Management Team
%
n.
Yes
5,22%
7
No, crisis management is assigned to the entrepreneur
alone
88,06%
11
8
No, crisis management is assigned to professionals
outside the company
6,72%
9
Source: own elaboration.
Finally, 72.39% of the companies surveyed stated that they were not aware of the
innovations introduced by the New Code of Business Crisis and Insolvency (Legislative
Decree 14/2019) in preventing crises. Among the SMEs in the sample that are aware of
the decree and therefore the hierarchical system of alert indices presented in it, it is
interesting to note that 56.76% do not believe that this system is actually useful in
predicting and preventing a crisis situation (Table 5).
Table 5: SMEs' knowledge of the New Business Crisis and Insolvency Code (Legislative
Decree 14/2019).
Knowledge of the New Business Crisis and Insolvency Code
(Legislative Decree 14/2019)
%
n.
Yes
27,61%
37
No
72,39%
97
Usefulness of the hierarchical system of alert indices
presented in the decree
%
n.
Yes
43,24%
16
No
56,76%
21
Source: own elaboration.
3.1.3 Crisis Section
Despite the importance emphasised in the literature regarding tracking, most of the
responding SMEs (60.45%) do not keep a record of crisis-related events (Table 6).
154
Table 6: Recording/tracking of crisis-related events by SMEs.
%
n.
Yes
39,55%
53
No
60,45%
81
Source: own elaboration.
Figure 1 shows the degree of attention with which the SMEs in the sample
communicate information about the crisis, both internally and externally to the company.
In this regard, the majority of the sample (87.31%) showed themselves to be attentive to
crisis communication activities, with values ranging from 3 (indifferent) to 5 (high degree
of attention) being predominantly attributed to them.
Figure 1: Degree of attention of SMEs in providing information on the crisis, internally
and externally to the company.
Source: own elaboration.
Based on the factors identified by Coombs (2007) regarding crisis communication,
three questions were then asked regarding the importance SMEs attach to rapidity,
accuracy, and consistency in crisis communication. A large majority of SMEs (81.34%)
attributed a medium to high degree of importance to the rapidity of communication, while
a small percentage of respondents (18.66%) did not attribute significant importance to this
element (Figure 2). About the precision and accuracy of the information provided,
40.30% of the SMEs surveyed assigned a very high degree of importance to these
elements, while only a few SMEs assigned a low degree of importance to this factor
155
(5.97%) (Figure 3). Similarly, the element of consistency was considered extremely
important by the majority of the sample (45.52%), who assigned this element a value of 5
(Figure 4).
Figure 2: Degree of importance given by SMEs to the element of timeliness in crisis
communication.
Source: own elaboration.
Figure 3: Degree of importance given by SMEs to the element of accuracy/precision in
crisis communication.
156
Source: own elaboration.
Figure 4: Degree of importance given by SMEs to consistency in crisis communication.
Source: own elaboration.
At the end of the section, the sample was asked about the periodic holding of
meetings within the company to discuss crisis situations. In line with what was suggested
157
by Burton (2017), most of the SMEs studied used to hold periodic meetings during the
crisis period (76.12%), with the aim of sharing information internally and establishing
future strategies (Table 7).
Table 7: Organisation of meetings during the crisis period.
%
n.
Yes
76,12%
102
No
23,88%
32
Source: own elaboration.
3.1.4 Post-crisis section
Observing Table 8, it emerges that most of the responding SMEs (60.45%) are
attentive to post-crisis communication, trying to inform the relevant stakeholders about
the company's recovery situation.
Table 8: Implementation of post-crisis communication.
%
n.
Yes
60,45%
81
No
39,55%
53
Source: own elaboration.
Thereafter, the importance that SMEs recognise in obtaining feedback on the
management of closed crises was explored. Again, they were asked to express a degree of
importance on a scale of 1 to 5. The answers obtained show that the majority of SMEs
consider this element important (88.80%), attributing it values ranging from medium to
high (Figure 5). It is only through a careful evaluation of past crises, in fact, that
companies can be stronger and more resilient to possible future crises (Folsom and
Garrettson, 2020).
Figure 5: Degree of importance given by SMEs to obtaining feedback in relation to crisis
management ended.
158
Source: own elaboration.
Finally, the majority of SMEs participating in the survey (61.19%) stated that they
carry out post-crisis meetings with their employees in order to be able to highlight best
practices, which are useful in view of future crisis management (Table 9).
Table 9: Organisation of post-crisis meetings in SMEs.
%
n.
Yes
61,19%
82
No
38,81%
52
Source: own elaboration.
4. Conclusions
Although crisis management has long been a subject of study in managerial and
organisational theory, the magnitude and persistence of recent political, economic and
health crises have once again made this topic of extreme topicality and interest. This
attention is even more important in the context of small and medium-sized enterprises,
which have always appeared particularly vulnerable in the face of crisis situations
(Pencarelli et al., 2020). With the aim of investigating how Italian SMEs, and in particular
those in the Marche region, conceive the crisis and how they manage it, a quantitative
159
survey was conducted based on the administration of a specific research questionnaire.
The results show that only a small number of SMEs surveyed had never had to manage
crisis situations. With respect to these, the year of foundation is quite heterogeneous; the
oldest SME was founded in 1950, while the youngest SME was founded in 2019. From
this it can be deduced that a company can operate for many years without necessarily
encountering a crisis, although this does not make it immune to future crises. In this
regard, the Crisis Management theory suggests conceiving the crisis as a normal event in
corporate life, which will hit the company sooner or later (Bazzerla, 2018). Regarding the
first phase of crisis management, the pre-crisis phase, the SMEs surveyed are still far
from having developed a proactive attitude towards company crises. Although most
companies state that they monitor the internal and external environment, the main tools
used to carry out this activity focus mainly on monetary aspects, while crises can result
from different causes (Paoloni, 2003; Pencarelli, 2013; Mayr et al., 2017). Concerning the
crisis phase, on the other hand, the results obtained denote a rather positive attitude by the
SMEs interviewed, especially as regards crisis communication, which, from what
emerged, seems to play a fairly important role. Consistent with what is suggested in the
literature (Coombs, 2007), the companies analysed are also used to organising meetings
during the crisis period to become fully aware of the situation and to study the most
appropriate strategies to be undertaken. On the contrary, few SMEs in the sample reported
having prepared a crisis management plan and having set up a crisis management team,
although these tools are considered essential (Barton, 2001; Coombs, 2007). With specific
reference to the establishment of the crisis management team, SMEs point out that the
management of possible crises is generally left to the entrepreneur alone. Finally, as
regards the post-crisis phase, the level of preparedness of the SMEs surveyed can be
considered positive overall; in fact, most of them recognise the importance of post-crisis
learning. As pointed out by Folsom and Garrettson (2020), a careful assessment of the
strengths and weaknesses of crisis management is crucial to better cope with possible
future crises.
The study presents both academic and managerial implications. This paper contributes
to enriching studies on this topic by deepening and investigating small and medium-sized
companies, which represent an interesting setting of analysis for both academics and
practitioners. It is crucial for owners and managers of SMEs to prevent business
disruption and economic damage resulting from crisis situations. In this respect, the study
offers some insights on how SMEs can effectively manage the different stages of crisis.
160
Among the other managerial implications, it would be particularly useful to involve
heterogeneous tools in monitoring the internal and external environment, thus being able
to consider both monetary and non-monetary aspects. Moreover, a crisis management
plan could be crucial, as it allows for a disciplined and timely response to the crisis, thus
greatly reducing the scale of its impact. Finally, a crisis management team could prove
very helpful. Indeed, a proper crisis management process is particularly challenging to
implement and doing it individually could be particularly difficult and time-consuming.
Lastly, some limitations are also present. The sample of companies surveyed is small
and limited to the Marche region. In the future, it would be interesting to extend the
research to a larger number of small and medium-sized enterprises, also involving those
operating in other Italian regions. In this way it will be possible to make a comparison
within the national context, identifying the needs of this category of companies to
implement an adequate and effective crisis management.
References
Adriani R., (2013) “Crisis Communication. Gestire la comunicazione aziendale quando accade
l’imprevisto”, Rivista di scienze della comunicazione e di argomentazione giuridica, Vol.1, pp.
212-222.
Alves, J. C., Lok, T. C., Luo, Y., Hao, W., (2020) “Crisis management for small business during the
COVID-19 outbreak: Survival, resilience and renewal strategies of firms in Macau”, Research
Square.
Baldissera, A., (2019) “Italian small-sized enterprise and procedures of warning crisis”, Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 2.
Barton, L., (2001), Crisis in organizations II (2nd ed), Cincinnati, OH, College Divisions
South-Western.
Bazzerla M., (2018) “Crisi aziendali e controllo di gestione: l’importanza degli strumenti di
controllo nella prevenzione della crisi”, Metodi e strumenti, Vol. 4, pp. 23-30.
Björklund, T. A., Mikkonen, M., Mattila, P., van der Marel, F., (2020) “Expanding entrepreneurial
solution spaces in times of crisis: Business model experimentation amongst packaged food and
beverage ventures”, Journal of Business Venturing Insights, Vol. 14, n. e00197.
Bogarelli, P., (2020) “Punctual crisis assessment in SMEs: an applicative model”, Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 2.
Brown N. J., a cura di (2019) Crisis Management, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University, Workplace
Health and Safety Program.
Brown, R., & Cowling, M., (2021) “The geographical impact of the Covid-19 crisis on
precautionary savings, firm survival and jobs: Evidence from the United Kingdom’s 100
largest towns and cities”, International small business journal, Vol. 39, No. 4, pp. 319-329.
Burton R. (2016). 4 Essential Crisis Management Tools. Testo disponibile online:
https://preparedex.com/4-essential-crisis-management-tools/ (last access on 20 March 2023).
Burton R. (2017). 3 Steps to an Effective Crisis Management Briefing Cycle. Testo disponibile
online:
161
https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/3-steps-effective-crisis-management-briefing-cycle-robert-bur
ton/ (last access on 20 March 2023).
Carney, A., Jorden, A., (1993) “Prepare for business-related crises”, The Public Relations
Journal, Vol. 49, No. 8, 34.
Cesaroni, F. M., Sentuti, A., (2016) “Strategie ambidestre e crisi economica: le peculiarità della
piccola impresa”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 1.
Civelek, M. E., Çemberci, M., Eralp, N. E., (2016) “The role of social media in crisis
communication and crisis management”, International Journal of Research in Business &
Social Science, Vol. 5, No. 3.
Coda, V., (1983) “Crisi e risanamenti aziendali”, Sviluppo e organizzazione, Vol. 75, No. 1, pp.
29-44.
Coombs, W. T., (2007) “Crisis management and communications”, Institute for public
relations, Vol. 4, No. 5, pp. 1-14.
Coombs, W. T., Laufer, D., (2018) “Global crisis management–current research and future
directions”, Journal of International Management, Vol. 24, No. 3, pp. 199-203.
Cucculelli, M., (2017) “Crisi, apprendimento e governo dell’impresa”, Rivista Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 1, pp. 9-31.
Decreto legislativo 12 gennaio 2019, n.14, “Nuovo Codice della Crisi d’Impresa e dell’Insolvenza”
(pubblicato in G.U. 14 febbraio 2019, n.38).
Diers-Lawson, A., (2019) Crisis communication: Managing stakeholder relationships, Routledge.
Doern, R., (2021) “Knocked down but not out and fighting to go the distance: Small business
responses to an unfolding crisis in the initial impact period”, Journal of Business Venturing
Insights, Vol. 15, n. e00221.
Doern, R., Williams, N., Vorley, T., (2019) “Special issue on entrepreneurship and crises: business
as usual? An introduction and review of the literature”, Entrepreneurship & Regional
Development, Vol. 31, No. 5-6, pp. 400-412.
Eggers, F., (2020) “Masters of disasters? Challenges and opportunities for SMEs in times of
crisis”, Journal of business Research, Vol. 116, pp. 199-208.
Fasth, J., Elliot, V., Styhre, A., (2022) “Crisis management as practice in smalland mediumsized
enterprises during the first period of COVID19”, Journal of Contingencies and Crisis
Management, Vol. 30, No. 2, pp. 161-170.
Fearn-Banks, K., (2010) Crisis communications: A casebook approach, Routledge.
Folsom S., Garrettson R., (2020) “How to conduct a post-crisis evaluation”, Risk Management, Vol.
67, No. 6, pp. 19-22.
Guatri L., (1995) Turnaround. Declino, crisi e ritorno al valore, Milano, Egea.
Hahn D., (1988) I sistemi di pianificazione aziendale per anticipare e gestire la crisi d’impresa, in
Corno F., a cura di, Prevenzione e terapia della crisi d’impresa, Cedam, Padova.
Hong, P., Huang, C., Li, B., (2012) “Crisis management for SMEs: insights from a multiple-case
study”, International Journal of Business Excellence, Vol. 5, No. 5, pp. 535-553.
Khodarahmi, E., (2009) “Crisis management”, Disaster Prevention and Management: An
International Journal, Vol. 18, No. 5, pp. 523-528.
Kurschus, R. J., Sarapovas, T., Pilinkiene, V., (2017) “The concept of crisis management by
intervention model for SMEs”, Engineering Economics, Vol. 28, No. 2, pp. 170-179.
Le imprese nella regione Marche (2020). Available online: https://statistica.regione.marche.it/ (Last
accessed on 20 January 2023).
Lerbinger, O., (1997) The crisis manager: Facing risk and responsibility (book review), Journalism
and Mass Communication Quarterly, Vol. 74, No. 3, 646.
Maal, M., Wilson-North, M., (2019) “Social media in crisis communication–the “do’s” and
“don’ts””, International journal of disaster resilience in the built environment.
162
Marullo, C., Piccaluga, A., Cesaroni, F., (2020) “How to invest in r&d during a crisis? Exploring
the differences between fast-growing and slow-growing Smes”, Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, Vol. 1.
Marullo, C., Piccaluga, A., Cesaroni, F., (2020) “How to invest in r&d during a crisis? Exploring
the differences between fast-growing and slow-growing Smes”, Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, Vol. 1.
Mayr, S., Mitter, C. Aichmayr, A., (2017) “Corporate Crisis and Sustainable Reorganization:
Evidence from Bankrupt Austrian SMEs”, Journal of Small Business Management, Vol. 55,
No. 1, pp. 108-127.
Mazzei, A., Ravazzani, S., (2015) “Internal crisis communication strategies to protect trust
relationships: A study of Italian companies”, International Journal of Business
Communication, Vol. 52, No. 3, pp. 319-337.
Mitroff, I. I., Harrington, L. K., Gai, E., (1996) “Thinking about the unthinkable”, Across the
board, Vol. 33, pp. 44-48.
Pace, R., (2013) “Piccole e micro imprese italiane tra crisi e vincoli finanziari: un’indagine
empirica”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 1.
Palazzi, F., Sgrò, F., Ciambotti, M., (2018) “Business crisis during the global economic recession:
focus on Italian SMEs”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 3.
Paoloni, M., (2003) La crisi della piccola impresa tra liquidazione e risanamento, G. Giappichelli,
Torino.
Pearson C. M., Clair J. A., (1998) “Reframing Crisis Management”, Academy of Management
Review, Vol. 23, No. 1, pp. 59-76.
Pencarelli, T., (2013) Le crisi d'impresa. Diagnosi, previsione e procedure di risanamento: Diagnosi,
previsione e procedure di risanamento, FrancoAngeli, Milano.
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., Demartini, P., (2020) “Covid-19 and Italian small and medium-sized
enterprises: consequences, threats and opportunities”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, Vol. 3.
Peterson, R. A., Kozmetsky, G., Ridgway, N. M., (1983) “Perceived causes of small business
failures: a research note”, American journal of small business, Vol. 8, No. 1, pp. 15-19.
Provvisiero P., (2014) La crisi d’impresa Definizioni normative Interpretazioni. In: Zambon P.,
Provvisiero P., Roncari A., Campra M., Muià R., Parigi A., Roletti A., Gariglio C., Balbo F.,
Telesca S., Cornaglia S., Paracchini N., Borella G., Chiantia C., Goffi P., Fontanella L., a cura
di, La gestione dell’impresa in crisi: l’analisi di dottori commercialisti, managers ed
imprenditori, pp. 15-25Eutekne, Torino.
Rapporto regionale PMI (2022). Available online: https://www.confindustria.it/ (Last accessed on
20 January 2023).
Salamzadeh, A., Dana, L. P., (2022) “A systematic literature review of crisis management in and by
small and medium-sized enterprises”, Small and Medium Sized Enterprises and the COVID-19
Response, pp. 38-61.
Sciarelli, S., (2011) “Comunicazione e gestione della crisi”, Sinergie Italian Journal of
Management, Vol. 59, pp. 63-75.
Sciarelli, S., Della Corte, V., (1995) La crisi d'impresa: il percorso gestionale di risanamento nelle
piccole e medie imprese, Cedam, Bologna.
Spillan, J., Hough, M., (2003) “Crisis planning in small businesses: Importance, Impetus and
Indifference”, European Management Journal, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 398-407.
Stato dell’Unione delle PMI (2021), available online on
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/ATAG/2021/690633/EPRS_ATA(2021)69063
3_IT.pdf (last access on 20 March 2023).
Wang, L., Schuetz, C. G., Cai, D., (2021) “Choosing response strategies in social media crisis
communication: an evolutionary game theory perspective”, Information & Management, Vol.
58, No. 6, 103371.
163
Russia-Ukraine invasion: a study on the geopolitical
and energetic scenarios and the effects on the Italian
SMEs
Maria Grazia Strano
Department of Economics and Business
University of Catania
Palazzo delle Scienze - Corso Italia, 55 - 95129 Catania
E-mail: maria.strano@phd.unict.it
Simone Rinaldi
Department of Social and Political Sciences
University of Catania
Palazzo Pedagaggi - Via Vittorio Emanuele II, 49 - 95131 Catania
E-mail: simone.rinaldi@phd.unict.it
Abstract
The war in Ukraine is having significant and dramatic consequences for both countries
involved and worldwide in many aspects. The energy sector is one of the key areas
affected by the conflict: leading directly and indirectly to widespread disruptions in gas
supplies to the EU countries. Leaving aside that Ukraine is a relevant transit country for
Russian gas to Europe, sanctions, bans, and the reaction of the Western countries
influenced primarily the energy market causing instability and concerns about energy
security. The crisis has highlighted a concept that is not new: the need for the European
Union to reduce dependency levels on Russian gas by diversifying its energy sources and
raw materials supply. The increase in energy prices has had an unfavourable impact on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs). Therefore, this has led to a decrease in profits for
Italian SMEs, caused by increasing production costs. Because of these events, it is
possible to observe a higher business churn rate, pointing out that SMEs are suffering and
struggling to remain competitive in their market. The impact of the conflict and the
increased energy prices pushed the Italian SMEs to employ strategic cost management
thinking to mitigate the risks and the damages, exploring alternative and green energy
sources and implementing energy efficiency. With an interdisciplinary approach to the
different fields of geopolitics and management, this study aims to provide a theoretical
contribution by giving an overview of the political and economic situation and an insight
into the market condition of Italian SMEs. In particular, using past EUROSTAT data
concerning the cost of energy for non-household consumption, energy inflation rate, and
business churn rate, the research provides estimates of data not yet published by
EUROSTAT and shows the relationship between these variables, highlighting the
statistical effect of the rise in electricity costs on the business churn rate, regarding Italian
SMEs. The war in Ukraine is having significant and dramatic consequences for both
countries involved and worldwide in many aspects. The energy sector is one of the key
areas affected by the conflict: leading directly and indirectly to widespread disruptions in
164
gas supplies to the EU countries. Leaving aside that Ukraine is a relevant transit country
for Russian gas to Europe, sanctions, bans, and the reaction of the Western countries
influenced primarily the energy market causing instability and concerns about energy
security. The crisis has highlighted a concept that is not new: the need for the European
Union to reduce dependency levels on Russian gas by diversifying its energy sources and
raw materials supply. The increase in energy prices has had an unfavourable impact on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs). Therefore, this has led to a decrease in profits for
Italian SMEs, caused by increasing production costs. Because of these events, it is
possible to observe a higher business churn rate,pointing out that SMEs are suffering and
struggling to remain competitive in their market. The impact of the conflict and the
increased energy prices pushed the Italian SMEs to employ strategic cost management
thinking to mitigate the risks and the damages, exploring alternative and green energy
sources and implementing energy efficiency. With an interdisciplinary approach to the
different fields of geopolitics and management, this study aims to provide a theoretical
contribution by giving an overview of the political and economic situation and an insight
into the market condition of Italian SMEs. In particular, using past EUROSTAT data
concerning the cost of energy for non-household consumption, energy inflation rate, and
business churn rate, the research provides estimates of data not yet published by
EUROSTAT and shows the relationship between these variables, highlighting the
statistical effect of the rise in electricity costs on the business churn rate, regarding Italian
SMEs.
Keywords Business Churn Rate, Strategic Cost Management, Energy Security, SMEs,
Russia-Ukraine war
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1 Introduction
The Russian invasion of Ukraine, which started on February 24th, 2022 with a vast
military offensive, has brought several changes to the global scenario. Since that day, the
world has lost its balance, experiencing a war in which there is no end in sight (ISW,
2023). While the world was going out from the COVID-19 crisis, after two difficult years
for both countries and citizens, the conflict in Ukraine represents a new major crisis for
the EU and the West in general. Indeed, this conflict involves closely and at different
levels other actors, such as the EU, the US, NATO countries, China, and the Middle East
(Dene, Labow, & Silber, 2022; Borrell, 2022; Ogunkeye, 2023).
Unlike the 2014 Russian annexation of Crimea (condemned by the West) which
generated a wave of economic sanctions imposed on Russia, this conflict in Ukraine
brought strong and determined stances on a broader political level. The Western reactions
to the 2022 conflict have led to global political tension, direct actions at the policy level,
unprecedented sanctions, and economic instability. Before the war and the wave of
165
sanctions imposed by the EU on the Kremlin, Russia was a major supplier of natural gas
and oil, together with other goods. In addition to the sanctions, the European Union
started a process of diversification on the acquisition of raw materials for energy
production while increasing the utilization of renewable sources. Indeed, on the one hand,
investing in renewable sources have positive repercussions in the long run, on the other
hand, diversification in the import of raw materials to reduce dependency on Russia is
needed in the short run. Both processes of diversification and investments in renewable
sources are still ongoing (European Commission, 2022).
The EU countries are using different sources to produce energy; in 2020, nuclear
energy was the 31% contributing source and 41% of energy production was from
renewable sources (wind, solar, and hydro energy). Among the other sources, such as
solid fuels and crude oil, natural gas represented 7% of energy production. For what
concerns Italy, statistics on energy production differ from the EU average shown before.
Italy is relying way more on natural gas and other fossil fuels than other European
countries for its energy production. Indeed, about 40% of Italian energy production
(International Energy Agency, 2023) is based on natural gas, with a higher dependency on
imported raw materials, since domestic production is not sufficient. In general, taking into
account the energy production source, there is a dependency relationship between Russia
as a supplier of raw materials and some countries of the European Union as main buyers.
This link between the EU and Russia is affected and affects a mutual bond the continental
and global geopolitics.
As regards the relation between the main geopolitical trends and energetic contexts
with the Italian economic situation, it has to be noticed that these circumstances had a
strong impact on different macroeconomic aspects, such as GDP, inflation rate, and the
import/export rate (Johnson, Hankins, & Carter, 2022; Banca D'Italia, 2023). Centering
the analysis on the Italian stage, the SMEs Regional Report by Confindustria and Cerved
(2022) showed that the moderate recovery registered in 2021, after the COVID-19
pandemic, slowed down in the first months of 2022. Although the global scenario keeps
evolving, it is pivotal to highlight the consequences in the Italian economic system due to
these occurrences: energy, agricultural, and metal prices grow, the supply chain for raw
materials and other commodities was problematic, and the inflation rate touched very
high levels. As a result of this, enterprises are facing a brake in production with a
repercussion on their costs and revenues (Fontana, 2022; OECD, 2022; ISTAT, 2022). To
deal with these difficulties, as already mentioned before, European Union decided to
166
implement a plan to decrease the energy dependence on Russian fossil fuels and move
towards other suppliers, as well as other kinds of energy sources, such as renewable ones.
This would provide an acceleration of European energetic independence, giving a boost to
the green transition, and reducing prices over time (European Commission, 2022).
Due to the increasing relevance of the above-mentioned issues, it becomes meaningful
to consider the survivability (or rather the competitiveness) of the Italian SMEs, in light
of the current energy and raw materials supply crisis. This paper wants to investigate the
condition of SMEs in Italy, considering the relationship between the business churn rate
and the cost of the electricity rate for non-household consumption. Both data are provided
by EUROSTAT, they define the “business churn” as the sum of business birth and death
rate in a reference period (EUROSTAT, 2022). It is worthwhile to notice that the available
figures for the business churn are up to the end of 2020 and the inflation electricity rate
data is available until the first semester of 2022; for this reason, the study wants to
provide the outcomes of the business churn rate, until the first semester of 2022 (Figure
1). This study aims to analyse the statistical effect of the rise in electricity costs on the
business churn rate. Through this research, we want to shed a light on the importance of
the European plans, in order to switch to renewable sources of energy and improve the
awareness of the cost management of the enterprises.
The reason for linking the theme of this paper with the literature dealing with strategic
cost management lies in the fact that the current geopolitical situation has caused a sharp
increase in prices, along with the increase in inflation, which can influence the decisions
regarding the cost management of companies. As rising costs can pose a threat to the
company's profitability, cost management becomes even more important to ensure that the
company is able to generate sufficient profits and remain competitive in the marketplace
(Cooper and Slagmulder, 1998). In this context, the role of strategic cost management
becomes that of helping SMEs manage the impact of inflation on their costs.
The paper has the following structure: initially, it gives a background of the
geopolitical situation, which negatively influenced the energy prices, and the strategic
cost management literature, to be used as a guide by the entrepreneurs to deal with this
matter. Further sections are dedicated to the quantitative analysis and its discussion.
Implications, limitations, and suggestions for future studies are drawn at the end.
Figure 1: Observed values for business churn rate and electricity price by EUROSTAT.
167
2 Background
2.1 Geopolitical context and energy market implication
There is relevant concern about the consequences that the conflict is provoking under
different aspects: world politics, economics, and energy management hang by a thread.
The war at the borders of the European Union is an alarming scenario not seen since the
Yugoslav Wars in the ’90s. Despite the clear signs before the invasion, the world and, in
particular, the Western countries were caught off guard. Without analysing in-depth the
reasons, the events, and the development of the war, we focused this research on the
European energy market. In 2022, the European Union’s reaction to the conflict consisted
of economic sanctions to weaken Russia and decrease any money flows, as a retaliation,
Russia increased gas and petrol costs and reduces the supply directed to the EU, in some
cases, even with a unilateral termination of the natural gas flows (European Council,
2022).
The different and multiple waves of sanctions that the EU imposed on Russia, the
outcome of bans, and the restrictions on Russian export are affecting the European
production of electricity. This depends on the nature of the raw materials that each
Member State is using for producing electricity, which is, in most cases, related to the
import from Russia. In brief, the European Union’s electricity production utilises different
168
primary sources, such as solid fuels, natural gas, crude oil, nuclear energy, and renewable
sources (such as hydro, wind, and solar energy). In 2020, the most widely spread source
for electricity production was represented by renewable energy, with about 41% of the
total EU production. 31 % of nuclear energy, 18% of solid fuels, 7% of natural gas, and
4% of oil follow renewable sources. It must be underlined that the energy production of
each European Member State substantially differs from one another. In Malta, electricity
is produced only using renewable energy sources, similar conditions for Portugal, Cyprus,
and Latvia which rely on renewable for about 95% of their domestic electricity
production. The situation is quite the opposite in other countries. France relies on nuclear
energy for 75%, followed by Belgium and Slovakia with about 60%. Eastern European
countries such as Poland, Estonia, and Czechia are still using mainly solid fuels. The use
of natural gas for electricity production is widespread in the Netherlands, of which 63% is
from natural gas. Denmark is relying mainly on crude oil (EUROSTAT, 2023).
According to the International Energy Agency (2023), Italy relied on natural gas for
45% of its total electricity production, currently representing the most utilised source, and
it must be underlined that natural gas relevance for Italy is not only related to electricity
costs, its impact on costs for businesses includes heating and production. At the same
time, Italy’s natural gas production is not enough large to satisfy the need. This caused a
deep and rooted reliance on natural gas imported by foreign countries, in particular Russia
and Algeria. This dependency is about 90% of the total natural gas consumption in the
country (Energy Information Administration, 2023).
In the decades before the Russian invasion of Ukraine, the EU’s trend of importing
Russian natural gas was going constantly as European production decreased. The
decreasing trend of domestic production within the EU has led to a growing import to fill
the lack of products for domestic consumption. This, in turn, has brought the EU to an
increasing energy dependency on Russia’s fuels. In the period 2018-2021, Russia was
supplying about 40% of the entire European consumption (European Commission, 2022),
with an increasing concern for European energetic dependency (International Energy
Agency, 2023). With the Versailles Declaration in March 2022, the European Union stated
its willingness to gradually remove Russia as a supplier of fossil fuels (European Council,
2022). The Declaration underlined the need for a quick reduction of energetic
dependency, together with the ambitious target of reaching climate neutrality by 2050. To
do that, it will be necessary to reduce the general consumption of fossil fuels, taking into
account the needs of the Member States. To substitute fossil fuels, the EU is promoting
169
diversification through new supply routes, the use of liquefied natural gas, and the
development of biogas. The fundamental aspect of the Versailles Declaration is the push
towards renewable energy, which is now seen as a strategically relevant energy source
(European Council, 2022).
The Russia-Ukraine conflict has accelerated the change of route of the European
Union in the energy market policies. This acceleration due to external factors and the
necessity to re-set and adjust the policies of fuel imports with rapidity is bringing and will
bring further changes in the energy market, with possible increasing instability. In a
certain way, the advent of the strategic plan REPowerEU has been speeded up as a
reaction to the emergency situation dictated by the conflict. This economic and strategic
plan of energy security is based on three pillars: reduce energy consumption through
efficiency, produce clean energy from renewable sources, and diversify the European
energy supply. To achieve these ambitious targets, the EU funds up to 300 billion to
support investment and policy structural interventions (European Commission, 2023)
The EU import of Russian gas was severely reduced going from 23% in 2022 to less
than 10% in January 2023, at the same time, the EU countries “run for the cover” was
effective and consisted in refilling their national storage, diversifying the gas sources, and
reducing consumption (International Energy Agency, 2023). Within the European Union,
the majority of natural gas is not self-produced, the member states imported 83% of the
total natural gas in 2021 (European Council, 2023). Before the conflict, about half of all
imported gas was from Russia, and the other half was divided among different supplier
countries. The scenario completely changed in less than one year, in October 2022, Russia
represents between 12% and 13% of all the gas imported, against 87% of all the other
suppliers together (European Council, 2023). According to the US Energy Information
Administration, the Russian export to the EU of natural gas through pipelines reached the
lowest level in about 40 years (Energy Information Administration, 2022). In order to
enhance diversification from Russia and end the dependency before 2030, the volume of
LNG (liquefied natural gas) imported into the EU increased significantly (Natural Gas
Intel, 2023; EUROSTAT, 2023). LNG tends to cost more than regular natural gas, due to
its costs of transport, liquefaction processes, and related logistics (World Bank, 2022).
On the other side of the Western-Russia political tension, Russia’s export of oil and
natural gas has not been paralysed by sanctions and bans. Russia re-routed the oil and gas
sales to other buyers, especially in Asia, selling with lower prices and partially reducing
170
the impact on domestic production, keeping Russia among the biggest producers
worldwide (International Energy Agency, 2023).
It must be underlined that not only the war in Ukraine had repercussions on the
market and prices. The consequences of the COVID-19 pandemic were still affecting the
gas and energy market with prices fluctuating when the conflict broke out (International
Gas Union, 2022). Prices fluctuation and market volatility increased even more with the
beginning of the conflict with consequences not only in the energy market (International
Energy Agency, 2023). Indeed, prices of different commodities usually exported by
Ukraine and Russia increased sharply worldwide, if compared to January 2022: for
instance, coal prices increased on average by 69.31%, wheat by 60.14%, oil by 29.11%,
and natural gas by 26.59% in the EU and 54.55% in the U.S. (Statista, 2023).
To sum up, from a strategic perspective, the EU and Italy built a strong
diversification-oriented policy, which aim is to reduce the dependency on the foreign
supplier in the years to come and at the same time reshape the European energy
ecosystem in terms of sustainability. However, since the conflict pushed policymakers to
quickly react to political needs, they had to face difficulties in long-term planning. This
sudden and rapid separation from Russia as the main supplier, together with economic
sanctions on import and export, from and to Russia, has been one of the causes of energy
market instability. Analogously, market instability is one of the reasons that contributed to
the increasing costs of electricity for the final consumer, including small and medium
businesses.
2.2 The importance of strategic cost management
Examining the Italian business environment in 2022, there were 4.4 million
enterprises, whose 99.91% were given by micro, small, and medium enterprises. The
around 206,000 Italian SMEs are responsible for 41% of the entire turnover generated in
the country, 33% of all employees in the sector private sector, and 38% of the country's
added value (Osservatorio Innovazione Digitale delle PMI, 2022). These numbers
explain why it is important to focus attention on these kinds of companies, looking at
their similarities and dissimilarities. In general, each company is characterized by specific
traits, such as the strategy, goals, mission, vision, targets, the way they reach the best
performances and competitive advantages, and the relationship between strategy,
resources, and costs management (Anderson, 2006; Baroto, Abdullah, & Wan, 2012;
Johnson, Whittington, Scholes, Angwin, & Regnér, 2017; Grant, 2021). This literature
171
paragraph wants to accent the relevance that strategic cost management has for business
success.
To have a better comprehension of the matter, it is necessary to know the meaning and
become familiar with the costs terminology. “Cost is the cash or cash equivalent value
sacrificed for goods and services. […] As costs are used up in the production of revenues,
they are said to expire. Expired costs are called expenses. In each period, expenses are
deducted from revenues on the income statement to determine the period’s profit. A loss
is a cost that expires without producing any revenue benefit. […] Many costs do not
expire in a given period. These unexpired costs are classified as assets and appear on the
balance sheet. […] Cost accounting information systems are structured to measure and
assign costs to cost objects. Cost objects can be anything for which costs are measured
and assigned; they may include products, customers, departments, projects, activities, and
so on” (Hansen, Mowen, & Heitger, 2021: 40-41). In addition to this, it is interesting to
know how cost behaves in relation to the level of output. Cost behaviour depends on the
kind of costs implied (fixed, variable, or mixed) for flexible or committed resources, it
can be also influenced by external factors. On the one hand, flexible resources are
supplied as used and needed, acquired from external sources, they usually have variable
costs, since resource costs rise along with demand. On the other hand, the committed
ones are supplied in advance of usage and they usually have fixed costs. Economically
speaking, the cost behaviour can be expressed as a continuous function (linear or
non-linear) or as a step function (Hansen, Mowen, & Heitger, 2021). An example of a
flexible resource is energy power, as an output it can be measured in kilowatt-hours, it has
a flexible cost, and when its demand increases, its cost increases as well.
Many scholars (Shank, 1989; Shank & Govindarajan, 1993; Cooper & Slagmulder,
1998; Silvi & Cuganesan, 2006; Kumar & Nagpal, 2011; Apak, Erol, Elagöz, & Atmaca,
2012) agree that a firm has to deal not only with the costs analysis but also with the
optimization of the costs for better value creation, performance, and revenue. Indeed,
strategic cost management is a broader concept that uses cost data to develop and
implement strategies to gain sustainable competitive advantage (Shank and Govindarajan,
1993). Cooper and Slagmulder (1998:14) define strategic cost management as "the
application of cost management techniques so that they simultaneously improve the
strategic position of a firm and reduce costs". Instead, Shank and Govindarajan (1993:6)
define it as "the managerial use of cost information explicitly directed at one or more of
the four stages of strategic management: (1) Formulating strategies, (2) communicating
172
those strategies throughout the organization, (3) developing and carrying out tactics to
implement the strategies, and (4) developing and implementing controls to monitor the
success of objectives".
According to Silvi and Cuganesan (2006), the strategic cost management perspective
considers three key factors, useful to provide information and guidance to the company:
value chain analysis, value creation analysis (or strategic positioning analysis), and cost
driver analysis. The value chain analysis aims to find out the overall value produced by an
industry or network of businesses and how value is divided among the numerous actors
who participate in its production. The result of the analysis is to determine the phases that
produce the best return within the value system, toward which address the financial
resources. Value creation analysis determines the value (and the costs) of the activities
carried out by the enterprise. It connects cost management with the strategy pursued by
the company (Shank, 1989). “Making visible the level of alignment between activity
costs and the value generated enables the commencement of actions to emphasize
value-added activities, make non-value added but required activities more efficient and
eliminate waste” (Silvi & Cuganesan, 2006: 313). Lastly, cost driver analysis helps
identify the factors and activities that are causes of cost occurrence. Some factors are
strictly tied to the strategic choices of the firm, such as the scale of the investments and
R&D activities, scope, and technologies implied. Furthermore, the company’s costs also
include the execution ones, which are the costs needed for workforce involvement,
capacity utilization, plant layout, product configuration, and relationships with customers
and suppliers.
It is worthwhile to notice that, despite the relevance of this framework, there is no
unique definition of it in literature, this does not make it uniquely interpretable (Kumar &
Nagpal, 2011). However, the broad application and development of strategic cost
management are the strengths of this framework. Kumar and Nagpal (2011) criticized the
framework of traditional cost management, because its primary concern was only the
costs, while strategic cost management considers also revenues, productivity, and
customer satisfaction, as well as the strategic position of the company. Strategic cost
management “is not confined to the continuous reduction of costs and controlling of costs
and it is far more concerned with management's use of cost information for
decision-making” (Kumar & Nagpal, 2011:128).
The strategic cost management literature is tied up to this research topic because it
shows the relevance of considering the costs in the narrow frame of strategy. Although the
173
inflationary environment, good strategic cost management can help the company mitigate
risk and maintain profitability. Some practical applications may consider cost-cutting
methods, such as optimising manufacturing processes, minimising waste, and negotiating
long-term contracts with suppliers to lock in costs. Therefore, the enterprise may strive to
increase its cost flexibility, such as by using a variable cost model rather than a fixed cost
model, in order to minimise expenses in response to market swings. Lastly, dynamic
pricing techniques, which allow product or service prices to be altered in response to
inflation and cost fluctuations, can be implemented.
At the current moment, small and medium enterprises are dealing with sharp cost
fluctuations that can negatively affect the balance between expenses and revenues. For
this reason, this framework wants to provide some reference points on which the
enterprise can develop its strategy, optimizing expenses and opportunities, in order to face
the difficulties caused by the above-mentioned events, improving profitability and
competitive advantage. “It is not sufficient to simply reduce costs; instead, costs must be
managed strategically (Cooper and Slagmulder, 1998:14).
3 Methodology
This is a quantitative study, which aims at investigating the statistical relationship
between the business churn rate and the electricity price by means of the autoregressive
distributed lag model (ARDL). First, an assessment of the geopolitical conditions was
made in light of the Russia-Ukraine conflict. Subsequently, research was done in
EUROSTAT to identify which categories were more interesting to study and which
variables influenced the business of small and medium-sized enterprises. The downloaded
datasets regard the electricity prices for non-household consumers, the business
demography, and the HICP, the Harmonised Index of Consumer Prices. Finally, the data
was adjusted and analysed using the R studio software. The electricity price is observed
on a half-yearly basis in nominal Euro/kWh. We adjust this for inflation using the 2015
base and convert it to cent/kWh. The churn rate is observed directly on a yearly basis and
matched to electricity prices. In a preliminary moment, also ISTAT statistics were
checked, but the data did not meet our research needs; for this reason, we have decided to
use data only from the EUROSTAT website.
174
4 Results
Let and denote the yearly churn rate and inflation-adjusted electricity price in
𝑦 𝑥
cent/kWh, respectively. We investigate the statistical relationship between the churn rate
and the electricity price by means of the autoregressive distributed lag model (ARDL),
𝑦𝑡= β0+ β1𝑥𝑡+ β2𝑥𝑡−1 + + β𝑝𝑥𝑡−𝑝 + α1𝑦𝑡−1 + α2𝑦𝑡−2 + + α𝑞𝑦𝑡−𝑞 + 𝑢𝑡
We obtain data on and by combining different statistics from EUROSTAT.
𝑦 𝑥
In order to identify the best-fitting model we estimate the ARDL model with different
values of and , starting from the simplest model and iteratively
𝑝 𝑞 𝑝 = 0, 𝑞 = 1
increasing the values until the added terms are not statistically significant. It turns out that
no additional terms beyond the simplest model are significant at any conventional level of
significance. This model also performs best in terms of goodness-of-fit. Table 1 reports
the AIC, BIC, and adjusted for the first four models. The specification
𝑅2𝑝 = 0, 𝑞 = 1
outperforms the larger models with respect to all three statistics (while we do not report it,
the simplest model outperforms also the even larger models). Thus, the model we
consider is:
𝑦𝑡= β0+ β1𝑥𝑡+ α1𝑦𝑡−1 + 𝑢𝑡
Table 1: Information criteria to define the goodness of the fitness of the model
Model
df
AIC
BIC
Adj. R-sqr
𝑝 = 0, 𝑞 = 1
20
42.387
46.929
0.448
𝑝 = 1, 𝑞 = 1
19
43.400
49.077
0.443
𝑝 = 0, 𝑞 = 2
18
43.395
48.850
0.393
𝑝 = 1, 𝑞 = 2
17
44.773
51.319
0.375
The -test of overall significance allows us to reject the hypothesis of zero significant
𝐹
regressors ( ) in the ARDL ( ) model. As shown in Table 2, an
𝑝 < 0. 01 𝑝 = 0, 𝑞 = 1
increase in electricity prices by one cent/kWh is associated with an economically
significant 0.19 percentage-point increase in the churn rate in the same year. This
corresponds to 25% of the standard deviation of the business’ churn rate in the period
under consideration (0.74%), and 8% of the range (minimum: 12.95%; maximum:
15.30%).
175
Table 2: Statistics from the ARDL model
Coefficient
Point estimate
S.E.
-value
𝑝
β1
0.18714
0.09845
0.07182
α1
0.59338
0.15688
0.00117
Figure 2 plots the fitted and observed values. We can see that the model predicts the
true churn rate best when there is a marked vertical distance between the lines of the
observed series (which is expected since this is the case for most of the period under
consideration). The fitted values in the final three periods (2021-S1, 2021-S2 and
2022-S1) are Monte Carlo predictions using the normal distribution.
Figure 2: Plot of the fitted and observed values
5 Discussion
The background on the current geopolitical situation and the examined data show that
the Russia-Ukraine conflict is causing consequences worldwide on different levels, from
political instability to a proper humanitarian crisis. Focusing the attention on the
economic impacts, the months of 2022 were characterized by a sharp increase in prices, in
176
particular of natural fuels, energy, and raw materials with repercussions on the
import/export of products from Eastern Europe and inconvenience or delays in the
distribution and supply chain.
“Energy prices have hit all-time highs in 2022, especially as a consequence of
Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and its use of gas supplies. The wholesale price of electricity
in the EU’s internal market is directly linked to the price of gas which is mostly
imported. The deliberate reduction of gas supplies by Russia is the main cause of the
recent skyrocketing gas prices in the EU, which have impacted the price of electricity
produced in gas-fired power plants and affected electricity prices overall. The price of
energy is expected to continue to remain high in the EU in the coming months, as it takes
time to replace Russian gas supplies with supplies from EU sources. EU countries have
therefore adopted an emergency regulation to address high energy prices and help citizens
and businesses that are most affected by the energy crisis” (European Council, 2023).
How are the Italian SMEs dealing with this energy price increase? Due to the short
amount of time since the beginning of the conflict and its consequences, it is early to have
EUROSTAT official data to analyse. However, the published data gave us the chance to
have an idea of the scenario.
The analysis demonstrates that the increase in electricity costs has a serious impact on
Italian enterprises. As the business churn rate is a good indicator of company turnover, it
follows that it is likely that the rise in electricity prices has had a severe impact on
businesses ability to survive. The more inflation increases, the more the effects are
amplified to the businesses, in terms of direct and indirect costs to sustain, and
consequences in the consumer and market demand too (Brueckner, O’Reilly, Falk,
Castagnino, & Tomsovic, 2022). The Italian business churn rate is confirmed by the
ISTAT (2022), which reports data up to the second quarter of 2022 about new business
registrations and bankruptcy. The originality of this study is to consider the statistical
association of the inflation rate and consider the churn rate as an overall figure since it
takes into consideration the birth of new enterprises and companies that have closed for
various reasons and not just those that have gone bankrupt. Taking a market perspective,
it provides an interesting viewpoint to evaluate the changes in the network of the firms, as
well as in the composition of the market.
The “so what?” of the study is to increase awareness of the difficulties that businesses
are experiencing. Efficient strategic cost management can help enterprises in handling
long-run strategies to minimize threats. Without any doubt, the European plans and
177
incentives to switch to sustainable energy are having a boost. Based on their needs,
resources, and assets availability, Italian SMEs should take into consideration moving to
green power. The benefits would be various and in line with both Agenda 2030 and the
EU Green Deal (European Commission, 2023). The green transition would bring
advantages in terms of cutting down bills, reduction of greenhouse gas emissions,
improvement of air quality, conservation of natural resources, creating new jobs,
technological innovation, sustainable economic growth, and improvement of people's
health and well-being.
The study supports that costs are dependent on external factors and actors, and
sustainable development is fast proceeding because of the increase in the cost of fossil
fuels and energetic dependency, as well as an increase in awareness on the matter.
However, it could be criticised that if the RePowerEU plan does not devote funds and its
attention to SMEs to defray costs, many companies will face the risk of being forced out
of business.
6 Implication and limitations
This study wants to offer an overview of geopolitical and economic topics, as well as
some considerations on the current SMEs’ critical situation, due to the increase in costs of
raw materials, natural resources, and electricity. The contribution is twofold. The analysis
is relevant at the entrepreneurial level for SMEs that struggle for balancing costs and
revenues, and the ones that are thinking of undertaking the path toward the green
transition. Thanks to its focus on a policy level, the research proposes itself as an
informative tool for policymakers, so that they can understand the issues to support SMEs
that cope with rising costs and achieve a green transition. Indeed, taking into
consideration the analysis of this study may improve public policies and business
practises.
The findings of this study have to be seen in the light of some limitations. Firstly, the
ongoing geopolitical situation, which keeps changing, and the consequences that it can
cause to the economic condition. The study does some “prediction” of data in a period
that is already passed. It was possible to extend the period taken into consideration, but
the results would have been highly inaccurate, so for this reason, the study limited itself to
predicting the relationship up to the first half of 2022. For the entire analysis, we have
used only EUROSTAT figures. The limit is given by the release time of the data: the last
178
figures of the business churn rate are up to 2020, while the inflation of electricity prices is
up to the first semester of 2022. However, this limitation is also the strength of this paper,
as it gave the chance to do some predictions of the possible trends that have to be
published. Another limitation is given by the measurement of the business churn rate.
Even though ISTAT provided already the numbers related to new business registrations
and bankruptcy for the whole of 2022, these figures are considered split and measured in
units. On the contrary, EUROSTAT provides an overall figure which is the sum of the
birth and death business measured in percentages. Moreover, the death rate taken into
account does not consider only bankruptcy, but also other factors in a broader way. In the
study, it was preferred to pay attention to the data that offered more complexity, even if
less recent.
7 Conclusions
The study had an interdisciplinary approach with an interest in geopolitics and
management. In particular, we examined the context after the outbreak of the Russia
Ukraine conflict, and its worldwide consequences. Literature on strategic cost
management has been described to provide strategic support and give insights into how
costs could be managed by firms and how they should consider them to seek value. Data
provided by EUROSTAT on business churn rate and electricity inflation rate were
analysed to identify their relationship, making some predictions of the data that will be
published. Based on the analysis, some considerations about the relevance of the topic
and its implications have been drawn.
Future studies need to be carried out in order to validate the relationship analysed in
this paper. In addition, further researches on business green transition are an essential next
step in confirming the efficiency and the application of the RePowerEu plan.
Furthermore, more information on the business churn rate would help to establish a
greater degree of accuracy on this matter, identifying the reasons for the business death
rate and studying its relationship with market internal and external factors. Lastly, in light
of the geopolitical context, this study could be repeated by analysing the trends of other
countries and the way the market reacted.
In conclusion, the war in Ukraine put under the spotlight European energy
independence as a fundamental strategic necessity for the domestic economic stability of
the European Union. To reach this independence it is pivotal and essential to act on a
179
double policy level increasing the diversification of energetic sources and improving a
greater use of renewable sources, under the strategic guidance of the EU. Consequently, it
is possible to expect in the next months and years additional steps ahead in terms of
European policies that will target these aspects.
8 Acknowledgement
Thanks to Johan Lyrvall for the statistical suggestions.
References
Anderson, S. W. (2006). “Managing costs and cost structure throughout the value chain: research on
strategic cost management”, Handbooks of Management Accounting Research, 2, 481-506.
Apak, S., Erol, M., Elagöz, İ., & Atmaca, M. (2012). “The use of contemporary developments in
cost accounting in strategic cost management”, Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 41,
528-534.
Banca D'Italia. (2023). Italy and the euro area in difficult and uncertain times. Economic Bulletin
(1), 1-6.
Baroto, M. B., Abdullah, M. M., & Wan, H. L. (2012). “Hybrid strategy: A new strategy for
competitive advantage”, International Journal of Business and Management, 7(20), 120-133.
Borrell, J. (2022, Apr). Russia’s war against Ukraine: where do we stand and what can the future
bring? Retrieved Jan 30, 2023, from European Union External Action:
https://www.eeas.europa.eu/eeas/russia%E2%80%99s-war-against-ukraine-where-do-we-stand
-and-what-can-future-bring_en
Brueckner, M., O’Reilly, K., Falk, S., Castagnino, T., & Tomsovic, C. (2022). The war in Ukraine:
How businesses can survive and thrive through high inflation. Accenture.
Confindustria, Cerved. (2022). Rapporto Regionale PMI. Rome: Confindustria Servizi S.p.a.
Cooper, R., & Slagmulder, R. R. (1998). “Strategic cost management - What is strategic cost
management?”, Management Accounting, 14-16.
Dene, M., Labow, H., & Silber, C. (2022, Mar). Middle East Responses to the Ukraine Crisis.
Retrieved Jan 30, 2023, from The Washington Institute for Near East Policy:
https://www.washingtoninstitute.org/policy-analysis/middle-east-responses-ukraine-crisis
Energy Information Administration. (2022). Russia’s natural gas pipeline exports to Europe decline
to almost 40-year lows. Retrieved Apr 8, 2023, from U.S. Energy Information Administration:
https://www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/detail.php?id=53379
Energy Information Administration. (2023). Energy Information Administration. Retrieved Apr 2,
2023, from Energy Information Administration - EIA:
https://www.eia.gov/international/analysis/country/ITA
European Commission. (2022). Quarterly Report on European gas markets. Retrieved Apr 8, 2023,
from European Commission:
https://energy.ec.europa.eu/system/files/2023-01/Quarterly%20report%20on%20European%20
gas%20markets%20Q3_FINAL.pdf
European Commission. (2022, May 18). REPowerEU: A plan to rapidly reduce dependence on
Russian fossil fuels and fast forward the green transition. Retrieved Apr 07, 2023, from
European Commission: https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/IP_22_3131
European Commission. (2023). Factsheet on REPowerEU Actions. Retrieved Apr 6, 2023, from
European Commission: https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/fs_22_3133
180
European Commission. (2022). The European Green Deal. Retrieved Apr 3, 2023, from European
Commission:
https://eur-lex.europa.eu/resource.html?uri=cellar:b828d165-1c22-11ea-8c1f-01aa75ed71a1.00
02.02/DOC_1&format=PDF
European Council. (2022). Versailles Declaration, March 2022. Retrieved Apr 8, 2023, from
European Council:
https://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/54792/20220311-versailles-declaration-it.pdf
European Council. (2023, Mar 23). Infographic - Energy crisis: Three EU-coordinated measures to
cut down bills. Retrieved Apr 10, 2023, from European Council:
https://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/infographics/eu-measures-to-cut-down-energy-bills/
European Council. (2023). Where does the EU’s gas come from? Retrieved Apr 9, 2023, from
European Council: https://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/infographics/eu-gas-supply/
EUROSTAT. (2022, Dec). Business demography by legal form. Retrieved Mar 23, 2023, from
EUROSTAT: https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/databrowser/product/page/bd_9ac_l_form_r2
EUROSTAT. (2023). EU imports of energy products - recent developments. Retrieved Apr 10,
2023, from EUROSTAT:
https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/statistics-explained/index.php?title=EU_imports_of_energy_prod
ucts_-_recent_developments#Main_suppliers_of_natural_gas_and_petroleum_oi
EUROSTAT. (2023). Shedding light on energy - 2023 edition. Retrieved Apr 7, 2023, from
EUROSTAT:
https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/interactive-publications/energy-2023#:~:text=Renewables%2
0lead%20in%20electricity%20generation,nuclear%20power%20plants%20(25%25)
Fontana, A. (2022). The Italian economy at the test of the conflict in Ukraine. Rapporti di
previsione - Centro Studi Confindustria.
Grant, R. M. (2021). Contemporary strategy analysis. John Wiley & Sons.
Hansen, D. R., Mowen, M. M., & Heitger, D. L. (2021). Cost management. Cengage Learning.
International Energy Agency. (2023). Italy: Key Energy Statistics. Retrieved Apr 7, 2023, from
International Energy Agency - IEA: https://www.iea.org/countries/italy
International Energy Agency. (2023). Fuels and Technologies: Gas. Retrieved Apr 11, 2023, from
International Energy Agency - IEA: https://www.iea.org/fuels-and-technologies/gas
International Energy Agency. (2023). Russia's War on Ukraine. Retrieved Apr 08, 2023, from
International Energy Agency - IEA: https://www.iea.org/topics/russias-war-on-ukraine#impact
International Energy Agency. (2023). Which countries are most reliant on Russian energy national
reliance on Russian fossil fuel imports analysis. Retrieved Apr 7, 2023, from International
Energy Agency - IEA:
https://www.iea.org/reports/national-reliance-on-russian-fossil-fuel-imports/
International Gas Union. (2022). Wholesale Gas Price Survey 2022 Edition. Retrieved Apr 10,
2023, from International Gas Union:
https://www.igu.org/resources/2022-wholesale-price-report/
ISTAT. (2022, Dec 06). Italy's Economic Outlook. Retrieved Apr 07, 2023, from ISTAT:
https://www.istat.it/it/files//2022/12/Economic_Outlook_Dec2022.pdf
ISTAT. (2022, Aug 4). Registrazione e fallimenti di imprese. Retrieved Apr 07, 2023, from ISTAT:
https://www.istat.it/it/archivio/273644
ISW. (2023, Jan). Russian Offensive Campaign Assessment, January 29, 2023. Retrieved Jan 30,
2023, from Institute for the Study of War:
https://www.understandingwar.org/backgrounder/russian-offensive-campaign-assessment-janu
ary-29-2023
Johnson, G., Whittington, R., Scholes, K., Angwin, D., & Regnér, P. (2017). Exploring Strategy.
Pearson.
181
Kumar, A., & Nagpal, S. (2011). “Strategic cost management–suggested framework for 21st
Century”, Journal of Business and Retail Management Research, 5(2), 118-130.
Ministry of Economic Development. (2021). The Energy Sector in Italy. Retrieved Apr 7, 2023,
from Ministry of Economic Development:
https://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/images/stories/documenti/The_energy_sector_in_Italy_
2021.pdf
Natural Gas Intel. (2023). How much of Europe’s gas comes from Russia? Retrieved Apr 9, 2023,
from Natural Gas Intelligence - NGI:
https://www.naturalgasintel.com/how-much-of-europes-gas-comes-from-russia/
OECD. (2022, July 22). Potential spatial impacts of the war in Ukraine (Abridged version).
Retrieved April 07, 2023, from OECD:
https://www.oecd.org/ukraine-hub/policy-responses/potential-spatial-impacts-of-the-war-in-uk
raine-abridged-version-76c873fd/
Ogunkeye, E. (2023). War in Ukraine: Who are Russia's allies? Retrieved Jan 30, 2023, from
France24:
https://www.france24.com/en/tv-shows/perspective/20230106-war-in-ukraine-who-are-the-kre
mlin-s-allies.
Osservatorio Innovazione Digitale delle PMI. (2022). Innovazione Digitale nelle PMI. Retrieved
Apr 07, 2023, from Osservatorio Innovazione Digitale nelle PMI - Politecnico di Milano:
https://www.osservatori.net/it/ricerche/osservatori-attivi/innovazione-digitale-nelle-pmi
Shank, J. H., & Govindarajan, V. (1993). Strategic Cost Management: The New Tool for
Competitive Advantage. Simon and Schuster.
Shank, J. K. (1989). “Strategic Cost Management: New Wine, or Just New Bottles?”, Journal of
Management Accounting Research, 47-65.
Silvi, R., & Cuganesan, S. (2006). “Investigating the management of knowledge for competitive
advantage: A strategic cost management perspective”, Journal of Intellectual Capital, 7(3),
309-323.
Statista. (2023). Change in average price of selected commodities from February 24 to June 1,
2022. Retrieved Apr 10, 2023, from Statista:
https://www.statista.com/statistics/1298241/commodity-price-growth-due-to-russia-ukraine-wa
r/
Statista. (2023). Natural gas import volume from Russia in the European Union (EU) and the
United Kingdom (UK) from week 1, 2021 to week 9, 2023, by exporting route. Retrieved Apr
11, 2023, from Statista:
https://www.statista.com/statistics/1331770/eu-gas-imports-from-russia-
World Bank. (2022). Commodity Markets Outlook 2022. Retrieved Apr 10, 2023, from World
Bank:
https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/server/api/core/bitstreams/d35940a5-0f3e-5835-81c7-24
f7d134c62c/content
182
Financing innovative SMEs: has any progress been
made?
Valeria Vannoni
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
University Address: Via Saffi, 42 Urbino
E-mail: valeria.vannoni@uniurb.it
Loris Nadotti
Department of Economics
University of Perugia
University Address: Via Pascoli, 2 Perugia
E-mail: loris.nadotti@unipg.it
Abstract
This study aims to present a comprehensive literature review on the topic of innovative
small and medium enterprises (SMEs) access to finance.
Innovative small and medium-sized enterprises have peculiarities that are reflected in
their choices about sources of financing, so that main traditional theories on financial
structure of firms are often not applicable. The so-called alternative finance can mitigate
these difficulties, just as the intervention of operators specialized in the financing of such
enterprises can facilitate the raising of capital.
The aim of this article is to conduct an in-depth examination of the main theories related
to the problems of innovative firms’ financing and to propose future directions for
research advancement. In particular, the focus is on the most recent literature, in the
period 2012-2022. We use a systematic literature review approach; it is a type of research
synthesis that can be used to create an overview of the state of the art of research on a
specific topic (Dewey, A. & Drahota, A. 2016). The results of our analysis highlight the
persistence of the main constraints traditionally consolidated by the literature with respect
to access to finance for innovative firms, even if some elements, such as firm’s
commitment to sustainability, could partly mitigate these difficulties. Moreover, a
regulatory environment that encourages investment in innovative companies is
undoubtedly favourable.
The value of our paper can be traced in the systematization of the most recent literature
on innovative firms financing.
Keywords innovative firms financing, financial constraints, systematic literature
review.
Paper type Academic Research Paper
183
1 Introduction
Innovative firms are a crucial resource for the development of modern industrial
economies: the liveliness and performance of these companies strongly affect the
innovative capacity and competitiveness of the economic system (Nadotti, 2014). The
birth and survival of these companies is influenced by many factors that can be
summarized in the two main themes of the knowledge gap and the funding gap. In
particular, some characteristics of innovative firms, such as information asymmetries,
under-collateralization and the high costs related to the estimate of their creditworthiness,
can become strong impediments to the provision of capital, with impacts on the financial
structure and profitability of these companies. These aspects are particularly stressed in
countries whose economy is typically characterized by small and medium-sized
enterprises. The ability of companies to innovate can become a critical factor for success,
able to facilitate the development of the business; however issues related to innovation
financing, including the difficulty of attributing a reliable value to innovation itself, can
be amplified by the size of the company, and small and medium-sized innovative
companies can heavily suffer from raising capital, with a potential brake on the
development of the company.
Problems related to the financing of innovative companies should be mitigated by
specific regulatory measures aimed at favouring investments in these companies;
moreover, firms could adopt managerial approaches that can facilitate lenders' confidence
in their business, for example, they could engage on sustainability-related issues to
improve their risk profile; companies could also seek for innovative forms of financing,
for which access may be less difficult than for traditional ones.
With this in mind, an exploratory analysis was conducted, using a systematic literature
review, to respond the following research question: (RQ1) Have emerged over time
factors that can facilitate the financing of innovative small and medium-sized enterprises?
The remainder of the paper is structured as follows. The second section presents the
theoretical background of our investigation; the third section describes the research
methodology; the fourth paragraph presents the research findings, while the last section is
for conclusions, implications and limits of the research.
184
2 Theoretical background
The literature on the topic is robust and it can be addressed into the most relevant
theoretical frameworks that explain the financial structure of SMEs: the pecking order
theory (Myers and Majluf, 1984); the trade-off theory (Jensen and Meckling, 1976;
Myers, 1977; Jensen, 1986); the market timing theory (Baker and Wurgler, 2002). For
innovative firms, the results of these main theories are compromised by some substantial
elements (Berger and Udell, 1998): innovative companies have a financial need and a
level of risk that depends on the degree of development of the project; the screening and
monitoring activities are difficult, due to the high level of agency costs and the degree of
information opacity of these companies (Huyghebaert and Van de Gucht, 2007; Hall and
Lerner, 2010); innovative firms are often not able to provide adequate guarantees to the
loan (under-collateralization), because they are mostly made up of intangible and/or
highly firm specific assets. These constraints mean that access to traditional sources of
financing is difficult for innovative companies and therefore the financing of innovation
could represent a serious and real obstacle for them. Berger and Udell (1998) re-proposed
the pecking order theory for this type of company, referring to their financial growth
cycle: the traditional hierarchy of funding sources is modified not only according to the
company size, but also for the degree of development of the project, to which different
levels of information opacity and financial requirements correspond. For these
companies, therefore, the traditional hierarchy is reversed. Following the financial growth
cycle theory, a more recent literature on innovative SMEs’ financing has been developed
(Zoppa and McMahon, 2002; Sogorb-Mira and Lopez Gracia, 2008; Hogan and Hutson,
2005; Hall and Lerner, 2010; Kuniy et al., 2010; Abraham and Schmukler, 2018). The
results they achieve are not unequivocal: differences are mainly attributable to the type of
innovation (product, process; incremental, disruptive; Cainelli et al., 2004; Koellinger,
2008; Czarnitzki and Hottenrott, 2010); to the business sector and firm market share
(Schock, 2013; Mac an Bhaird and Lynn, 2015); to the attitude for innovation of the
macroeconomic context (Arnone et al. 2015; Wilson 2015). Moreover, recently the
literature is enriched with contributions that analyze the role of alternative financing
instruments (Cusmano and Thompson, 2018; Vannoni, 2020; Bertoni et al., 2022; Bisht et
al., 2022) and the firm’s commitment to sustainability in reducing these financial
constraints (Bartolacci et al., 2020; Pu et al., 2021; Tirumala and Tiwari, 2022). Our work
185
is part of this theoretical frame, proposing a critical synthesis of the main results of these
studies.
3 Research methodology
We use a systematic literature review approach; it is a type of research synthesis that
can be used to create an overview of the state of the art of research on a specific topic
(Dewey, A. & Drahota, A. 2016). The systematic review should follow a clearly defined
protocol or plan, where the criteria is clearly stated before the review is conducted. Our
analysis is performed using Business Source Complete as research database. We selected
only academic papers published in the period 2012-2022, in journals with a peer reviewed
evaluation process, with full text available, in english, searching in the title for the
following text-strings: “Innovative firms financing” or “Innovative and sustainable firms
financing” or “Alternative finance for innovative firms”. We found 79 papers fulfilling
these specifications.
4 Results
We first present the pathway that leads us to the final group of articles analyzed to
answer our research question. Figure no.1 shows our first results.
Figure 1: Results about first step of systematic review
Text strings
No. articles
Innovative firms financing
18
Innovative and sustainable firms financing
35
Alternative finance for innovative firms
26
Total
79
Source: authors elaboration.
We then refined the search, eliminating duplications, i.e. articles that appeared in more
than one of the text strings (for example, eliminating overlaps between “Innovative firms
financing” and “Innovative and sustainable firms financing”), obtaining the new results as
in Figure no. 2. We kept the article in the category (text string) that was closest to the
topic, among the alternatives, thorough an in-depht examination of the papers; on the
other hand, we eliminated it from the less similar category.
186
Figure 2: Results about second step of systematic review
Text string
No. articles
Innovative firms financing
14
Innovative and sustainable firms financing
35
Alternative finance for innovative firms
20
Total
69
Source: authors elaboration.
Finally, we excluded articles dealing with topics related but not strictly adhering to
our research objective. Figure no. 3 shows the final results. The group of analyzed articles
consists of 39 items.
Figure 3: Final results of systematic review
Text string
No. articles
Innovative firms financing
7
Innovative and sustainable firms financing
21
Alternative finance for innovative firms
11
Total
39
Source: authors elaboration.
Figure no.4 presents results according to year of publication of the articles.
Figure 4: Articles per year.
Year/text
string
Innovative firms
financing
Innovative and
sustainable firms
financing
Alternative finance
for innovative firms
2012
1
-
-
2013
1
-
-
2014
1
-
-
2015
-
-
-
2016
-
1
-
2017
1
1
-
2018
1
6
1
2019
1
3
1
2020
-
4
-
2021
1
3
4
2022
-
3
5
Total
7
21
11
187
Source: authors elaboration.
The text string with the highest number of contributions is that one for “Innovative
and sustainable firms financing”: however, reading the full articles in this category (21),
we found that innovation is investigated almost exclusively as a driver of sustainability,
while the links between innovation-sustainability-access to finance are not stressed.
Moreover, literature is rich in contributions on alternative finance, but this topic is not yet
addressed by many studies in relation to the specific theme of innovative companies’
financing.
With reference to each text-thematic string, we then analyzed the contributions
identifying the specific topic of the articles. It was possible to categorize the papers in the
following two areas of focus: financial instrument; financial constraints; moreover, we
underlined if there is a sectoral focus and/or a geographical focus in the articles. Among
the articles included in the category “Alternative finance for innovative firms”, the
prevailing thematic motif is that one of the financial instrument; about the other two
thematic areas, the distribution about “financial instrument” and “financial constraints” is
almost similar; 46.2% of the articles has a sectoral focus; 20.5% of the papers presents a
geographical focus.
Figure no. 5 presents results according to this classification.
Figure 5: Articles per focus area.
Text string
No.
articles
Financial
instrument
Financial
constraints
Sectoral
focus
Geographical
focus
Innovative firms
financing
7
4
3
3
2
Innovative and
sustainable firms
financing
21
13
8
10
6
Alternative finance
for innovative
firms
11
9
2
5
-
Total
39
Source: authors elaboration.
The review of the literature shows, first of all, the reference with some issues
traditionally linked to the financing of innovative companies; access to finance for
knowledge-based firms seems to be strongly influenced by some structural elements such
as: degree of development of the economic and financial reference context; information
188
availability, quality and disclosure about firms; size of financial needs of companies.
According to the first element, the orientation of the financial system through
intermediaries or market can be relevant: in market-oriented systems, for example,
companies are pursuing the medium-long term goal to become public company and this
attitude creates a particularly strong link between banks and enterprises, which goes
beyond the lending relationship, with intermediary becoming a company partner. The
structure of the financial market also affects the ways in which funding for innovative
enterprises takes place: in well-developed stock markets, for example, we observe high
capital inflows, per unit amount, and by number of interventions, from institutional
investors in venture capital (Principi, 2012). The entry of an institutional investor in the
capital structure of an innovative company is a good thing because, in addition to
increasing the company's financial resources through the contribution of new capital, it
enables the firm to a series of other related benefits: venture capital actively participates
in the management of the company, with a qualified managerial experience that often is a
decisive element for the success of high-tech enterprises; furthermore, it helps to
strengthen the credibility of the firm, reducing moral hazard risk. The venture capital
industry is more developed in the financial markets where the exit is less complex, mainly
occurring through public offerings. The access to the capital market is possible when
companies achieve the minimum compulsory requirements (capitalization, disclosure)
provided by the stock exchange regulations. Moreover, substantial financial resources are
needed to cover the costs related to comply with the technical and legal requirements
imposed by stock exchange’s regulations. To encourage listing by smaller companies, the
financial markets have in many cases provided for specific requirements and dedicated
trading segments to small and medium enterprises, with less burdensome obligations for
companies.
The highly innovative content of their activities implies a greater opacity and
informational asymmetry that make this company less attractive to external sources of
financing. There is a clear relationship between the degree of innovation and financial
constraint in new businesses: the greater the degree of innovation of the enterprise, the
greater the perception and the degree of risk for third-party lenders. According to this
evidence, Quintiliani (2013) reports the negative correlation between debt financing and
the degree of innovation of the company (extimated as the relevance of investments in
R&D activities). The evolution of the studies on this issue has helped to consolidate the
idea that institutions and financial markets play an irreplaceable role in economic
189
development, especially when, as happens in modern economies, factors that generate
these processes arise from so-called “intangible assets”, such as research, knowledge and
attitude to innovation, which interact intensively with other elements that influence the
behaviour of economic actors, such as the risks and uncertainty of economic results.
In an economic system in which the role of banks is prevalent, access to loans by
innovative companies can also be influenced by the particular credit policies of the
intermediary; the relationship banking model can mitigate these problems (Cosci et al.,
2016). The relationship between lenders and borrowers affects allocative efficiency and,
consequently, the financial system contribution to innovation; in fact, the conditions of
credit access may be significantly different due to the parties' ability to relate in terms of
quality of the exchanged information, the flexibility of the relationship and the ability to
cooperate not only in the financial management of enterprises, but also in other aspects of
management in a broader sense. Relationships based on cultural relationship-oriented
models, therefore, involve a greater ease of access to bank financing, even for the
apparently more risky firms (Nadotti, 2014). Moreover, the intensification of that
relationship tends to reduce the use of collateral, particularly expensive for this type of
firms. This evidence makes it clear that if the orientation on transaction lending is more
pronounced, innovative firms could experience greater credit; conversely approaches
oriented to emphasize the relationships, valuing the company as a whole and trying to
highlight its future potential, can assess a convenience in allocating part of their resources
in financing innovative firms.
Alternative financing instruments, for example crowdfunding, can provide finance for
innovative companies (Giudici and Guerini, 2014; Vannoni, 2020); opportunities may
also be found in the impact investing industry (Pinelli and Torluccio, 2021). The use of
these tools presupposes, however, a good level of financial literacy in firms: financial
literacy also serves to make small business familiar about availability of various financing
options and support services (Anshika and Singla, 2022).
4 Conclusions
The financial variable is a decisive driver for innovation: the lack of resources to
invest to create an enabling environment for competitiveness and development is,
perhaps, the most binding limitation to the growth of modern economic systems, so it is
190
essential to identify the most effective tools to avoid losing competitiveness and to offer
these businesses the financial support they need.
The level of financial sector development can be considered a good indicator of the
growth of an economic system, especially when it contributes regularly to provide funds
useful for the development of investments in the industrial sector and, in particular, when
it selects the activities characterized by the highest rate of innovation and change in
productive assets.
Informational asymmetry and moral hazard problems still act as relevant obstacles for
innovative firms financing (Diaconu, 2016). Public and government incentives can help to
bridge the funding gap by innovative firms. In the particular case of innovative
enterprises, the uncertainty about expected outcomes is a major obstacle to the funding: as
we said before, the peculiarities of this type of enterprise, information asymmetry,
under-collateralization and high costs associated with their risk assessment, have often
been impeding factors for access to bank financing.
Most of the economic literature share the idea that the most suitable innovation
funding instrument is the venture capital; however, currently, innovative tools, using
fintech models are also growing, representing an alternative channel to collect capital by
firms.
To answer our research question “(RQ1) Have emerged over time factors that can
facilitate the financing of innovative small and medium-sized enterprises? “, we have
compiled a systematic review of the literature, from which the following main results
emerge: most of the articles fit into the thematic area “Innovative and sustainable firms
financing”; among the articles included in the category “Alternative finance for
innovative firms”, the prevailing thematic motif is that one of the financial instrument; the
distribution about “financial instrument” and “financial constraints” is almost similar for
the other two thematic areas (“Innovative firms financing” and “Innovative and
sustainable firms financing”); 46.2% of the articles has a sectoral focus; 20.5% of the
papers presents a geographical focus.
The analysis of the most recent literature on the financing of innovative companies
does not seem to be freed from the consolidated evidence with respect to the factors that
hinder access to finance for innovative companies, with financial constraints even
stronger in the case of small and medium enterprises. Some original elements are, instead
traceable in attempts to identify factors that can mitigate financial constraints, improving
the reputation and creditworthiness of firms, for example its commitment to sustainability
191
issues and financial literacy of entrepreneurs. However, this analyses are still not in an
advanced stage, so there is a lack of robust evidence. In addition, in many articles, the
research concerns case studies for singular economic sector.
Our article gives a contribution to the existing literature about the financing of
innovative companies as it proposes an in-depth analysis of the most recent contributions
on the topic (period 2012-2022). To further deepen the research, the next step could be to
compare these evidences with the contributions, in the same period of investigation, about
the financing of non-innovative small and medium-sized enterprises, in order to highlight
more precisely the differences in access to finance among firms.
References
Barney, J.B., (1991) “Firm Resources and Sustained Competitive Advantage”, Journal of
Management, Vol. 17, No. 1, pp. 99-120.
Davenport, T. H. and Prusak, L., (1998) Working knowledge: How organizations manage what they
know, Harvard Business School Press, Boston.
Marr, B. and Schiuma, G., (2001) Measuring and Managing Intellectual Capital and Knowledge
Assets in New Economy Organisations, in Handbook of Performance Measurement, ed. M.
Bourne, Gee, London.
Abraham, F. and Schmukler, S. L. (2018) A New Role for Development Banks?, World Bank
Research and Policy Briefs No. 120691.
Anshika, A., and Singla, A. (2022) Financial literacy of entrepreneurs: a systematic review,
Managerial Finance.
Arnone, M., Farina, G. and Modina, M. (2015), “Technological Districts and the Financing of
Innovation: Opportunities and Challenges for Local Banks”, Economic Notes, 44(3), 483–510.
Baker, M., & Wurgler, J. (2002) “Market Timing and Capital Structure”, The Journal of Finance,
57(1), 1-32.
Bartolacci, F., Caputo, A. and Soverchia, M. (2020), Business Strategy and the Environment, vol.
29, issue 3, 1297-1309.
Berger, A. and Udell, G. (1998), “The economics of small business finance: the roles of private
equity and debt markets in the financial growth cycle”, Journal of Banking & Finance,
22(6–8), 613-673.
Bertoni, F., Bonini, S., Capizzi, V., Colombo, M.G. andManigart, S. (2022), “Digitization in the
Market for Entrepreneurial Finance: Innovative Business Models and New Financing
Channels”, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Vol. 46(5) 1120–1135.
Black, B. and Gilson, R. (1998), “Venture capital and the structure of capital markets: Banks versus
stock markets”, Journal of Financial Economics, n. 47.
Cainelli, G., Evangelista, R. and Savona, M. (2004), “The Impact of Innovation on Economic
Performance in Services”, The Service Industries Journal 24(1).
Cosci, S., Meliciani, V. and Sabato, V. (2016), “Relationship lending and innovation: empirical
evidence on a sample of European firms”, Economics of Innovation and New Technology.
Volume 25, 2016 - Issue 4, 335-357.
Czarnitzki, D. and Hottenrott, H. (2010), Financing Constraints for Industrial Innovation: What Do
We Know?
192
Cusmano, L. and Thompson, J. (2018), Alternative Financing Instruments for SMEs and
Entrepreneurs, OECD SME and Entrepreneurship Papers.
D’Amato, A. and Cacia, C. (2008), “La quotazione in borsa delle PMI tra mito e realtà”. Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, (3).
Dewey, A. and Drahota, A. (2016), An Introduction to Systematic Reviews, SAGE Publications
Ltd., Thousand Oaks.
Diaconu, M. (2016), Determinants of Financing Decisions in Innovative Firms: A Review on
Theoretical Backgrounds and Empirical Evidence, Ovidius University Annals: Economic
Sciences Series, 16, 198-203.
Domenichelli, O. (2008), “The pecking order theory in the context of small and medium-sized
enterprises: a note”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (2).
Domenichelli, O. (2012), “A review of the main determinants of capital structure of smaller firms
and an empirical investigation on a sample of small Italian firms”, Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, (1).
Giudici, G., Guerini, M. and Rossi-Lamastra, C. (2014), “Crowdfunding in Italy: state of the art and
future prospects”, Economia e Politica Industriale, (2013/4).
Hall, B. H. and Lerner, J. (2010), The Financing of R&D and Innovation, in B. H. Hall, & N.
Rosenberg (Eds.), Handbook of the Economics of Innovation (Vol. 1, pp. 609-639).
Hogan, T. and Hutson, E. (2005), Capital structure in new technology-based firms: Evidence from
the Irish software sector, Global Finance Journal.
Huyghebaert, N., Van de Gucht, L. and Van Hulle, C. (2007), “The choice between bank debt and
trade credit in business start-ups”, Small Bus Econ 29, 455.
Jensen, M. and Meckling, W. H. (1976), “Theory of the firm: Managerial behavior, agency costs
and ownership structure”, Journal of Financial Economics, 3, issue 4, p. 305-360.
Jensen, M.C. (1986), “Agency Cost of Free Cash Flow, Corporate Finance, and Takeover”,
American Economic Review, Vol. 76, No. 2.
Koellinger, P. (2008), “Why are some entrepreneurs more innovative than others?”, Small Bus Econ
(2008) 31:21–37.
Kuniy, M., Kimura, H. and Cruz Basso, L.F. (2010), Innovation Strategy and Capital Structure of
Brazilian Companies. SSRN Electronic Journal.
López-Gracia, J. and Sogorb-Mira, F. (2008), “Testing trade-off and pecking order theories
financing SMEs”, Small Business Economics, Springer, vol. 31(2), pages 117-136.
Mac an Bhaird, C. and Lynn, T. (2015), “Seeding the cloud: Financial bootstrapping in the
computer software sector”, Venture Capital 17 (1-2), 151-170.
Myers, S.C. (1977), “Determinants of Corporate Borrowing”, Journal of Financial Economics, 5,
147-175.
Myers, S.C. and Majluf, N.S. (1984), “Corporate Financing and Investment Decisions When Firms
Have Information That Investors Do Not Have”, Journal of Financial Economics, 13, 187-221.
Nadotti, L. M. (2014), Progettazione e Finanziamento delle imprese startup, Isedi-De Agostini,
Torino.
Palazzi, F. (2011), “Sviluppo e capitali delle medie imprese familiari italiane. I casi paradigmatici di
The Bridge e Piquadro”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (2).
Pinelli, M. and Torluccio, G. (2021), Impact investing: an overview.
Principi, S. (2012), Il ruolo dell’investimento istituzionale nel capitale di rischio delle family
business: review empirica internazionale e caso italiano.
Pu, G., Qamruzzaman, M. D., Mehta, A. M., Naqvi, F. N. and Karim, S. (2021), “Innovative
finance, technological adaptation and SMEs sustainability: the mediating role of government
support during COVID-19 pandemic”, Sustainability, 13(16), 9218.
193
Quintiliani, A. (2013), Le scelte di finanziamento dell’impresa: review della letteratura, Sinergie
rapporti di ricerca.
Saint Paul G. (1992), “Technological Choice, Financial Markets and Economic development”,
Markets and Economic Development, 3, 763–781.
Schock, F. (2013), Private Equity Financing of Technology Firms: A Literature Review, EBS
Business School Research Paper No. 14–06.
Tirumala, R. D. and Tiwari, P. (2022), “Innovative financing mechanism for blue economy
projects”, Marine Policy, 139, 104194.
Ueda M. (2002), Bank Versus Venture Capital, UPF Economics and Business Working Paper, n.
522.
Vannoni, V. (2020), “Financing Italian firms throught invoice trading platforms”, International
Journal of Economics and Finance, Vol. 12, no. 3, pp. 78-85.
Zoppa, A. and McMahon, R.G.P. (2002), Pecking Order Theory and the Financial Structure of
Manufacturing SMEs from Australia’s Business Longitudinal Survey, The Flinders University
of South Australia, School of Commerce, Research Paper Series: 02-1, Bedford Park.
Wilson, K. E. (2015), Policy Lessons from Financing Innovative Firms.
194
Entrepreneurship & Networks: A Literature Review
Francesco Mutignani
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via saffi, 42, 61029 Urbino
E-mail: f.mutignani@campus.uniurb.it
Roberta Bocconcelli
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via saffi, 42, 61029 Urbino
E-mail: roberta.bocconcelli@uniurb.it
Alessandro Pagano
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via saffi, 42, 61029 Urbino
E-mail: alessandro.pagano@uniurb.it
Abstract
In recent years within entrepreneurship literature a “contextualised” perspective has
emerged to place emphasis on the wide variety of contexts where entrepreneurial
processes are undertaken. This led to a more complex view attempting to provide an
additional and complementary perspective to “mainstream” contributions based on the
analysis of entrepreneurial orientation and behaviour mainly in terms of opportunity
recognition and exploitation. This attention to understanding the role of contexts has been
due to the increasing effort in diffusing entrepreneurial culture and activities across
sectors, regions and cities for economic development and social cohesion. This effort has
been apparent with regard to the so-called peripheral areas, which have been strongly
affected by reduction of economic activities.
In this scenario the role of networks emerges progressively in research dealing with
entrepreneurship, both considered as an engine to entrepreneurial initiatives and
development and as a specific context in which entrepreneurship takes place.
In this paper we conduct a literature review on the topic of “Networks &
Entrepreneurship” with a particular focus on the “spatial/geographical” dimension. The
195
research is at its initial stage and will constitute the basis for settling the state of the art on
the issue to elaborate further on the interplay between Networks and Entrepreneurship in
Peripheral Areas.
Keywords Entrepreneurship, Contexts, Networks, Place, Peripheral Areas
Paper type Literature review paper
1 Introduction
Entrepreneurship is recognized as an engine of economic growth and development.
The enhancement of entrepreneurial processes within economies are at the centre of
policy actions at the local, national and European level, especially in periods of crisis and
uncertainty as those faced in the last years (Sharma et al., 2022; Vatavu et al., 2022). In
this vein scholars have been increasingly interested in investigating entrepreneurship as a
complex phenomenon and using different perspectives and approaches for different
purposes.
Notably, in recent years within entrepreneurship studies a “contextualised”
perspective has emerged (Welter et al., 2019). The emphasis has been placed on the wide
variety of contexts where entrepreneurial processes are undertaken, leading to a more
complex view attempting to provide an additional and complementary view to
“mainstream” contributions based on the analysis of entrepreneurial orientation and
behaviour mainly in terms of opportunity recognition and exploitation. This effort has led
to consider other disciplines and research methodologies (Welter & Baker, 2021). The
variety of contexts might imply a variety of entrepreneurial forms and processes, which
might show unconventional features (Guercini & Cova, 2018). The need to better
understand the role of contexts has been due to the increasing effort also in terms of
policy making in diffusing entrepreneurial culture and activities across sectors, regions
and cities, thus promoting both economic development and social cohesion (OECD,
2021). This effort has been apparent with regard to the so-called peripheral areas, which
have been strongly affected by reduction of economic activities and by the weakening of
the social fabric (Pugh & Dubois, 2021).
An increasing number of contributions have attempted to analyse the role of contexts
adopting a “networked” perspective, thus placing attention on the web of exchanges and
relationships where entrepreneurial initiatives are embedded (Wigren-Kristoferson et al.,
196
2022). This stream of studies have moved beyond the well-known focus on
“entrepreneurial networking” conceived as the main pattern describing the way
entrepreneurial firms engaged with markets and market actors. Contexts might be
characterised by networks showing overlapping dimensions economic, social,
technological, institutional and therefore deserve to be better understood in their
interplay with entrepreneurial processes, which might lead to interactive patterns
(Shepherd, 2015; Baraldi et al., 2019).
The main objective of this study is to provide a preliminary review of contributions
linking entrepreneurship and network-related concepts in terms of 1) main and emerging
trends of the literature; 2) most prominent authors and relative journals; 3) avenues for
further research. The reason for undertaking this literature review is twofold: first, most of
the existing systematic reviews are dated (O’Donnell et al., 2001; Slotte-Kock &
Coviello, 2009), while various recent contributions concern specific topics, such as
entrepreneurial ecosystems (Fernandes & Ferreira, 2022) or embeddedness in
entrepreneurship (Wigren-Kristoferson et al., 2022); secondly, this analysis represents an
intermediate step in our research project focussing on entrepreneurship, networks and
peripheral areas.
2 Methodology
For the purpose of the study, a preliminary exploration of previous contributions, we
conducted a systematic literature review (Xiao & Watson, 2019; Kraus et al., 2020)
focusing mainly on its quantitative part, thus not extending the qualitative analysis of the
results obtained. The selected dataset is Scopus, with a settled time frame of 10 years
(2014-2023).
Scopus has been chosen in the light of its openness, comprehensiveness, and easiness
with respect to data collection procedures and opportunities of analysis when compared to
Web of Science and Google Scholar (Bergman, 2012; Martín-Martín et al. 2019).
For what concerns the time frame we believe that this is a good period to observe for
a twofold reason. First, a ten-years time frame allows us not to be overwhelmed by
documents but at the same time it represents a reasonable time to observe emerging
trends and to compare them. Secondly, it represents an interesting period of investigation
due to the many events that have occurred over the years that have had a major impact on
197
the topic of our interest. For example, we catch both the period immediately following the
crisis of 2008-2011 and the crisis due to the pandemic.
The selection of contributions has followed three main steps:
- Selection of keywords and boolean operators to formulate research query: we
have individuated relevant keywords to be searched into the title of the
document, then we have limited the subject areas of study to the most relevant
for our aim.
- Refinements of the keywords, subject areas, publication type, to further limit the
results to the most pertinent in order to reach a reasonable number of documents
to read the abstract of each one.
- Abstract readings for exclusion of non relevant works and final assessment of
the dataset.
The first step was related to the selection of key words and boundaries of the research
process. In this phase we have proceeded first with a trial related to a limited period of
time (2022-up to date) to test the main keywords we had previously assessed. In this
phase has been possible to add relevant keywords that were not taken into account (i.e.
platform*, district*), to assess the boolean operators to be used in the search engine and to
verify that the search limit at the title was not too restricted.
In the second phase we refined our research query and applied it to the whole time
period. We limited the boundaries of the research to specific subject areas (business,
sociology, economics, decision science, arts, psychology), to specific document types
(articles, review, book chapter, editorials) and to the English language. This choice is
consistent with our research aim and was deemed necessary to come up with a reasonable
amount of contributions to be analysed (abstract reading) to reduce the dataset.
At the end of this phase 2064 results have been found using the following search
query on SCOPUS:
( TITLE ( entrepreneur* ) AND TITLE ( network ) OR TITLE ( ecosystem ) OR TITLE (
community ) OR TITLE ( platform ) OR TITLE ( district ) OR TITLE ( "imp" ) ) AND PUBYEAR >
2013 AND ( LIMIT-TO ( SUBJAREA , "busi" ) OR LIMIT-TO ( SUBJAREA , "soci" ) OR LIMIT-TO
( SUBJAREA , "econ" ) OR LIMIT-TO ( SUBJAREA , "deci" ) OR LIMIT-TO ( SUBJAREA , "arts" )
OR LIMIT-TO ( SUBJAREA , "psyc" ) ) AND ( LIMIT-TO ( DOCTYPE , "ar" ) OR LIMIT-TO (
198
DOCTYPE , "ch" ) OR LIMIT-TO ( DOCTYPE , "re" ) OR LIMIT-TO ( DOCTYPE , "bk" ) OR
LIMIT-TO ( DOCTYPE , "ed" ) ) AND ( LIMIT-TO ( LANGUAGE , "english" ) ) .
The dataset at this stage was composed of 1589 articles, 386 book chapters, 38
reviews, 33 books and 18 editorials.
Since the dataset proved to be, as expected, very large, we proceeded to the last phase.
We read the abstract of each item in the dataset to exclude those works that, even meeting
the above described research criteria, were not actually centred on the main topic of our
research. Just to make a couple of examples, the papers “Strategic Entrepreneurship and
the Performance of Women-Owned Fish Processing Units in Cibinong District, Bogor
Regency” and “Innovation finance ecosystems for entrepreneurial firms: A conceptual
model and research propositions” were excluded. From this process, the database was
almost halved, reaching 1054 items divided into: 829 articles, 181 book chapters, 16
reviews, 16 books and 12 editorials.
For the main aim of this work in progress research we performed a preliminary
demographic analysis and we elaborate preliminary considerations about “place and
networked entrepreneurship” that will constitute the bases of future research. These
analyses are presented in the following section.
3 Results
3.1 Overview
In this section we provide the analysis of our dataset of 1054 works. The analysis we
provide is mainly a demographic analysis. We first analyse the time dimension and the
general composition of the dataset; we then provide an overview of the main keywords
associated to entrepreneurship on which our paper is focused: networks, ecosystem,
community, platform and district; finally we present a first analysis of the importance of
“place” as a “context” in which entrepreneurship occurs.
3.1.1 Timeframe analysis and general overview of the dataset
The trend of publications proves to be continuously growing, with a slight decrease
during 2021, largely recovered during 2022 which, at the moment, is the year with the
highest number of publications, although, speculating, 2023 will undoubtedly surpass this
result (see Figure 1).
199
It is worthy to notice that although the headlines do not explicitly mention the
covid-19 pandemic, it can be assumed that the data collected refer to this period and were
therefore influenced by it. This may therefore be the explanation for both the strong
increase in publications in the year 2022 and the preference for specific keywords and
topics.
Figure 1: Publications per year
As we have already pointed out, the dataset of 1054 results in terms of kind of
publications is composed as follows: 829 articles, 181 book chapters, 16 reviews, 16
books and 12 editorials. The main sources are therefore confirmed as the journals. In
terms of concentration we observe that about 30% of the articles have been published in
10 journals (Figure 2). Notably, the first five journals in terms of number of publications
are: Small Business Economics with 56 results, Sustainability with 32, Entrepreneurship
and Regional Development with 31, Journal of Business Research with 25 and Research
Policy tied with Journal of Enterprising Communities with 22 results. In this respect, we
can argue that even though a majority of papers are published in those journals with a
focused scope in relation to the issue under analysis, 70% of papers have attracted the
interest of different outlets. This means that the topic has been investigated using a variety
of perspectives and for a variety of aims in the business and economics fields.
200
Figure 2: First 10 sources for articles
The increasing interest in this topic and the variety of angles from which the topic is
investigated is witnessed by the presence in the dataset of a number of special issues (SIs)
published in the ten years under observation. For example in 2014 Small Business
Economics hosted a SI edited by Karlsson and Warda titled “Entrepreneurship and
innovation networks”. Starting from the observation that so far studies emphasised
institutional arrangements along with the structure and efficiency of innovation networks
as major factors of the variation of the frequency and the quality of entrepreneurship
between different places, regions, and countries, the Guest Editors called for studies
centred on the role of knowledge and its diffusion as a triggering factor for
entrepreneurship in the twenty-first century. In 2017 McNaughton and Gray in their SI
about “Entrepreneurship and resilient communities” in Journal of Enterprising
Communities: People and Places in the Global Economy, assess that there was been little
research into the links between the resilience of individual entrepreneurs or
entrepreneurial organisations and resilience of the communities which they belong, and
thus investigated the mutual relationship between entrepreneurship and the communities
it is embedded in. The latest three SIs of our dataset have been published in the last two
years and all deal with Entrepreneurial Ecosystems (EEs). In mid 2021 Audretsch and
colleagues edited in Entrepreneurship and Regional Development “The dynamics of
entrepreneurial ecosystems”, a SI centred on the dynamics occurring in EEs, contending
that in previous studies EEs have generally been analysed from a static perspective. In
late 2022, Research Policy published a SI titled “Uncommon methods and metrics for
local entrepreneurial ecosystems” edited by Feldman and colleagues. The aim of the SI is
201
to propose new empirical approaches for studying local entrepreneurial ecosystems to
provide insights for the study of the dynamics and functioning of local entrepreneurial
ecosystems. In March 2023 Chin and colleagues edited in Journal of Intellectual Capital
a SI titled “Unveiling the roles of intellectual capital in entrepreneurial ecosystems:
evidence from moderate innovative countries”. Guest editors, starting by the assumption
that EEs “entail the possession of diverse knowledge resources and assets as the basis for
fostering sufficient innovation capacity to cope with the ever-evolving, intricate relations
among actors”, call for the imperative to investigate the dynamic mechanisms of
intellectual capital that characterises the totality of an organisation’s knowledge stocks
and resources.
Undoubtedly these SIs along with the number of contributions over the last decade,
witness that the interest of academia dealing with entrepreneurship towards the networked
dimension of entrepreneurship has constantly increased.
3.1.2 Networks, ecosystem, community and Entrepreneurship
In order to direct the analysis in the next steps, it is useful to look at the occurrence of
the chosen keywords in the titles during the decade under observation (see Figure 3).
Considering the totals, it is immediately possible to identify the dominance of the
keyword “ecosystem*”, which appears 587 times, followed by “network*” with 359 and
“social*” with 152. However, it is interesting how the trends have evolved during the
decade. Notably, the first one has started to emerge only from 2016, surpassing the second
one by 2018 that, instead, has maintained constant around 36 results each year. On the
other hand, “social*” has a growing path that deserve attention and that has almost
reached “network*” in 2023. Undoubtedly, the latter has been replaced by the first one on
the more general meaning of aggregation while retaining the more interactive one.
Finally, we believe that other keyword trends that deserve attention are “communit*” and
“rural” that are slowly rising in the last five years.
202
Figure 3: Occurrence of main and emerging keywords per year
More in depth, starting from the most apparent trend of “ecosytem*” we can see that
the topic has been treated by the major journals since 2017 by Small Business Economics,
which has a total of 41 publications on that; on the other hand, Research Policy has
published one article on that in 2021 but we noted a pike on 2022 with 17 articles on the
subject, while in 2023 only one article again has been published. Looking at the authors,
the most active are Roundy P.T. and Ratten V., respectively with 19 and 15 results.
However, despite the first one has been constant in its work since 2016, Ratten V.
produced 9 works in 2020 when he approached the topic. Furthermore, while Ratten V.
has published some book chapters, Roundy P.T. has worked mainly on journal articles for
several sources. It is interesting to note that we can see a surge in 2021 publications
compared to the trend of previous years.
Regarding the second keyword, “network*”, that has gradually been replaced by the
previous one, the major source titles are Small Business Economics with 18 results,
followed by Entrepreneurship and Regional Development and Journal of Business
Research, respectively with 14 and 12 works. The main authors are Huggins R., with 6
works, Lamine W. with 5, and McGrath H. with 4. Interestingly, while Huggins has been
very active on the topic since 2018, McGrath has a constant presence in the timeframe
and she is the only one who has published in the last four years among the most active
authors. In any case, these authors seem to not be focused on a particular journal. This
203
keyword has peaked in 2018 even though it maintains an almost constant level of
publications every year.
Finally, the keyword “social*” is acquiring more and more relevance, coupled both
with “entrepreneurship” and to “network*” keywords. Of our particular interest, in fact, is
the use made to identify the social network, that is the set of relationships and contacts
that entrepreneurs use to sustain their businesses. The keyword is mostly present in Small
Business Economics and Sustainability (Switzerland), both with 7 articles, followed by
several other sources that account 4 results and for which it is worthy to mention
Community Development,Journal of Social Entrepreneurship and Journal of
Enterprising Communities. There seems to be that no author has specialised on the
subject so far. Thus, we mention Busch C., who has been one of the first to publish one
work in 2014 and another in 2019, and Drummon D. who published 2 works within 2022
and 2023. The trend peak has been reached two times, first in 2018 and later again in
2022.
On the side of emerging trends, the keyword “communit*” had a strong leap forward
in its growth path in the year 2022, surpassing the publications in the same year of the
keyword “social*” and almost reaching those of “network*”. The main sources are
Journal of Enterprising Communities with 9 articles, Entrepreneurship and Regional
Development with 6 and Community Development with 5 results. The authors that have
appeared the most are Fortunato M.W.P. with 5 works, Roundy P.T. with 3 and Ratten V.
with 2 results. The rise of this keyword can be attributed mainly to its use to denote
entrepreneurial activity by a community or for a community, thus sharing some semantic
meaning with the previously mentioned terms.
3.2 Place and “networked” entrepreneurship
The keyword “communit*” represents a defined set of people who share defined
characteristics, and in particular may also incorporate specific spatial meanings. From this
point of view, the importance of keywords pertaining to the “place” component of
community as well as entrepreneurship emerges. Therefore, it is useful to investigate the
trends of place-related keywords, among them being “Rural” the most prominent.
204
Figure 4: Occurrence of place-related keywords
With 36 results, the keyword “Rural” denotes a specific context of entrepreneurial
activity, a marginal space mostly thought not suitable for it but can also create space and
opportunities for the success of even innovative and high-tech activities. This has been
clearly outlined by Korsgaard (et al., 2015) in their article titled “The best of both worlds:
how rural entrepreneurs use placial embeddedness and strategic networks to create
opportunities”. The link with “communit*” keyword emerges in 14 papers that explicitly
mention the two words and make particular reference to resilience as well as community
development in this difficult context through entrepreneurial activity. Another interesting
link can be found also in 12 articles that make use also of “network*” keyword,
remarking a relational component of entrepreneurship in this environment. Yet, no
particular journal seems to be focused on the topic: we have 3 results for Sustainability
(Switzerland) and 2 for Journal of Rural Studies. Many other source titles have just one
article, but it is interesting to note that they are for the most part concentrated in the last 5
years, except for Regional Studies and Entrepreneurship and Regional Development that
have been the first to publish on the topic in our time-frame, respectively in 2014 and
2015. The first article was published by Freire-Gibb and Nielsen (2014) and was entitled
“Entrepreneurship Within Urban and Rural Areas: Creative People and Social Networks”
while the latter is the already cited one by Korgaard, Ferguson, and Gaddefors (2015); on
the other hand, the latest article “Neo-endogenous revitalisation: Enhancing community
resilience through art tourism and rural entrepreneurship” has been published in 2023 on
205
Journal of Rural Studies by Qu and Zollet. From these articles the importance of social
networks in rural areas emerges, thanks to entrepreneurs developing strong ties with other
local actors, thus overcoming economic stagnation and institutional weakness of this
context.
The spatial component emerges also with several other keywords, such as “context*”,
“district*”, “platform*”, “place*”, “space*” and “area*”. The first three have significant
growing trends, with particular reference to “platform*”, and can be assimilated to
“networked environments”, where actors interact with each other. Notably, these terms
have been used in many titles associated with specific countries, regions or districts. In
this sense we can get some idea from “Interpreting community enterprises’ ability to
survive in depleted contexts through the Humane Entrepreneurship lens: evidence from
Italian rural areas” published by Buratti and colleagues (2022) on Journal of Small
Business and Enterprise development, which studies how Community Entrepreneurs
operating in depleted contexts manage to survive, by successfully achieving multiple
goals. The last three terms, with more general meanings, reflect these connections, but
they are not as frequent as the others.
4 Preliminary discussion and conclusions
The preliminary results of this literature review shows that the analysis of networks
within the entrepreneurship field has grown over time and has become a key theme in this
stream of studies. This might be due to various reasons: the emergence of a wide variety
of contexts where entrepreneurial processes emerge; the relevance of networked
environments to increase the resilience of entrepreneurial firms; the need to understand
better the nature and evolution of these networks and networked environments. Clearly,
the literature reviews tracked in the dataset can give us a comprehensive overview of how
the individual topics were addressed.
The growing interest in entrepreneurship and networks is apparent also in terms of the
variety of journal outlets where articles on this topic are published. Beside the key
journals in the entrepreneurship field, various other journals - mostly concerned with
innovation and innovative processes - show contributions dealing with networks-related
themes. An important connection of the two streams of research on entrepreneurship and
networks-related studies has been highlighted by Baraldi E., La Rocca A., Perna A.,
Snehota I. in their literature review on Industrial Marketing Management journal of 2020,
206
which identifies research areas fruitful for advancing our understanding of entrepreneurial
phenomena.
In terms of emerging themes this initial analysis shows two parallel evolutions. There
is a growing interest in the nature and role of ecosystems as a key concept to analyse and
describe the emergence of connected actors with local boundaries. This growing attention
to ecosystems and ecosystem approach is due also to the relevance of technological
upgrading and innovation processes and to the involvement of actors such as
universities/research centres and knowledge brokers. This type of concern emphasises
those entrepreneurial contexts qualified as innovation hubs and placed at the forefront of
technological advances in developed areas (Rosli & Cacciolatti, 2022).
The other interesting result in terms of key themes is the recent and growing attention
towards what might be defined as the “fabric” of entrepreneurial networks. The emphasis
on concepts such as community, on the social dimension of networked relationships, on
marginal contexts such as rural areas has lead scholars to investigate in more depth the
nature and evolution these networks, placing attention on human-related and place-based
factors, as shown by Korsgaard (et al., 2015).
We are aware of the many limitations of this study, in particular the absence of a
citation analysis and the clustering of publications. Furthermore, the manual selection of
articles on such a large dataset on the one hand, and the use of only one reference
database on the other, undoubtedly lead to bias in the protocol used and the results
obtained.
The future steps in the development of this literature review concern a better
understanding of the contents in our dataset by looking at the abstract and clustering the
works according to the subject areas. In particular, the next step of the analysis will
provide a detailed view of studies dealing with network dynamics concerning different
kinds of entrepreneurial typologies and how these are shaped in relation to the context,
environment and place in which they occur.
This work will prove its validity first and foremost as a basis for further analysis in
general terms on entrepreneurship and networks, as well as for research on the
increasingly prominent role of the placial component in entrepreneurial processes. From
this point of view, due to the increasing interest in rural entrepreneurship, future research
can focus on it by analysing limits and opportunities, innovative methods and policy
support in doing entrepreneurial activities in this context, emphasising the positive effects
for the social fabric of these places.
207
References
Audretsch, D., Mason, C., Miles, M. P., & O’Connor, A. (2021). Time and the dynamics of
entrepreneurial ecosystems. Entrepreneurship & Regional Development,33(1-2), 1-14.
Baraldi, E., Havenvid, M. I., Linné, Å., & Öberg, C. (2019). Start-ups and networks: Interactive
perspectives and a research agenda. Industrial Marketing Management,80, 58-67.
Baraldi, E., La Rocca, A., Perna, A., & Snehota, I. (2020). Connecting IMP and entrepreneurship
research: directions for future research. Industrial Marketing Management,91, 495-509.
Bergman, E. M. L. (2012). Finding citations to social work literature: The relative benefits of using
Web of Science, Scopus, or Google Scholar. The Journal of Academic Librarianship,38(6),
370-379.
Buratti, N., Albanese, M., & Sillig, C. (2022). Interpreting community enterprises’ ability to survive
in depleted contexts through the Humane Entrepreneurship lens: evidence from Italian rural
areas. Journal of Small Business and Enterprise Development,29(1), 74-92.
Chin, T., Del Giudice, M., Di Vaio, A., Fiano, F., Garcia-Perez, A., Paoloni, N., & Magni, D.
(2023). Guest editorial: Unveiling the roles of intellectual capital in entrepreneurial
ecosystems: evidence from moderate innovative countries. Journal of Intellectual Capital,
24(1), 1-9.
Feldman, M., Fleming, L., Heaton, S., Desai, S., & Teece, D. (2022). Uncommon methods and
metrics for local entrepreneurial ecosystems. Research Policy,51(9), 104583.
Ferreira, J. J. (2022). Entrepreneurial ecosystems and networks: a literature review and research
agenda. Review of Managerial Science,16(1), 189-247.
Freire-Gibb, L. C., & Nielsen, K. (2014). Entrepreneurship within urban and rural areas: Creative
people and social networks. Regional studies,48(1), 139-153.
Guercini, S., & Cova, B. (2018). Unconventional entrepreneurship. Journal of Business Research,
92, 385-391.
Karlsson, C., & Warda, P. (2014). Entrepreneurship and innovation networks. Small Business
Economics, 43, 393-398.
Korsgaard, S., Ferguson, R., & Gaddefors, J. (2015). The best of both worlds: how rural
entrepreneurs use placial embeddedness and strategic networks to create opportunities.
Entrepreneurship & regional development,27(9-10), 574-598.
Kraus, S., Breier, M., & Dasí-Rodríguez, S. (2020). The art of crafting a systematic literature
review in entrepreneurship research. International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal,
16, 1023-1042.
Martín-Martín, A., Orduna-Malea, E., Thelwall, M., & Delgado-López-Cózar, E. (2019). Google
Scholar, Web of Science, and Scopus: Which is best for me?. Impact of Social Sciences Blog.
McNaughton, R. B., & Gray, B. (2017). Entrepreneurship and resilient communities–introduction to
the special issue. Journal of Enterprising Communities: People and Places in the Global
Economy, 11(1), 2-19.
OECD/European Commission (2021). The Missing Entrepreneurs 2021: Policies for Inclusive
Entrepreneurship and Self Employment, OECD Publishing, Paris,
https://doi.org/10.1787/71b7a9bb-en.
O’Donnell, A., Gilmore, A., Cummins, D., & Carson, D. (2001). The network construct in
entrepreneurship research: a review and critique. Management Decision,39(9), 749-760.
Pugh, R., & Dubois, A. (2021). Peripheries within economic geography: Four “problems” and the
road ahead of us. Journal of Rural Studies, 87, 267-275.
Qu, M., & Zollet, S. (2023). Neo-endogenous revitalisation: Enhancing community resilience
through art tourism and rural entrepreneurship. Journal of Rural Studies,97, 105-114.
Sharma, G. D., Kraus, S., Liguori, E., Bamel, U. K., & Chopra, R. (2022). Entrepreneurial
challenges of COVID-19: Re-thinking entrepreneurship after the crisis. Journal of Small
Business Management, 1-23.
208
Shepherd, D. (2015). Party On! A call for entrepreneurship research that is more interactive,
activity based, cognitively hot, compassionate, and prosocial. Journal of Business Venturing,
30(4), 489-507.
Slotte–Kock, S., & Coviello, N. (2010). Entrepreneurship research on network processes: A review
and ways forward. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice,34(1), 31-57.
Rosli, A., & Cacciolatti, L. (2022). The role of universities in the development of the local
knowledge base: supporting innovation ecosystems through skills development and
entrepreneurship. International Journal of Intellectual Property Management,12(1), 64-87.
Vatavu, S., Dogaru, M., Moldovan, N. C., & Lobont, O. R. (2022). The impact of entrepreneurship
on economic development through government policies and citizens’ attitudes. Economic
Research-Ekonomska Istraživanja,35(1), 1604-1617.
Welter, F., Baker, T., & Wirsching, K. (2019). Three waves and counting: The rising tide of
contextualization in entrepreneurship research. Small business economics, 52, 319-330.
Welter, F., & Baker, T. (2021). Moving contexts onto new roads: Clues from other disciplines.
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 45(5), 1154-1175.
Wigren-Kristoferson, C., Brundin, E., Hellerstedt, K., Stevenson, A., & Aggestam, M. (2022).
Rethinking embeddedness: a review and research agenda. Entrepreneurship & Regional
Development,34(1-2), 32-56.
Xiao, Y., & Watson, M. (2019). Guidance on conducting a systematic literature review. Journal of
planning education and research,39(1), 93-112.
209
Long Abstracts
210
Sustainable Business Models: the role of
Collaborative and Integrated Supply Chain
Cecilia Correggi
Department of Economics
University of Modena and Reggio Emilia
Via Università, 4
E-mail: cecilia.correggi@unimore.it
Paolo Di Toma
Department of Communication and Economics
University of Modena and Reggio Emilia
Via Università, 4
E-mail: paolo.ditoma@unimore.it
Keywords Business Model, Sustainable Business Model, Supply Chain
Paper type Long Abstract
1. Objectives
In recent years, how entrepreneurial activities impact on the environment and
communities has become a prominent concern for both civil society and scientific debate.
Scholars increasingly turned their attention to how firms can shape their activities to
implement sustainable business models (SBM) that are suitable for combining economic
performance with the protection of the environment, the stakeholders involved, and the
community as a whole (Bocken et al., 2014; Levy França et al., 2016; Lüdeke-Freund,
2019).
This paper enters this research stream aiming to extend our theoretical understanding
of SBM innovation. Drawing on the definition of a business model (BM) suggested by
Zott and Amit (2010), we investigate how and why a firm in the agri-food industry can
pursue a model of value creation and redistribution with its supply chain partners that
ensures both economic performance and sustainability over time for all firms involved.
We applied a Single Case Study approach that allowed us to understand the nature and the
complexity of the processes that took place. The research site was a company that
commercializes food products. Data were collected through interviews and secondary
211
sources then analyzed by following the thematic analysis approach. Our findings provide
empirical evidence of a Business Model involving a company and its partners (Zott and
Amit, 2010) along the entire Supply Chain with a view to integrate all the three
sustainability dimensions. More precisely, we dive deep to understand the factors
influencing the interaction between all the parties such as complementary, collaboration,
value sharing and governance. Our results advance the extant research both in the
Business Model field and in the Sustainable Supply Chain Management by showing that
its linearity leaves space for a more circular and complex network between organizations
when integrating sustainability concepts.
2. Literature Review
During the last decades, the management literature has increasingly focused its
attention on the BM concept (Zott & Amit , 2007; Zott et. al., 2011).
Business Model Innovation and Innovative Business Models (Foss & Saebi, 2016)
have gained more and more importance in the field which is today experiencing an
important evolution. Indeed, scholars are introducing the SBM concept (Schaltegger,
Lüdeke-Freund, & Hansen, 2012; França, Broman, Robert, & Basile, 2017; Yang,
Vladimirova, & Evans, 2017; Cassia Comin, et al., 2019). The paradigm according to
which the unique objective for companies is to achieve a positive economic result has
today been overtaken by integrating social and environmental goals in response to
society’s growing attention to sustainability. From this perspective, value creation should
mind these dimensions and SBMs requires to be designed by considering multiple
stakeholders’ needs and interests to maximize the positive societal and environmental
impacts (Stubbs & Cocklin, 2008; Bocken et al., 2013, Matos & Silvestre, 2013; Evans, et
al., 2017; Inigo et al., 2017). Ludeke-Freund (2018) talks about “sustainable
entrepreneurship”. Most of the studies focus on the value creation for customers and little
has been said about the supply chain. More precisely, a gap remains in exploring the
drivers that help firms to realize the value creation and incorporate social and
environmental goals along the entire supply chain.
3. Approach/Methods
212
This research was conducted through a Single Case Study (Yin, 1994) that allowed us
to operate an in-depth analysis of the phenomena and processes that occur and achieve a
theoretical generalization (Tsang, 2014). The case was considered appropriated because
we had access to a wide plurality of sources and detailed information (Creswell, 1994).
The research site is an Agri-Food company which has been pioneer and leader in organic
production. Its SBM is made possible thanks to the integration of the supplier in the
ownership structure and, consequently, in the decision-making bodies. The consequence
is a virtuous circle in which agricultural producers are fair remunerated, this incentivizes
them to maintain quality standards above the market. Data were collected through
primary sources (semi-structured interviews) and secondary sources. These phases were
conducted in compliance with the validity and reliability dimensions (Gibbert & Ruigrok,
2010; Ebneyamini & Sadeghi Moghdam, 2018).
4. Results
We found that the focal firm developed an innovative and sustainable business model
grounded in close integration with its supply chain partners in the economic, social and
environmental dimensions. We addressed the business model as a system of
interdependent activities (Zott and Amit, 2010) and the collected data show that only part
of the processes that make it up are implemented by the investigated firm.
The relationship with the partners of the supply chain is not limited to commercial
agreements for the purchase of goods, but also includes the planning of production, the
composition of the offer and the use of agricultural resources and methods of cultivation
that ensure the environmental protection and the consumers’ health. Indeed, the focal firm
collaborates only with external or integrated partners who share their own values, which
means, for example, using only extra virgin olive oil instead of others that are easier to
work with but characterized by the presence of saturated acids and fats that are considered
harmful to health, producing without emulsifiers and aromas, and operating with raw
materials that derives by their shareholders or by selected and reliable partners so as to
have more control. This obviously makes the job more difficult and possible only for
companies with the same sensitivity.
5. Value and Implications
213
This paper extends the theoretical understanding of SBM by focusing on the
integration of interdependent processes between the focal firm and its suppliers. Although
previous studies investigated BM that are based on partnerships between the focal firm
and its supply chain, little research to date explored how these BM can combine economic
performance and sustainability. Furthermore, our research in a multi-stakeholder
perspective, relates to how an original model of value creation and redistribution enables
the focal firm to sustain not only its own performance, but also that of the partners
involved in the supply chain.
Moreover, it sheds light on how the integration of the BM with governance processes
- in which suppliers also take on the role of supplier-owner - strengthen the engagement
in a relationship based on shared values and that produces mutual economic and
sustainable advantages. It also identifies the mechanisms and practices that nurture its
growth over time advancing the extant research (Perrini & Tencati, 2006).
According to the conference’s main theme, this paper helps to understand how SBM
allows to overcome the current ecological and ethical crisis and continue to grow from an
economic point of view. Our findings can be useful both to managers in re-thinking their
BM and to policy makers to identify the drivers for the economic sustainable
development of an area, a community, or other sectors. Moreover, the governance of the
integrated business model in the supply chain helps small enterprises to overcome size
constraints and increases their competitive capacity in increasingly globalised markets.
References
Bocken, N., Short , S. W., Rana, P., & Evans, S. (2013). A value mapping tool for sustainable
business modelling. Corporate Governance International Journal of Business in Society, 13(5),
482-497.
Bocken, N., Short, S., Rana, P., & Evans, S. (2014). A literature and practice review to develop
sustainable business model archetypes. Journal of Cleaner Production, 42-56.
Creswell, J. W. (1994). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and mixed methods approaches.
Thousand Oaks. CA: Sage.
Evans, S., Vladimirova, D., Holgado, M., Van Fossen, K., Yang, M., Silva, E. A., & Barlow, C. Y.
(2017). Business Model Innovation for Sustainability: Towards a Unified Perspective for
Creation of Sustainable Business Model. Business Strategy and the Environment, 26,
597-608.
Foss, N. J., & Saebi, T. (2017). Fifteen Years of Research on Business Model Innovation: How Far
Have We Come, and Where Should We Go? Journal of Management, 200-227.
França , C. L., Broman, G., Robert, K.-H., Basile, G., & Trygg, L. (2017). An approach to business
model innovation and design for strategic sustainable development. Journal of Cleaner
Production, 155-166.
214
Gibbert, M., & Ruigrok, W. (2010). The "What" and "How" of Case Study Rigor. Three Strategies
Based on Published Work. Organizational Research Methods.
Inigo, E. A., Albareda, L., & Ritala, P. (2017). Business model innovation for sustainability:
exploring evolutionary and radical approaches through dynamic capabilities. Industry and
Innovation, 24(5), 515-542.
LevyFrança, C., Bromana, G., Henrik, K., & Geo, R. (2017). An approach to business model
innovation and design for strategic sustainable development. Journal of Cleaner Production,
155-166.
Ludeke-Freund, F. (2018). Sustianable entrepreneurship, innovation, and business models:
Integrative framework and propositions for future research. Business Strategy and the
Environment, 29, 665-681.
Matos, S., & Silvestre, B. S. (2013). Managing stakeholder relations when developing sustainable
business models: the case of the Brazilian energy sector. Journal of Cleaner Production, 43,
61-73.
Perrini, F., & Tencati, A. (2006). Sustainability and Stakeholder Management: the Need for New
Corporate Performance Evaluation and Reporting Systems. Business Strategy and the
environment, 296–308.
Schaltegger, S., Hansen, E. G., & Lüdeke-Freund, F. (2016). Business models for sustainability:
origins, present research, and future avenues. . Organization and the environment, 3-10.
Stubbs, W., & Cocklin, C. (2008). Conceptualizing a "Sustainability Business Model". Organization
& Environment, 21(2), 103-127.
Tsang, E. (2014). Generalising from research Findings: The Merits of Case Studies. International
Journal of Management Review, 174-186.
Yang, M., Vladimirova, D., & Evans, S. (2017). Creating and Capturing Value Through
Sustainability. Research-Technology Management , 30-39.
Yin, R. K. (2009). Case study research: Design and methods. Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE.
Zott, Christoph, & Raphael Amit. (2007) “Business Model Design and the Performance of
Entrepreneurial Firms.” Organization Science, vol. 18, no. 2, pp. 181–99.
Zott , C., & Amit, R. (2010). Business Model Design: An Activity System Perspective. Long Range
Planning, 43(2-3), 216-226.
215
Rethinking business models for
sustainability-oriented innovation: implementing
collaborative logistics in manufacturing SMEs
Serena Galvani
Department of Economics, Society, Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi 42, Urbino (Italy)
serena.galvani@uniurb.it
Elisa Carloni
Department of Economics, Society, Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi 42, Urbino (Italy)
elisa.carloni2@uniurb.it
Alice Aiudi
Department of Economics, Society, Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Via Saffi 42, Urbino (Italy)
a.aiudi4@campus.uniurb.it
Keywords Collaborative logistics, Business Models, SMEs, Sustainability, Innovation
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
The attention of industrial firms toward environmental sustainability has grown in the
past decade (Perotti et al., 2012) and has pushed firms towards the implementation of
sustainability-oriented innovations, such as collaborative logistics (CL) practices, being
logistics one of the main sources of air pollution (Mesjasz, 2016). In this perspective,
companies are feeling the need to adopt innovative models to both improve their logistics
performances from a sustainable perspective and guarantee competitive advantages in the
global context.
The interest in such approaches in the industrial context is associated with
high-complexity levels in terms of implementation, since such a transition towards CL
requires a rethinking and reconfiguration of existing business models, along their main
216
value dimensions (Oskam et al., 2018) of value proposition, value delivery, value
creation, value networking, and value appropriation (Cortimiglia et al., 2016).
Such level of complexity in sustainability-oriented innovation, and particularly in
sustainable logistics transition, is further enhanced for Small and Medium-sized
Enterprises (SMEs) (Woschke et al., 2017), in the light of their scarcity of resources,
limited change management knowledge, and risk-aversion.
The present study aims to explore if and how SMEs face the transition towards CL
processes and the impact on their business models (BM), by addressing the following
research question: How does transitioning towards CL impact the five dimensions of BM
and linkages among them?
In line with the explorative nature of the RQ, we adopt a qualitative approach (Yin,
2003), based on a single case study methodology (Halinen and Törnroos, 2005). The case
study selected is IRON, an Italian manufacturing SME in the mechanical processing
sector, which has implemented an internal project aimed at supporting
sustainability-oriented innovation processes. Data collection relies on focus groups
(Powel and Single, 1996) and participating observation. The resulting empirical data has
been analyzed along the processual dimension of the project and codified using the five
BM dimensions identified (Cortimiglia et al., 2016).
2. Literature review
Logistics concerns the movement of goods, services, and information from the point
of origin to the point of consumption, with the aim of meeting customer needs and
creating value, and plays a crucial role in enhancing the success and competitiveness of
firms (Ojha and Gokhale, 2009). Companies have realized that logistics decisions have a
significant impact on costs, customer service levels, market penetration, and profits
(Ballou, 1997).
CL has emerged as an innovative approach resulting from the transition from logistics
management to sustainable Supply Chain Management (SCM), based on the concept of
collaboration, as it involves sharing activities and resources among multiple independent
companies to improve overall logistics efficiency (Stock and Boyer, 2009). CL holds the
potential to achieve economic, environmental, and social sustainability as well as to meet
the growing demand for sustainable business practices (Ferrel et al., 2020) on the one
217
hand; on the other hand, it enables companies to lower operating costs, to enhance
efficiency, and to improve customer satisfaction (Osório et al., 2013).
Collaboration in logistics is becoming a strategic tool for SMEs; however, they face
challenges in finding suitable partners for collaboration due to their limited resources,
capabilities, and access to information (Zaridis et al., 2021; Vlachos and Gutnik, 2016).
Furthermore, innovative and sustainable-oriented ideas, as CL, require rethinking the
processes leading to the company’s value creation, in terms of resources needed, costs to
be borne, and new partnerships to be established; thus, pushing towards changes in the
companies’ BMs. A successful rethinking of the BM’s dimensions and a paradigm change
in the way firms create and deliver value are key leverages for integrating innovation and
sustainability into organizations (Geissfoerfer et al., 2018; Pieroni et al., 2019).
BM is “a representation of a firm's underlying core logic and strategic choices for
creating and capturing value within a value network” (Shafer et al., 2005: 204), whose
main dimensions are that of value proposition (offering), delivery (customer segments,
relationships, and distribution channels), creation (key activities and resources),
networking (partners), and appropriation (revenue streams and cost structure)
(Cortimiglia et al., 2016).
Encompassing sustainability and innovation elements in the company’s BM requires a
“loosening” of the boundaries of the focal firm and a consideration of the larger network,
as well as for interdependence and interaction among the elements of the BM to embrace
a shift towards an embedded system view (Breuer et al., 2018). The adoption of a BM
perspective can help in providing guidance for identifying which of the five main BM
dimensions require being rethought of, reconfigured, or adjusted in interaction with the
network of suppliers and customers to face environmentally complex challenges.
3. Method
This research applies an ongoing qualitative processual case study methodology (Yin,
2003; Halinen and Törnroos, 2005) in line with previous studies on the interrelation
between BM and sustainable innovations (Acciarini et al., 2022). The empirical setting
under investigation is an Italian manufacturing SME active in the mechanical processing
sector, IRON4, that has been chosen for its recent effort in implementing an internal
4The name of the company, of the projects and of stakeholders has been anonymized to ensure
confidentiality.
218
project aimed at supporting sustainability-oriented innovation processes and because of
its commitment to redefining actors, activities, and resources to be employed for CL. The
focus of the analysis is thus a project implemented within IRON, named COSI
(Customer-oriented Sustainable Innovation).
Data collection is based on an 18-hours focus group (Powel and Single, 1996) with
the CEO and 7 employees, and on participating observation conducted by one of the
authors. Using different sources of data helps triangulate information from multiple
sources to confirm results emerging within the single case study (Woodside and Wilson,
2003).
Data is analyzed following a systematic combining approach (Dubois and Gadde,
2002) and coding is based on the processual dimension of the COSI project with a focus
on the three main topics covered, that is: Supply Chain Management approach for
sustainability-oriented innovation; implications and challenges of CL;
sustainability-driven customer segmentation, and on the five conceptual dimensions of the
BM framework, as depicted in Cortimiglia et al. (2016).
4. Results/Findings
IRON is a small Italian company specialized in realizing metal-based products and
offering related services, such as laser cut, banding, and wending. The company is located
in the rural area of the Marche region in Italy and operates in a very traditional context,
where innovation in terms of sustainability is difficult to access. However, the firm pays
particular attention to innovation and is recently making the first efforts to achieve more
sustainable business practices along its supply chain. Indeed, in 2022 the company
implemented the COSI project aimed at supporting sustainable-driven innovation for
customers in terms of CL. The project consisted of three days of meetings between the
IRON Team and two Professors from a local University with knowledge of sustainability
issues. Meetings were divided into three days.
Day one was focused on the SCM approach for sustainable-oriented collaborations. It
identified some criticalities for the company, among which: organizational resistances,
high perceived risk about suppliers’ opportunistic behaviours, and lack of a structured
approach.
219
Day two was dedicated to CL implementation and its challenges. Participants
highlighted the limited value networking opportunities in IRON’s geographical context
and the limited competences of its employees on how to manage CL.
Day three dealt with sustainability-driven customer segmentation. What emerged is
that IRON does not have the proper knowledge to develop a proper customer
segmentation analysis.
CL is a sustainable effort involving only a small portion of the productive process,
which is transportation. Therefore, it could be a first, affordable effort for SMEs to
gradually try to become more sustainable. However, the IRON case reveals how even a
delimited green transition as CL entails challenges and calls for adaptations in the overall
BM and its dimensions.
The most stressed dimension in CL is value delivery, which is the main focus of the
entire process - as CL implies a consistent revision of the adopted distribution channel,
introducing new ones and achieving market segmentation to identify the set of customers
interested to receive sustainable services (Brotspies and Weinstein, 2019). Value
networking and value creation are also objects of change, as a faltering business network
tremendously limited the opportunities for the SME in achieving CL (Velter et al., 2020),
and CL requires an internal reorganization, the development of sustainability-related
knowledge, the achievement of a strategic vision related to sustainable performances, the
increase and reorganization in logistics activities, and the activation of a control system to
monitor internal performances through codified information, respectively. Value
proposition and value appropriation are part of the transition, even though minor changes
are required to determine the type of green offering to offer and to build an appropriate
cost structure and revenue model related to green transportation services.
Notwithstanding different changes at the level of the various BM dimensions, all of
them are involved in a net of links and interrelations, for which issues emerging at the
level of one dimension have direct impacts on other dimensions and vice versa. Table 1
depicts the interrelations among the elements.
220
Figure 1: Interactions among business model dimensions in the IRON case
5. Value & Implications
To analyse companies’ transition towards CL and how this shift redesigns its BM, this
study highlights the importance of rethinking the BM for integrating innovation and
sustainability-connected aspects.
Understanding the interrelation among BM dimensions is crucial for comprehending
the complexity of sustainable approaches for SMEs. The interaction among dimensions
creates a “domino effect”, where challenges in one dimension lead to challenges in others,
increasing complexity. In this context, a cohesive strategic vision and developing specific
competences are crucial.
The analysis reveals key points. First, integrating sustainability and innovation into
the BM requires clear business vision and mission focused on green and sustainable
practices. Second, the adoption of sustainable logistics is facilitated by establishing a
partner network that enables innovation and sustainability throughout the supply chain.
Third, customer segmentation plays a strategic role in identifying stakeholders interested
in sustainable services.
Overcoming the limitations of SMEs, such as small size and resource constraints
(Zaridis et al., 2021), requires acquiring internal skills and knowledge. Investing this
knowledge across all BM dimensions is essential for creating a sustainable corporate
vision. Additionally, SMEs benefit from strong leadership to overcome organizational
221
resistance and cultural aversion, and drive the transformation toward a more innovative
and sustainable BM.
References
Acciarini, C., Borelli, F., Capo, F., Cappa, F., & Sarrocco, C. (2022). Can digitalization favour the
emergence of innovative and sustainable business models? A qualitative exploration in the
automotive sector. Journal of Strategy and Management, 15(3), 335-352.
Ballou, R. H. (1997). Business logistics: importance and some research opportunities. Gestão &
Produção, 4, 117-129.
Breuer, H., Fichter, K., Lüdeke-Freund, F., & Tiemann, I. (2018). Sustainability-oriented business
model development: Principles, criteria and tools. International Journal of Entrepreneurial
Venturing, 10(2), 256-286.
Brotspies, H., & Weinstein, A. (2019). Rethinking business segmentation: a conceptual model and
strategic insights. Journal of Strategic Marketing, 27(2), 164-176.
Cortimiglia, M. N., Ghezzi, A., & Frank, A. G. (2016). Business model innovation and strategy
making nexus: evidence from a crossindustry mixedmethods study. R&D Management,
46(3), 414-432.
Dubois, A., & Gadde, L. E. (2002). Systematic combining: an abductive approach to case research.
Journal of Business Research, 55(7), 553-560.
Ferrell, W., Ellis, K., Kaminsky, P., & Rainwater, C. (2020). Horizontal collaboration: opportunities
for improved logistics planning. International Journal of Production Research, 58(14), 4267-
4284.
Geissdoerfer, M., Vladimirova, D., & Evans, S. (2018). Sustainable business model innovation: A
review. Journal of Cleaner Production, 198, 401-416.
Halinen, A., & Törnroos, J. Å. (2005). Using case methods in the study of contemporary business
networks. Journal of Business Research, 58(9), 1285-1297.
Mesjasz-Lech, A. (2016). Urban air pollution challenge for green logistics. Transportation
Research Procedia, 16, 355-365.
Ojha, D., & Gokhale, R. A. (2009). Logistical business continuity planningscale development and
validation. The International Journal of Logistics Management, 20(3), 342-359.
Oskam, I., Bossink, B., & de Man, A. P. (2018). The interaction between network ties and business
modeling: Case studies of sustainability-oriented innovations. Journal of Cleaner Production,
177, 555-566.
Osório, A. L., Camarinha-Matos, L. M., & Afsarmanesh, H. (2013). Enterprise collaboration
network for transport and logistics services. In Collaborative Systems for Reindustrialization:
14th IFIP WG 5.5 Working Conference on Virtual Enterprises, PRO-VE 2013, Dresden,
Germany, September 30–October 2, 2013, Proceedings 14 (pp. 267-278). Springer Berlin
Heidelberg.
Perotti, S., Zorzini, M., Cagno, E., & Micheli, G. J. (2012). Green supply chain practices and
company performance: the case of 3PLs in Italy. International Journal of Physical Distribution
& Logistics Management,42(7), 640-672.
Pieroni, M. P., McAloone, T. C., & Pigosso, D. C. (2019). Business model innovation for circular
economy and sustainability: A review of approaches. Journal of Cleaner Production, 215,
198-216.
Powel, R. A. & Single, H. M. (1996). Focus groups. International Journal of Quality in Health
Care, 8(5), 499-504.
Shafer, S. M., Smith, H. J., & Linder, J. C. (2005). The power of business models. Business
Horizons, 48(3), 199-207.
Stock, J. R., & Boyer, S. L. (2009). Developing a consensus definition of supply chain
management: a qualitative study. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics
Management, 39(8), 690-711.
222
Velter, M. G. E., Bitzer, V., Bocken, N. M. P., & Kemp, R. (2020). Sustainable business model
innovation: The role of boundary work for multi-stakeholder alignment. Journal of Cleaner
Production, 247, 119497.
Vlachos, I. P., & Gutnik, S. (2016). Together we e-export: Horizontal cooperation among Austrian
food companies in global supply chains and the role of electronic business tools. International
Journal of Information Systems and Supply Chain Management (IJISSCM), 9(1), 17-40.
Woodside, A. G., & Wilson, E. J. (2003). Case study research methods for theory building. Journal
of Business & Industrial Marketing, 18(6/7), 493-508.
Woschke, T., Haase, H., & Kratzer, J. (2017). Resource scarcity in SMEs: effects on incremental
and radical innovations. Management Research Review, 40(2), 195-217.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case Study Research, Design and Methods. 3rd Ed, London: Sage Publications.
Zaridis, A., Vlachos, I., & Bourlakis, M. (2021). SMEs strategy and scale constraints impact on
agri-food supply chain collaboration and firm performance. Production Planning & Control,
32(14),
1165-1178.
223
Enhancing SMEs’ resilience-building processes
through business model innovation. A systemic
perspective to face entrepreneurial challenges in
times of crisis
Marcantonio Ruisi
Department of Economics, Business Management and Statistics
University of Palermo, Italy
Viale delle Scienze, Ed. 13, 90128, Palermo
E-mail: marcantonio.ruisi@unipa.it
Federico Cosenz
Department of Political Science and International Relations
University of Palermo, Italy
Via Maqueda 324, 90134, Palermo
E-mail: federico.cosenz@unipa.it
Rodolfo Damiano
Department of Economics, Business Management and Statistics
University of Palermo, Italy
Viale delle Scienze, Ed. 13, 90128, Palermo
E-mail: rodolfo.damiano@unipa.it
Keywords Business Model Innovation; SMEs; Dynamic Business Modelling;
Resilience; Crises; Case-studies.
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
This study explores how systemic methodological support to implement business
model innovation (BMI) may enhance the resilience-building processes of Small and
Medium Enterprises (SMEs). In times of crisis, these firms representing more than 90%
of all businesses worldwide (Latifi et al., 2021) require additional methodological
efforts to overcome their peculiar limits (e.g., limited access to credit lines, paucity of
strategic capabilities and resources, poor networking capacity) and adequately take on
new entrepreneurial challenges and opportunities for survival. Emerging crises be they
related to war, pandemics, energy supply, or others further emphasize the conventional
224
shortages characterizing SMEs, thus increasing complexity and uncertainty in their
strategy design and performance management mechanisms (Fasth et al., 2022). However,
by leveraging their strengths such as flexibility and innovation capability these firms
may better seize new opportunities offered by the changing context than their larger
competitors (Pencarelli et al., 2020). This process to be conducted on a regular basis
appears fundamental to building up satisfactory resilience in SMEs. However, matching
strengths with emerging opportunities is not easy in SMEs that usually are more focused
on fostering technical product-related competencies than strategic management settings.
Based on these premises, a systemic perspective in designing BMI strategies may provide
SME decision-makers with an additional methodological support to understand, orient
and manage entrepreneurial itineraries affected by crises.
2. Literature review
The research is rooted in the business model design and innovation field with a focus
on the requirements of SMEs in times of crisis. As such, the reference literature is
analyzed to evaluate the state-of-the-art in the current scientific debate related to the
methods and tools supporting BMI in SMEs threatened by complex critical events. This
analysis enables the identification of relevant research gaps and, as a result, the
emergence of further advancing practical knowledge in this field according to the research
objective. More specifically, the methodological proposal of the paper finds
complementarity with the theoretical framework recently developed by Sanasi and Ghezzi
(2022), which emphasizes a pivot-as-process mechanism for strategic response to crises.
In particular, the systemic perspective endorsed in this paper through a Dynamic
Business Modelling (DBM) approach (Cosenz & Noto, 2018) helps SME
decision-makers foster their entrepreneurial learning processes, thus strengthening pivot
experimentations for BMI (Cosenz & Bivona, 2021).
3. Approach/Method
The paper proposes and explores a Dynamic Business Modelling (DBM) approach as
a systemic method to support the implementation of BMI in SMEs in times of crisis and
strengthen their resilience-building processes (Zutshi et al., 2021), thereby facing the gaps
emerging in the literature review and the related research objective. This method
225
originates from integrating an adapted version of the Business Model Canvas
(Osterwalder & Pigneur, 2010) and System Dynamics modelling (Torres et al., 2017;
Sterman, 2000). Such integration makes DBM valuable for modelling and investigating
entrepreneurial systems characterized by complexity and uncertainty and experimenting
with the models to build and test innovation-driven strategies. Figure 1 portrays the DBM
approach (Cosenz & Noto, 2018). DBM frames BMI pivot experimentation according to
a “build-test-learn” loop by identifying causal feedback structures among financial and
non-financial business model variables. This approach does not require the
implementation of “heavy” management information systems (e.g., SAP), usually adopted
by larger firms. Rather, it builds upon the construction of lean systemic models, thus
resulting in less expensive and more adequate decision-support tools for SMEs. To gather
practical insights and implications related to the use of DBM in SMEs, the research also
offers some empirical evidence. In particular, drawing on the empirical work recently
developed by Clauss et al. (2022), the paper applies this approach to three case studies of
SMEs struggling to overcome crises by taking on new entrepreneurial challenges through
BMI.
Figure 1: The Dynamic Business Modeling framework (Cosenz and Noto, 2018).
226
4. Results/Findings
Adopting a case-based analysis by applying the DBM approach to SMEs enables the
elaboration of empirical and theoretical findings about its effectiveness and reliability in
supporting resilience-building processes through BMI. Discussing these findings from a
critical perspective implies exploring the main advantages and limits related to the use of
DBM in SMEs for BMI purposes. Expected results investigate how DBM offers a
methodological framework where financial and non-financial factors (i.e., strategic
capabilities and resources) may show up as a system of causal interplays, thus enabling
the introduction of new features that drive SMEs’ BMI itinerary. Additional insights shed
light on how a systemic perspective may boost SMEs’ resilience-building processes while
facing new entrepreneurial challenges in times of crisis. Eventually, findings identify
emerging critical issues drawing future research perspectives.
5. Value & Implications
This work may provide a valuable contribution to the current debate on BMI applied
to SMEs in times of crisis. Its value relies on the use of a systemic perspective aimed at
fostering entrepreneurial learning processes to strengthen SME resilience by seizing new
opportunities emerging from crisis exposure. From a theoretical point of view, the paper
contributes to the current scientific debate by drawing on the shortages identified in the
literature on BMI applied to SMEs in order to explore possible methodological support to
overcome these barriers for SME resilience-building and survival in uncertain turbulent
conditions. As for its implication for practice, the case-based analysis highlights empirical
evidence of how DBM provides a practical approach to speeding up BMI in SMEs
through a less costly strategy design tool. This relies on the possibility of creating,
exploring and experimenting with the effects generated by the causal interplays of the
business model elements, also in future scenarios characterized by crisis factors and
promising BMIs to counteract their negative impacts.
227
References
Clauss, T., Breier, M., Kraus, S., Durst, S., & Mahto, R.V. (2022). Temporary business model
innovation SMEs’ innovation response to the Covid-19 crisis. R&D Management, 52, (2),
294-312.
Cosenz, F., & Bivona, E. (2021). Fostering growth patterns of SMEs through business model
innovation. A tailored dynamic business modelling approach. Journal of Business Research,
130, 658-669.
Cosenz, F., & Noto, G. (2018). A dynamic business modelling approach to design and experiment
new business venture strategies. Long Range Planning, 51(1), 127–140.
Fasth, J., Åkerman, N., Elliot, V., & Hilmersson, M. (2022). Small and medium-sized enterprises
response to Covid-19: The effect of external openness and procedural management.
International Small Business Journal, forthcoming, doi 10.1177/02662426221101528.
Latifi, M.A., Nikou, S., & Bouwman, H. (2021). Business model innovation and firm performance:
Exploring causal mechanisms in SMEs. Technovation, 107, 102274.
Osterwalder, A., & Pigneur, Y. (2010). Business model generation: A handbook for visionaries,
game changers, and challengers. Hoboken: Wiley.
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., & Demartini, P. (2020). Covid-19 and Italian small and
medium-sized enterprises: consequences, threats and opportunities. Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, (3).
Ruisi, M. (2022). Reconceptualizing Business Models in Light of the COVID-19 Experience:
Insights from the World of Start-Ups for a Renewed Corporate Finalism. In: AA.VV. (Eds):
Campisi, G., Mocciaro Li Destri, A., Amenta, C., COVID-19 and Communities - The
University of Palermo’s Voices and Analyses During the pandemic. UNIPA SPRINGER
SERIES, p. 257-264, Springer.
Sanasi, S., & Ghezzi, A. (2022). Pivots as strategic responses to crises: Evidence from Italian
companies navigating Covid-19. Strategic Organization, forthcoming, doi
10.1177/14761270221122933.
Sterman, J. (2000). Business dynamics: System thinking and modelling for a complex world.
London: McGraw-Hill.
Torres, J. P., Kunc, M., & O’Brien, F. (2017). Supporting strategy using system dynamics. European
Journal of Operational Research, 260(3), 1081–1094.
Zutshi, A., Mendy, J., Sharma, G. D., Thomas, A., & Sarker, T. (2021). From challenges to
creativity: enhancing SMEs’ resilience in the context of COVID-19. Sustainability, 13(12),
6542.
228
Integrating ambidexterity and family governance for
business model innovation: a case study
Paolo Di Toma
Department of Communication and Economics
University of Modena and Reggio Emilia.
Viale Allegri, 9 Reggio Emilia
E-mail: paolo.ditoma@unimore.it
Cecilia Correggi
Department of Economics “Marco Biagi”
University of Modena and Reggio Emilia
Via dell’Università, 4 - Modena
Keywords Family Business, Ambidexterity, Business model innovation, Family
governance
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
In recent years organizational ambidexterity has attracted a growing attention in
family business research. Ambidexterity enables firms to enhance their performance and
competitiveness and refers to the firms’ capability to exploit current abilities and
resources, while simultaneously exploring and integrating new competences (O’Reilly &
Tushman, 2013; Raisch & Birkinshaw, 2008). Therefore, ambidexterity is recognized as a
key driver to continuously nurture innovation and to develop organisational capabilities
which enable business model innovation. However, the nexus with governance processes
was substantially neglected by previous research, although it is crucial for understanding
the distinctiveness of family firms' behaviour and the heterogeneity of their performance
(Stubner et al. 2012).
We adopt a process perspective to investigate how and why ambidexterity and
governance interact in the flow of the entrepreneurial process (Hjorth et al., 2015;
Langley, 1999) and influence business model innovation. This research focuses on the
iteration, over time, of the intentions and behavior that unfold in the entrepreneurial
process and deep delves into the interplay of ambidexterity and governance processes. We
229
challenge traditional one-way perspectives and investigate the mutual conditioning and
adaptation that leads to the ability to innovate the firm's business model.
Finally, according to Kammerlander et al.l (2020) we acknowledge family
membership diversity and we investigated the different behavior and goals that
characterize individually the family members involved in governance processes.
2. Literature review
Organizational ambidexterity refers to the simultaneous pursuit of exploratory and
exploitative innovation by firms (Raisch & Birkinshaw, 2008) and recent research pointed
out its positive linkage with above average performance, especially in family firms (Moss
et al, 2014). The conflicting demands of ambidexterity are most relevant in family firms,
since they need to balance tradition with innovation and renewal (Miller and Le
Breton-Miller, 2005). Previous research found that not all family firms will be equally
proficient in simultaneously pursuing exploration and exploitation to a high level
(Bammens, Notelaers, & Van Gils, 2014; Carney, 2005; Cassia et al., 2012; Kollmann &
Stöckmann, 2014; König et al., 2013; Lubatkin, Simsek, Ling, & Veiga, 2006; Moss,
Payne, & Moore, 2014).
A central trait in managing ambidexterity is the possession of prior related
knowledge in order to assimilate and use new knowledge. An organization takes
advantage from individuals with a breadth of prior knowledge in multiple categories as
well as various linkages across these categories, which makes organizations better
prepared to take on both exploitation and exploration. This requirement is very significant
in family firms that have been handing down knowledge rooted in tradition for
generations, but which also represents a resource that can be mobilised to undertake new
paths of innovation. Family control of ownership, management and governance provides
the ability to shape organizational ambidexterity through their power and legitimacy, as
well as through resources (Chrisman et al., 2012, Dyer, 2006). Therefore, family
governance represents a fundamental trigger to unlock and enhance traditional knowledge
in alternative uses by pursuing ambidextrous strategies that can facilitate business model
innovation.
230
3. Methods
This research was carried out, through a process perspective, to investigate how and
why the interaction between family governance and ambidexterity affects a firm's
capability to innovate its business model. We analyzed, by means of a single case study
(Chetty, 1996; Yin, 1994; 2009), how the interaction unfolds over time and produces
mutually adaptive effects on governance and ambidexterity. The research site was a
fourth-generation family firm engaged in the manufacturing of traditional food products
strongly rooted in the culture of a local area. According to a process perspective, we
investigated how BM innovation is realized through sequences of events (Langley, 1999;
Tsoukas and Chia, 2002). We deployed longitudinal research to depict the evolution of
actual processes in their natural environment. Furthermore, our open and iterative
approach to data collection and analysis enables us to explore and refine our
conceptualization of process dynamics (Strauss, 1987).
The data was collected through semi-structured interviews (Easterby-Smith et al.,
2018) with directors, investors and other partners, experts, as well as from secondary
sources such as company website, annual reports, media accounts, industry publications.
Data analysis was guided by theoretical concepts regarding both the ambidexterity,
governance process and business model innovation in family firms theories in an iterative
cycle of analytic induction and deduction. Collected data were inductively analyzed,
closely following the guidelines for qualitative inquiry, including the techniques for
iterative comparison of data and emerging data structure.
4. Findings
This research investigated how and why the governance of a family firm interacts
with new ambidextrous business ventures. Since we adopted a process perspective, our
study allowed us to identify the mutual interaction through purposive behaviors that
changed the firm's business model and its governance processes over time.
We investigated a family firm engaged in the production and trading of traditional
cured meats. It initiated an exploration strategy by setting up a production site in the USA
which slices and packs the sausage for large retail chains. Therefore, the business focuses
on customer service capacity and requires different organisational processes, new
organisational capabilities and new management methods and techniques.
231
We found that family governance plays a key role in encouraging or hindering the
initiation of ambidextrous strategies. Given the existing and prospective balance in
governance processes, the initiation of an ambidextrous strategy is only implemented if it
is in line with and compatible with family governance and its balances. Therefore,
ambidextrous strategies interact with family governance processes and balances.
We found that family governance and ambidexterity mutually condition each other by
determining adjustments in governance balances and practices to carry forward
exploration choices and consolidating exploitation activities to strengthen the resilience
and continuity of the family business. Choices assigning particular family members to run
exploration and exploitation strategies, the content of exploration and exploitation
activities, as well as the degree of innovativeness in designing business model changes
are conditioned by the family governance balances deemed appropriate and balanced and
their evolution over time.
We found that the development of the processes that over time led to the
implementation of the exploration strategy has had effects on the management of the
family business that have resulted in a change in family governance. Moreover, it led to a
change the leadership within the family governance. Consequently, these adaptations
changed the power relations and authority in the family business hierarchy, also involving
relations with top management and unfamiliar middle management.
5. Value & Implications
Our paper contributes to explaining the integration of strategy and governance in the
family business from a process perspective. By deepening the link with family
governance, helps to explain the heterogeneous innovation behavior in family firms (e.g.,
Duran et al., 2016), which is an important predictor of their long-term survival.
Our research highlights the family firm governance as a key enabler for undertaking
ambidextrous strategies. An insight of our research is the link between governance and
ambidexterity as a relationship of interdependence and mutual conditioning. Although
previous studies have privileged the relationship between ambidexterity and the
composition and behaviors of top management (e.g. Kammerlander et al., 2020), little
research has delved into the relationship with governance. We argue that governance is
the key element to make it possible to initiate and implement ambidextrous strategies that
are then pursued over time, if in line with the current and prospective equilibrium of the
232
family governance. This insight extends the theoretical understanding of the
heterogeneous innovation behavior of family businesses (Chrisman and Patel, 2012;
Duran et al., 2016) which has been recognized as a significant predictor of their long-term
survival (Kammerlander et al., 2020).
This paper also highlights how the governance of family businesses, by promoting
ambidextrous strategies, can enable new business models that make it possible to
overcome the crisis and start virtuous paths of entrepreneurial development.
References
Bammens Y., Notelaers G. & Van Gils, A. (2015). “Implications of Family Business Employment
for Employees’ Innovative Work Involvement”. Family Business Review, 28(2), pp.123-144.
Carney, M. (2005). “Corporate Governance and Competitive Advantage in Family-Controlled
Firms”. Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 29(3), pp.249-265.
Cassia, L., De Massis, A. & Pizzurno, E. (2012). “Strategic innovation and new product
development in family firms: An empirically grounded theoretical framework”. International
Journal of Entrepreneurial Behavior and Research, 18(2), pp.198-232.
Chrisman, J. J., Chua, J. H., Pearson, A. W., & Barnett, T. (2012). “Family involvement, family
influence, and family-centered non-economic goals in small firms”. Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice, 36(2), pp.267-293.
Duran, P., Kammerlander, N., van Essen, M., & Zellweger, T. (2016). “Doing more with less:
Innovation input and output in family firms”. Academy of Management Journal, 59(4), pp.
1224-1264
Dyer, W.G. Jr. (2006). “Examining the “Family Effect” on Firm Performance”. Family Business
Review, 19(4), pp. 253-273.
Easterby-Smith, M., Thorpe, R., Jackson, P.R., and Jaspersen, L.J. (2018).”Management & Business
Research”, London: SAGE.
Hjorth, D., Holt, R. & Steyaert, C. (2015). “Entrepreneurship and process studies”. International
Small Business Journal, 33(6), pp.599-611.
Kammerlander, N. Patzelt, H., Behrens, J.& Röm, C. (2020). “Organizational Ambidexterity in
Family-Managed Firms: The Role of Family Involvement in Top Management”. Family
Business Review, 33(4), pp. 393-423.
Kollmann, T., & Stöckmann C. (2014). “Filling the Entrepreneurial Orientation-Performance Gap:
The Mediating Effects of Exploratory and Exploitative Innovations”. Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice, 38(5), pp. 1001-1026.
König, A., Kammerlander N. & Enders A. (2013). “The family innovator's dilemma: how family
influence affects the adoption of discontinuous technologies by incumbent firms”. Academy of
Management Review, 38 (3) (2013), pp. 418-441
Langley A (1999) “Strategies for theorizing from process data”. Academy of Management Review
24(4), pp.691– 710.
Lubatkin, M. H., Simsek, Z., Ling, Y., & Veiga, J. F. (2006). “Ambidexterity and performance in
small-to medium-sized firms: The pivotal role of top management team behavioral
integration”. Journal of Management, 32(5), pp.646-672.
Miller, D., & Le Breton-Miller, I. (2005). “Management insights from great and struggling family
businesses”. Long Range Planning, 38(6), pp. 517-530.
233
Moss, T. W., Payne, G. T., & Moore, C. B. (2014). “Strategic consistency of exploration and
exploitation in family businesses”. Family Business Review, 27(1), pp. 51-71
O’Reilly, C. A., & Tushman, M. L. (2011). “Organizational ambidexterity in action: How managers
explore and exploit”. California Management Review, 53(4), pp.5-22.
Raisch, S., & Birkinshaw, J. (2008). “Organizational ambidexterity: Antecedents, outcomes, and
moderators”. Journal of Management, 34(3), pp.375-409.
Stubner, S., Blarr, W. H., Brands, C., & Wulf, T. (2012). “Organizational ambidexterity and family
firm performance”. Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, 25(2), pp. 217- 229.
Tsoukas H & Chia R (2002) “On organizational becoming: Rethinking organizational change”.
Organization Science 13(5): 567–582.
Yin, R. K. (2003). Case Study Research: Design and Methods, 3rd edition, Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
234
Looking for factors doing migrant women successful
entrepreneurs. An exploratory study.
Michela Floris
Department of Business and Economic Science
University of Cagliari
University Address: Viale Sant’Ignazio, 74
E-mail: micfloris@unica.it
Roberta Atzori
Free researcher
E-mail: roberta.atzori@gmail.com
Keywords Migrant entrepreneurship, Women entrepreneurship, Individual level,
Contextual level, Multiple case
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1. Objectives
Women entrepreneurship is gaining increasing academic attention (Langevang et al.
2015; Laguía et al., 2022).
Several studies focus on the micro-level (individual) of analysis, by identifying
personal traits and characteristics that appear positively linked with entrepreneurial
careers (Schlaegel and Koenig, 2014; Mitchelmore and Rowley, 2013; Hassan et al.,
2020), and contribute to explaining differences between men and women in undertaking
entrepreneurial initiatives. In this sense, women appear to be less entrepreneurial than
their male counterparts (Anna et al., 2000; Nani and Mathwasa, 2023).
Other studies focus on contextual rather than individual factors to explain drivers that
stimulate or inhibit entrepreneurship and thus also women entrepreneurship (Essers,
Doorewaard, and Benschop, 2013; De Vita, Mari, and Poggesi, 2014; Ratter, Dana, and
Ramadani, 2017; Ogundana et al., 2021). There is a broad consensus that contextual
factors affect entrepreneurship, entrepreneurial intention and behavior (Zahra et al.,
2014). Specifically, following Granovetters suggestions (1985), scholars have
demonstrated that contexts can stimulate, delineate, or inhibit entrepreneurship through
their specific features, originating territories with unique entrepreneurial characteristics
235
(Floris et al., 2020; Floris and Dettori, 2023). This phenomenon is at the origin of the
embeddedness theory and refers to the intricate relational tangle of individual and
organizational ties in a defined context (Dacin et al., 1999; Jack & Anderson, 2002) that
affect personal life spheres, economic actions and business activities (Aldrich & Zimmer,
1986; Uzzi, 1997).
Building on the embeddedness perspective (Granovetter, 1985), this study agrees with
Minniti and Naudè’s view (2010), sustaining that to understand women entrepreneurship
is essential to focus contemporarily on the individual and the contextual level of analysis.
To our knowledge, scholars have investigated the two levels separately, while we believe
that the two levels coexist and thus deserve to be jointly analyzed. Additionally, following
Alvesson and Sandberg’s suggestions (2011: 252), we problematize the topic “with novel
research questions through a dialectical interrogation of one’s own familiar position, other
stances, and the domain of literature targeted for assumption challenging”. Specifically,
this study stresses the joint role that contextual and individual factors exert in successful
migrant women entrepreneurship. Because migrant women entrepreneurs are influenced
by multiple embeddedness explicating in different levels, that is, context - positive or
negative factors that come from their context of provenience and of migration - and
individual, we aim to answer the following research question: How and why do
contextual and individual factors act in successful migrant women entrepreneurship?
2. Literature review
Women entrepreneurship is increasing in its relevance, however, women that decide to
create or continue a business are less than their male counterparts (Elam et al., 2019),
corroborating the stereotypical concept of “think entrepreneur-think male” (Laguía et al,
2022).
To understand the reason for differences between men and women in undertaking
entrepreneurial initiatives, scholars have mainly focused on the context characteristics
because “context is important for understanding when, how, and why entrepreneurship
happens and who becomes involved” (Welter, 2011: 166), especially concerning
institutional context that includes political, economic, and cultural aspects (Shane, 2003).
Similarly, other scholars, focusing on the individual level, have spotlighted the
relevance of possessing well-defined soft skills as antecedents for obtaining
entrepreneurial success (Emami et al., 2022). Women appear to be rarely interested in
236
undertaking an entrepreneurial career path (Shinnar et al., 2012) and report lower
entrepreneurial skills, knowledge and ability to set up a new firm (Allen et al., 2007).
However, several individual attitudes seem to be strictly related to the context, as a result
of culture and social norms. For this reason, context and individual levels need to be
jointly considered.
There is a specific kind of women entrepreneurship that appear to be profoundly
influenced by the context: migrant women entrepreneurship. Several studies have shown
that migrant women entrepreneurs seem victims of a double disadvantage (Dhaliwal,
Scott, and Hussain, 2010) or a triple disadvantage (Pio and Essers, 2014). Double
disadvantage refers to the concerns stemming from being both migrants and women,
while triple considers the case of migration from developing countries (Azmat, 2013).
This last case worsens the condition of migrant female entrepreneurs, historically
considered the most disadvantaged kind of entrepreneur (Raijman and Semyonov 1997),
as they find it more challenging to adapt to the institutional framework, culture, and
socio-economic context of developed countries (Drori, Honig, and Ginsberg, 2006;
Azmat 2010).
Thus, migrant women entrepreneurs that come from developing countries experience
prejudice from their country of origin more than the host country because of deeply
rooted, discriminatory, cultural values, attitudes, practices, and the traditions of
patriarchal culture (Amine and Staub 2009; Marlow and McAdam 2012). In this
perspective, the embeddedness perspective lens appears the most suitable to investigate
the phenomenon. Under the lens of this perspective, migrant women entrepreneurship
deserves to be investigated by understanding how, to what extent, and through which
main factors context affects its development and dynamic. At the same time, because
migrant women entrepreneurs are influenced by factors from the country of origin and the
host country, the embeddedness perspective becomes more complex, shifting into
multiple embeddedness (Wigren-Kristoferson et al., 2022) that helps to interpret the
phenomenon and allowing us to understand the effects of the contexts and the individual
level through their intertwined ties. In other words, our understanding of migrant women
entrepreneurship needs to consider the multiple contexts and the social structures in
which migrant women entrepreneurs are embedded (Welter, 2011; Zahra et al., 2014).
3. Approach/Method
237
Given the unexplored topic, a qualitative methodology for this research was chosen
and executed by a multicase approach (Eisenhardt, 1989; Yin, 1994). The qualitative
approach is particularly appropriate for this study because the joint observation of the
contextual and individual level of analysis of migrant women entrepreneurship requires
an in-depth analysis able to penetrate interviewees’ resistance. We involved four migrant
women entrepreneurs to obtain their availability, presenting the objective of the study.
The sample was adequate and additional cases provided no further knowledge, thus
reaching saturation (Suddaby, 2006). Our study mainly relied on primary (interviews) and
secondary data sources (archives, personal documents, websites, and others). Primary
data consisted of four in-depth interviews with migrant women entrepreneurs. All
interviews helped us understand whether and how context (of origin and host) exerts its
influence and how they perceive it as supportive or not. Contemporarily, interviews
allowed us to investigate whether and how individual factors interrelate with contextual
factors. We analyzed data using an inductive approach (Eisenhardt, 1989; Eisenhardt et
al., 2016). In the first step, we reviewed the primary and secondary data independently,
highlighting the material reflecting migrant women entrepreneurs’ perceptions of
contextual factors. Then, we examined single cases, creating chronologically structured
descriptions of each of the four firms with all relevant information. Two independent
coders first read through the interviews and additional materials and subsequently
scanned them for emergent themes that appeared important to answer our research
question (Reay & Zhang, 2014). In the second step, we followed the recommendations of
Eisenhardt (1989) and conducted a cross-case analysis to identify common patterns and
contradictions across the sample (Eisenhardt & Graebner, 2007). We iterated amongst
case pairs to sharpen similarities and differences and form tentative relationships between
constructs. Furthermore, we shifted between empirical evidence and theory.
4. Results/Findings
Analyzing data we noted that migrant women entrepreneurs paid attention to common
themes, showing similarities and differences in how they express their individual levels,
how they perceive contextual factors, and how they formulate their responses to
difficulties.
Concerning the individual level of analysis, the common themes that have emerged
are “self-esteem” and “self-efficacy”.
238
Referring to the context level, we noted two different perceptions, that is, neutral or
positive, and hostile.
Carrying out our cross-case analysis and, thus, jointly analyzing the two levels, we
noted that the interplay between individual and context levels generates two different
responses based on an “individual perspective” and on a “business perspective”.
Specifically, when the context is perceived as hostile (only in one case), the individual
level enhances its relevance by stimulating a response based on an “individual
perspective”, necessary to face the context's negative challenges. This means that the
migrant women entrepreneur, experiencing negative feelings from the context, builds her
success by investing efforts and resources in the achievement of personal high skills,
knowledge, and abilities. In other words, the response is a sort of “self-investment”. On
the opposite side, when the context is perceived as neutral or positive, the individual level
tends to reinforce the context level by stimulating a response based on a “business
perspective”. This means that migrant women entrepreneurs can focus on delineating and
conceiving deliberate strategies to improve their entrepreneurial activity, discovering and
spotting new business opportunities.
As a result of our data interpretation, it is possible to suggest the following
propositions:
P1. When the individual level is strong and the perception of the context is negative,
migrant women entrepreneurs tend to formulate a cognitive response based on an
individual perspective
P2. When the individual level is strong and the perception of the context is neutral or
positive, migrant women entrepreneurs tend to formulate a cognitive response based on a
business perspective
5. Value & Implications
This study contributes to the literature in at least two ways. First, our study unveils
that migrant women entrepreneurship is heavily influenced by the interplay of contextual
and individual factors - especially self-esteem and self-efficacy. Second, our study
underlines that the mechanisms through which these factors interrelate determine two
different cognitive responses that follow, on the one side, an individual perspective based
on self-investment (when the context is hostile and individual factors try to reduce
negative context effects), and, on the other side, a business perspective, based on
239
deliberate strategic actions (when the context is neutral or friendly and individual factors
tend to enhance the positive context effects). On the practical side, the study’s findings
can help migrant women entrepreneurs and practitioners (consultants and other
entrepreneurs) to identify the main factors that can sustain or inhibit entrepreneurial
behaviors, by anticipating possible concerns and issues and, above all, trying to remove
potential context barriers. Finally, findings call into action also policymakers to promote
ad hoc entrepreneurship education programs to strengthen the individual level, with the
aim of contrasting possible negative effects due to hostile contexts.
References
Aldrich, H. E. and Zimmer, C. (1986) ‘Entrepreneurship through Social Networks’, in D. Sexton
and R. Smilor (eds) The Art and Science of Entrepreneurship, pp. 2–23. New York: Ballinger
Publishing Company.
Allen, E., Langowitz, N., & Minniti, M. (2007). The 2006 Global Entrepreneurship Monitor special
topic report: Omen in entrepreneurship. Babson Park: Center for Women Leadership, Babson
College.
Alvesson, M. and Sandberg, J. (2011). “Generating research questions through problematization”.
Academy of Management Review, 36, 247–71.
Amine, L. S., and K. M. Staub. 2009. “Women Entrepreneurs in Sub-Saharan Africa: An
Institutional Theory Analysis from a Social Marketing Point of View.” Entrepreneurship and
Regional Development, 21 (2): 183–211.
Anna, A. L., Chandler, G. N., Jansen, E., & Mero, N. P. (2000). “Women business owners in
traditional and non-traditional industries”. Journal of Business Venturing, 15(3), 279-303.
Azmat, F. 2010. “Exploring Social Responsibility of Immigrant Entrepreneurs: Do Home Country
Contextual Factors Play a Role?” European Management Journal 28 (5): 377–386.
Azmat, F. 2013. “Opportunities or Obstacles? Understanding the Challenges Faced by Migrant
Women Entrepreneurs.” International Journal of Gender and Entrepreneurship 5 (2): 198–215.
Dacin, M. T., Ventresca, M. J., & Beal, B. D. (1999). “The embeddedness of organizations:
Dialogue & directions”. Journal of management, 25(3), 317-356.
De Vita, L., Mari, M., & Poggesi, S. (2014). “Women entrepreneurs in and from developing
countries: Evidences from the literature”, European Management Journal, 32(3), 451-460.
Dhaliwal, S., J. M. Scott, and J. Hussain. 2010. “Help or Hindrance? South Asian Women in the
Family Firm.” Electronic Journal of Family Business Studies 1 (4): 4–23.
Drori, I., B. Honig, and A. Ginsberg. 2006. “Transnational Entrepreneurship: Toward a Unifying
Theoretical Framework.” Academy of Management Conference, Best Paper Proceedings,
Atlanta, GA.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989). Building theories from case study research. Academy of Management
Review, 14(4), 532–550.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (2021). “What is the Eisenhardt Method, really?”, Strategic Organization, 19(1),
147-160.
Eisenhardt, K. M., & Graebner, M. E. (2007). “Theory building from cases: Opportunities and
challenges”, Academy of Management Journal, 50(1), 25–32.
240
Elam, A. B., Brush, C. G., Greene, P. G., Baumer, B., Dean, M., and Heavlow, R. (2019). Global
Entrepreneurship Monitor 2018/2019 Women’s Entrepreneurship Report. Babson College:
Smith College and the Global Entrepreneurship Research Association.
Emami, A., Ashourizadeh, S., Sheikhi, S., & Rexhepi, G. (2022). “Entrepreneurial propensity for
market analysis in the time of COVID-19: benefits from individual entrepreneurial orientation
and opportunity confidence”, Review of Managerial Science, 16(8), 2413-243. Essers, C., H.
Doorewaard, and Y. Benschop. 2013. “Family Ties: Migrant Female Business Owners Doing
Identity Work on the Public–Private Divide.” Human Relations 66 (12): 1645–1665.
Floris, M., & Dettori, A. (2023). “With our feet on the ground and our minds free to fly”: multiple
embeddedness and entrepreneurial orientation in small and medium-sized family businesses.
Journal of Management and Governance, 1-31.
Floris, M., Dettori, A., Melis, C., & Dessì, C. (2020). “Entrepreneurial orientation and the role of
the context. The case of the firm ‘Sa Panada Srl’”, Journal of Small Business and Enterprise
Development, 27(3), 349-363.
Granovetter, M. (1985). “Economic Action And Social Structure: The Problem Of Embeddedness”.
American Journal of Sociology 91, 481-510.
Hassan, S. H., Zeqiri, J., Ramadani, V., Zhen, T. S., Azman, N. H. N., & Mahmud, I. (2020).
“Individual factors, facilitating conditions and career success: insights from Malaysian female
entrepreneurs”, Journal of Enterprising Culture, 28(04), 375-400.
Jack, S. L., & Anderson, A. R. (2002). “The effects of embeddedness on the entrepreneurial
process”. Journal of business Venturing, 17(5), 467-487
Laguía, A., Wach, D., Garcia-Ael, C., & Moriano, J. A. (2022). “Think entrepreneur–think male”:
the effect of reduced gender stereotype threat on women's entrepreneurial intention and
opportunity motivation. International Journal of Entrepreneurial Behavior & Research, 28(4),
1001-1025.
Langevang, T., Gough, K. V., Yankson, P. W., Owusu, G., & Osei, R. (2015). “Bounded
entrepreneurial vitality: The mixed embeddedness of female entrepreneurship”. Economic
geography, 91(4), 449-473.
Marlow, S., and M. McAdam. 2012. “Gender and Entrepreneurship: Advancing Debate and
Challenging Myths; Exploring the Mystery of the Under-performing Female Entrepreneur.”
International Journal of Entrepreneurial Behaviour and Research 19 (1): 114–124.
Minniti, M., & Naudé, W. (2010). What do we know about the patterns and determinants of female
entrepreneurship across countries?. The European Journal of Development Research, 22,
277-293.
Mitchelmore, S., & Rowley, J. (2013).” Entrepreneurial competencies of women entrepreneurs
pursuing business growth”. Journal of Small business and enterprise development, 20(1),
125-142.
Nani, G. V., & Mathwasa, J. (2023). “Factors that discourage highly educated women from being
entrepreneurs”. European Journal of Management and Marketing Studies, 8(1).
Ogundana, O. M., Simba, A., Dana, L. P., & Liguori, E. (2021). “Women entrepreneurship in
developing economies: A gender-based growth model”. Journal of Small Business
Management, 59(sup1), S42-S72.
Pio, E., and C. Essers. 2014. “Professional Migrant Women Decentring Otherness: A Transnational
Perspective.” British Journal of Management 25 (2): 252–265.
Raijman, R., and M. Semyonov. 1997. “Gender, Ethnicity, and Immigration: Double Disadvantage
and Triple Disadvantage among Recent Immigrant Women in the Israeli Labor Market.”
Gender and Society 11 (1): 108–125.
Ratten, V., Dana, L. P., & Ramadani, V. (Eds.). (2017). “Women entrepreneurship in family
business”. Routledge.
Reay, T., & Zhang, Z. (2014). Qualitative methods in family business research. In L. Melin, M.
Nordqvist, & P. Sharma (Eds.), The Sage handbook of family business (pp. 573–593). Sage.
241
Schlaegel, C., & Koenig, M. (2014). “Determinants of entrepreneurial intent: A meta–analytic test
and integration of competing models”. Entrepreneurship theory and practice, 38(2), 291-332.
Shinnar, R. S., Giacomin, O., & Janssen, F. (2012). “Entrepreneurial perceptions and intentions: the
role of gender and culture”. Entrepreneurship: Theory and Practice, 36(3), 465–493.
Suddaby, R. O. Y. (2006). “From the editors: What grounded theory is not”. The Academy of
Management Journal, 49(4), 633–642
Uzzi, B. (1997). “Social structure and competition in interfirm networks: The paradox of
embeddedness.” Administrative science quarterly, 35-67.
Welter, F. (2011). “Contextualizing entrepreneurship - conceptual challenges and ways forward”.
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 35(1), 165–184.
Wigren-Kristoferson, C., Brundin, E., Hellerstedt, K., Stevenson, A., & Aggestam, M. (2022).
“Rethinking embeddedness: A review and research agenda”. Entrepreneurship & Regional
Development, 34(1–2), 32–56.
Yin, R. K. (1994). Case study research (3rd ed.). Sage.
Zahra, S. A., Wright, M., & Abdelgawad, S. G. (2014). “Contextualization and the advancement of
entrepreneurship research”, International Small Business Journal, 32(5), 479-500.
242
Fostering Women Entrepreneurship under the lens of
Agenda 2030. A closer look based on a systematic
literature review
Giorgia M. D’Allura
Department of Economics and Business
University of Catania
Corso Italia, 55
E-mail: gdallura@unict.it
Michela Floris
Department of Economics and Business Sciences
University of Cagliari
Viale Sant’Ignazio, 74
Keywords Women entrepreneurship, UN Agenda 2030, Sustainable Development
Goals, Systematic Literature Review
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1. Objectives
The phenomenon of women entrepreneurship is gaining increasing attention from
scholars, which argue that women play a significant role in entrepreneurship (Noguera et
al., 2013), contributing to socio-economic development (Strawser el. al, 2021), poverty
reduction and inclusion promotion (Langowitz and Minniti, 2007). In the last Global
Entrepreneurship Monitor (GEM) report (2021-2022), women entrepreneurs are described
as key generators of relevant “impact in their markets, industries and communities
through innovation, job creation and economic growth. However, their contributions are
often lost in the prevailing narrative that women are over-represented among the poorest
and most vulnerable entrepreneurs globally”. Women entrepreneurship is influenced by
changes in the economy, restructuring of labor markets in terms of employee
qualifications, and the nature of the work contents, and it is a cross-cultural phenomenon
with culture-specific aspects. Countries' and relatives' cultures influence both sexes but
not in the same manner or with the same impact and there are aspects of entrepreneurial
behavior that are country specific.
243
Despite this argument, we consider the UN Agenda 2030 as a common path that
should reduce this difference and, along with the evidence, sustain women
entrepreneurship above cross-cultural variables. Gender equality is one of the 17
Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) accepted by world leaders in 2015, and we
consider it a milestone in delivering on the promises of sustainability and human progress
worldwide.
Previous studies agree on the fact that scholars have to spend their efforts to identify a
theoretical framework to observe, analyze, and understand the phenomenon. In this
perspective, there are still no studies on how literature has positioned itself after the
strong impulse that the UN 2030 Agenda has given to the development of women
entrepreneurship and its current stage and future development. For this reason, a
systematic review of the literature that includes the reference to the UN Agenda 2030 is
essential to understand, also at an institutional and political level, what is changed from
2015 to now, and what actions can be taken to further stimulate women entrepreneurship,
and remove the cultural, social, economic and financial barriers that still exist.
Coherently, this study, through a systematic literature review, aims to investigate if,
how, and to what extent the UN Agenda 2030 and the related SDGs have exerted an
impulse in women entrepreneurship studies. Contemporarily, this study tries to
understand whether and how scholars have conjugated women entrepreneurship and UN
Agenda 2030 in their studies.
2. Literature review
Women who decide to create an entrepreneurial activity are significantly less than
their male colleagues (Elam et al., 2019). Several scholars state that this difference
accentuated in some countries compared to others, could derive from stereotyped and
male-dominated perspectives which would seem to discourage women from undertaking
business activities (Langowitz and Morgan, 2003). Other studies highlight other barriers,
such as lack of education, experience, and training opportunities; spatial mobility and lack
of family support; lack of institutional support; lack of entrepreneurial management; and
problem acquiring financial resources (Raghuvanshi, J., Agrawal, R., & Ghosh, P. K.,
2017). Moreover, scholars focused on the explanation of the differences between men and
women in terms of entrepreneurial rates, processes of financial resource acquisition,
sectoral choices, and business size and performance. Generally speaking, the
244
understanding of women entrepreneurship has two different, though related, levels of
analysis: the individual level, mainly focused on personality traits and career stages, and
the institutional level, where the context drives and lends shape to entrepreneurial activity.
We notice that studies ignore cultural values concerning gender, the constraints that shape
women’s motivations and choices, and their implications at the macro (policy-making)
level, at the meso (organizational) level as well as at the micro-level of local practice. By
adopting a social theory perspective, we consider that a greater understanding of the
sociocultural and spatial impact of a formal institution such as Agenda 2030 is crucial if
we are to move to integrate the two levels of analysis with a gender perspective. Mainly,
we consider that to advance entrepreneurship research on this topic we need to move
beyond the simplistic and dichotomous explanations of gender.
3. Method
This study adopts a Systematic Literature Review (SLR) because it provides a
comprehensive overview of literature related to the aim of this study and synthesizes
previous work to strengthen a particular topic's foundation of knowledge while adhering
to the concepts of transparency and bias reduction (Pittway, 2008; Tranfield, Denyer, and
Smart, 2003). Based on the combination of SCOPUS and Web of Science databases,
which include a large number of leading journals, this study carries out an analysis of the
articles from 2000 to 2023 (export date March, 7th) to verify the publication trend with a
particular emphasis on the content of the articles published from 2015 to 2023, to deepen
the knowledge on the role exerted by UN Agenda 2030 in terms of whether and how
Sustainable Development Goals are stimulating the proliferation of studies on women
entrepreneurship, suggesting new perspectives and research directions. We selected 43
articles.
4. Findings
Findings reveal the existence of an underdeveloped field of research. In fact, we found
that the number of articles was not high, as we rather expected. Moreover, the selected
articles have been published in a small number of specialist academic journals, which
have been interesting since their foundation in publishing articles dealing with
sustainability issues. In other words, among the selected articles, very few have been
245
published in General Management or Entrepreneurship leading journals. This evidence
would seem to highlight a reduced sensitivity on the side of managerial discipline
scholars with regard to the joint analysis of women entrepreneurship and sustainable
development goals. This appears in contrast with the relevance given to the same topics
investigated separately.
After reading the articles, however, findings show the main themes that scholars have
deeply analysed, as follows:
- Women entrepreneurs in the service sector and social enterprises.
These articles emphasize how and why women privilege the service sector, especially
the tourism and the renewable energy sector, and social enterprises to undertake their
entrepreneurial initiatives. Women appear to be more prone to invest their efforts in
services and social businesses than their male counterparts because pushed, on the one
hand, by the interest of achieving social goals and improving community well-being, and,
on the other side, by the more possibility to obtain financial and social support than in
other sectors. In addition, social business appears a powerful means to allow women to
face the patriarchal norms of specific countries.
- Women entrepreneurship in emerging countries.
The articles in this cluster focus on women entrepreneurship as a driver of women
empowerment in poor areas and emerging countries, and underline the role of women
entrepreneurship in poverty reduction, by investing in sectors that are critical for
Countries’ development, and by suggesting governments to delineate ad hoc policies to
promoting women entrepreneurship enhancement.
- Barriers and opportunities.
These articles investigate which factors inhibit or stimulate women entrepreneurship,
and what governments can promote by developing public policies able to remove
obstacles and ensure active actions to improve women participation in the entrepreneurial
arena.
- Technology as a driver to improve women entrepreneurship.
The studies sustain that technology represents a valid tool to enhance women
entrepreneurship, ensuring the work-life balance and allowing women to self-organize
their work from home, and, at the same time, argue that women can invest in
technological sector to set up their entrepreneurial initiatives.
- Female entrepreneurship education.
246
These articles spotlight the role that entrepreneurship education has on the set up of
women-led firms and, contemporarily, the difficulties that women encounter in acquiring
entrepreneurial skills.
5. Value & Implications
The originality of the study relies on the focus on UN Agenda 2030, to understand if it
represents a driver to enhance and stimulate women entrepreneurship.
Compared to other studies, we produce new findings on the relationship between
women entrepreneurship and the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDG). We see a
different relationship with SDG and we consider that future research should invest in the
analysis of this difference to consider its impacts, first, on the development of the field
and, second, on the practical side of the UN Agenda 2030. Based on our findings, we
offer a rich research agenda to investigate the impacts of Un Agenda 2030 to foster
women’s entrepreneurship, including a closer look at the evaluation of the various SDGs.
References
Elam A.B., Brush C.G., Greene P.G., Baumer B., Dean M., Heavlow R., (2019), “Global
Entrepreneurship Monitor 2018/2019 Women’s Entrepreneurship Report”.Babson College,
Smith College, and the Global Entrepreneurship Research Association (GERA).Accessed 23
February 2020
https://www.gemconsortium.org/report/gem-20182019-womens-entrepreneurship-report
Langowitz, N., Minniti, M. (2007). “The entrepreneurial propensity of women”, Entrepreneurship
Theory and Practice, Vol. 3, No. 3, pp. 341-364.
Langowitz, N. S., Morgan, C. (2003). Women entrepreneurs. New Perspectives on Women
Entrepreneurs, Information Age Publishing Inc., America, 101-119.
Noguera, M., Alvarez, C., Urbano, D. (2013), “Socio-cultural factors and female entrepreneurship”.
International Entrepreneurship and Management Journal, Vol. 9, pp. 183-197.
Pittway, L. (2008) “Systematic literature reviews”. In Thorpe, R. & Holt, R. The SAGE dictionary
of qualitative management research. London: SAGE Publications.
Raghuvanshi, J., Agrawal, R., Ghosh, P. K. (2017). “Analysis of barriers to women
entrepreneurship: The DEMATEL approach.” The Journal of Entrepreneurship, Vol. 26, No 2,
pp. 220-238.
Strawser, J. A., Hechavarría, D. M., Passerini, K. (2021). “Gender and entrepreneurship: Research
frameworks, barriers and opportunities for women entrepreneurship worldwide”, Journal of
Small Business Management, Vol. 59(sup1), S1-S15.
Tranfield, D., Denyer, D & Smart, P. (2003), “Towards a methodology for developing
evidence-informed management knowledge by means of systematic review.”, British Journal
of Management, Vol. 14, No. 3, pp. 207-222.
247
Does the sector matter? Italian Innovative SME’s and
Board Gender Diversity: impact on firms’
performance
Valeria Schifilliti
Department of Economics
University of Messina
Piazza Pugliatti, 1 - 98122 Messina
E-mail: valeria.schifilliti@unime.it
Elvira Tiziana La Rocca
Department of Economics
University of Messina
Piazza Pugliatti, 1 - 98122 Messina
E-mail: elviratiziana.larocca@unime.it
Keywords Board Gender Diversity; Innovative SMEs; Firms Performance
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
This study aims to examine the link between firm performance and corporate
governance, specifically with regards to board diversity. In particular, the main purpose is
to ascertain the impact of gender disparities within the Board of Directors (BoD) on the
financial performance of Italian Innovative Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs). The
Italian government introduced the Innovative Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) business
category in 2015 with the aim of fostering technological advancement and national
growth. This category pertains to companies that are actively involved in innovation and
possess certain distinctive features, including ownership rights with regard to intellectual
property, a workforce comprising of skilled individuals with doctorates or prior
experience in research activities in public or private institutions, and a designated level of
investment in research and development (MISE, 2015). In recent years, there has been a
growing emphasis on promoting diversity within organizational boards, largely due to
factors such as government mandates, media attention, and stakeholder advocacy. In
response to concerns about the lack of gender diversity on the Board of Directors, various
measures have been implemented. For instance, the European Commission enacted a
248
Directive in 2016 aimed at enhancing female representation on corporate governance
bodies (European Commission, 2016).
2. Literature review
Despite the extensive research conducted on the relationship between female board
representation and firm performance, the findings remain inconclusive. Numerous
scholarly investigations contend that gender diversity has an impact on a company's
effectiveness, as well as its ability to gain a competitive edge (Cox and Blake, 1991;
Elsbach, 2003; Smith, Smith and Verner, 2006; Campbell and Mínguez-Vera, 2008;
Adams and Ferreira, 2009; Westphal and Zajac, 2013). Several studies have reported that
the inclusion of women on boards has been associated with enhanced asset returns and
financial gains (Singh, Vinnicombe, & Johnson, 2001; Campbell & Mínguez-Vera, 2008).
Mari and Poggesi (2020) conducted a study to investigate the impact gender could have
on the performance of Italian innovative small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs).
The results revealed that, in contrast to male, female on boards demonstrated a higher
likelihood of achieving superior performance. On the contrary, certain studies suggest that
an increase in the number of women serving on a board does not have a noteworthy
impact on a company's profitability. In fact, some research has shown a negative effect, as
evidenced by a reduction in accounting returns (Darmadi, 2011; Mínguez-Vera and
Martin, 2011). This study provides fresh evidence pertaining to the discussion on gender
diversity in the boardroom of Italian innovative SMEs, indicating that its impact on
performance is contingent upon the specific sector being considered. Our argument posits
that the presence of women on corporate boards in high-growth sectors yields superior
performance outcomes compared to those in low-growth sectors.
3. Approach/Method
The study employed a quantitative approach utilizing a sample of 2.264 Italian
innovative small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) sourced from Aida, a Bureau van
Dijk (BVD) database that provides comprehensive information on companies, including
data on directors and corporate governance.
For the empirical analysis, a linear regression model has been employed where the
dependent variable Return on Asset (ROA), has been considered as measure for firm
performance (Adams and Ferreira, 2009; Easterwood et al., 2012; Zona et al., 2015).
249
The primary independent variable is Female Board, which refers to the proportion of
women serving on the board of directors divided by the total number of board members.
As a means of implementing control measures for the Board of Directors, Age Board has
been used, calculated as the natural logarithm of the age of the individual components
comprising the Board of Directors.
To assess the level of a company’s dedication to investing in innovation, additional
metrics have been incorporated, related to research and development endeavours.
Specifically, the variables R&D expenses, Patent expenses, and Licensing expenses have
been introduced as control measures.
4. Results/Findings
Findings underscore the sector-dependent nature of the influence on corporate
performance, as the representation of women on boards of directors is not uniform across
all sectors. The presence of gender diversity on corporate boards has been found to have a
significant negative effect on firm performance.
Our present findings diverge from several prior investigations (Brahma et al., 2020;
Arvanitis et al., 2022), but are consistent with certain other empirical inquiries (Adams
and Ferreira, 2009; Fernández-Temprano and Tejerina-Gaite, 2020).
Furthermore, findings indicate that there is a negative relationship between the
presence of female board members and return on assets (ROA), which is further
exacerbated by an increase in sector growth.
The study suggests that the involvement of women on the Board of Directors in
innovative small and medium-sized enterprises operating in high-growth sectors has a
statistically significant adverse impact on firm performance. The impact of the Female
Board variable on ROA exhibits a noteworthy adverse effect in the context of the
ascending levels of the Growth Sales variable across sectors.
Therefore, the research hypothesis has not been validated, indicating a requirement for
additional investigations.
5. Value & Implications
This research offers noteworthy insights into the field of innovative small and
medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) and corporate governance mechanisms. It encourages
250
debate on the impact of female representation on the board of directors (BoD), as well as
the association between board composition and performance outcomes. Industries that
have been traditionally male-dominated continue to exhibit a lack of representation of
women in the boardroom. In order to address this phenomenon, it is recommended that
policymakers offer adequate support to female presence in the board across various
industries and nations, particularly in fields where male dominance may give rise to
biases.
References
Adams, R. B. and Ferreira, D. (2009) ‘Women in the boardroom and their impact on governance
and performance’, Journal of Financial Economics, 94(2), pp. 291–309.
Arvanitis, S. E., Varouchas, E. G., & Agiomirgianakis, G. M. (2022). Does board gender diversity
really improve firm performance? Evidence from Greek listed firms. Journal of Risk and
Financial Management, 15(7), 306.
Brahma, S., Nwafor, C., & Boateng, A. (2021), ‘Board gender diversity and firm performance: The
UK evidence’, International Journal of Finance & Economics, 26(4), pp.5704-5719.
Campbell, K. and Mínguez-Vera, A. (2008) ‘Gender diversity in the boardroom and firm financial
performance’, Journal of Business Ethics, 83(3), pp. 435–451.
Cox, T. H. and Blake, S. (1991) ‘Managing cultural implications for competitiveness
organizational’, Academy of Management Executive, 5(3), pp. 45–56.
Darmadi, S. (2011) ‘Board diversity and firm performance: the Indonesian evidence’, Forthcoming
in the journal Corporate Ownership and Control. WP SSRN
Elsbach, K. D. (2003) ‘Organizational Perception Management’, Research in Organizational
Behavior, 25(03), pp. 297–332.
Easterwood J.C., Ince Ö.Ş, Raheja C.G. (2012), “The evolution of boards and CEOs following
performance declines”, Journal of Corporate Finance, vol. 18, n. 4, pp. 727-744
European Comission (2016) ‘Source: European Commission, Database on women and men in
decision-making’, (July).
Farag, H. and Mallin, C. (2016) ‘The Impact of the Dual Board Structure and Board Diversity:
Evidence from Chinese Initial Public Offerings (IPOs)’, Journal of Business Ethics, 139(2), pp.
333–349.
Fernández-Temprano, M.A. and Tejerina-Gaite, F. (2020). Types of Director, Board Diversity and
Firm Performance. Corporate Governance: The International Journal of Business in Society,
20, 324-342.
Mari, M. and Poggesi, S. (2020) ‘Gender and Performance: Preliminary Evidences from Italian
Innovative SMEs’, Entrepreneurial Behaviour: Unveiling the Cognitive and Emotional
Aspects of Entrepreneurship. Emerald Publishing Ltd., pp. 281–295
Mínguez-Vera, A. and Martin, A. (2011) ‘Gender and management on spanish SMEs: An empirical
analysis’, International Journal of Human Resource Management. Taylor & Francis Group,
22(14), pp. 2852–2873.
MISE (2015) PMI Innovative. Available at:
https://www.mise.gov.it/index.php/it/impresa/piccole-e-medie-imprese/pmi-innovative.
Singh, V., Vinnicombe, S. and Johnson, P. (2001) ‘Women Directors on Top UK Boards’, Corporate
Governance. John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 9(3), pp. 206–216.
251
Smith, N., Smith, V. and Verner, M. (2006) ‘Do women in top management affect firm
performance? A panel study of 2,500 Danish firms’, International Journal of Productivity and
Performance Management, 55(7), pp. 569–593.
Surroca, J., Tribó, J. A., Waddock, S. (2010) ‘Corporate responsibility and financial performance:
The role of intangible resources’, Strategic management journal, 31(5), pp. 463-490.
Westphal, J. D. and Zajac, E. J. (2013) ‘A Behavioral Theory of Corporate Governance’, The
Academy of Management Annals, 7(1), pp. 605–659.
Zona F., Gomez-Mejia L.R., Withers M.C. (2015), “Board interlocks and firm performance: toward
a combined agency-resource dependence perspective”, Journal of Management, vol. 20, n. 10,
pp. 1-30.
252
Women Entrepreneurship under the lens of Social
Theory: The Italian case
Mariasole Bannò
Department of Industrial and Mechanical Engineering
University of Brescia (Italy)
Via Branze, 38 - Brescia
Giorgia M. D’Allura
Department of Economics and Business
University of Catania
Corso Italia, 55
E-mail: gdallura@unict.it
Keywords Women entrepreneurship, Social Indentity Theory, Femminist theory, social
context
Paper type Academic Research Paper
1. Objectives
The study and analysis of women entrepreneurship have increased in recent years
from different research fields (Henry, Foss, & Ahl, 2016; Shane, 2003). Scholars agree
about the need to invest in this complex phenomenon. Intending to build a better
understanding of women entrepreneurship, this paper attempts to provide a theoretical
framework for developing academic research on the topic.
First, moving from the works that support gender equality as a necessary aspect for a
factual evaluation and growth of the role of women within enterprises, the proposed
theories are linked by a common thread: they all take a normative perspective based on
the study of the context in which the enterprise operates. This is because the context, on
the one hand, influences the socialization process of managers and determines the internal
conditions within the enterprise in which they or it operates. The analysis of how culture
can influence attitudes toward men and women can be usefully conducted by considering
Berger & Luckmann's (1966) Social Construction Theory. Indeed, it should be recalled
that this theory postulates that men's and women's ways of thinking, feeling and behaving
are influenced from childhood by the socialization reserved for sex. From this, men and
women learn how they are expected to behave in the society in which they live. They
253
learn what it means, in a given social context, they learn what it means to be a woman or
a man and how to construct their beliefs about the "innate characteristics" of men and
women (i.e., stereotypes). Hence, the existence in some contexts of the think
manager-think man stereotype, which in our view can inhibit the presence and active role
of women in corporate governance in those contexts where there is the presence of a
masculinist culture (non-egalitarian contexts). These aspects can also be translated
concerning women who want to set up their businesses.
Second, although entrepreneurship has its own theoretical and practical tradition, it
has never fully addressed the role of cultural and social context in supporting women to
engage in business activities (Brändle, Berger, Golla, & Kuckertz, 2018; Gruber and
MacMillan, 2017). The works have often limited themselves to describing the presence of
women in certain sectors or not, but not investigating the causes. In light of this
consideration, it is assumed that creating a bridge between entrepreneurship and gender
studies can contribute to the advancement of knowledge on these issues from a gender
perspective.
2. Literature review
Based on the interpretive lens of social identity theory, there are no entrepreneurial
competencies or skills that can be attributed to gender but a dominant culture related to
the specific geographic contexts in which the female entrepreneur operates. Context can
play a key role in influencing attitudes toward women entrepreneurs, supporting or
limiting the establishment and growth of the enterprises they govern.
In particular, contexts can be distinguished into patriarchal and non-egalitarian
contexts. In patriarchal and non-equalitarian contexts, differences in personality traits are
emphasized as masculine or feminine and the stereotypical view of women is reinforced.
In these contexts, women find it more difficult to create and prosper in their enterprises
(Bui, Kuan & Chui, 2018). In contrast, in egalitarian cultures, differences in personality
traits and the above stereotypical views tend to be less pronounced since the idea is that
all individuals, whether man or women, are born equal. As a result, women can create
their own businesses and make them thrive just like men.
Gender stereotypes are social constructions and, consequently, are context-dependent
since people jointly create them within a specific domain (Gullberg et al., 2018).
254
Therefore, when distinguishing between egalitarian and non-egalitarian, the purpose is to
capture the role of cultural beliefs in shaping gender stereotypes.
These findings, referring to the stereotypes discussed in the literature, may ultimately
influence managerial practice. The proposed point of observation, based on Social
Identity Theory, thus argues that gender differences are a reaction to the social
construction referred to sex. Furthermore, it should be emphasized that stereotyping can
be both normative, when it attributes characteristics to the two sexes, and prescriptive
when it assesses how a man or woman should be. Descriptive and prescriptive stereotypes
are not mutually exclusive. What is evaluated in this paper is the fact that stereotyping
(whether descriptive or prescriptive) creates different (and discriminating) treatment
based on the individual's sex categories. Examples of discrimination leading to restraint
of female entrepreneurs can be considered as follows:
Role of care. Since the female is the one who biologically procreates, the caring role is
commonly attributed to the woman and she is expected to remain in the domestic sphere.
The man, on the contrary, is naturally placed in working positions precisely because he is
considered to be outside the caring roles but having the social role of providing
economically for the family.
Risk aversion. The literature seems unanimous in stating that women act differently than
men, particularly exhibiting more risk-averse behaviour, a characteristic underlying
business activity.
Personal attitudes. Management research describes women as cautious, unconfident,
unaggressive, irrational, emotional, easy to persuade, and with limited leadership and
problem-solving skills. The finance literature also considers women to be less confident
than their male counterparts. These are aspects that the literature considers contrary to
business activity.
These stereotypes affect both the perception of the woman herself in undertaking business
activity by not evaluating herself as suitable for the role (individual level) and in the
evaluation by the context (think, for example, of access to credit and the obstacles that
can be encountered: Bannò, D'Allura, Coller and Amorim Varuum, 2022). Therefore, we
hypothesise:
Non-egalitarian contexts are negatively related to the presence of women-owned firms.
255
3. Method
Data for the analysis, referring to the year 2020, are derived from three databases:
Aida Bureau Van Dijk, Reprint, and Espacenet. The sample for this study consists of
5,441 Italian firms. Firms were selected randomly; therefore each firm had the same
probability of being selected.
Consistent with our framework, the dependent variable (Women_Entrepreneurial) of
our linear model is measured as the total share of capital owned by women (Bear et al.,
2010; Ben-Amar et al., 2017). Considering that in contexts in which women operate, there
may be gendered barriers related to cultural and personal factors (e.g., lack of respect by
men and refusal to do business with women), we consider the role that the context exerts
on the possibility of women to be entrepreneurs Specifically, the external context refers to
the region of origin and aims to frame the peculiarities of a specific area in terms of
cultural barriers embedded in its history, traditions, value and informal norms (Dacin et
al., 2002). We exploit a unique feature of the Italian context: the great differences across
Italian regions regarding gender roles. Recent studies show the non-egalitarian context of
Southern Italy, where a traditional, patriarchal, and male-oriented view is the predominant
one. In Southern Italy the woman is traditionally seen as the homemaker while the man as
the breadwinner; on the contrary, in Northern Italy this belief is not dominant (Amore et
al, 2014; Wright et al., 2007). Furthermore, the European Quality of Government Index
(Charron et al., 2019) identifies Southern Italy as the worst in Europe regarding
institutional quality. Thus, the variable External context takes value one if the firm is
located in Southern Italy, and zero otherwise. SME was included as an interaction
variable, it is measured as a dummy variable if the firm is a small or medium one.
In line with previous studies, we control for several firm-specific characteristics.
To test our hypothesis, we develop two econometric models. The first one which
assesses the impact of the External context (MODEL A), and the second one which
assesses the impact of the External context mediated by the firm size (MODEL B),on
women entrepreneurship.
MODEL A: Women_Entrepreneurship = ƒ(External context; SME; Control variables)
MODEL B: Women_Entrepreneurship = ƒ(External context; SME; External
context*SME; Control variables)
To test our hypotheses, we perform ordinary least squares (OLS) regression analysis
(Greene, 2003).
256
4. Results
Table 1 reports the main statistics of the variables used in the empirical analysis. The
overall descriptive statistics reported in Table 1 show that the average
Women_Entrepreneurship equals 27,78%. Almost eight out of ten firms are localized in
the North of Italy. More than 987% are SME and the average size equals 4 million euro
total sales. The firms are on average more than 18 years old. The average profitability
ROA is 4,7% revealing a good sample of profitable family firms. 24% of firms are
multinational and hold, on average, one patent.
Table 1: Descriptive statistics
Table 2: Empirical results, MODEL A
Table 3: Empirical results, MODEL B
257
Our preliminary results show that when the context is non-egalitarian, women-owned
firms are less likely as they face barriers and discrimination that impede them both as the
number of firms led by women and their development (most of them are SME).
Table 2 and 3 report the regression results from all models. The models differ about
the statistical significance of the variables connected to the external context.
External context and firm dimension do not impact women entrepreneurship
(MODEL A). However, when considering the interaction of the external context and SME
it becomes positive and significant at p<0.10 (MODEL B) and external context becomes
negative and significant at p<0.05.
The control variables also yield interesting results. Sales is negative and significant in
all models, with at least p<0.05. Firm age, does not impact any models. The variable
measuring firm profitability ROA has a negative impact in all models (at p<0.05), while
financial constraints is positively significantly different from zero in all models at p<0.10.
The variables Risk,Listed and Innovation are not significantly different from zero in any
models. MNE negatively impacts at least at p<0.01 in all models. Some of the coefficients
associated with the industry dummies are significantly different from zero in all models
(available upon requests).
5. Value & Implications
The idea for this research work stems from the need to understand the influence
exerted by egalitarian and non-egalitarian contexts on the birth and development of
women's businesses. Such insights are bound to grow as a consequence of legislative and
policy interventions attentive to the inclusion of women in entrepreneurial contexts.
Women are often affected by the context in which they operate and this deserves
attention.
Through empirical analysis, an attempt was made to explain the relationship between
non-egalitarian context and women's presence in ownership.
In particular, the hypothesis that women's presence in ownership is lower in a
non-egalitarian context than in egalitarian contexts is confirmed. The results also show
that firms in which there is a greater presence of women in ownership are also smaller
firms. . Women receive less confidence in expanding their business activities and in some
cases are also hindered, for example, to access the necessary funds for development.
Therefore, it is possible to conclude that in contexts where stereotypes, such as
258
preconceived ideas about personal attitudes (low self-confidence, risk aversion, and a
more balanced division of care roles) are scarcely present, women's presence in business
ownership is greater and the enterprises they lead also reach larger sizes.
References
Amore, M. D., Garofalo, O., & Minichilli, A. (2014). “Gender interactions within the family firm”.
Management Science, Vol. 60 No. 5, pp. 1083–1097.
Bannò, M., D’Allura, G. M., Coller, G., & Varum, C. (2022). “Men are from Mars, women are from
Venus: on lenders’ stereotypical views and the implications for a firm’s debt”. Journal of
Management and Governance, pp. 1-37.
Bear, S., Rahman, N., & Post, C. (2010). “The impact of board diversity and gender composition on
corporate social responsibility and firm reputation”. Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 97 No. 2,
pp. 207–221.
Ben-Amar, W., Chang, M., & McIlkenny, P. (2017). “Board gender diversity and corporate response
to sustainability initiatives: Evidence from the carbon disclosure project.” Journal of Business
Ethics, Vol. 142 No. 2, pp. 369–383. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10551-015-2759-1
Berger, P. L., & Luckmann, T. (1966). “The social construction of reality: A treatise in the
sociology of knowledge.” New York: Doubleday.
Brändle, L., Berger, E. S., Golla, S., & Kuckertz, A. (2018). “I am what I am-How nascent
entrepreneurs’ social identity affects their entrepreneurial self-efficacy”. Journal of Business
Venturing Insights, Vol. 9, pp. 17-23.
Bui, H. T., Kuan, A., & Chu, T. T. (2018). “Female entrepreneurship in patriarchal society:
motivation and challenges.” Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 30 No. 4, pp.
325-343.
Charron, N., Lapuente, V., & Annoni, P. (2019). “Measuring quality of government in EU regions
across space and time”. Papers in Regional Science, Vol. 98 No. 5,
Dacin, T. M., Goodstein, J., & Richard Scott, W. (2002). “Institutional theory and institutional
change: Introduction to the special research forum”. Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 45
No. 1, pp. 45–56. https://doi.org/10.5465/amj.2002.6283388
Fischer, E. M., Reuber, A. R., & Dyke, L. S. (1993). “A theoretical overview and extension of
research on sex, gender, and entrepreneurship”. Journal of business venturing, Vol. 8 No. 2, pp.
151-168.
Gruber, M., & MacMillan, I. C. (2017). “Entrepreneurial behavior: A reconceptualization and
extension based on identity theory”. Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, Vol. 11 No. 3, pp.
271-286.
Gullberg, A., Andersson, K., Danielsson, A., Scantlebury, K., Hussénius, A. (2018). “Pre-service
teachers’ views of the child—Reproducing or challenging gender stereotypes in science in
preschool”. Research in science education, Vol. 48, pp. 691-715.
Henry, C., Foss, L., & Ahl, H. (2016), “Gender and entrepreneurship research: A review of
methodological approaches”, International Small Business Journal, Vol. 34 No. 3, pp. 217-241.
Shane, S. A. (2003). A general theory of entrepreneurship: The individual-opportunity nexus.
Edward Elgar Publishing.
Wright, M., Westhead, P., & Ucbasaran, D. (2007). “Internationalization of small and medium-sized
enterprises (SMEs) and international entrepreneurship: A critique and policy implications”.
Regional Studies, Vol. 41 No. 7, pp. 1013–1030.
259
Design(ing) for the benefit of entrepreneurship
Arvi Kuura
Department of Entrepreneurship, Pärnu College
University of Tartu
University Address: Ringi 35 Pärnu 80012 Estonia
E-mail: arvi.kuura@ut.ee
Riina Tomast
Department of Entrepreneurship, Pärnu College
University of Tartu
University Address: Ringi 35 Pärnu 80012 Estonia
E-mail: riina.tomast@ut.ee
Keywords Entrepreneurship, Design, Design Thinking, Entrepreneurship Education;
Networking
Paper type Long Abstract
1. Introduction
Design is the foundation of human practice, being a part of every human culture and
civilisation (Baker III & Moukhliss, 2020). Nowadays we speak about total design that
involves products, processes, and services (Hollins & Shinkins, 2006). There are multiple
definitions or understandings, but according to a widely cited specification by Herbert
Simon (1996:111) “Everyone designs who devises courses of action aimed at changing
existing situations into preferred ones.” Design supports competitiveness, innovation, etc.,
and fosters cross-disciplinary collaboration. The value of design research comprises
social, cultural, economic, and environmental components. (Rodgers et al., 2020)
Design thinking is a focal feature of design, a multiplex phenomenon that includes
creative problem-solving, sprint execution, creative confidence, and innovation of
meaning (Dell'Era et al., 2020). Design thinking has deserved notable interest from
practitioners and academics, yet there are considerable differences between its promoters
and critics (Micheli et al., 2019). Still, developments in the design thinking practice have
not been sufficiently grounded theoretically. Recent developments relate design thinking
to critical and system thinking, and reflective practice, and importantly, “… represent a
260
major advance in our understanding of innovation, strategy, and entrepreneurship over
traditional approaches.” (Verganti et al., 2021: 2). These developments relate to another
shift, from ‘design thinking’ to ‘designerly thinking’, a more sophisticated version of the
first (Hvidsten et al., 2023).
Entrepreneurship has long been seen as a key engine for economic development, but
nowadays it is equally recognised as a powerful source of innovative solutions to the most
intractable societal challenges, including poverty and social injustice, and climate change
(Bacq et al., 2022). The ability to facilitate exploration and exploitation of opportunities
and turning them into economic and social value is still a widely renowned feature of
entrepreneurship, yet some hesitating voices are also sounding. Late events, such as the
COVID-19 pandemic and the war in Ukraine, have driven many, especially small and
medium businesses, to crisis (Fasth et al., 2022). Still, crises also generate new needs and
new opportunities, thus finding innovative solutions to upcoming problems have become
priorities worldwide as reflected also in pertinent public policies (Pencarelli et al., 2022).
These developments are changing the image of ideal entrepreneurs, from traditional profit
seekers to global changemakers for development and progress. Nowadays
entrepreneurship is a possibility for everyone for all purposes, not a profession or
avocation for businesspeople. This reflects another paradigmatic change towards
empowered individuals as the main agents of change, development, and progress, instead
of public bodies. (Lee, 2023).
Developments in practice induce scholars to advance theory, including going beyond
the ‘mainstream’. One possibility for this is apprehending insights from other disciplines.
A recent endeavour is incorporating design and design thinking into entrepreneurship and
introducing a new journal Journal of Business Venturing Design (Berglund, 2021). This
paper follows the mentioned trends and intends to contribute to exploring the existent
linkages between entrepreneurship and design, primarily design thinking, systematically
reviewing the relevant literature and discussing the findings.
2. Systematic literature review
Literature was searched in two major academic databases Scopus and Web of
Science (WoS), using the keywords “entrepreneurship” AND “design AND thinking”.
The second was a combined keyword because solely “design” provided a mass of useless
matches, but design thinking is the definite feature. Additional criteria were
261
peer-reviewed articles in English with available full text. Searches provided 68 matches
but eight were duplicates and two did not match the additional criteria.
The screened 58 articles were examined, using an inductive and iterative approach,
and coded. The first codes were derived from original keywords and substantial
(key)words in headings. In the next rounds, complemental codes were derived from texts.
Similar, and especially rare keywords (such as multidisciplinar* and interdisciplinar*)
were assembled. This process had several iterations until saturation when it proved
impossible to perceive novel substantial (key)words. Finally, all 58 articles were
examined again, some numbers of occurrences increased during this process.
Linking of entrepreneurship and design (thinking) appeared to be a relatively new
trend that has emerged within the past ten years. The publication outlets vary, only a few
journals have published several relevant articles, but among the relatively popular
journals are five educational journals. This is probably not simply coincidental and allows
to hypothesise that design (thinking) is permeating into entrepreneurship practice chiefly
via education.
The ascertained 58 articles are from 149 authors, 13 from one and 45 from 2…8
authors; and just 10 names appear more than once. This indicates that the domain is
emerging and diverse with dominant conceptual approaches still missing. The articles
cover a relatively diverse area, in terms of both involved concepts and notions, as well as
fields of activity –like sports, tourism and hospitality, not counting social
entrepreneurship and education.
The methodology revealed a total of 29 keywords (codes) that occurred in 2…30 (on
average in 21) articles. Codified keywords served as first-order constructs. To explore the
codified keywords, a qualitative grounded theory approach known as ‘Gioia
methodology’ was adopted (Gioia, 2021). So, four themes formed: (1) Creation and
running businesses, networks and ecosystems (to benefit societies), (2) Contemporary
organizational practices, (3) Knowledge development, and (4) Social and environmental
responsibility. Because most formed themes are quite wide and distinct, and the number
of themes is rather small, it seemed inappropriate to form third-level categories.
3. Preliminary conclusions
This paper explored several linkages between entrepreneurship and design (thinking)
in existent literature, and discerned four interrelated but distinguishable themes. The
262
emerged hypothesis was vaguely confirmed, so it is still rather a question for further
research how do entrepreneurs obtain the idea and relevant knowledge for applying
design (thinking)? Education and training may have an important role in this but possibly
there are several other significant influencers. So, the consequent research questions
might be about the supporting and deterrent factors for implementing design (thinking) in
entrepreneurship practices, and the pertinent processes, as well the usefulness of
appropriate sets of tools and methods, etc., and how all these differ across the typical
phases of venture development. The findings confirmed that design is a counterpart of
innovation, as its main features (customer-centricity, value (co)creation, creativity, etc.)
are inherent in the (re)design or innovation of products and services. Yet, besides products
and services, also processes and methods, and organizational structures are innovated,
hence designed (if new) or re-designed (if existing). The design of (or for) services means
a transition from artefacts to processes and methods, denoted by education (as a service)
in this review. Design and innovation are legitimately important in entrepreneurship and
both reasonably project-based phenomena. Thus, further research is needed for
exploration of existent and possible or still hidden linkages between these phenomena.
References
Bacq, S., Hertel, C. and Lumpkin, G.T. (2022) “Communities at the nexus of entrepreneurship and
societal impact: A cross-disciplinary literature review”, Journal of Business Venturing, Vol. 37,
No. 5, 106231.
Baker III, F.W. and Moukhliss, S. (2020) “Concretising design thinking: A content analysis of
systematic and extended literature reviews on design thinking and humancentred design”,
Review of Education, Vol. 8, No 1, pp. 305-333.
Berglund, H. (2021) “Entrepreneurship as design and design science”, Journal of Business
Venturing Design, Vol 1, No 1, pp. 1-4.
Dell'Era, C., Magistretti, S., Cautela, C., Verganti, R.and Zurlo, F. (2020) “Four kinds of design
thinking: From ideating to making, engaging, and criticizing”, Creativity and Innovation
Management, Vol 29, No 2, pp. 324-344.
Fasth, J., Åkerman, N., Elliot, V.and Hilmersson, M. (2022) “Small and medium-sized enterprises
response to Covid-19: The effect of external openness and procedural management”,
International Small Business Journal, DOI: 10.1177/02662426221101528.
Gioia, D.A. (2021) “A systematic methodology for doing qualitative research”, The Journal of
Applied Behavioral Science, Vol 57. No 1, pp. 20-29.
Hollins, B. and Shinkins, S. (2006) “Managing service operations: Design and implementation."
Sage, London.
Hvidsten, A., Rai, R. S. and By, R.T. (2023) “Design(erly) Thinking: Supporting Organizational
Change and Leadership”, Journal of Change Management, Vol 23, No 1, pp. 1-11.
Lee, S. S. (2023) “Entrepreneurship for all? The rise of a global “entrepreneurship for
development” agenda, 1950–2021”, World Development, Vol. 166, 106226.
263
Micheli, P., Wilner, S. J., Bhatti, S. H., Mura, M.and Beverland, M. B. (2019) “Doing design
thinking: Conceptual review, synthesis, and research agenda”, Journal of Product Innovation
Management, Vol. 36, No 2, pp. 124-148.
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F.M. and Demartini, P. (2022) “Italian SMEs and new scenarios in the
current geo-political turmoil”, Piccola Impresa/Small Business, No. 1, pp. 12-16.
Rodgers, P.A., Mazzarella, F.and Conerney, L. (2020) “Interrogating the value of design research
for change”, The Design Journal, Vol. 23, No 4, pp. 491-514.
Simon, H.A. (1996) The Sciences of the Artificial, 3rd ed. MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.
Verganti, R., Dell’Era, C. and Swan, K. S. (2021) “Design thinking: Critical analysis and future
evolution”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, Vol. 38. No 6, pp. 603-622.
264
Community Entrepreneurship: a literature review and
research agenda
Nicoletta Buratti
Department of Economics and Business Studies
University of Genoa
Via Vivaldi 5 16126 Genova
E-mail: buratti@economia.unige.it
Massimo Albanese
Department of Economics and Business Studies
University of Genoa
Via Vivaldi 5 16126 Genova
E-mail: buratti@economia.unige.it
Keywords Community entrepreneurship, Community enterprise, Social
entrepreneurship, Systematic literature review, Bibliometric analysis.
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
Community Entrepreneurship (CE) at its very origin has been associated with the
process of building a robust, entrepreneurial community, as a social as well as an
economic endeavour by community entrepreneurs. Since then, many experiences have
grown up all around the world, especially in impoverished territories of the so-called
Peripheral North as well as in depleted contexts of the Global South, often giving birth to
a specific kind of enterprise, named Community-based Enterprise or simply Community
Enterprise (Buratti et al., 2022). Other than within the framework of Community
Entrepreneurship, these initiatives have often been explored under the umbrella of the
social entrepreneurship construct, with which it has many points in common.
Notwithstanding, CE presents some distinctive features that may advocate a specific role
within entrepreneurship studies.
Considering the above, our study aims to provide an extensive background of issues
related to CE, focusing on its specificities as well as its relationships with other strands of
entrepreneurship studies.
265
Although some literature reviews on community enterprises have been performed in
recent years, to the best of our knowledge no recent review on the entrepreneurial process
of community enterprises is available.
With this purpose in mind, we first introduce the topic and formulate the research
questions driving the following analysis. We then illustrate the methodology adopted to
select the body of literature to be analysed and provide a descriptive analysis of selected
papers. Based on the literature review, an attempt is made to clarify the development path
of CE, pinpointing both shared and unshared elements emerging from the various studies
analysed. Finally, we conclude by describing the value and implications of our study.
2. Literature review
The label Community Entrepreneurship (CE) has been used in the past and is still
used, to interpret initiatives aimed at stimulating local community engagement and active
participation in local development processes (Johannisson, 1990; Dana and Light, 2011;
Mars, 2022).
CE construct is at the intersection between community and entrepreneurship, where a
community may be defined as a group of people based in a geographically bound area,
such as a village or locality (Haugh and Pardy, 1999). Communities tend to be
self-defining in place (Lyons et al., 2012), which then becomes fundamental to the
entrepreneurial process (McKeever et al., 2015).
As regards instead entrepreneurship, many approaches have been developed over
time, making it a blurring-boundaries concept. To our purpose, we consider
entrepreneurship as both the creation of a new organisation (as proposed by Gartner,
1988), and the process of creation and extraction of value from an environment
(following the holistic definition of Anderson, 1995).
Since the seminal contribution of Johannisson (1990) who first introduced the label,
scholars have proposed experiences from different contexts contributing over time to the
sedimentation of practices and interpretations, so much so that some stressed the urgency
of getting order within a jagged body of knowledge, by recognizing the link between
community and entrepreneurs as a new frontier in entrepreneurship research (Lyons et al.,
2012) and/or wondering if a new stream of thought within the broader strand on
entrepreneurship was taking shape (Fortunato and Alter, 2015).
266
By conducting an extensive literature review, we aim to offer an up-to-date picture of
the body of knowledge developed around the CE construct, both following its
development over time and highlighting its distinctive characteristics, as compared to
other kind of entrepreneurship.
In sum, our literature review is organized to answer the following research questions:
1. How the CE construct developed over time? 2. What are if any - its distinctive
features?
3. Method
To analyse CE research, we developed a SLR following the input-processing-output
approach (Levy and Ellis, 2006), which involves sequential steps (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 Stages and main activities of the literature review process
Source: Levy and Ellis (2006)
In the first stage, we searched within two major databases: Scopus and Web of
Science Core Collection (WoS) to identify relevant (quality) literature. We limited the
search to peer-reviewed academic articles published in English and collected papers
containing the term “community entrepreneurship” in the title or keywords.
The queries run in January 2023 and after cross-checking 43 (Scopus) and 25 (WoS)
articles, the final set of papers consisted of 44 documents.
To develop the processing stage, we read and classified the selected literature
according to the typical variables of a review, such as publication year, keywords,
267
methodological strategy (see the taxonomy used in McGrath, 1981), and publication
outlet5.
To sketch the state of the art of CE research, we adopted a 2-level analysis aimed to
assess:
1. the scientific activity, by analysing the density of documents (number of articles),
as the act of generating peer-reviewed articles is a good proxy for (quality)
research activity (Henneken and Kurtz, 2019),
2. the scientific impact, by analysing the citations, as this measure can be considered
a proxy for scientific impact (Moed, 2005). Data were downloaded from Google
Scholar in March 2023 via Publish or Perish software.
3. Findings
The review spans more than 30 years as the first article was published by Johannisson
in 1990. Over the next 20 years, scholarly activity was not intense. Indeed, only 8 articles
were published, whereas, since 2011, community entrepreneurship has attracted more
interest from authors. However, scientific activity has been more intense and regular only
in the last 7 years, and today CE is increasingly attracting interest as an area of academic
scrutiny, given that 25% of the selected literature has been published in the last 2 years.
Research set in natural systems stands out above all others, as they account for more
than 65% of the analysed literature. However, articles pointing to greater generalisability
of results (sample survey, combined methods research), as well as those of a conceptual
nature have increased in recent years. From the viewpoint of research impact, the works
of Johannisson (1990), Selsky and Smith (1994), Gliedt and Parker (2007) and Peredo
(2003) are the most influential, as they each gathered more than 100 citations. Although
based on case studies, these works proposed attempts at theoretical generalisations on the
phenomenon investigated, providing useful stimuli for subsequent studies.
One of the challenges in understanding more than 30 years of research is to grasp how
the literature has evolved and how its results relate to each other. Our analyses suggest a
distinct shift in research focus over time. We let these shifts influence our sensemaking in
two phases. First, we organize the shifts into three eras. Our organization under the three
eras may be biased by subjective evaluations, but it is in line with observations about the
5To assess the quality of the publication outlets, we adopted the journal h-index (Mingers
and Yang, 2017) by basing on Scimago Journal Rank of March 2023.
268
most relevant papers published in periods 1 and 2 and with the rising interest in the topic
in period 3. Second, we conduct a thematic exploration of the papers with their published
keywords and content, using the eras as an organizing framework to extract substantive
themes.
4. Value & Implications
Our study offers a portrayal of the development and current state of the literature on
community entrepreneurship, i.e., a hybrid form of entrepreneurship manifested
especially in areas characterized by economic decline and social impoverishment and
based mainly albeit not exclusively - on community involvement in the governance of
the firm thus established and/or in supporting the implementation of development
projects.
As regards the development of the body of literature over time, our review highlighted
three basic pillars: first, a focus on the community entrepreneurs ability to enact the local
environment and to turn an unfavourable, sometimes hostile context into one capable of
offering collective well-being. Second, the emergence of the community-based enterprise
as a viable solution to bottom-up approach to local development in contexts characterized
by social, economic, and environmental depletion. Third, the growing interest by scholars
towards obtaining legitimacy of CE construct and its specificities within the strand of
entrepreneurship studies.
As regards instead the positioning of CE within the realm of entrepreneurship studies,
overlaps between community and social entrepreneurship are commonly acknowledged;
notwithstanding, some distinctive features of community entrepreneurship emerge.
These findings enabled us to draw attention to some issues that may be relevant to
both researchers and policymakers interested in CE and related initiatives. In this regard,
a particular concern is about the actual contribution to local development; the studies
analyzed showed us in fact the many threats to the viability and sustainability of CE
initiatives, pinpointing that, while institutional recognition of the potential of CE for
communities’ revitalization is crucial, it is also important to acknowledge their intrinsic
fragility and to correctly size the expectations regarding their development and
achievements.
269
References
Anderson, A.R. (1995). The Arcadian Enterprise: An Enquiry into the Nature and Conditions of
Rural Small Business, Unpublished PhD Thesis, University of Stirling.
Buratti, N., Sillig, C. and Albanese, M., (2022) “Community enterprise, community
entrepreneurship and local development: a literature review on three decades of empirical
studies and theorizations”, Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, Vol. 34, No. 5-6, pp.
376-401, https://doi.org/10.1080/08985626.2022.2047797.
Dana, L.P. and Light, I., (2011) “Two forms of community entrepreneurship in Finland: Are there
differences between Finnish and Sámi reindeer husbandry entrepreneurs?”, Entrepreneurship
& Regional Development, Vol. 23, No. 5-6, 331-352,
https://doi.org/10.1080/08985626.2011.580163.
Fortunato, M.W., & Alter, T. (2015). Community entrepreneurship development: an introduction,
Community Development, 46(5), 444-455. https://doi.org/10.1080/15575330.2015.1080742.
Gartner, W.B. (1988). Who Is an Entrepreneur? Is the Wrong Question, American Small Business
Journal, Spring, 11-31a https://doi.org/10.1177/104225878801200401.
Gliedt, T. and Parker, P., (2007) “Green community entrepreneurship: creative destruction in the
social economy”, International Journal of Social Economics, Vol. 34, No. 8, pp. 538-553,
https://doi.org/10.1108/03068290710763053.
Haugh, H.M., & Pardy, W. (1999). Community entrepreneurship in north east Scotland,
International Journal of Entrepreneurial Behavior & Research, 5(4), 163-172.
https://doi.org/10.1108/13552559910293119.
Henneken, E.A. and Kurtz, M.J., (2019) Usage bibliometrics as a tool to measure research activity
in Springer Handbook of Science and Technology Indicators, eds. W. Glänzel, H.F. Moed, U.
Schmoch, M. Thelwall, Springer, Cham, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-02511-3_32.
Johannisson, B., (1990) “Community entrepreneurship-cases and conceptualization”,
Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 71-88,
https://doi.org/10.1080/08985629000000006.
Levy, Y. and Ellis, T.J., (2006) “A systems approach to conduct an effective literature review in
support of information systems research”, Informing Science Journal, Vol. 9, pp. 181-212,
https://doi.org/10.28945/479.
Lyons, T.S., Alter, T.R., Audretsch, D., & Augustine, D. (2012), Entrepreneurship and community:
The next frontier of entrepreneurship inquiry, Entrepreneurship Research Journal, 2(1), 1-24,
https://doi.org/10.2202/2157-5665.1064.
Mars, M.M., (2022) “Community and Cultural Entrepreneurship and Value Co-Creation in the
Local Food Marketscape”, Sustainability, Vol. 14, 16744,
https://doi.org/10.3390/su142416744.
McGrath, J.E., (1981) “Dilemmatics: The Study of Research Choices and Dilemmas”, American
Behavioral Scientist, Vol. 25, No. 2, pp. 179-210,
https://doi.org/10.1177/000276428102500205.
McKeever, E., Jack, S., & Anderson, A. (2015). Embedded entrepreneurship in the creative
re-construction of place, Journal of business venturing, 30(1), 50-65.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2014.07.002.
Mingers, J. and Yang, L., (2017) “Evaluating journal quality: A review of journal citation indicators
and ranking in business and management”, European journal of operational research, Vol. 257,
No. 1, pp. 323-337, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ejor.2016.07.058.
Moed, H.F., (2005) Citation analysis in research evaluation, Springer, Berlin.
Peredo, A.M., (2003) “Emerging strategies against poverty: The road less travelled”, Journal of
Management Inquiry, Vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 155-166,
https://doi.org/10.1177/1056492603012002006.
270
Selsky, J.W. and Smith, A.E., (1994) “Community entrepreneurship: A framework for social change
leadership”, The Leadership Quarterly, Vol. 5, No. 3-4, pp. 277-296,
https://doi.org/10.1016/1048-9843(94)90018-3.
271
How Rural Entrepreneurship Benefits from Organic
Consumers’ Personal Values for Peripheral Areas
Development. The Case of Girolomoni
Alessio Travasi
Department of Economy, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
Via Aurelio Saffi 2 61029 Urbino PU Italy
E-mail: a.travasi@campus.uniurb.it
Francesco Mutignani
Department of Economy, Society and Politics (DESP)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
Via Aurelio Saffi 2 61029 Urbino PU Italy
E-mail: f.mutignani@campus.uniurb.it
Keywords Rural Entrepreneurship, Consumer Personal Values, Peripheral Areas,
Territorial Development, Organic Agriculture.
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
The objective of the paper is to understand the impact of organic agriculture on
peripheral areas development by integrating organic food consumer behaviour into the
context of rural entrepreneurship. It is our aim, therefore, to expand the knowledge on this
connection between entrepreneurship and consumer marketing streams of research by
investigating the internal and external processes that enable the local roots of the
organisations to relate to the needs, imperatives and opportunities that characterise global
markets.
It is well known in the literature that Entrepreneurship influences and is influenced
itself by the context (Welter, 2011) in which it occurs. In particular, it has been recognized
to be a key factor for the development of Peripheral Areas (PAs) (Korsgaard et al. 2015a),
i.e. territories marginalised by the actual path of social and economic development (Barca
et al., 2014; Pugh & Dubois, 2021).
Among many activities, the one that has always existed in these places is the
agricultural one and it has evolved over time as a result of several historical dynamics.
272
The sector, which was culturally despised during the years of industrial development, has
today regained the dignity it deserves following the rise of a new demand for organic
products and the development of related production, which is one of the central elements
of strategies for environmental sustainability.
As organic food consumption is still considered a niche, it is important to study the
elements that characterise the consumer profile and, in particular, the values and motives
that determine their behaviour and choices (Kushwah et al., 2019; Sivapalan et al., 2021;
Sheth et al., 1991).
To achieve the proposed aim, the case study of agricultural Co-op Girolomoni is
analysed. Its founder, Gino Girolomoni, is considered the father of Italian organic farming
and his entrepreneurial spirit is identified as an example of resilience and reason for the
regeneration of Isola del Piano area, a town on the outskirts of the Pesaro-Urbino
province, in the Italian Marche region.
The long abstract is structured as follows: the second section is a literature review on
entrepreneurship in PAs, with particular reference to organic agriculture. Previous studies
on the motives and values that determine the choice of organic food consumption are also
outlined. Methodology is stated within the third section. Finally, sections four and five set
out the main findings, highlighting both value and theoretical implications.
2. Literature review
On “rural” entrepreneurship, an important contribution comes from Korsgaard et al.
(2015b), who emphasise the role that place has on the organisational structure of the
enterprise and its role at the local level. Unlike space, place also includes strong social
and cultural components that are intertwined with the organisational structure and modus
operandi of the firm itself, making its activities unique and not replicable in other
territories (Korsgaard et al, 2015b; Wright et al., 2022). The territory in turn receives
benefits from this link in terms of economic development, enhancement of the territory,
increased resilience, and containment of depopulation.
Although the topic of place-embedded entrepreneurship is well established in the
literature, Prashantham and Birkinshaw (2022) point out that the connection between
local and global contexts is not adequately studied. Shedding light on this relevant topic
would be important because such connection may even be problematic in certain
businesses, such as organic agriculture (Popescu, 2018; Siebrecht, 2020).
273
To this aim, there are numerous insights from industrial marketing and purchasing
(IMP) studies, which focus on relationships and networks between companies (Håkansson
& Snehota, 2006; Håkansson et al., 2009). These relationships enable companies,
especially SMEs, to access important resources, goods, and knowledge that they would
otherwise not be able to achieve on their own. Therefore, through these network
processes, the boundaries of an organic agriculture venture expand beyond its
organisational and territorial limits, allowing, at least in part, the problems of reconciling
large-scale production with the dictates of organic production to be resolved.
This has been facilitated, in recent years, by the development of a more
environmentally friendly mindset among consumers (Kautish et al., 2019; Sadiq et al.,
2020; Sharma et al., 2020). This new breed of consumers is able to make a green mark on
the world through the means at their disposal. They have many product choices and have
access to and the ability to use mass media, all of which make them extremely informed
(Tariq et al., 2019; Wilk, 2012). This “system of knowledge”, understood as a system of
advice to consumers that can change their purchasing habits regarding food products, has
been recognised as a key issue by the promoters of organic food production (Fjellström,
2009; Jørgensen, 2007; Sessou & Septime, 2020). This change has justified the adoption
of increasingly green marketing strategies to support the creation of nature-friendly
beliefs, both as a marketing opportunity and as a means to promote sustainability
(Ghoshal, 2011; Muo & Azeez, 2019; Petrescu et al., 2015).
The existing literature suggests different motives behind the consumption of organic
food. All these motives can be classified into three different dimensions of values
functional, social, and conditional using theory of consumption values as a theoretical
framework (Sheth et al., 1991). The theory proposed by Sheth et al. (1991) includes two
other dimensions of value emotional and epistemic which are not included in the
present classification due to their lack of relevance when declined in the context of
organic food.
3. Methodology
To understand the impact of organic food purchase behaviours on organic agriculture
entrepreneurial activities and on rural development, we adopted a case study approach
(Yin, 2018; Gustafsson, 2017; Tellis 1997). Such an approach is particularly appropriate
274
for its flexibility in the research design (Eisenhardt 1989) and in adopting a variety of data
collection procedures (Vissak et al., 2017).
Indeed, due to the novelty of the topic, there is a need for further empirical insight.
Therefore, we decided to adopt an explorative approach in developing the case study,
which is particularly appropriate to answer how, and why questions (Eisenhardt 1989;
Welch et al. 2011; Yin 2018) when there is little knowledge about the topic under study
(Yin 2018).
Moreover, given the aim and objectives of the study, we implemented a purposeful
sampling technique (Patton, 2001) for the case selection, due to the importance of
identifying key informants in the field of research who can help identifying
information-rich cases (Palinkas et al. 2015; Suri 2011; Patton 2001). Therefore, the case
selection involves individuals that expressed their availability and willingness to be part
of the research by communicating their experiences (Palinkas et al. 2015).
Regarding data collection, we opted for the use of multiple sources of evidence to
meet the triangulation principle ensuring the validity of the study (Yin 2018). We
collected primary data through a single semi-structured interview (Saunders et al. 2019)
to Giovanni Girolomoni, son of the founder Gino and actual firm’s President, which
lasted for one hour and eleven minutes. The interview was recorded and then transcribed
and integrated with secondary data sources such as companies’ websites and the other
material directly provided by the interviewees (e.g., internal reports).
With specific reference to data analysis, after writing the case story, data coding was
carried out independently and then discussed among researchers (Ghauri, 2004).
4. Findings
The Girolomoni Co-op was established with the mission of bringing agriculture back
to marginalised lands and territories. Organic agriculture was developed here as a tool to
enhance production and guarantee local farmers higher revenues, thus contributing to stop
the emigration from the territory. This bound with the place and organic agriculture
methods make the company identity unique and not replicable in other places in the same
way (Korsgaard et al, 2015b; Zamagni & Venturi, 2017).
The prevalence of export, which accounts for 80% of total sales, has its roots in the
Italian legislative system in force in the 1960s, preventing all products derived from a
whole-wheat flour to be called “pasta”. Today, Girolomoni exports its products to over
275
thirty countries. France, Germany, and the United States account for 60% of total exports
and are characterised by a higher per-capita consumption of organic food than Italy. There
are several possible explanations for this.
A first element is the identification, and consequent overlap, between the concept of
organic food and “zero km food”, better known as “Km 0”, i.e. the movement to create a
food system in which consumers only buy products from their own place of origin
(Calicchia, 2017). Organic production criteria do not come exclusively from the local
origin of the product.
The perception gap is also fed by the phenomenon of greenwashing, i.e. the practice
of falsely promoting an organisation’s environmental efforts or spending more resources
to promote the organisation as “green” than are spent to actually engage in
environmentally sound practices (Becker-Olsen & Potucek, 2013).
In addition, the mistrust of Italian consumers towards the certification system does not
help to heal the perception gap. Girolomoni found a gap regarding the “power” of
certifications held - in terms of higher sales - between the three main foreign markets and
the domestic one.
From these points of view, Girolomoni is in its own right an admirable example of
rural entrepreneurship, which is a firm place-embedded in the rural setting and with its
social fabric (Korsgaard, 2015b). Furthermore, thanks to the bounds both with local
suppliers and global markets, the firm manages to redistribute the additional economic
value created by the organic production along the entire value chain and particularly
upstream to farmers.
In general, interactions with farmers, and thus between the agricultural and industrial
sectors, lead to the convergence of different competences and the activation of carefully
designed processes that allow, within the value chain, to bring a series of high-quality
products to final consumers. In this process, we can clearly trace IMP elements,
specifically the four characteristics of the relational process: adaptation, cooperation and
conflict, social interaction, and routinisation (Håkansson & Snehota, 1995).
The externalities on the territory are multiple: first, the business activity itself
generates income for the local community and, as data confirmed, the main pool of
human resources reside in the area surrounding Montebello. This is important for the
resilience of the local social fabric, which is already severely weakened (Musso, 2011),
but being a rural venture also means, on the other hand, that there are few opportunities to
hire personnel from outside the area (Carrosio & Faccini, 2020).
276
Finally, active support to farmers in firm-level investments has an impact on the
industry's rate of innovation, which, although not at the level of hi-tech companies, is
important to improve processes and final products (Bjerke & Johansson, 2022).
5. Value & Implications
The territorial impact of Girolomoni is remarkable, as it has restored dignity to the
agricultural sector and shown its potential for development with a view to sustainability.
The added value of certified organic production reaching the final consumer is traced
back along the entire value chain to the farmers who, thanks to the dynamics of a social
co-op characteristic of Girolomoni, obtain higher remuneration than the traditional
market. Nevertheless, the company has always been committed to supporting its partners
by providing both its industrial expertise and specific services for the new needs that have
emerged over time.
A major limitation of this study stems from the inherent limitations of the case study
approach. As much as the Girolomoni case proved to be a unique example of rural
entrepreneurship and rural regeneration, the results obtained should be translated into
multiple business realities in order to be able to define the ecosystem built by Girolomoni
as a national model of development of peripheral areas through organic farming.
Similarly, the results that emerged from the study of the Girolomoni target customer are
based on the firm's historical distribution strategy rather than from a specific market
survey regarding the behaviour of their target customers. Consequently, further research
into the values and motivations driving organic food consumption is increasingly
important.
References
Barca, F., Casavola, P., and Lucatelli, S. (2014) “Strategia nazionale per le aree interne: definizione,
obiettivi, strumenti e governance”, Materiali UVAL, No. 31, pp. 1-68.
Becker-Olsen, K., and Potucek, S. (2013) Greenwashing in Encyclopedia of corporate social
responsibility, eds. S. O. Idowu, N. Capaldi, L. Zu, and A. D. Gupta, Springer, Berlin.
Bjerke, L., and Johansson, S. (2022) “Innovation in agriculture an analysis of Swedish
agriculture-and non-agricultural firms”, Food Policy, Vol. 109, pp. 1-14.
Calicchia, F. (2017) Il movimento Km 0 come segnale di cambiamento sociale. Caso di studio: gli
orti urbani di Roma in L’apporto della Geografia tra rivoluzioni e riforme. Atti del XXXII
Congresso Geografico Italiano, ed. F. Salvatori, A.Ge.I., Roma.
277
Carrosio, G., Faccini, A. (2020) Le mappe della cittadinanza nelle aree interne, in Riabitare l'Italia:
le aree interne tra abbandoni e riconquiste, pp. 51-77, ed. De Rossi, A., Donzelli editore.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989) “Building Theories from Case Study Research”, The Academy of
Management Review, Vol. 14, No. 4, pp. 532–550.
Fjellström, C. (2009) Food’s cultural system of knowledge–meals as a cultural and social arena, in
Food in contemporary society, pp. 19-23, eds. Janhonen-Abruquah, H., & Palojoki, P.
Ghauri, P. (2004) Designing and conducting case studies in international business research, in
Handbook of Qualitative Research. Methods for International Business, pp. 109-124, eds.
Marchan-Piekkari, R. and Welch, C., Edward Elgar, Glos, UK.
Ghoshal, M. (2011) “Green Marketing-A changing concept in changing time”, BVIMR
Management Edge, Vol. 4, No. 1, pp. 82-92.
Gustafsson, J. (2017) Single case studies vs. multiple case studies: A comparative study. Academy
of Business, Engineering and Science, Hamstad University.
Hakansson, H. and Snehota, I. (1995) Developing relationships in business networks (Vol. 11).
London: routledge.
Håkansson, H., and Snehota, I. (2006) “No business is an island: the network concept of business
strategy”, Scandinavian journal of management, Vol. 22, No. 3, pp. 256-270.
Håkansson, H., Ford, D., Gadde, L. E., Snehota, I., and Waluszewski, A. (2009) Business in
networks. John Wiley & Sons.
Jørgensen, M. S. (2007) “Organic Food in Denmark from Grass Root Initiative to Market Niche:
Potentials and Barriers for Further Sustainable Transition”, Environmental Engineering &
Management Journal (EEMJ), Vol. 6, No. 5, pp. 381-389.
Kautish, P., Paul, J., and Sharma, R. (2019) “The moderating influence of environmental
consciousness and recycling intentions on green purchase behavior”, Journal of Cleaner
Production, Vol. 228, pp. 1425-1436.
Korsgaard, S., Ferguson, R., and Gaddefors, J. (2015a) “The best of both worlds: how rural
entrepreneurs use placial embeddedness and strategic networks to create opportunities”,
Entrepreneurship & regional development, Vol. 27, No. 9-10, pp. 574-598.
Korsgaard, S., Müller, S., and Tanvig, H. W. (2015b) “Rural entrepreneurship or entrepreneurship in
the rural–between place and space”, International Journal of Entrepreneurial Behavior &
Research, Vol. 21, No. 1, pp. 5-26.
Kushwah, S., Dhir, A., Sagar, M., and Gupta, B. (2019) “Determinants of organic food
consumption. A systematic literature review on motives and barriers”, Appetite, Vol. 143,
104402.
Muo, I., and Azeez, A. A. (2019) “Green Entrepreneurship: Literature Review and Agenda for
Future Research”, International Journal of Entrepreneurial Knowledge, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp.
17-29.
Musso, F. (2011) “Small Retailing, Town Centres and Inland Territories. An Extended Town Centre
Management Perspective”, Public Administration & Regional Studies, 3rd Year, No. 2, 6, pp.
37-58.
Palinkas, L. A., Horwitz, S. M., Green, C. A., Wisdom, J. P., Duan, N., & Hoagwood, K. (2015)
“Purposeful sampling for qualitative data collection and analysis in mixed method
implementation research”, Administration and policy in mental health and mental health
services research, Vol. 42, No .5, pp. 533-544.
Patton, M.Q. (2001) Qualitative Research & Evaluation Methods, Sage, London.
Petrescu, D. C., Petrescu-Mag, R. M., and Burny, P. (2015) “Management of environmental security
through organic agriculture. Contribution of consumer behavior”, Environmental Engineering
and Management Journal, Vol. 14, No. 11, pp. 2625-2636.
Popescu, G. (2018) Agrifood Economics and Sustainable Development in Contemporary Society,
IGI Global.
278
Prashantham, S., and Birkinshaw, J. (2022) “The local roots of global entrepreneurship: Insights
from Stephen Young”, Journal of International Business Studies, Vol. 53, pp. 950–961.
Pugh, R., and Dubois, A. (2021) “Peripheries within economic geography: Four “problems” and the
road ahead of us”, Journal of Rural Studies, Vol. 87, pp. 267-275.
Saunders, M. N. K.; Lewis, Philip; Thornhill, Adrian (2019) Research Methods for Business
Students, 8th Edition. New York: Pearson.
Sadiq, M., Paul, J., and Bharti, K. (2020) “Dispositional traits and organic food consumption”,
Journal of Cleaner Production, Vol. 266, 121961.
Sessou, E., and Septime, N. (2020) Constructing the Green Consumer: a Critical Discourse
Analysis of Nestle’s Press Releases, Faculty/Researcher Works, Temple University.
Sharma, N., Saha, R., Sreedharan, V. R., and Paul, J. (2020) “Relating the role of green
selfconcepts and identity on green purchasing behaviour: An empirical analysis”, Business
Strategy and the Environment, Vol. 29, No. 8, pp. 3203-3219.
Sheth, J. N., Newman, B. I., and Gross, B. L. (1991) “Why we buy what we buy: A theory of
consumption values”, Journal of business research, Vol. 22, No. 2, pp. 159-170.
Siebrecht, N. (2020) “Sustainable Agriculture and Its Implementation Gap—Overcoming Obstacles
to Implementation”, Sustainability, Vol. 12, No. 9, pp. 38-53.
Sivapalan, A., von der Heidt, T., Scherrer, P., and Sorwar, G. (2021) “A consumer values-based
approach to enhancing green consumption”, Sustainable Production and Consumption, Vol. 28,
pp. 699-715.
Suri, H. (2011) “Purposeful sampling in qualitative research synthesis”, Qualitative research
journal, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 63-75.
Tariq, A., Wang, C., Tanveer, Y., Akram, U., and Bilal, M. (2019) “Online impulse buying of
organic food: A moderated (website personality) mediation (social appeal) process”,
International Journal of Information Systems and Change Management, Vol. 11, No.1, pp.
3-24.
Tellis, W. (1997) “Introduction to case study”, The qualitative report, Vol. 3, No. 2, pp. 1-14.
Welch, C., Piekkari, R., Plakoyiannaki, E. and Paavilainen-Mäntymäki, E. (2011) “Theorising from
case studies: Towards a pluralist future for international business research”, Journal of
International Business Studies, Vol. 42, No. 5, pp. 740-762.
Welter, F. (2011) “Contextualizing entrepreneurship conceptual challenges and ways forward”,
Entrepreneurship theory and Practice, Vol. 35, No. 1, pp. 165-184.
Wilk, R. R. (2012) “Book Review: Consumption Challenged: Food in Medialised Everyday Lives”,
Acta Sociologia, Vol. 55, No. 2, pp. 196-199.
Wright, A. L., Irving, G., Zafar, A., and Reay, T. (2022) The Role of Space and Place in
Organizational and Institutional Change: A Systematic Review of the Literature, Journal of
Management Studies, pp. 1-36.
Yin, R. K. (2018) Case study research and applications. Sage
Zamagni, S., and Venturi, P. (2017) Da spazi a luoghi, Aiccon Short paper, No.13
279
Tensions in SMEs’ networks for sustainable
entrepreneurship
Federico Ceschel
Department of Business Economics
University of Roma Tre
Via Silvio D’Amico, 77 00145, Roma (RM)
E-mail: federico.ceschel@uniroma3.it
Martina Lucarno
Department of Economics and Business Management Sciences
Catholic University
Via Necchi, 7 20123, Milano (MI)
E-mail: martina.lucarno@unicatt.it
Michela Marchiori
Department of Business Economics
University of Roma Tre
Via Silvio D’Amico, 77 00145, Roma (RM)
E-mail: michela.marchiori@unirma3.it
Annalisa Tunisini
Department of Economics and Business Management Sciences
Catholic University
Via Necchi, 7 20123, Milano (MI)
E-mail: annalisa.tunisini@unicatt.it
Keywords Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), sustainability, Network
Contracts, tensions, “dark side”. (max 5 words)
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) are considered the engines of worldwide
economies and the primary source of job creation (Wiklund et al., 2019). In 2018, the
SMEs sector employed 66.6% of all persons employed and contributed 56.4% to the
value added in the EU (European Commission, 2019). Due to their impact on economic
280
growth and progress (Steiner & Atterton, 2014), factors influencing SMEs' survival
propensity have been researched for many years (Sharma et al., 2020).
Beyond the context just described, SMEs must also consider that sustainability is
regarded as a new strategic and long-term goal for firms, countries, and society (Finke et
al., 2016), leading to the transformation toward more sustainable processes of production
and consumption (Roy & Singh, 2017).
Successful collaboration is crucial for organizations to achieve knowledge-sharing
and competitive advantage. Studies emphasize the importance of sustainable
collaboration for this purpose (Cao & Zhang, 2011; Touboulic & Walker, 2015). This is
even more important for SMEs, where business-to-business interaction relationships and
networking become essential to pursue sustainability goals (Pastore et al., 2019). For this
reason, European funds frequently support the establishment of these partnerships,
providing resources to enhance SMEs initiatives, particularly sustainability initiatives,
and sustaining them during the initial phase. (Kulaga & Cardinali, 2022).
Collaboration through interaction has been highlighted as valuable in literature, but
there has been less focus on the limitations and tensions surrounding business-to-business
relationships and interaction in network situations. (Abosag et al., 2016; Grandinetti,
2017; Tunisini, Marchiori, 2020) Further, very few studies analyse the drawbacks of
business networks and business interactions aimed at sustainability goals (Tura et al.,
2018; Ryan et al., 2012).
For these reasons, our work aims to investigate: (RQ1) which are the tensions that
emerge in a business network with declared sustainability objectives and how they are
characterised; (RQ2) which are the solutions adopted by the organisational actors to
overcome problems that arose inside the business network and to exploit the value of
networking.
Our research involves analyzing a particular type of business network in Italy called
"Network Contracts," which have a formalized structure. The goal of this study is to
identify any conflicts that arise within the network, understand what causes them, and
explore the strategies used to address and prevent them.
281
2. Literature review (max 500 words)
2.1. Dark sides in business interactions
SMEs play a vital role in boosting the global economy by creating jobs, driving
innovation, and promoting industrialization, as per OECD (2017). However, during
transitional phases, like adopting eco-friendly practices or defining sustainable practices,
SMEs often face resource and scale constraints and lack awareness of the benefits they
can derive.
However, close relationships are only sometimes synonymous with good connections.
This is evidenced by the fact that many of these close relationships fail (Anderson & Jap,
2005). The notion of the "dark side" first emerged in business-to-business literature in the
mid to late 1990s and has been further developed in the new century (Barnes, 2005;
Grayson & Ambler, 1999; Håkansson & Snehota, 1995; Grandinetti, 2017), suggests
‘problems’, ‘challenges’, ‘difficulties’, and ‘drawbacks’ related to structural, behavioural
and phycological issues that exist in business relationships. Increased attention to the dark
side of relationships has helped better understand the nature of business relations, which
often require careful management.
Several variables can affect the effectiveness of the network. Tunisini and Marchiori
(2020) conducted a review of network failure literature and were able to organise and
categorise the factors that contribute to issues in business networks. They classified these
factors as individual, structural, legitimacy, interaction, and governance issues.
Specifically:
Individual variables. People may struggle with prioritising personal goals, losing
control, making self-centred decisions, foreseeing collaborative outcomes, and
predicting finances.
Structural characteristics of the network. There are differences in the features of
partners, including technological, dimensional, and organisational characteristics
that could lead to relationship difficulties between the companies participating in
the network.
Legitimacy variables. External resources such as funders, suppliers or public
institutions are not providing the necessary support.
Interaction variables. Establishing a network collaboration can be challenging
due to reluctance, disagreements, lack of participation, unwillingness to share
282
knowledge and information and managing relationships. Changing existing ties
within the network can also be difficult.
Governance variables: the network is facing challenges due to the lack of a
network manager and difficulty in coordinating its activities.
2.2. The Network Contract
In Italy, the concept of a network has been officially recognised since 2009 through
the Decree-Law N°78. This law aims to formalise existing partnerships or promote the
creation of new ones by identifying the members, goals, duration of the contract, and
members' duties and rights. The regulations recognise two types of legal status: one is a
“light” form of contractual networks (“reti contratto”) and the other is an “heavy” form of
contractual networks (“reti soggetto”). Heavy networks have legal obligations, while light
networks give partners more autonomy to enhance their innovation and competitiveness.
Network Contracts are versatile and can be used to set goals for various activities,
including purchasing, production, R&D, and sales. They can also be used for more
complex objectives, such as expanding internationally, innovating, or developing
sustainable projects. Italian SMEs can benefit significantly from Network Contracts.
Over the past decade, there has been a rise in Network Contracts between firms from
various industries. The advantages of these contracts have been studied, but their
drawbacks are not well-researched.
3. Approach/Method (max 400 words)
Since current research on the negative aspects of sustainable business networks is still
in the early stages, a qualitative research approach is appropriate to gain a thorough and
comprehensive understanding of this intricate and widespread phenomenon in a
real-world context (Corbin & Strauss, 2008).
Our paper thoroughly examined 7 network contracts through the interpretative model
created by Tunisini and Marchiori (2020). By analyzing real-life case studies, we were
able to evaluate the effectiveness of the analytical framework and gain valuable new
perspectives. Additionally, these cases inspired us to expand upon the model using the
methodology suggested by Eisenhardt (1989) and Siggelkow (2007).
283
Choosing cases for case study research can be a difficult task. It is crucial to keep in
mind that practical and logistical considerations also play a role in case selection. For this
reason, the selection of the cases was based on the theoretical framing approach (Yin,
2014): in setting up the multiple case study, we have selected networks that (1) have
publicly stated their commitment to sustainability goals and (2) can prove that they are
still actively engaged in their collaborative efforts.
The 7 case studies have been identified through a desktop survey on a database used
in 2018 by some authors (Tunisini & Marchiori, 2020) for similar research. Table 1
presents the profile of the seven business networks. To protect the confidentiality, the
names have been anonymised. The data were mainly collected through direct interviews
conducted between April 2021 and April 2023.
All the respondents are either network managers or individuals with a significant role
in their respective networks. The number of interviews was determined according to the
criterion of theoretical saturation that is interviews were conducted until the information
gathered was considered sufficient and no further relevant information could be garnered
through additional interviews (Corbin & Strauss, 2008). We used semi-structured
interviews organised into six main parts, the first dedicated to collecting general and
contextual information, while the further five sections are related to the five categories of
factors that contribute to tensions in business networks (Tunisini & Marchiori, 2020).
Table 1: Sample of the networks analysed (main data)
Business
Network
Number
of firms
Sector
Product / Services
Informant
position
A
5
Mechanical and
electrical engineering
Construction of optical
systems
Network
leader
B
7
Construction
Sustainable building
constructions
Network
leader
C
9
Construction
Sustainable building
constructions
Network
leader
D
11
Tourism
Services for cycle tourists
Network
manager
E
4
Research centre
Industrial and academic
research on robotic systems
and parallel kinematic
simulation
Network
manager
284
F
5
Wood industry
Design and supply of wood
furniture
Network
leader
G
14
Construction
Sustainable building
constructions
Network
manager
4. Results
Firstly, we analyse the primary tensions that harm business networks. We aim to
emphasise the critical factors that hinder effective and efficient networking for
sustainability. Secondly, we showcase the measures and actions taken by the network
actors to address these issues.
Individual variables
One of the biggest concerns is losing control over customer management and
production processes. Autonomy is highly valued, and its absence is a major issue.
Unfortunately, some individuals prioritise personal gains in the short term, which can
hinder the development of a collaborative work approach in the network.
Structural characteristics of the network
Different things can affect the distance between network partners. These things can
relate to how companies run their processes, use technology, or how far apart they are. It's
important for network members to have similarities, but not too much, or it could slow
down progress and reduce motivation to work together.
Legitimacy variables
Connecting with other businesses is crucial for growth, and government organizations
can provide benefits and aid. However, some of these organizations may not be as helpful
as they should be, and there are no programs to support the network at different stages.
The way these public organizations work can cause confusion and complications for
network operators.
285
Interaction variables
During the interviews, participants identified two main issues in the network. One was
sharing confidential data with partners, which needs improvement. The other was a lack
of investment in joint activities. Participants stressed that the network's goal should be to
create added value for customers by collaborating with all companies, rather than just
gaining more customers.
Another important factor to consider is the network's composition. This is often not
determined by prior relationship or established trust but rather by the opportunity to
exploit incentives provided by the reference regulatory context in which it is formed. For
instance, a public tender might incentivise the creation of a network through economic
incentives. The commitment of certain members is crucial for the upkeep of the network's
activities.
Governance variables
When the person in charge of a network doesn't have the right skills or knowledge, it
can cause problems. At times, public institutions hire managers who may lack sufficient
knowledge or experience in the industry or network management. This can make partners
unhappy and cause problems. Interviews show that some companies don't understand how
important it is to choose the right person to manage a network.
Finally, Table 2 provides a comprehensive overview of the findings we obtained from
our multi-case study analysis. In this table, we have summarised the different approaches
used by the network and have traced them back to the different categories of tensions that
these actions aim to address.
Table 2. Tension and solutions
Tensions (categories)
Actions taken to overcome tensions (solutions)
Individual variables
Selection of companies in the phase of forming the network (for
instance, decisions can be made based on past relationships,
geographic proximity, or complementary skill sets)
Structural characteristics of
the network
Individual variables
Definition of training courses (for instance, this could be related
to technical, managerial, or relational issues)
286
Structural characteristics of
the network
Interaction variables
Interaction variables
Definition of a clear set of goals and shared quality/process
standards. Proposal of a selections of common products/services
Governance variables
Selection of a network manager with strong professionalism and
soft skills
Governance variables
Definition of roles and responsibilities within the network
Governance variables
Definition of effective communication methods and ways of
involving partners in the decision-making process (an example of
this is by using common rules and specific communication
techniques)
5. Value & Implications
Our study found that there are several tensions (RQ1) that can cause issues in business
networks, whether or not they have sustainability goals. Legitimacy concerns are
especially important for networks with sustainability goals. Public and private institutions
play an important role in making these networks successful, and not getting enough
support during their development can harm their success.
After carefully examining the issues and possible solutions (RQ2), we have come
across a paradox. The most significant tension that has been identified cannot be directly
resolved by the interviewees and their networks. Even though external factors may have
been helpful during the initial stages of starting a business, they can eventually become
uncontrollable factors for entrepreneurs.
Our interviews have revealed that external legitimacy can sometimes be achieved
through suppliers' support and recognition of added value by customers. This new
discovery has further enriched our interpretation model and reinforced the theoretical
reference model.
Managers and professionals involved in sustainability networking projects for SMEs
can benefit from these preliminary research results. Our exploratory study has developed
and applied an interpretative framework, but further extensive and quantitative research is
required for better insights.
287
References
Abosag, I., Yen, D. A., & Barnes, B. R. (2016). What is dark about the dark-side of business
relationships?. Industrial Marketing Management, 55, 5-9.
Anderson, E., & Jap, S. D. (2005). The dark side of close relationships. MIT Sloan Management
Review, 46(3), 75.
Barnes, B. R. (2005). Is the sevenyear hitch premature in industrial markets?. European Journal of
Marketing.
Cao, M., & Zhang, Q. (2011). Supply chain collaboration: Impact on collaborative advantage and
firm performance. Journal of operations management, 29(3), 163-180.
Corbin, J., & Strauss, A. (2008). Basics of qualitative research: Techniques and procedures for
developing grounded theory. Sage publications.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989). Building Theories from Case Study Research. The Academy of
Management Review, 14(4), 532–550.
Europena Commission (2019). Annual report on European SMEs 2018/2019. Research &
development and innovation by SMEs.
Finke, T., Gilchrist, A., & Mouzas, S. (2016). Why companies fail to respond to climate change:
Collective inaction as an outcome of barriers to interaction. Industrial Marketing Management,
58, 94–101.
Grandinetti, R. (2017). Exploring the dark side of cooperative buyer-seller relationships. Journal of
Business & Industrial Marketing.
Grayson, K., & Ambler, T. (1999). The dark side of long-term relationships in marketing services.
Journal of marketing Research, 36(1), 132-141.
Grippo, G., Marchiori, M., & Tunisini, A. (2016). Lo start up delle reti tra imprese. Analisi dei gap
tra “intenzione” e “(inter-) azione”. Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (2).
Håkansson, H., & Snehota, I. (1995). Developing relationships in business networks. London:
routledge.
Kulaga, B., & Cardinali, S. (2022). The role of networks in accessing european funds aimed at the
international development of INVs: an analysis of cases. Piccola Impresa / Small Business.
Pastore, P., Ricciardi, A., & Tommaso, S. (2019). Contractual networks: an organizational model to
reduce the competitive disadvantage of small and medium enterprises (SMEs) in Europe’s less
developed regions. A survey in southern Italy. International Entrepreneurship and
Management Journal, 1-33.
Roy, V.; Singh, S. Mapping the business focus in sustainable production and consumption literature:
Review and research framework. J. Clean. Prod. 2017, 150, 224–236.
Ryan, A., Kajzer Mitchell, I., & Daskou, S. (2012). An interaction and networks approach to
developing sustainable organizations. Journal of Organizational Change Management, 25(4),
578-594.
Sharma, P., Leung, T. Y., Kingshott, R. P., Davcik, N. S., & Cardinali, S. (2020). Managing
uncertainty during a global pandemic: An international business perspective. Journal of
business research, 116, 188-192.
Siggelkow, N. (2007). Persuasion with case studies. Academy of management journal, 50(1), 20-24.
Steiner, A., & Atterton, J. (2014). The contribution of rural businesses to community resilience.
Local Economy, 29(3), 228-244.
288
Touboulic, A., & Walker, H. (2015). Theories in sustainable supply chain management: a structured
literature review. International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management.
Tunisini, A., & Marchiori, M. (2020). Why do network organizations fail?. Journal of Business &
Industrial Marketing.
Tura, N., Keränen, J., & Patala, S. (2019). The darker side of sustainability: Tensions from
sustainable business practices in business networks. Industrial Marketing Management, 77,
221-231.
Wiklund, J., Nikolaev, B., Shir, N., Foo, M. D., & Bradley, S. (2019). Entrepreneurship and
well-being: Past, present, and future. Journal of business venturing, 34(4), 579-588.
Yin, R.K. (2014). Case Study Research and Applications: Design and Methods, Sage publications,
Thousand Oaks, CA.
289
The antecedents of entrepreneurial intention: A study
of Albanian university students
Maria A. Makarova
Faculty of Economics
Catholic University of the Sacred Heart
Largo Gemelli 1, 20123
Milano MI, Italy
maria.makarova@unicatt.it
Donatella Depperu
Faculty of Economics
Catholic University of the Sacred Heart
Largo Gemelli 1, 20123
Milano MI, Italy
donatella.depperu@unicatt.it
Camillo Sirianni
Faculty of Economics
Catholic University of the Sacred Heart
Largo Gemelli 1, 20123Milano MI, Italy
camillosirianni@live.it
Domenico Rocco Cambrea
Department of Communication and Economics
University of Modena and Reggio Emilia
Viale A. Allegri 9, 42121
Reggio Emilia RE, Italy
domenicorocco.cambrea@unimore.it
Keywords Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurial intention, Barriers to entrepreneurship,
Women entrepreneurship
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
Entrepreneurship research has shown that entrepreneurial intention (EI) of individuals
is limited by a set of perceived barriers (Franke and Lüthje, 2004; Hsu et al., 2019) that
vary according to contexts (Kouriloff, 2000; Verheul et al., 2006), and include not only
290
legal and formal aspects, but also informal rules, values and traditions (Webb et al.,
2020). Notwithstanding, there is a limited knowledge about specific features of
entrepreneurship, motivations and differences in perceived barriers to entrepreneurship in
societies with a relatively young entrepreneurial culture (Aidis et al., 2007; Ivlevs et al.,
2021), while attempts to analyze post-communist economies (Alvarez et al., 2023; Pistrui
et al., 2000; Welter, 2007) show that each country has its own unique features and ways to
cope with transition.
Entrepreneurship research has shown that intention to become entrepreneur is a good
predictor for further behavior (Ajzen, 1991; Kautonen et al., 2015; Krueger and Brazeal,
1994; McGee et al., 2009), and women all over the world demonstrate a generally lower
EI even in countries that, at least from a legal standpoint, offer equal opportunities to men
and women. Attempts to explain these differences offered a wide array of possible causes
from limitations in access to resources (Marlow and Patton, 2005) to the role women have
as mothers and wives (Leung, 2011). From this standpoint, Albania represents an
interesting research context, as years of communist egalitarian policy had to deal with
centuries of Albanian tradition where the role of women has always been highly limited
(Dana, 1996; Danaj, 2022; Murzaku and Dervishi, 2003). Entrepreneurial intention of
students has been widely analyzed also in Albania (Alimehmeti and Shaqiri, 2015; Garo
et al, 2016; Laudano et al., 2019), however, with some exceptions (e.g., Welter, 2007),
research rarely evidence the influence of the egalitarian approach after the communist
fall.
This study departs from the renewing claim for a better understanding of specific
barriers in different cultural settings (Aidis et al., 2007; Yousafzai et al., 2019; Webb et
al. 2020) and aims to analyze EI of Albanian university students by testing the differences
between men and women in the idea they have about their own characteristics and about
the environment as more or less supportive to start the own business.
2. Literature review
Entrepreneurship research has explored a wide range of barriers, however the
understanding of barriers continue to evolve. Literature confirms that individual's
perception of ability to perform a certain behavior is an important antecedent of EI
(Krueger and Brazeal, 1994; McGee et al., 2009; Rosique-Blasco et al., 2018; Sahin et
al., 2019), but recently studies started to take into consideration not only the ability and
291
knowledge to perform the task, but the importance of the perceived fit between
entrepreneurship and individual feelings about it as a possible career path (Hsu et al.,
2019).
Another barrier to start the entrepreneurial activity is the fear to failure. Failure can be
perceived as a learning opportunity or as an event that negatively influences an
individual’s professional development (Yamakawa et al., 2015). Studies show that fear of
failure inhibits entrepreneurial growth aspirations (Verheul and van Mil, 2011),
re-engagement in entrepreneurship (Yamakawa et al., 2015), and dissuades individuals
from starting their own firms (Cacciotti et al., 2016; Shinnar et al., 2012).
Search for better working hours and fair wages motivates individuals to start their
own businesses (Werner et al., 2014). Entrepreneurs are known for a particular passion
they nurture for their activity that makes them resistant to difficulties due to extreme
devotion (Cardon et al., 2005; Murnieks et al., 2014), but entrepreneurship also evokes
risk, stress, and hard work that diminish EI (Choo and Wong, 2006; Sandhu et al., 2011).
A long period of a state-provided employment affected the culture of communist
countries making difficult the spread of entrepreneurial initiatives (Ivlevs et al., 2021;
Volkov, 1999; Webb et al., 2020), but entrepreneurship may be a response both to a
perceived opportunity or a need of self-realization (Falck et al., 2012; Werner et al., 2014)
and to unemployment, low wages, an unstable economic situation (Schlaeger and Koenig,
2014).
Previous research offers some contradictory results about gender differences. Women
have a lower congruence with traits required for entrepreneurship (Gupta et al., 2009), but
the attribution of lower participation of women in entrepreneurship to specific
characteristics, such as their tendency to avoid risky activities and stress (Byrnes et al.,
1999; Sandhu et al., 2011), is contradicted by studies that describe an inverse situation in
matriarchal societies (e.g., Shahriar, 2018), therefore, stressing the role of the
environment where women grow. Women’s employment choices depend more on the
local environment (Ahl and Nelson, 2015; Yousafzai et al., 2019) and reflect also
female-specific conditions that facilitate or inhibit participation in professional activities
(Leung, 2011; McGowan et al., 2012). Women who start their own entrepreneurial
ventures may desire more flexible working hours (Adamson and Kelan, 2019; Leung,
2011), therefore entrepreneurship perceived as requiring sacrifices in other aspects of life
may become less attractive for women. Therefore, following the literature that show
women less available to sacrifice some aspects of their life to have an entrepreneurial
292
success, to have higher fear of failure, women are expected to be more influenced by
barriers than men.
3. Methodology
Based on previous entrepreneurship works and stressing the relevance of individuals’
perceptions, this research elaborates and tests in Albania four barriers to EI such as 1)
absence of perceived fit of individual characteristics with those required for successful
entrepreneurship; 2) fear of failure due to external conditions; 3) sacrifice as part of
entrepreneurial journey; and 4) macroeconomic environment offering benefits and social
guarantees.
The data were collected from surveys conducted at seven Albanian universities6
(Vlorë, Korçe, Durrës, Epoka, Tirana, University of New York Tirana, and European
University of Tirana) on students in the final year of their bachelors degrees in economic
disciplines or business administration. Students in their last year of study are more likely
to be considering their career plans, including the possibility of starting their own
businesses.
The questionnaire was prepared in English, and an independent professional translator
translated it into Albanian, while another translator translated it back into English to
ensure a correct translation.
The questionnaire was anonymous, and one of the authors manually administered it to
university students from May through December 2019. A total of 593 questionnaires were
obtained (631 questionnaires were distributed), and 447 were fully completed (a 94%
response rate).
Of the respondents, 10.5% were from Vlorë University, 13.3% from Korçe University,
23.3% from Durrës University, 16.5% from Epoka University, 12.6% from the European
University of Tirana, 4.9% from the University of New York Tirana, and 18.9% from
Tirana University. Furthermore, 115 male students (25.7%) and 332 female students
(74.3%) responded.
EI, the dependent variable in the study, was measured as a dummy variable (yes = 1;
no = 0) based on responses (yes = one; no = zero) to the following question: “What would
you really like to do?” The survey offered six answers: (a) to become an entrepreneur and
6The higher education system in Albania consists of eight universities, two academies, and six
non-public higher schools (https://arsimi.gov.al/universiteti/).
293
have my own firm; (b) to work (as an employee) at a good position in a good firm; (c) to
be a freelancer; (d) to be a politician; (e) to work in the public sector; or (f) I would rather
prefer_ (space was provided here for the respondent to specify a preference). The
students could only make one choice, so we considered it a dummy variable. We
distinguished the choice “to become an entrepreneur” from the other answers by
assigning it a value of one and assigning the other answers a value of zero.
The main independent variables were fit of characteristics,fear of failure,
entrepreneurship as sacrifice, and perceived social guarantees.
4. Results
To empirically test our hypotheses, we ran a probit maximum likelihood model with
robust standard errors (Shahriar, 2018; Westhead and Solesvik, 2016; Zhang et al., 2014).
Specifically, the following model was applied:
Pr. (EI = 1) = β0 + β1 Fit of characteristics + β2 fear of failure + β3
entrepreneurship as sacrifice + β4 perceived social guarantees + control variables + μt
Regarding the entire sample of students, fit of characteristics shows a positive and
significant effect = 0.457, p< .01) on EI. Therefore, the perception of having the
necessary characteristics to be a good entrepreneur is a strong determinant of EI.
However, tthe coefficient of the variable fit of characteristics remains positive only for
the female subsample = 0.497, p< .01), so the relationship between perceiving oneself
as possessing the characteristics necessary to start an entrepreneurial venture and the
intention to start the venture is stronger for female students than for male students in
Albania.
The coefficient of fear of failure is negative and statistically significant = -0.167, p
< .01).. Thus, the difficulties related to unstable economic conditions present a relevant
barrier to entrepreneurship for university students in Albania. Considering the effect of
fear of failure in the female and male subsamples, the results show that the relationship
between perceiving the economic situation in the country as unfavorable for starting an
entrepreneurial activity and the EI of Albanian students is negative and significantly
stronger for women = -0.173, p< .05) than for men.
294
The variable entrepreneurship as sacrifice shows a positive coefficient and is
statistically significant = 0.174, p< .01). Contrary to our prediction, entrepreneurship
as sacrifice positively relates to the EI of university students. The results suggest that
dedicating significant effort to one’s business does not prevent the professional choice of
starting an entrepreneurial activity. Interestingly, the empirical findings do not differ in
terms of gender. These results contradict previous studies that were showing women as
less resistant to stress and challenging work as an explanation for lower female
participation in entrepreneurship (see Sandhu et al., 2011).
The perception of the environment as offering fewer benefits and social guarantees
has a positive influence on EI. The empirical findings show the positive statistical
significance of the variable perceived social guarantees = 0.222, p< 0.10). This
hypothesis is confirmed for the entire sample, but the coefficient retains a positive sign
for the female subsample = 0.334, p< .05) and loses strength becoming non-significant
in the male subsample = 0.168, p> .10). Seemingly, an institutional setting
characterized by adverse circumstances in terms of social guarantees makes women,
rather than men, consider entrepreneurship a possible solution with a substantially
motivating effect on women. The research shows that Albanian women, but not men,
consider entrepreneurship a possible way to overcome economic difficulties and
compensate the lack of social guarantees.
5. Value and Implications
Albania had a long-rooted patriarchal tradition giving a very peripheral place to
women in society and their professional realization was far from being a priority.
However, the communist regime struggled with patriarchal values to introduce the idea of
equal participation of men and women in professional activities.
In spite of some studies that highlighted a very vulnerable role of women after the
communist fall (Murzaku and Dervishi, 2003), this study found some elements that show
a much more evident trend of egalitarian vision among young Albanians. These results
make to suggest that in a country like Albania support programs should be more oriented
to psychological elements that deal with perceptions of would-be entrepreneurs about the
environment in order to help them go over fear of failure and to see thee way s to start the
own entrepreneurial venture. Contradicting the previous studies, this research finds that
the idea of hard work and necessity to dedicate time and energy to entrepreneurial activity
295
does not influence negatively the EI of women, on the contrary, confirming some
studies(see Pistrui et al., 2000) that found a similar trend in higher propensity to hard
work and sacrifice in post-communist countries.
References
Adamson, M., & Kelan, E.K. (2019). 'Female Heroes': Celebrity Executives as
Postfeminism Role Models. British Journal of Management, 30(4), 981-996.
https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-8551.12320
Ahl, H. and Nelson, T. (2015), How policy positions women entrepreneurs: A
comparative analysis of state discourse in Sweden and the United States, Journal of
Business Venturing, 30(2), 273-291. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2014.08.002
Aidis, R., Welter, F., Smallbone, D., Isakova, N. (2007), Female entrepreneurship in
transition economies: the case of Lithuania and Ukraine, Feminist Economics, 13(2),
157-183. https://doi.org/10.1080/13545700601184831
Ajzen, I. (2011). The theory of planned behaviour: Reactions and reflections. Psychology
& health, 26(9), 1113-1127. https://doi.org/10.1080/08870446.2011.613995
Alimehmeti, G. and Shaqiri, G. (2015), “Factors determining entrepreneurial intentions: a
case study from Albania”, Academic Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies, Vol.4,
No.3, pp.233-240.DOI:10.5901/ajis.2015.v4n3p233
Alvarez, A., Newman, A.B., Barney, J., Plomaritis, A. (2023) Creating Stakeholder
Legitimacy in the Eyes of Stakeholders: The case of Havana's paladares,
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, Vol. 47, Issue 1, pp.17-65
Byrnes, J.P., Miller, D.C., and Schafer, W.D. (1999), Gender differences in risk taking: A
meta-analysis, Psychological Bulletin, 125(3), 367-383.
Cacciotti, G., Hayton, J.C., Mitchell, J.R, & Giazitzoglu, A. (2016). A
reconceptualization of fear of failure in entrepreneurship. Journal of Business
Venturing, 31(3), 302-325.https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2016.02.002
Cardon, M.S., Zietsma, C., Sapartito, P., Matherne, and B.P., Davis, C. (2005), A tale of
passion: New insights into entrepreneurship from a parenthood metaphor, Journal of
Business Venturing, 20(1), 23-45. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2004.01.002
Choo, S., and Wong, M. (2006), Entrepreneurial intention: triggers and barriers to new
venture creation in Singapore, Singapore Management Review, 28(2), 47-64.
Dana, L.P. (1996), Albania in the twilight zone: the perseritje model and its impact on
small business, Journal of Small Business Management, 34(1), 64-70.
Danaj, E. (2022), Women, migration and gendered experiences. The case of post-1991
Albanian migration, IMISCOE Research Series, Springer.
296
Falck, O., Heblich, S., Luedemann, E. (2012), Identity and entrepreneurship: do school
peers shape entrepreneurial intentions?, Small Business Economics, 39,
39-59.https://doi.org/10.1007/s11187-010-9292-5
Franke, N. and Lüthje, C. (2004), Entrepreneurial intentions of business students-a
benchmarking study, International Journal of Innovation and Technology
Management, 1(3), 269-288. https://doi.org/10.1142/S0219877004000209
Garo, E., Kume, V., Basho, S. (2015), Determinants of entrepreneurial intention among
university students: case of Albania, Multidisciplinary Journal for Education, Social
and technological Sciences, 2(2), 176-190. https://doi.org/10.4995/muse.2015.3691
Gupta, V.K., Turban, D.B., Wasti, S.A., and Sikdar, A. (2009), The role of gender
stereotypes in perceptions of entrepreneurs and intentions to become an
entrepreneur, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 33(2), 397-417.
https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6520.2009.00296.x
Hsu, D.K., Burmeister-Lamp, K., Simmons, S.A., Foo, M.-D., Hong, M.C., & Pipes, J.D.
(2019), 'I know I can, but I don't fit': Perceived fit, self-efficacy, and entrepreneurial
intention, Journal of Business Venturing, 34(2), 311-326.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2018.08.004
Ivlevs, A., Nikolova, M., Popova, O. (2021), Former Communist party membership and
present-day entrepreneurship, Small Business Economics, 57, 1783-1800.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11187-020-00364-6
Kautonen, T., van Gelderen, and M., Fink, M (2015), Robustness of the theory of planned
behavior in predicting entrepreneurial intentions and actions, Entrepreneurship
Theory and Practice, 39(3), 655-674. https://doi.org/10.1111/etap.12056
Krueger, N.F., and Brazeal, D.V. (1994), Entrepreneurial potential and potential
entrepreneurs, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 18(3), 91-104.
https://doi.org/10.1177/104225879401800307
Kouriloff, M. (2000), Exploring perceptions of a priori barriers to entrepreneurship: a
multidisciplinary approach, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 25(2), 59-80.
https://doi.org/10.1177/104225870002500204
Laudano, M.C., Zollo, L., Ciappei, C., Zampi, V. (2019), Entrepreneurial universities and
women entrepreneurship: a cross-cultural study, Management Decision, 57(9),
2541-2554.DOI 10.1108/MD-04-2018-039
Leung, A., (2011), Motherhood and entrepreneurship: gender role identity as a source,
International Journal of Gender and Entrepreneurship, 3(3), 254-264.DOI
10.1108/17566261111169331
Marlow, S. and Patton, D. (2005), All credit to men? Entrepreneurship, finance and
gender, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 29(6),
717-735.https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6520.2005.00105.x
McGee, J.E., Peterson, M., Mueller, S. L., Sequieira, J.M. (2009), Entrepreneurial
self-efficacy: refining the measure, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 33(4),
965-988. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6520.2009.00304.x
McGowan P., Redeker, C.L., Cooper, S.Y., Greenan, K. (2012), Female entrepreneurship
and the management of business and domestic roles: Motivations, expectations and
297
realities, Entrepreneurship & Regional Development, 24(1/2), 53-72.
https://doi.org/10.1080/08985626.2012.637351
Murnieks, C,Y., Mosakowski, E., Cardon, M.S. (2014), Pathways of passion: identity
centrality, passion, and behavior among entrepreneurs, Journal of Management,
40(6), 1583-1606. https://doi.org/10.1177/0149206311433855
Murzaku, I.A. and Dervishi, Z. (2003), Albanians’ first post-communist decade. Values in
transition: traditional or liberal?,East European Quarterly, 37(2), 231-256.
Pistrui, D., Welsch, H.P., Wintermantel, O., Liao, J., Poh, H.J. (2000) Entrepreneurial
Orientation and Family Forces in the New Germany: Similarities and Differences
Between East and West German Entrepreneurs, Family Business Review, Vol..13,
issue 3, pp.251-263
Rosique-Blasco, M., Madrid-Guijarro, A., Garcia-Perez-de-Lema, D. (2018), The effects
of personal abilities and self-efficacy on entrepreneurial intentions, International
Entrepreneurship and Management Journal, 14, pp.1025-1052.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s11365-017-0469-0
Sahin, F., Karadag, H., Turcer, B. (2019) Big five personality traits, entrepreneurial
self-efficacy and entrepreneurial intention, International Journal of Entrepreneurial
Behavior & Research, 25(6), 1188-1211. DOI 10.1108/IJEBR-07-2018-0466
Sandhu, M.S., Sidique, S.F., Riaz, S. (2011), Entrepreneurship barriers and
entrepreneurial inclination among Malaysian postgraduate students, International
Journal of Entrepreneurship Behaviour & Research, 17(4), 428-449. DOI
10.1108/13552551111139656
Schlaeger, C. and Koenig, M. (2014), Determinants of entrepreneurial intent: a
meta-analytic test and integration of competing models, Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice, 38(2), 291-332.https://doi.org/10.1111/etap.12087
Shinnar, R.S., Giacomin, O., Janssen, F. (2012), Entrepreneurial perceptions and
intentions: The role of gender and culture, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice,
36(3), 465-493. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6520.2012.00509.x
Shahriar, A.Z.M. (2018), Gender differences in entrepreneurial propensity: Evidence
from matrilineal and patriarchal societies, Journal of Business Venturing, 33(6),
762-779. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusvent.2018.04.005
Verheul, I., and van Mil, L. (2011), What determines the growth ambition of Dutch
early-stage entrepreneurs?, International Journal of Entrepreneurial Venturing, 3(2),
183-207.DOI: 10.1504/IJEV.2011.039340
Verheul, I., Van Stel, A., Thurik, R. (2006), Explaining female and male entrepreneurship
at the country level, Entrepreneurship and Regional Development, 18(2) 151-183.
https://doi.org/10.1080/08985620500532053
Volkov, V. (1999), Violent Entrepreneurship in Post-communist Russia, Europe-Asia
Studies, 51(5), 741-754.
Webb, J.W., Khoury, T.A., Hitt, M.A. (2020), The influence of formal and informal
institutional voids on entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, 44(3),
504-526. https://doi.org/10.1177/1042258719830310
298
Welter, F.(2007) Entrepreneurship in West and East Germany, International Journal of
Entrepreneurship and Small Business, Vol.4, N.2, pp.97-109
Werner, A., Gast, J., Kraus, S. (2014), The effect of working time preferences and fair
wage perceptions on entrepreneurial intentions among employees, Small Business
Economics, 43, 137-160.https://doi.org/10.1007/s11187-013-9528-2
Westhead, P., and Solesvik, M. Z. (2016), Entrepreneurship education and entrepreneurial
intention: Do female students benefit?, International small business journal, 34(8),
979-1003. https://doi.org/10.1177/026624261561253
Yousafzai, S., Fayolle, A., Saeed, S., Henry, C., Lindgreen, A. (2019), The contextual
embeddedness of women’s entrepreneurship: towards a more informed research
agenda, Entrepreneurship and Regional Development, 31(3/4), 167-177.
https://doi.org/10.1080/08985626.2018.1551786
Zhang, Y., Duysters, G., Cloodt, M. (2014), The role of entrepreneurship education as a
predictor of university students' entrepreneurial intention, International
Entrepreneurship and Management Journal, 10,
623-641.https://doi.org/10.1007/s11365-012-0246-z
299
Obstacles and Enablers of the Adoption of
E-commerce in SMEs
Huseyn Mammadov
PhD candidate, PhD in Global Studies
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: h.mammadov@campus.uniurb.it
https://orcid.org/0000-0001-9792-1364. *
* Corresponding author
Mara Del Baldo
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
Department of Economics, Society & Politics
Via Saffi, 42 Urbino (Italy)
E-mail: mara.delbaldo@uniurb.it
https://orcid.org/0000-0001-7912-8573
Isidoro Romero
University of Seville
Faculty of Economics and Business Sciences
E-mail: isidoro@us.es
https://orcid.org/0000-0001-8764-2599.
Keywords SMEs, E-commerce, Obstacles, Enablers
Paper type Long abstract
Acknowledgments
This article is embodied in the research project entitled PID2020-113384GB-I00,
funded by the Spanish Ministry of Science and Innovation within the framework of the
National Program for Knowledge Generation and Scientific and Technological
Strengthening of the RDI System.
1. Objectives
This research paper examines the factors that influence the adoption of e-commerce in
SMEs, including both barriers and facilitators, as well as how SMEs can afford this
technology. The study aims to address a gap in existing research by taking a
comprehensive approach to evaluate barriers to e-commerce adoption in SMEs. It
300
combines elements that have received attention in the literature with those that have been
overlooked.
In addition to recognizing the significance of adopting e-commerce, it is important to
consider the various factors that can either hinder or facilitate this process. Previous
literature has highlighted several factors, including the technological awareness of
entrepreneurs/managers (Zheng et al., 2004), their managerial expertise (Chuang et al.,
2007), limited resources, particularly financial constraints (Scupola, 2009), and the level
of technological readiness (Abou-Shouk et al., 2016; Alam et al., 2011).
Understanding the factors that stimulate e-commerce adoption, particularly for SMEs,
is crucial. Equally important is determining how this adoption enhances organizational
effectiveness. Previous studies have identified three main concerns that contribute to
SMEs' hesitancy in adopting and utilizing e-commerce: a lack of achievements, limited
awareness of e-commerce, and uncertainty about its impact (Salwani et al., 2009). These
factors directly affect business performance. Therefore, our study aims to analyze how
potential obstacles and facilitators influence the adoption of e-commerce in SMEs and
how SMEs can afford this technology.
In contrast to previous research, we approach this issue from the perspective of the
TOE model, specifically focusing on the technological, organizational, and environmental
dimensions. We pay attention to factors such as cooperation with other actors, competitive
status, technology investment, lack of funds, sales and purchase forecasting, digital
competencies, broadband quality, and R&D activities.
2. Literature review
The shift from traditional trade to digital platforms presents a significant challenge for
small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) due to increased rivalry and competition in
the digital world (Wang et al., 2011; Zhu, 2004). While large enterprises dominate the
development of e-commerce, SMEs are often slow in adopting this technology due to
limited resources and the high cost of integrating digital technologies (Van Akkeren et al.,
2003; Alam et al., 2011; Govindaraju et al., 2015; Scupola, 2009). Access to resources is
therefore essential for adopting digital technologies (Abebe, 2014). E-commerce is
becoming increasingly important for companies, offering new opportunities, lower fixed
costs, enhanced competitive advantages, comprehensive product positioning, and
expanded market prospects (Lefebvre, 2005; Al-Qirim, 2007; Saridakis et al., 2019).
301
In the literature, the level of technology in small enterprises is recognized to play a
significant role in the adoption of e-commerce readiness (Abou-Shouk et al., 2016).
Limited financial resources are identified as a major obstacle in e-commerce adoption for
firms (Scupola, 2009; Saridakis et al., 2019). At the individual level, the expertise of
managers and entrepreneurs in management and their technological awareness are
important factors in the adoption of e-commerce (Chuang et al., 2007; Zheng et al., 2004).
3. Approach/Method
The TOE model was selected as the theoretical foundation for this research due to its
exploration of technical, organizational, and environmental aspects. Such a multi-faceted
framework is considered to have better analytical effectiveness compared to frameworks
with a single aspect (Molla & Licker, 2005). Additionally, the TOE model adopts a
dynamic viewpoint that recognizes the influence of both individual and firm
characteristics in driving organizational changes (Hameed et al., 2012). However, the
TOE model has also faced criticism for neglecting the individual characteristics of
entrepreneurs/managers and employees (Ghobakhloo & Tang, 2013).
This study employs the logistic regression method to evaluate how the independent
variables impact the variable of e-commerce adoption.
4. Results/Findings
The findings emphasize that within the technological aspect, a significant negative
influence on e-commerce adoption stems from the barrier of insufficient funds or
financing. Similarly, investments in ICT, software, consulting, research and development,
and innovation prove highly effective, but any limitations in these areas can adversely
affect the adoption of e-commerce. In terms of the organizational dimension, constraints
in digital skills, sales and purchase forecasting, and personal development also have a
detrimental impact on SMEs' adoption of e-commerce. Concerning the environmental
aspect, any decline in the competitive landscape poses a barrier to e-commerce adoption.
Likewise, collaboration with both customers and competitors has a positive effect on
e-commerce adoption, and any restrictions on such collaboration would harm e-commerce
adoption by SMEs.
302
This study provides quantitative empirical evidence on a relatively unexplored subject
using a representative sample of the small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) sector in
Spain. The findings indicate that within the technological aspect, the lack of funds or
financing poses a significant negative influence on the adoption of e-commerce.
Similarly, investments in ICT, software, consulting, research and development, and
innovation are highly effective, but any constraints in these areas can have a detrimental
impact on e-commerce adoption. Concerning the organizational dimension, limitations in
digital skills, sales and purchase forecasting, and personal development negatively affect
SMEs' adoption of e-commerce. In terms of the environmental aspect, a decline in the
competitive landscape acts as a barrier to e-commerce adoption. Likewise, cooperation
with both clients and competitors has a positive effect on e-commerce adoption, and any
restrictions on this cooperation harm e-commerce adoption by SMEs.
5. Value & Implications
This study has various practical implications for managers. It is crucial for any
strategy aimed at overcoming the challenges of SMEs' adoption of e-commerce to
prioritize investment in human resources and education, particularly in enhancing their
knowledge. Additionally, the study emphasizes the significance of financing, including
the accessibility and availability of funds within the ecosystem. Furthermore, the findings
underscore the importance of interaction and cooperation with other stakeholders. SMEs
should strive to foster the creation of such networks and incorporate them into their
existing organizational structure.
References
Abebe, M. Electronic Commerce Adoption, Entrepreneurial Orientation and Small- and
Medium-Sized Enterprise (SME) Performance. J. Small Bus. Enterp. Dev. 2014, 21, 100–116.
Abou-Shouk, M.A.; Lim, W.M.; Megicks, P. Using Competing Models to Evaluate the Role of
Environmental Pressures in Ecommerce Adoption by Small and Medium Sized Travel Agents
in a Developing Country. Tour. Manag. 2016, 52, 327–339.
Al-Qirim, N. The Adoption of ECommerce Communications and Applications Technologies in
Small Businesses in New Zealand. Electron. Commer. Res. Appl. 2007, 6, 462–473.
Alam, S.S.; Ali, M.Y.; Jani, M.F.M. An Empirical Study of Factors Affecting Electronic Commerce
Adoption among SMEs in Malaysia. J. Bus. Econ. Manag. 2011, 12, 375–399.
Chuang, T.T.; Nakatani, K.; Chen, J.C.H.; Huang, I.L. Examining the Impact of Organisational and
Owners Characteristics on the Extent of e-Commerce Adoption in SMEs. Int. J. Bus. Syst.
Res. 2007, 1.
303
Ghobakhloo, M., & Tang, S. H. (2013). The role of owner/manager in the adoption of electronic
commerce in small businesses: The case of developing countries. Journal of Small Business
and Enterprise Development, 20(4), 754-787.
Govindaraju, R., Wiratmadja, I. I., & Rivana, R. (2015). Analysis of drivers for e-commerce
adoption by SMEs in Indonesia. Paper presented at the Interdisciplinary Behavior and Social
Sciences: Proceedings of the International Congress on Interdisciplinary Behaviour and Social
Sciences 2014.
Lefebvre, L.-A.; Lefebvre, É.; Elia, E.; Boeck, H. Exploring B-to-B E-Commerce Adoption
Trajectories in Manufacturing SMEs. Technovation 2005, 25, 1443–1456.
Molla, A., & Licker, P. S. (2005). eCommerce adoption in developing countries: a model and
instrument. Information & Management, 42(6), 877-899. doi:
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.im.2004.09.002
Mumtaz Abdul Hameed, Steve Counsell, Stephen Swift, A conceptual model for the process of IT
innovation adoption in organizations, Journal of Engineering and Technology Management,
Volume 29, Issue 3, 2012, Pages 358-390, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jengtecman.2012.03.007.
Salwani, M. I., Marthandan, G., Norzaidi, M. D., & Chong, S. C. (2009). E-commerce usage and
business
Saridakis, G.; Idris, B.; Hansen, J.M.; Dana, L.P. SMEs’ Internationalisation: When Does
Innovation Matter? J. Bus. Res. 2019, 96, 250–263.
Scupola, A. SMEs’ E-commerce Adoption: Perspectives from Denmark and Australia. J. Ent. Inf.
Manag. 2009, 22, 152–166.
Van Akkeren, J.; Harker, D. The Mobile Internet and Small Business: An Exploratory Study of
Needs, Uses and Adoption with Full-Adopters of Technology. J. Res. Pract. Inf. Technol. 2003,
35, 205–220.
Wang, S.; Hong, Y.; Archer, N.;Wang, Y. Modeling the Success of Small and Medium Sized Online
Vendors in Business to Business Electronic Marketplaces in China: A Motivation—Capability
Framework. J. Glob. Inf. Manag. 2011, 19, 45–75.
Zheng, J.; Caldwell, N.; Harland, C.; Powell, P.; Woerndl, M.; Xu, S. Small Firms and E-Business:
Cautiousness, Contingency and Cost-Benefit. J. Purch. Supply Manag. 2004, 10, 27–39.
Zhu, K. The Complementarity of Information Technology Infrastructure and E-Commerce
Capability: A Resource-Based Assessment of Their Business Value. J. Manag. Inf. Syst. 2004,
21, 167–202.
304
The role of Educational Digital Content Marketing in
improving customer engagement and small firms’
brand awareness
Barbara Francioni
Department of Communication Sciences, Humanities and International
Studies (DISCUI)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
University Address: Via Saffi 15, 61029 Urbino, Italy
E-mail: barbara.francioni@uniurb.it
Ilaria Curina
Department of Communication Sciences, Humanities and International
Studies (DISCUI)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
University Address: Via Saffi 15, 61029 Urbino, Italy
E-mail: ilaria.curina@uniurb.it
Marco Cioppi
Department of Communication Sciences, Humanities and International
Studies (DISCUI)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
University Address: Via Saffi 15, 61029 Urbino, Italy
E-mail: marco.cioppi@uniurb.it
Roberta De Cicco
Department of Communication Sciences, Humanities and International
Studies (DISCUI)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
University Address: Via Saffi 15, 61029 Urbino, Italy
E-mail: roberta.decicco@uniurb.it
Grazia Sigismondo
Department of Communication Sciences, Humanities and International
Studies (DISCUI)
University of Urbino “Carlo Bo”
University Address: Via Saffi 15, 61029 Urbino, Italy
E-mail: g.sigismondo@campus.uniurb.it
Keywords Content marketing, Educational digital content marketing, Brand awareness,
Customer engagement
Paper type Long abstract
305
1. Objectives
This paper discusses educational content marketing (ECM) as a recognized and
effective marketing strategy (Knihová, 2019). ECM is a sub-category of content
marketing that, by offering useful content, avoids traditional interruptive advertising and
positively influences customer engagement (Knihová, 2021). Companies that leverage
ECM have the potential to build long-term relationships with customers and achieve their
business goals (Knihová, 2019). Thus, it is not surprising that the relevance of ECM has
grown, especially with COVID-19, and prominent brands like Nike and Apple have
started adopting it in the digital environment (Knihová, 2020).
In general, content marketing is a powerful tool for improving brand awareness, and it
is considered particularly suitable for small and medium-sized enterprises due to its
low-cost nature (Kraus, 2019). However, despite its potential, ECM and its digital
sub-category, Educational Digital Content Marketing (EDCM), have received limited
research attention (Knihová, 2019), and the effectiveness of EDCM in engaging
consumers and enhancing brand-related outcomes is not yet well established. Because of
the need to test the efficacy of education-based content marketing quality in enhancing
brand-related variables, this study applies an online survey and contributes to the existing
literature on educational digital content by analyzing the impact of EDCM quality on two
key marketing outcomes: customer engagement and brand awareness. The research also
uncovered customer preferences regarding educational content formats, platforms, and
publication frequency. By addressing the research gap in EDCM and brand-related
literature, the paper provides recommendations and guidelines for researchers in the field.
2. Literature review
Digital content marketing (DCM) is widely defined as the creation and distribution of
informative and compelling content in multiple formats to attract and retain customers
(Rowley, 2008). It is a fundamental tool for the success of digital marketing strategies,
with several objectives such as brand awareness, customer engagement, trust-building,
customer attraction, lead conversion, and customer relationship maintenance (Holliman &
Rowley, 2014). Italian companies allocate a significant portion of their marketing budget
around 60% to content marketing in online settings (Rancati & Gordini, 2014), thus
DCM has gained significant interest among researchers. DCM is primarily communicated
306
through social media, and because social media is an informal and interactive
environment allowing a closer interaction, content marketing fosters a tight relationship
between the brand and the consumer, (Du Plessis, 2017). As mentioned in the definitions
of DCM, among other types of content, consumers seek useful and educational ones from
brands. So, by informing and educating followers on various subjects, quality content
drives digital customers along their journey without directly pushing them to make
purchases (Knihová, 2021). Hence, education-based content aims to offer valuable insight
into a particular field (Knihová, 2020). According to experts, companies should focus on
EDCM through both marketing and sales operations to establish true value-based selling
(Alamäki & Korpela, 2021). Indeed, research has shown that emphasizing the educational
nature of content is crucial for the success of content marketing strategies (Grubor &
Milonalov, 2016) and that the level of engagement on brand pages correlates with the
incorporation of educational content (Ashley & Tuten, 2015). Furthermore, Knihová
(2021) suggests that, due to the increasing relevance of electronic channels in marketing,
digital educational content has the potential to enhance online engagement and drive
brand-related outcomes. Despite these preliminary insights, there is a lack of research
exploring the role of educational content quality in both customer engagement and brand
awareness. In particular, brand awareness, being a crucial aspect of brand knowledge, is
necessary for companies to be considered in consumers’ decision-making process (Keller,
2013), and educational content is believed to be a factor in strengthening the engagement
between consumers and brands, by capturing their attention and aiding brand recall. So,
based on previous research linking DCM to brand engagement and awareness, a positive
relationship is hypothesized between educational content quality and customer
engagement (H1), and brand awareness (H2). Also, engagement is expected to mediate
the relationship between educational content quality and brand awareness (H3), given its
influence on various brand-related outcomes.
3. Method
To achieve the stated objectives, an online questionnaire was implemented using the
Google Form platform. The questionnaire had a first part designed to acquire
demographic insights and past experience with educational content, and a second part
consisting of statements regarding the constructs. To ensure that a comprehensive list of
measures was included, an extensive body of research was reviewed to apply validated
307
scales for all dependent variables, with a few minor changes in wording. The constructs
used in the survey were adapted from Dessart et al. (2016), Hinson et al. (2019), Dabbous
and Barakat (2020), Gligor and Bozkurt (2021), and Hasanah and Aziz (2022). All the
measures were recorded on a seven-point Likert scale (1 = strongly disagree”; 5 =
strongly agree”). Also, single-response and multiple-choice questions were included.
The survey followed a hierarchical structure. After the initial section gathering
demographic data, participants were asked whether they had encountered online
educational content. Those who responded affirmatively were directed to the second
section, where they provided further details about their own experiences. Subsequently,
they proceeded to the third section, where they expressed their preferences concerning
EDCM. A total of 419 questionnaires were completed. About respondents, 127 were men,
289 were women, and 3 participants preferred not to reveal their gender.
4. Results
This study aims to analyze the impact of educational digital content quality on both
customer engagement and brand awareness, and to test the mediation effect of
engagement between educational digital content quality and brand awareness.
Preliminary results from correlation analysis showed that educational content quality
was positively associated with both engagement (.514) and brand awareness (.283). In
turn, engagement was also positively correlated with brand awareness (.483).
Simple linear regression analyses revealed that educational content quality explained
26% of the variance, R2= .26, F (1, 334) = 120.022, p < .001, indicating a significant
positive effect on engagement (B = .66, t = 10.96, p < .001), thus confirming H1.
Similarly, educational content quality explained 23% of the variance in brand awareness,
R2= .23, F (1, 334) = 72.425, p < .001, indicating a significant positive effect on brand
awareness (B = .66, t = 10.96, p < .001), which supports H2. When including the
mediator in the model, we find a significant direct effect of educational content quality on
engagement (B = .66, t = 10.96, p <.001, CI [.5409; .7776], however, the direct relation
between educational content quality and brand awareness is not significant anymore (B =
0.07, t = .85, p =.40 CI [-.0906; .2288]. The mediation analysis indicated a significant
indirect and positive effect of educational content quality on brand awareness via
engagement (B = 0.34; p <.001, CI [.2426; .4513]) confirming H3. Given no significant
308
direct effect of educational content quality on brand awareness was found when including
the variables in the mediation model, the effect was fully mediated.
The study also revealed customer preferences for educational content types,
platforms, formats, and frequency of publishing. In terms of the topics that people find
most appealing for ECM, hobbies and interests, job-related topics, and health-related
issues are considered the most captivating themes. When companies share online
educational content, these are the areas that garner the highest interest from participants.
As for the frequency of posting educational digital content, most users believe that a
once-a-week schedule is reasonable and effective. Following closely behind is a
preference for companies to publish content between one to three times per week. Only a
minority of users find daily or monthly posting strategies to be valuable in terms of
educational content. The user preferences regarding the platforms for consuming
educational content can be ranked as follows: Instagram takes the lead, followed by the
company's website, and then Facebook. Additionally, the results reveal that users have
distinct preferences when it comes to the format of educational content: videos are
favored the most, followed by pictures and text, meaning that users find multimedia
content more appealing and engaging than static content in the educational context.
5. Value & Implications
This study reveals that ECM can significantly improve customer engagement and that
engaging customers through ECM can effectively boost brand awareness. The analysis
indicates that customer engagement significantly mediates the relationship between
educational content quality and brand awareness, aligning with previous research on the
mediating role of engagement (Hollebeek & Macky, 2019). The study emphasizes the
value of rich and quality information in gaining individual benefits for customers and
brand awareness for companies. In line with Pansari and Kumar (2017), our findings
support the role of customer engagement in building brand knowledge and justify the use
of educational content to enhance brand-building processes. In this perspective, by
examining this relationship, the study contributes to the understanding of digital
marketing and content marketing as essential means in the digital landscape. Additionally,
the study offers guidance for brands and marketers on gaining customer engagement and
maximizing brand performance, as it highlights potential strategies for optimizing
educational digital content.
309
Finally, about limitations, this is a cross-sectional study, and consequently the effects
of specific EDCM characteristics such as format, length, and topic are still unclear and
require an experimental investigation. Also, future studies should explore other potential
mediators and possible moderators.
References
Alamäki, A., and Korpela, P., (2021) “Digital transformation and value-based selling activities:
seller and buyer perspectives”, Baltic Journal of Management.
Ashley, K. and Tuten, T., (2015) “Creative strategies in social media marketing: an exploratory
study of branded social content and consumer engagement”, Psychology and Marketing, Vol.
32 No. 1, pp. 15-27.
Dabbous, A. and Barakat, K. A., (2020) “Bridging the online offline gap: Assessing the impact of
brands’ social network content quality on brand awareness and purchase intention”, Journal of
Retailing and Consumer Services, Vol. 53, 101966.
Dessart, L., Veloutsou, C. and Morgan-Thomas, A., (2016) “Capturing consumer engagement:
duality, dimensionality and measurement”, Journal of Marketing Management, Vol. 32, No.
5-6, pp. 399-426.
Du Plessis, C., (2017) “The role of content marketing in social media content communities”, South
African Journal of Information Management, Vol. 19, No. 1, pp. 866.
Gligor, D. and Bozkurt, S., (2021) “The role of perceived social media agility in customer
engagement”, Journal of Research in Interactive Marketing, Vol. 15 No. 1, pp. 125-146.
Grubor, A., and Milovanov, O., (2016) “Content Marketing: Creating, Maintaining, and Enhancing
Brand Equity”, In 19th Ebes Conference–Istanbul Proceedings CD (Vol. 2).
Hasanah, Y. R. and Aziz, F., (2022) “Analysis of content marketing and online advertising on brand
awareness for Halal skincare products brands, mix: Jurnal Ilmiah Manajemen, Vol. 12, No. 1,
pp. 83-98.
Hinson, R., Boateng, H., Renner, A. and Kosiba, J. P. B., (2019) “Antecedents and consequences of
customer engagement on Facebook: An attachment theory perspective”, Journal of Research in
Interactive Marketing, Vol. 13, No. 2, pp. 204-226.
Hollebeek, L. D. and Macky, K., (2019) “Digital content marketing's role in fostering consumer
engagement, trust, and value: Framework, fundamental propositions, and implications”,
Journal of interactive marketing, Vol 45, pp. 27-41.
Holliman, G. and Rowley, J., (2014) “Business to business digital content marketing: marketers’
perceptions of best practice”, Journal of research in interactive marketing, Vol. 8, No. 4, pp.
269-293.
Keller, K.L., (2013) Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, and Managing Brand
Equity, 4th ed., Prentice-Hall, London.
Knihová, L., (2019) “Educational Labs Pave the Way for Education-Based Marketing”, Marketing
Identity, Vol. 7, No. 1, pp. 104-117.
Knihová, L., (2020) “Education-Based Content Marketing “in White and Black””, Marketing
Identity, Vol. 8, No. 1, pp. 257-270.
Knihová, L., (2021) “The role of educational content in a digital marketing strategy”,
Communication Today, Vol. 12, No. 1, pp. 162-179.
Kraus, S., Gast, J., Schleich, M., Jones, P. and Ritter, M., (2019) “Content is king: How SMEs
create content for social media marketing under limited resources”, Journal of
Macromarketing, Vol. 39, No. 4, pp. 415-430.
310
Pansari, A., and Kumar, V., (2017) “Customer engagement: the construct, antecedents, and
consequences”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 45, 294-311.
Rancati, E. and Gordini, N., (2014) “Content marketing metrics: Theoretical aspects and empirical
evidence”, European Scientific Journal, Vol. 10, No. 34, pp. 92-104.
Rowley, J., (2008) “Understanding digital content marketing”, Journal of Marketing Management,
Vol. 24, No. 5-6, pp. 517-540.
311
Equity crowdfunding platforms to support innovative
small business: the Italian scenario
Paola Paoloni
Department of Law and Economics of Productive Activities
Sapienza University of Rome
Via del Castro Laurenziano 9, 00161 Rome (RM) Italy
paola.paoloni@uniroma1.it
Giuseppe Modaffari
Department of Law and Economics of Productive Activities
Sapienza University of Rome
Via del Castro Laurenziano 9, 00161 Rome (RM) Italy
giuseppe.modaffari@uniroma1.it
Keywords SMEs, start-up, platform, innovative financial tools, entrepreneurship.
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
The study aims on the effective role of equity crowdfunding platforms in supports
Italian SMEs. Particularly, the main research questions (RQs) of this first explanatory
study are: (RQ1) how are equity crowdfunding platforms distributed in the Italian
economic landscape?; (RQ2) what are the main performances of Italian platforms?;
(RQ3) what are the platforms’ implications for the total equity amount raised for SMEs?
In recent time the world economies have been subjected to a process of transformation
oriented to innovation. The innovation process has been in regards to different aspects of
organizations such as the preferences, behaviors and products (Gomber et al., 2018,
Balata et al., 2018; Baldissera, 2019; Pencarelli et al., 2020). This transformation has not
affected only individuals but also enterprises have been involved in the process of change.
Particularly, the area in which this process is being applied is entrepreneurial innovation
observed from the perspective of financial innovation (Dessy, 1995; Cesaroni and Sentuti,
2016; Blakstad and Allen, 2018). Starting from 2012, the Italian regulator introduces two
different kinds of innovative financial tools: the equity-side instruments (as stock
exchange listing in AIM segment of Borsa Italiana and equity crowdfunding tool) and the
312
debt-side instruments (as private debt, minibonds, and lending crowdfunding). Hence,
access to equity crowdfunding is reserved for innovative SMEs called innovative start-ups
that satisfy the formal and substantive conditions established by law (Law Decree no.
179/2012). Nowadays, the number of Italian start-ups is 14.708 but only a few of these
are familiar with equity-crowdfunding. In 2022, a total of 218,36 million euro (146
million of which was related to real state) was raised that supported 141 campaigns
(CrowdfudningBuzz, 2023).
As it is clear, the platforms could play a crucial role in financing innovative SMEs
but, in this direction, a lack in the literature emerges. Scholars seem to overlooked the role
of these platforms, focusing on the main projects’ characteristics (Modaffari et al., 2020;
Caputo et al., 2022) and the individuals’ behaviour during campaings (Davis et al., 2017;
Lukkarinen et al., 2022).
In this way, the present work aims at investigating the equity crowdfunding platform
contribution in supporting innovative SMEs, as a hub between enterprises and investors.
Analysing these issues is important because they represent the material junction in the
financing model, without which the innovative SMEs would not have the opportunity to
share equity to fill the gaps in the financial sphere.
2. Literature review
The literature section provides a general panorama of the equity crowdfunding tools,
and then, it focuses on the function of platforms with particular attention to describing
their business model in the Italian context. Equity crowdfunding represents one of the
main equity-side innovative financial tools introduced by the Fintech Revolution
(Belleflamme et al.,2014; Modaffari et al., 2020; Grassi and Fantaccini, 2022; Caputo et
al., 2022). In 2012, equity crowdfunding was introduced in Italian Law (Law Decree
no.83/2012) and other relevant regulations (for instance in the USA by the Jobs ACT),
allowing innovative start-ups to raise equity from investors (the crowd) through online
portals, namely platforms (Zarandi et al., 2015; Vulkan et al., 2016; Walthoff-Borm et.,
2018; Cumming et al., 2020). This instrument was born to reduce the equity-gap in
start-up ventures, allowing them to overcome liquidity threats in the early-stage
(Veugelers, 2011; Cesaroni and Sentuti, 2016; Quintiliani, 2017; Baldissera, 2019;
Pencarelli et al., 2020). However, while several scholars focus their works on other facets
313
of equity-crowdfunding, such as campaigns’ issues or investors’ behaviors, platforms’
research stream has been underestimated.
Platforms represent the link between firms and investors and play a fundamental role
in resolving potential principal-agent mismatching that hurt the financing process. Their
effectiveness can be observed in relation to the services offered pre, during and post
campaign (Burtch et al., 2015; Vismara, 2016; Paschen, 2017; Davis et al. 2017; Hornuf
and Neuenkirch, 2017; Signori and Vismara, 2018). More specifically, their typical
behavior can be deducted from phases such as the evaluation of the project presented by
the start-up, the preparation of the negotiation and the shares placement, the possible
subscription by investors and finally, the assignment of the capital shares of the start-up
(Hagedorn and Pinkwart, 2016). The information that is provided during these phases,
helps the investor to better understand the entrepreneurial initiative. Project evaluation
and subscription phases are a crucial moment for the business model of the platform
(Attuel-Mendes et al., 2018), in which a lot of activity return is generated. In fact, during
the project evaluation phase the platform, based on the business plan provided by
start-ups, fixes its yield expectation. However, in countries where there is weak or no
regulation, platforms have more liberty to adapt their business models based on market
needs. Conversely, in countries where there is strong regulation, platforms have to try to
be profitable by adopting more rigid business models in compliance with the law.
Focusing on the Italian context, the Consob Regulation nr. 18592 issued on 2013,
June 26, (updated on 2020, 6 feb by the resolution nr. 21259) regulates equity
crowdfunding instrument, providing the behavioural requirements that platforms must
maintain while operating as online portals. These mainly refers to disclosure
requirements, investor protection duties, confidentiality issues and obligatory reporting of
any violations to CONSOB. Particularly, it are: insurance coverage (Art.7-bis), maximum
inactivity limit of not more than 6 months (Art.11-bis), conflict of interest with investors
in terms of disclosure and co-investment (Art.13), due diligence to be carried out on each
project by an independent professional (Art.13), negotiation of mini-bonds (Art.13), fraud
risk prevention measures (Art.14), confidentiality obligations (Art.19) and record-keeping
obligations (Art.20).
314
3. Approach/Method
To reach the declared goal, Exploratory Descriptive Qualitative (EDQ) research
(Carvalho et al., 2005; Cleff, 2014; Modaffari and della Corte, 2022) supports the paper.
EDQ is a qualitative methodology suitable for addressing research objectives that aim to
provide a direct description of phenomena (Sandelowski, 2004).
The EDQ was applied to understand the phenomenon of equity crowdfunding
platforms in Italy, through the analysis of 51 active portals that are authorized by
CONSOB (Italian acronym for " Commissione Nazionale per le Società e la Borsa "). To
develop the analysis and answer the RQs, the authors had to build a dataset that combines
platform data from different sources. The dataset was built through three main stages. The
first stage has extracted matching the platforms information by ordinary Register held by
CONSOB. On 2023, Jan 03, there were 51 platforms authorized to raise equity in Italy.
After obtaining data from CONSOB register, the authors extract the information by
AIDA database through queries via vat number for each platform. The extracted
information focus on several issues from income statement and financial statements.
Moreover, an insight on the main financial index was provided. For each platform the
authors observed the working capital, operating cash flow, ROI (%), ROE (%), Quick
Ratio, Debt/Equity ratio, Debt/EBITDA ratio and the NFP (Net Financial Position).
Last but not least, the third stage focused on the analysis of capital raised during the
analysis period (2018-2021). For the purpose of our study and to link the performance of
platforms with the volume of raised capital, the equity crowdfunding volume (Politecnico
di Milano, 2022) has been:
- 36.39 million euros were raised in 2018;
- 65.41 million euros were raised in 2019;
- 101.05 million euros were raised in 2020; and
- 148.26 million euros were raised in 2021 (the last year of our analysis).
As it is clear, each stage of dataset is directly related to the specific topics of RQs.
4. Results/Findings
Equity crowdfunding represents one of the main innovative equity-side financing
instruments that support innovative SMEs (Modaffari et al., 2020). Using this tool,
companies obtain financial resources as risk capital to financing their business idea.
315
Investors, on the other hand, subscribe and get shares in the company, which offers future
profits and capital gains in return. According to RQs, findings show several relevant
topics. Firstly, the Italian equity-crowdfunding platforms have an irregular distribution.
The data reveals a lack of homogeneity in the territorial distribution of the platforms. A
significant concentration is found in the province of Milan, where 28 units out of 51
reside (or about 55% of the total). In the rest of northern Italy there are another 10
platforms, which together with the previous ones amount to 38 units (or 75.5% of the
total). In central Italy there are 9 units while in the south only 3 units (RQ1). This
concentration can be linked with a phenomenon already known in Italian economic
history as industrial districts. In this case "digital" ones, dedicated to innovative financing
instruments that offer services to innovative SMEs from the pre-collection phase up to the
exit phase.
Focusing on platforms’ performance (RQ2), the aggregated data do not show positive
results in terms of performance for the 51 active Italian equity crowdfunding platforms.
However, negative statements about the sector are not entirely correct. In fact, by
focusing only on the entities that present profitability in terms of EBITDA, positive
performance results become visible. Firstly, we should mention that out of the 51
platforms, only 18 have a positive EBITDA (i.e. only 35% of the sector). These 18
platforms, in 2021, contribute to the production of approximately 85% of the entire
revenue volume (eur 9.5 million out of eur 11.1), producing a positive EBITDA of eur 1.7
million. From this conclusion, subsequent studies could be elaborated to understand
which cost factors make platforms economically vulnerable.
Finally, approaching (RQ3), only a few players hold up the equity crowdfunding
market. While the official data shows an increase in volumes raised, only a few platforms
reach positive performances. In this way, SMEs seem to prefer only some platforms for
promoting their equity crowdfunding campaigns. Deeping the analysis, another
significant finding is that while generating negative results, platforms try to stay alive as
if the cost-opportunity of losing the CONSOB authorisation is greater than the negative
performance achieved each year.
In the light of what has been discussed so far and the points derived from the answer
to 3RQs, we can conclude by defining the platform sector, which derives from the
phenomenon of financing through equity crowdfunding, as a heterogeneous sector in
which the risk of loss is greater than 50% of the entire sample. In other words, to date, the
number of platforms with positive performances represents only 35% of the sector. A
316
further positive growth forecast can be linked to the regulations introduced in 2020, with
which the possibility of negotiating debt-side instruments such as minibonds was also
provided to the portal. Today, this possibility is exploited by only 13% of Italian platforms
(7 units), but in the near future it could allow a real democratization of the phenomenon
of innovative financing instruments.
5. Value & Implications
The work can help improve the relationship between start-ups and platforms by
providing a clear representation of the current market The present study has several
theoretical and practical implications. From a theoretical perspective, it enriches the
literature on innovative small-medium enterprises and innovative financial tools. Several
aspects of the functioning of the innovative equity financial market for SMEs have been
treated, and several topics theorized by scholars on equity crowdfunding platforms have
been checked within this empirical study. From a practical perspective, the present
research can be useful twofold. On one hand, it can support public authorities, such as
CONSOB. in monitoring the equity crowdfunding phenomenon. On the other hand, it can
navigate practitioners in supporting innovative small businesses toward platforms that
perform better and therefore stand a greater likelihood of success in raising capital,
supporting the growth of start-ups, which represent a rapidly growing entrepreneurial
phenomenon in Italy.
References
Attuel-Mendes, L., Bonescu, M., & Raymond, S. (2018). Business model of equity crowdfunding in
france in 2016: An overview. Innovations, 56(2), 89-116.
Balata, G., Porcu, R., Ussai, A., Morandi, F., & Tola, A. (2018). Pushing towards innovation in the
Cultural and Creative industry of Sardinia. Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (3), pp. 10-37
Baldissera, A. (2019). Italian small-sized enterprise and procedures of warning crisis. Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, (2
Belleflamme, P., Lambert, T., & Schwienbacher, A. (2014). Crowdfunding: Tapping the right
crowd. Journal of business venturing, 29(5), 585-609.
Blakstad, S., & Allen, R. (2018). FinTech revolution. Cham, Switzerland: Springer, 121, 132.
Burtch, G., Ghose, A., & Wattal, S. (2015), The hidden cost of accommodating crowdfunder
privacy preferences: A randomized field experiment, Management Science, 61(5), pp. 949-962
Caputo, A., Schiocchet, E., & Troise, C. (2022). Sustainable business models as successful drivers
in equity crowdfunding. Business Strategy and the Environment, 31(7), 3509-3522.
317
Carvalho, L., Scott, L., & Jeffery, R. (2005). An exploratory study into the use of qualitative
research methods in descriptive process modelling. Information and Software Technology,
47(2), 113–127.
Cesaroni, F. M., & Sentuti, A. (2016). Strategie ambidestre e crisi economica: le peculiarità della
piccola impresa. Piccola Impresa/Small Business, (1).
Cleff, T. (2014). Exploratory data analysis in business and economics. Exploratory Data Analysis in
Business and Economics, Springer International Publishing, Switzerland
Cumming, D. J., Leboeuf, G., & Schwienbacher, A. (2020), Crowdfunding models: Keepitall vs.
allornothing, Financial Management, 49(2), pp.331-360
Davis, B. C., Hmieleski, K. M., Webb, J. W., & Coombs, J. E. (2017), Funders' positive affective
reactions to entrepreneurs' crowdfunding pitches: The influence of perceived product creativity
and entrepreneurial passion, Journal of Business Venturing, 32(1), pp. 90-106
Dessy, A., (1995), Politiche finanziarie e indebitamento nelle piccole e medie imprese, Milano,
Egea.
Gomber, P., Kauffman, R. J., Parker, C., & Weber, B. W. (2018). On the fintech revolution:
Interpreting the forces of innovation, disruption, and transformation in financial services.
Journal of management information systems, 35(1), 220-265.
Grassi, L., & Fantaccini, S. (2022). An overview of Fintech applications to solve the puzzle of
health care funding: state-of-the-art in medical crowdfunding. Financial Innovation, 8(1), 1-27.
Hagedorn, A., & Pinkwart, A. (2016). The financing process of equity-based crowdfunding: An
empirical analysis. Crowdfunding in Europe: State of the art in theory and practice, 71-85.
Hornuf, L., & Neuenkirch, M. (2017), Pricing shares in equity crowdfunding, Small Business
Economics, 48(4), pp. 795-811
Italian Law Decree 83/2012
Lukkarinen, A., Shneor, R., & Wallenius, J. (2022). Growing pains and blessings: Manifestations
and implications of equity crowdfunding industry maturation. Decision Support Systems, 157,
113768.
Modaffari, G., & della Corte, G. (2022). Female Agri-Food Start-Ups: Mapping the Italian Context
During the Coronavirus Era. In Organizational Resilience and Female Entrepreneurship
During Crises: Emerging Evidence and Future Agenda (pp. 171-190). Cham: Springer
International Publishing.
Modaffari, G., Paoloni, N., & Dello Strologo, A. (2020). Relational Capital and Crowdfunding: A
New Opportunity for Italian Woman Start-Ups. In Gender Studies, Entrepreneurship and
Human Capital: 5th IPAZIA Workshop on Gender Issues 2019 (pp. 251-268). Springer
International Publishing.
Paschen, J. (2017), Choose wisely: Crowdfunding through the stages of the startup life cycle,
Business Horizons, 60(2), pp. 179-188
Pencarelli, T., Cesaroni, F. M., & Demartini, P. (2020). Covid-19 and Italian small and
medium-sized enterprises: consequences, threats and opportunities. Piccola Impresa/Small
Business, (3)
Quintiliani, A. (2017). The costs of SME’s financial distress: a cross-country analysis. Piccola
Impresa/Small Business, (3).
Sandelowski, M. (2004). Using qualitative research. Qualitative Health Research, 14(10),
1366–1386
Signori, A., & Vismara, S. (2018), Does success bring success? The post-offering lives of
equity-crowdfunded firms, Journal of Corporate Finance, 50, pp. 575-591
Veugelers, R. (2011). Mind Europe's early-stage equity gap (No. 2011/18). Bruegel policy
contribution.
Vismara, S. (2016), Equity retention and social network theory in equity crowdfunding, Small
Business Economics, 46(4), pp. 579-590
318
Vulkan, N., Åstebro, T., & Sierra, M. F. (2016), Equity crowdfunding: A new phenomena, Journal
of Business Venturing Insights, 5, pp. 37-49
Walthoff-Borm, X., Schwienbacher, A., & Vanacker, T. (2018), Equity crowdfunding: First resort or
last resort?, Journal of Business Venturing, 33(4), pp. 513-533
Zarandi, S., Asakere, S., & Afsharpour, M. (2015). Comparative study business models of top
crowdfunding platforms in the world. Journal of Technology Development Management, 3(3),
pp. 127-150
319
Impact of resource interaction between a startup and
a medium-sized company in a business network
Matteo Dominidiato
Department of Economic Sciences and Business Administration
Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Largo Gemelli, 1 20123, Milano
E-mail: matteo.dominidiato@unicatt.it
Keywords Start-up, Supplier Business, Business relationships, Business network, New
venture relationship
Paper type Academic Research Paper
Objectives
The focus of this research on entrepreneurship has been the subject of interest by
industrial marketing studies (Baraldi et al., 2020; McGrath et al., 2019). In particular, the
capacity of small firms to develop relationships inside business networks is now given a
wider range of attention, when previously the focus of discussion was on the approach of
small business toward the client (Kickul et al., 2011).
The study of entrepreneurship in business networks, which refers to the ways in which
large and small firms engage with other businesses in their field, has generated interest in
the literature (Halberstadt et al., 2021; Parry, 2020). Despite these difficulties, recent
research has demonstrated that start-ups can successfully establish relationships with
other companies by utilizing their resources and innovative push.
This study is intended to be part of the discussion that intersects the study of
supply-chain and entrepreneurship, considering how in the context of the relationship
between a small business and a large one, a dual reciprocity can emerge from which both
benefit for different business purposes (Aaboen and Aarikka-Stenroos, 2017; Aaboen et
al., 2013). Specifically, the study's focus falls on the process of interaction between two
companies with different business models resulting from the size and the nature of their
offerings, with respective different needs (Rizos et al., 2016; Zahoor et al., 2022).
320
The interaction between a small and a large company offers a chance to examine how
these two businesses have come to this interaction, from which both can gain for various
business goals. Since each organization has various demands and resources to provide the
relationship, the resources interaction between two businesses with different business
models deriving from the size and type of their offerings makes for an interesting case
study.
In other words, the study first seeks to understand how in the context of a buyer-seller
relationship between actors who differ in size, a closer collaboration can emerge such
that they become partners despite size differences. Subsequently, it is intended to study
how such relationship consolidation impacts the network of which these companies
belong.
1 Literature review
The concept of resource interaction is key to the study of entrepreneurship and
business relationships. The importance of network relationships in promoting resource
interaction and generating chances for innovation and growth has also been highlighted
(Dyer and Singh, 1998). Resource interaction has been thoroughly researched in the
literature and is important in the growth of business relationships. The idea of resource
interaction focuses on how crucial it is to understand how resources complement one
another in order to build value in business interactions (Prenkert et al., 2022).
Furthermore, the resource interaction literature has stressed the relevance of network
bonds in enhancing resource interaction and offering chances for innovation and growth
(Tunisini et al., 2023). Network relationships are crucial because they allow businesses to
access more resources and expertise than they could on their own (Anderson et al., 1994).
Resource interaction in a network environment can occur not only between two
organizations, but also between several firms inside the network (Snehota and Hakansson,
1995). Firms in a network can achieve a competitive edge and mutual benefits by sharing
resources and expertise (Hakansson and Snehota, 2006).
The concept of "value creation" in business relationships is another significant
contribution of the IMP literature. According to the IMP approach, value creation is a
dynamic process that develops over time through the interaction of businesses (Guercini
and Runfola, 2012; McGrath et al., 2019). Value creation is more than just maximizing
321
profits or minimizing costs; it is a process of determining how to create value for both
parties involved in the relationship.
Despite increased interest in the significance of business ties in the context of
entrepreneurship, there is still a scarcity of research on the interaction of companies
different in size and the influence of these relationships on their business network.
Although there is some literature on the obstacles and opportunities that occur when small
and large companies combine (Aaboen and Aarikka-Stenroos, 2017; Aldrich and Auster,
1986), less is known about how these collaborations can be sustained beyond the
buyer-seller connection and influence the broader network.
The present literature on the interaction of small and large businesses focuses on the
ties between collaborating firms rather than the broader implications for the larger
network of firms.
How can two firms that differ in size develop a closer collaboration that goes beyond
mere buyer-seller ties such that they become partners despite size differences? And then,
how does such relationship consolidation create implications on the network, specifically
the downstream network?
2 Research methodology and empirical context
3.1 Research Methodology
This paper's empirical study is based on an exploratory case study technique, which is
appropriate when research topics are emerging and not yet clearly defined (Eisenhardt,
1989). This paper is based on a single case study that investigates the dynamics of a
business relationship between two companies that differ in size and offer. A single case
study was chosen because it allows a detailed examination of the phenomena under
investigation as well as an in-depth understanding of the context (Yin, 1994), and is thus
useful in situations where a comprehensive understanding of a complex system or process
is desired (Baxter and Jack, 2008).
The use of a single case study technique allows for an in-depth analysis of the
dynamics of the two organizations' relationship, including the specific mechanisms that
promote effective collaboration and the relationship’s extended effects on the network.
322
2.2 Data Collection
Case studies sometimes rely on multiple data sources that complement one another
(Yin, 1994). The interview questions focused on many areas of the cooperation, such as a
description of the company's business, each individual's demands, the evolution of the
collaboration, the activities engaged, and the resources employed within the collaboration.
The focus of the interviews then switched to the formation of the collaboration.
Interviewees were asked to describe how the relationship began and how it progressed
from the beginning, which offered insight into the elements that supported the
collaboration, the problems encountered, and how the organizations overcame them. Each
respondent was also asked to discuss how collaboration has altered their company's
activities. Furthermore, the interviews tried to identify the resources required to carry out
specific activities, as well as the changes that needed to be made to those resources.
In addition to allowing us to take advantage of the flexibility of data collection, the
overlap of data analysis with data collection gave us an edge in data analysis and in
fine-tuning our tool for structuring and interpreting data. This way of comparing
frameworks with empirical observations as the case study proceeds has been termed
"systematic combining" (Dubois and Gadde, 2014).
323
3 Results and Findings
4.1 Case description
Beta selected Alfa as a supplier for high-quality clothing due to its reputation as a
prestigious textile company. Initially, Alfa supplied fabrics to Beta, establishing a
customer-supplier relationship. Alfa collaborated closely with Beta to determine suitable
materials and blends for Beta's products. They also worked together on logistics and
supply chain management. Over time, the relationship between Alfa and Beta grew
stronger, resulting in a mutual exchange of resources. Beta not only relied on Alfa for a
consistent supply of textiles but also gained industry knowledge and organizational
abilities. Alfa was interested in this collaboration because Beta's digital-focused business
model aligned with their aspirations. Eventually, Alfa acquired Beta in 2020, viewing it as
a strategic move to expand their product range and enter the customized menswear
industry.
3.2 Case analysis
The customer-supplier relationship between Alfa and Beta has evolved into a strong
partnership characterized by mutual cooperation and strategic interests. Initially, the
relationship was based on a simple exchange of resources, with Alfa supplying materials
for Beta's products. However, the collaboration gradually deepened, going beyond the
traditional customer-supplier dynamic.
Alfa, being a larger company, brought industry-specific expertise, financial resources,
and organizational skills to the table. They sought to acquire digital talents that Beta
possessed, aligning with their aspirations for digitalization. Alfa's resources enabled them
to invest in innovative technologies, research and development, and sustainable practices,
enhancing their competitiveness.
On the other hand, Beta, as a digital-focused business, contributed its digital skills and
online presence to the partnership. Their emphasis on customized clothing attracted a
loyal customer base and expanded Alfa's reach. Beta's digital expertise helped Alfa
modernize its operations and improve competitiveness.
Beta's investment in technology and digital infrastructure allowed them to streamline
operations, provide efficient service, and gather valuable customer data for continuous
improvement. This digital focus propelled Beta's success in the men's fashion industry.
324
The collaboration between Alpha and Beta had profound implications for their
respective business networks. By combining their resources and competencies, they were
able to generate new opportunities for value creation and innovation across industries.
The collaboration significantly expanded both organizations' networks. Beta gained
access to Alpha's network of textile industry suppliers and clients, fueling growth and
expansion. Alpha, on the other hand, leveraged Beta's digital skills and online platform to
tap into a new customer base and develop new business models. Acquiring Beta allowed
Alpha to enhance its market share, particularly in the B2C industry, where it had minimal
exposure.
Trust and cooperation were the foundation of the collaboration, leading to a shift from
a traditional buyer-seller relationship to a more collaborative approach to value creation.
This collaboration also facilitated network-wide innovation and learning. The sharing of
knowledge and expertise between the organizations led to the development of innovative
products and processes. Additionally, it provided opportunities for employees to learn and
grow as they embraced new ways of working and gained fresh perspectives in their fields.
4 Value & Implication
This study explored the collaboration between a small and a major textile company
and its impact on the business network. The aim was to examine how both organizations
could enhance their competitive positions through resource interaction and outline the
implications for the network. Existing research on collaborations between small and large
firms in business networks was found to be limited.
Preliminary findings showed that the partnership between Alfa and Beta was mutually
beneficial. Alfa's acquisition of Beta allowed them to gain digital competences and access
a broader customer base, particularly in the B2C segment. The collaboration also
strengthened the buyer-seller relationship by facilitating the integration of resources and
expertise. Moreover, the study found that such collaborations had significant effects on
the wider network, influencing power dynamics and potentially reshaping the competitive
landscape.
However, it is important to note that this study has limitations as it was based on a
single case study. Further research is necessary to validate the findings and assess their
generalizability. Additional data gathering and analysis are required to obtain
comprehensive results.
325
In conclusion, this study underscores the potential benefits of collaborations between
small and large businesses within business networks. Alfa's acquisition of Beta expanded
their customer base and boosted their competitive position through digital competence.
References
Aaboen, L., andAarikka-Stenroos, L. (2017). Start-ups initiating business relationships: process and
asymmetry. IMP Journal, 11(2), 230-250.
Aaboen, L., Dubois, A., andLind, F. (2013). Strategizing as networking for new ventures. Industrial
Marketing Management, 42(7), 1033-1041.
Aldrich, H., andAuster, E. R. (1986). Even dwarfs started small: Liabilities of age and size and their
strategic implications. Research in organizational behavior.
Anderson, J. C., Håkansson, H., andJohanson, J. (1994). Dyadic business relationships within a
business network context. Journal of marketing, 58(4), 1-15.
Baraldi, E., La Rocca, A., Perna, A., andSnehota, I. (2020). Connecting IMP and entrepreneurship
research: Directions for future research. [Article]. Industrial Marketing Management, 91,
495-509. doi: 10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.04.019
Baxter, P., andJack, S. (2008). Qualitative case study methodology: Study design and
implementation for novice researchers. The qualitative report, 13(4), 544-559.
Dubois, A., andGadde, L.-E. (2014). “Systematic combining”—A decade later. Journal of Business
Research, 67(6), 1277-1284.
Dyer, J. H., andSingh, H. (1998). The relational view: Cooperative strategy and sources of
interorganizational competitive advantage. Academy of management review, 23(4), 660-679.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989). Building theories from case study research. Academy of management
review, 14(4), 532-550.
Guercini, S., andRunfola, A. (2012). Relational paths in business network dynamics: Evidence from
the fashion industry. Industrial Marketing Management, 41(5), 807-815.
Hakansson, H., andSnehota, I. (2006). " No business is an island" 17 years later. Scandinavian
Journal of Management, 22(3), 271-274.
Halberstadt, J., Niemand, T., Kraus, S., Rexhepi, G., Jones, P., andKailer, N. (2021). Social
entrepreneurship orientation: Drivers of success for start-ups and established industrial firms.
[Article]. Industrial Marketing Management, 94, 137-149. doi:
10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.06.012
Kickul, J. R., Griffiths, M. D., Jayaram, J., andWagner, S. M. (2011). Operations management,
entrepreneurship, and value creation: Emerging opportunities in a cross-disciplinary context
(Vol. 29, pp. 78-85): Elsevier.
McGrath, H., O'Toole, T., andCanning, L. (2019). Coopetition: a fundamental feature of
entrepreneurial firms' collaborative dynamics. [Article]. Journal of Business and Industrial
Marketing, 34(7), 1555-1569. doi: 10.1108/JBIM-10-2018-0287
Parry, M. E. (2020). Research opportunities in the study of B2B new ventures: Perspectives from
the entrepreneurship literature. [Article]. Industrial Marketing Management, 90, 466-480. doi:
10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.07.018
326
Prenkert, F., Hedvall, K., Hasche, N., Frick, J. E., Abrahamsen, M. H., Aramo-Immonen, H., . . .
Huang, L. (2022). Resource interaction: Key concepts, relations and representations. Industrial
Marketing Management, 105, 48-59.
Rizos, V., Behrens, A., van der Gaast, W., Hofman, E., Ioannou, A., Kafyeke, T., . . . Topi, C.
(2016). Implementation of circular economy business models by small and medium-sized
enterprises (SMEs): Barriers and enablers. [Article]. Sustainability (Switzerland), 8(11). doi:
10.3390/su8111212
Snehota, I., andHakansson, H. (1995). Developing relationships in business networks. London:
Routledge.
Tunisini, A., Harrison, D., andBocconcelli, R. (2023). Handling resource deficiencies through
resource interaction in business networks. Industrial Marketing Management, 109, 154-163.
Yin, R. K. (1994). Discovering the future of the case study. Method in evaluation research.
Evaluation practice, 15(3), 283-290.
Zahoor, N., Golgeci, I., Haapanen, L., Ali, I., andArslan, A. (2022). The role of dynamic
capabilities and strategic agility of B2B high-tech small and medium-sized enterprises during
COVID-19 pandemic: Exploratory case studies from Finland. Industrial Marketing
Management, 105, 502-514.
327
Innovative startups and social goals: how far are
Italian firms from an effective impact assessment?
Valeria Vannoni
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
University Address Via Saffi, 42 Urbino
E-mail: valeria.vannoni@uniurb.it
Federica Palazzi
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
University Address Via Saffi, 42 Urbino
E-mail: federica.palazzi@uniurb.it
Annalisa Sentuti
Department of Economics, Society and Politics
University of Urbino Carlo Bo
University Address Via Saffi, 42 Urbino
E-mail: annalisa.sentuti@uniurb.it
Keywords innovative startup, social goal, impact assessment
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
Sustainable Development Goals in the “2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development”
by the United Nations emphasized the need to steer business behaviors toward social
goals; hence, the numerous attempts to formulate methodological solutions to attribute
value and/or measure the social impacts of different phenomena.
Social impact assessment is a very complex activity, which requires a deep
examination of all the processes of the company; it requires a lot of time, critical attitude
and stakeholders’ involvement. The increased awareness of the role played by business in
improving not merely economic, but also social return is reflected in the way which the
debate on the purpose of firms has broadened to include scholars, institutions and
practitioners.
328
Over time, national governments have increasingly encouraged firms to behave
responsibly and to generate social impact. In Italy, a particular type of firm has also been
regulated, it is the Innovative startup with a social goal (hereinafter ISUSGs): it is a firm
that meets the requirements introduced for innovative startups in Decree-Law no.
179/2012 and, in addition, operates in any of the sectors identified by Italian legislation
on social enterprises (Legislative Decree 112/2017, art. 2, paragraph 1, which replaces
D.lgs. 155/2006, art. 2, paragraph 1, referenced by the original provision). These firms are
obliged to draw up an “Social Impact Description Document” when applying for
recognition of the status of innovative startup; the document must therefore be updated
annually to demonstrate the maintenance of the requirements necessary for this status.
The procedures to grant the status of Innovative startup with a social goal are regulated by
Circular 3677/C, issued by the Italian Ministry of Economic Development on January 20,
2015. The analysis of these documents can be used to assess the approaches adopted for
social impact assessment and how these have evolved over the time.
This paper aims to explore how Italian Innovative startups with a social goal approach
the impact assessment and how/if this approach changes over time. With this in mind, an
exploratory analysis was conducted, using a qualitative method based on longitudinal
multiple case studies, to respond the following research questions: (RQ1) What is the
approach to the impact description document by Italian ISUSGs?; (RQ2) How does
impact assessment changes over time?
2. Literature review
Early definitions of social impact assessment (SIA) tended to see it as being
inherently linked to a regulatory context (Vanclay 2003). Over the time, this interpretation
has given way to a broader definition of SIA, including in the impact assessment widely
the effects of projects and other public and private initiatives; the scope of social and
economic variables to be included in social impact assessment has greatly expanded over
the years, with a new consideration to long term impacts related to community
sustainability (Vanclay and Esteves, 2011; Vanclay, 2012). A rich academic literature has
bloomed out, proposing critical and conceptual analysis of SIA (Vivalt, 2015; Mathur,
2016) and/or methodologies for summarizing the results of such assessments (Dos Santos
and Rodrigues, 2008; Roshayani et al., 2015; Koks and Thissen, 2016; Silovská and
Kolaríková, 2016; O’Faircheallaigh, 2017; Grieco, 2018). Many different classifications
329
are proposed about SIA methodologies: Perrini and Vurro (2013) suggest an indexing
among strategic, participatory and integrated methods; Nicholls (2015) distinguishes
between output-based techniques, positive outcome-based techniques and holistic
techniques; Grieco et al. (2015) propose, instead, a classification according to the nature
of the technique, distinguishing four main criteria: simple and social; holistic and
complex; quality screening; management assessments. The most recognized
classification, however, is still that one provided by Clark et al. (2004), which considers
three main approaches to the problem: process methods, impact methods and
monetization methods. Process methods are based on comparative evaluation of inputs,
outcomes and outputs, as defined in the “Impact Value Chain” logical model. The most
common approaches within this category are: Best Available Charitable Option (BACO;
Acumen Fund, 2006), Global Reporting Initiative (GRI; GRI Reporting Framework,
1997), B rating system (B-Lab), Endeavors Impact Assessment Dashboard (SAP, 2011),
Global Impact Investing Rating System (GIIRS; Invest with value, 1970), Impact
Reporting and Investment Standards (IRIS; The Rockefeller Foundation, 2008). Impact
methods seek to capture the social and/or environmental returns of a project or investment
through a qualitative analysis of the interactions among the different elements that define
a particular phenomenon; the most commonly used techniques in this area can be traced
back to the following theoretical approaches: Participatory Impact Assessment (The
Feinstein International Center, Catley, 1999), Ongoing Assessment of Social Impacts
(OASIS, The Roberts Enterprise Development Fund, 2002), Theory of Change (Aspen
Institute, 2002). Monetization methods, finally, assign a monetary value to the benefits
generated by identifying appropriate economic and financial proxies. This group includes:
Cost-benefit analysis, Social Return on Investment (SROI, Roberts Enterprise
Development Fund, 2000), Social Capital Partners’ Socially Adjusted Interest Rate
(Social Capital Partner, 2001).
Overall, the analysis of the literature results in the following main points: lack of
consensus in defining the so-called “impact perimeter”; need to combine cross-discipline
issues and skills; difficulty of finding replicable methods; impact measures are strongly
influenced by the context in which they are applied (“context-dependence issue”, Vivalt
2015); regardless of the practical approach adopted, the identification and involvement of
stakeholders in the impact assessment process is a key.
330
3. Approach/Method
A qualitative approach based on longitudinal multiple case study was adopted,
analyzing Italian innovative startups with social goal operating in the service sector with
Social Impact Description Documents available on their website.
A multiple case study is particularly appropriate, given the focus on the how questions
(Eisenhart, 1989; Eisenhart, Graebner, 2007). Furthermore, longitudinal approach allows
us to observe and analyze the phenomenon during a longer time period (Yin, 2009).
The Italian context is particularly eligible for this study, as Italy introduced a specific
law for innovative startups with a social goal in 2015 and this status has proved
increasingly appealing.
Firms were chosen through a criterion sampling strategy (Patton 2002), based on the
following criterion: we looked for firms set up as Innovative startups with a social goal no
more than five years before, operating in the service sector, and having at least two
consecutive “Social Impact description documents” available on their official websites. In
Italy, Innovative startups with a social goal operating in the service sector are 216
(november 2022); among these firms, 172 have been set up for no more than five years.
We have consulted the websites of these 172 companies, finding Social Impact
description documents available just for six companies; three of these firms have at least
two subsequent Social Impact description documents available, so we focused our
analysis on them (companies are indicated anonymously, as Alpha, Beta and Gamma).
The information was gathered using the Italian Business Register for Innovative startups,
last updated on november, 2022. Data gathered through the multiple case studies have
been analyzed by content analysis (Krippendorff, 2012). It allows us to verify the
alignment of the social impact description documents with the indications contained in
the ministerial guide and other relevant characteristics (readability, style, form, etc.), also
exploring change over time. For each firm we furnish a description of the corporate
purpose and some of its characteristic features; moreover, we compare content of the
Social Impact Description documents of the three firms in our case study with the
characteristics that the document should have according to the indications of the Italian
ministerial guide.
331
4. Results/Findings
Alpha’s and Gamma’s approach to social impact description looks rather like an
attempt to fulfil a legal obligation. In fact, besides being rather concise, the documents do
not contain all the information relating to impact assessment, theoretical framework and
the standards used for measurement. The documents, moreover, show no particular signs
of improvement over time: form and content remain much the same, confirming a style
which is succinct. Readibility is high, because the language is extremely simple, but the
documents don’t allow third parties to deeply understand the actual social impact of the
activity and the path to the impact. Instead, in the case of Beta, the documents deepen
more adequately the description of the social impact, with reference to the theoretical
framework of Theory of change and use of quantitative indicators and standards.
Undoubtedly, this result is conditioned by the fact that Beta is also a benefit corporation:
to meet the transparency requirements of the legislation, Benefit corporations are required
to draw up the annual impact report to be attached to their financial statements and
published on the company website. Firms must be compliant with the evaluation standard
specified by the legislation, so there is a regulatory constraint on the content of the report.
Based on these results, the answers to our two research questions can be formulated as
follows: for (RQ1) “What is the approach to the impact description document by Italian
ISUSGs?: (RQ2) How does impact assessment changes over time?”, the approach to
social impact description still seems to respond, almost exclusively, to a compulsory
requirement to receive/maintain the status of ISUSG; for (RQ2) “How does impact
assessment changes over time?”, the structure and content of the documents appear
almost unchanged over time, revealing a still low level of awareness about this relevant
issue by companies. These critical evidences are mitigated in the case of Beta, since it is
also a benefit corporation.
5. Value & Implications
Results highlight the persistence of significant lacks in assessing the social impact of
ISUSGs, resulting in rather simple social impact description documents, which merely
provide some general information; however, a greater awareness of this issue is emerging
in the case the firm is also a benefit corporation.
332
In our opinion, the search for an effective social impact evaluation approach requires
that both academics and practitioners increase interdisciplinary skills.
The value of our study can be traced in providing an original contribution to the
existing literature, as the studies referring to the theme of impact assessments in
innovative firms in Italy are still limited (Piccarozzi, 2017; Gallo and Vannoni, 2020);
moreover, the Italian case may be relevant to draw policy indications also for other
countries, given the importance that the third sector has in the country; finally, it is
important that companies consolidate increasingly effective solutions to assess their social
impact, because this is also an important driver to ensure sustainable development.
References
Clark, C., Rosenzweig, V., Long, D. and Olsen, S. (2004), Double bottom line project methods
catalog, The Rockefeller Foundation.
Dos Santos, M. R. C. and Rodrigues, G. S. (2008), Journal of Technology Management &
Innovation, 3(3), 123–128.
Eisenhardt, K. M. (1989), “Building theories from case study research”, Academy of management
review, 14(4), 532–550.
Eisenhardt, K. M. and Graebner, M. E. (2007), “Theory building from cases: Opportunities and
challenges”, Academy of management journal, 50(1), 25–32.
Gallo, M. and Vannoni, V. (2021), Social impact assessment in Italian Innovative Startups, in:
“Contemporary Issues in Sustainable Finance, Financial Products and Financial Institution”,
Palgrave Studies in Impact Finance.
Grieco, C., Michelini, L. and Iasevoli, G. (2015), “Measuring value creation in social enterprises: A
cluster analysis of social impact assessment models”, Nonproft and Voluntary Sector
Quarterly, 44(6), 1173–1193.
Grieco, C. (2018), “What do social entrepreneurs need to walk their talk? Understanding the
attitude-behavior gap in social impact assessment practice”, Nonproft Management &
Leadership, 29(1), 105–122.
Koks, E. E. and Thissen, M. (2016), “A multiregional impact assessment model for disaster
analysis”, Economic Systems Research, 28(4), 429–449.
Krippendorff, K. (2012), Content Analysis: An introduction to its Methodology (3rd edn), New
York: Sage.
Mathur, H. M. (2016), ASCI Journal of Management. Special Issue, 45, 72–80.
Mion, G. (2020), “Organizations with impact? A study on Italian benefit corporations reporting
practices and reporting quality”, Sustainability, 12(21), 9038.
Nicholls, J. (2015, Summer), “Measuring social impact”, Pioneers Post Quarterly, 1, 49–53.
Nigri, G., Del Baldo, M. and Agulini, A. (2020), “Governance and accountability models in Italian
certified benefit corporations”, Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental
Management, 27, 2368–2380.
Palazzi F., Sentuti A., Sgrò F. and Ciambotti, M. (2022), Italian Benefit Corporations: An
investigation on the purposes, Annual European SPES Conference, Urbino.
O’Faircheallaigh, C. (2017), Shaping projects, shaping impacts: Community controlled impact
assessments and negotiated agreements, Third World Quarterly, 38(5), 1181–1197.
333
Patton. M. Q. (2002), Qualitative research and evaluation methods (3rd ed.), Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage Publications.
Perrini, F. and Vurro, C. (2013), “Stakeholder orientation and corporate reputation: a quantitative
study on US companies.”, Emerging Issues in Management (symphonya.unimib.it), n. 1, p.
1–13.
Piccarozzi, M. (2017), “Does social innovation contribute to sustainability? The case of italian
innovative start-ups”, Sustainability, 9, 2376.
Roshayani, A., Norliza, O., Noorbijan, A. B. and Noraini, M. N. (2015), “Exploring performance
measurement from the erspective of social impact”, Malaysian Accounting Review, 14(2),
137–154.
Silovská, H. C. and Kolaríková, J. (2016), Observation and assessment of local economic
development with regard to the application of the local multiplier, European Planning Studies,
24(11), 1978–1994.
Taplin, D. H. and Clark, H. (2013), Theory of Change basics, Acknowledge. New York.
http://www.theoryofchange.org.
Vanclay, F. (2003), International principles for social impact assessment, Impact Assessment and
Project Appraisal, 21(1), 5–12.
Vanclay, F. and Esteves, A. M. (2011), New directions in social impact assessment: Conceptual and
methodological advances. Northhampton, MA: Edward Elgar Publishing Inc.
Vanclay, F. (2012), “The otential application of social impact assessment in integrated coastal zone
management”, Ocean & Coastal Management, 68, 149–156.
Vanclay, F. (2020), Reflections on Social Impact Assessment in the 21st century, Impact
Assessment and Project Appraisal, 38(2), 126-131.
Vivalt, E. (2015), “Heterogeneous treatment effects in impact evaluation”, American Economic
Review, 105(5), 467–470.
Yin, R. K. (2009), Case study research: Design and methods (Vol. 5). Sage.
334
A case study of social impact evaluation in a regional
non-profit organisation: Identifying challenges and
suitable measures.
Karen Handley
Newcastle Business School
University of Newcastle
10 Chittaway Road, Ourimbah, NSW, 2259
E-mail: karen.handley@newcastle.edu.au
Keywords Social impact; non-financial reporting; non-profit organisations; case study.
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
This study is focused on the practical dilemmas faced by non-profit leaders as
prompted by Benjamin et al. (2022). It explores a case study of social impact (SI)
reporting and evaluation (SIE) in a small non-profit organisation (NPO) located in a
peripheral region (Tödtling and Trippl, 2005). The study adopts a stakeholder approach
and presents analysis of interviews with stakeholders that establish the perceptions of the
social impact of the organisation as well as their suggestions for how it ought to be
measured. It further shares some suggested metrics specific to this case that may be useful
for other similar entities seeking to produce social impact reports.
2. Literature review
Prosocial activities in NPOs are of interest to a wide group of stakeholders that may
benefit from or support the mission of the NPO either financially or in kind (Arena et al.,
2015). The NPO needs to provide these stakeholders with evidence of their “primary
stewardship” to society (Chen, 1975, p. 536), and may elect to do so using SIE, a
“rational myth” (Kleszczowski and Raulet-Croset, 2022 n.p.) that supports their claims to
legitimacy, but SIE adds the complexity often reserved for for-profit companies like
performance management, heightened accountability, complexity and judgement (Bagnoli
and Megali, 2011). This resource-draining measurement approach may result in
335
inconsistent and localised results, and are particularly difficult for small, underfunded
entities (Kleszczowski and Raulet-Croset, 2022; Luke et al., 2013; Rawhouser et al.,
2019).
Theoretically, agency and stakeholder theories can be used to motivate the need for
NPOs to produce and report measures of their SI. In small NPOs there is a heightened
power imbalance (towards funding providers) and information asymmetry (for managers).
Bagnoli and Megali (2011), identify the community at large as principals, which provides
a view consistent with stakeholder theory in NPOs.
However, quantification of SI creates dilemmas since NPOs and their stakeholders
regularly interact for long periods and many activities are delivered at low or no cost on a
voluntary basis. Further, NPO managers may be inclined to report favourably and not
report failures to resource providers (Polonsky et al., 2016). Small NPOs with limited
pools of funding report erratically and may focus on easily measured outcomes (Kah and
Akenroye, 2020) to protect against mission drift (Maier et al., 2015; Polonsky et al.,
2016).
Careful evaluation of the suitability of the mix of multiple multifaceted measures of
SIE available - both quantitative and qualitative is needed, particularly in the under
researched small entity sector. This is important if funders are to rely on the reports to
allocate scare resources. While not generalisable, researchers propose that small entities
could overcome resource restrictions by selecting narrow parameters like single sectors to
model the relationships between SI and variables like performance ratios (Jo et al., 2015;
Polonsky et al., 2016; Rawhouser et al., 2019).
This study seeks to explore the real-time issues associated with SIE in a small NPO
located in a peripheral region; and the perceptions of stakeholders about the types of
elements (activities or output) that should be included in the SIE and how these might be
valued.
3. Approach/Method
Interview data was recorded and transcribed from 18 stakeholders of a NPO during
the production of a SI report in 2019. Interviewees were drawn using a snowballing
technique from representatives of the triple-helix surrounding this NPO. The first
interviewees were suggested by the CEO of the NPO. The NPO studied is in a peripheral
region and was seeking donor funding. The data was manually analysed for themes using
336
a grounded theory methodology. Additional data was obtained by scanning internal and
publicly available records of the entity.
4. Results/Findings
This NPO is found to provide social benefits that are highly valued by the
stakeholders interviewed. These benefits are not matched by high value outcomes and are
difficult to quantify, particularly where records are scant and similar offerings are few or
non-existent. There is a resultant tension between the desire to quantitatively value SI for
the purposes of seeking funding and the stakeholders’ qualitative perceptions of the NPO.
Further, the NPO’s SI and the CEO’s personal qualities are closely related, making the SI
value difficult to quantify, extract or replicate. The closeness of the ties between the NPO
and its immediate group of stakeholders means that services and benefits are delivered
collectively, and the direct value added by the NPO itself is difficult to extract. These
blurred boundaries, the CEO’s human capital and limited record keeping make historical
quantitative measurement of SI impossible.
The article describes diverse stakeholder understanding of the measurement objectives
of SIE that lead to conflicting expectations of results from SIE and possibilities for
misrepresentation of data. The article describes a set of forward measures constructed for
the NPO by the research team and stakeholders within its SI report that should be
relatively inexpensive to collect, allowing for reporting to funders in future SIE iterations.
5. Value & Implications
There are conflicting interests in small entities like the one described in this article
where the entity believes it needs a SI valuation to secure future funds but does not have
the present resources or records to prepare it. Much of the understanding about SEI in
NPOs is derived from large organisations and this article provides new understandings
from the perspective of a small entity that is also a NPO and in a peripheral region. It
provides caution for funding bodies of small NPOs and underscores the value of a narrow
focus and qualitative evaluations where resources are lacking. It explores the tension
between what is perceived as a “good” SEI and what is possible and valued by internal
stakeholders. Funders should be aware of the blurred boundaries around SIE that might
distort reporting.
337
References
Arena, M., Azzone, G., & Bengo, I. (2015). Performance measurement for social enterprises.
Voluntas,26(2), 649-672. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.1007/s11266-013-9436-8
Bagnoli, L., & Megali, C. (2011). Measuring performance in social enterprises. Nonprofit and
Voluntary Sector Quarterly,40(1), 149-165.
Benjamin, L. M., Ebrahim, A., & Gugerty, M. K. (2022). Nonprofit organizations and the
evaluation of social impact: A research program to advance theory and practice. Nonprofit and
Voluntary Sector Quarterly,early-cite, 1-40. https://doi.org/10.1177/08997640221123590
Chen, R. S. (1975). Social and financial stewardship. The Accounting Review,50(3), 533-543.
Jo, H., Kim, H., & Park, K. (2015). Corporate environmental responsibility and firm performance in
the financial services sector. Journal of Business Ethics,131(2), 257-284.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10551-014-2276-7
Kah, S., & Akenroye, T. (2020). Evaluation of social impact measurement tools and techniques: a
systematic review of the literature. Social Enterprise Journal,16(4), 381-402.
https://doi.org/10.1108/SEJ-05-2020-0027
Kleszczowski, J., & Raulet-Croset, N. (2022). Evaluating social impact in practice: Constructing a
response to institutional demand in a French nonprofit organization. Annals of Public and
Cooperative Economics,93(2), 357-380. https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.1111/apce.12368
Luke, B., Barraket, J., & Eversole, R. (2013). Measurement as legitimacy versus legitimacy of
measures. Qualitative Research in Accounting & Management,10(3/4), 234-258.
https://doi.org/10.1108/QRAM-08-2012-0034
Maier, F., Schober, C., Simsa, R., & Millner, R. (2015). SROI as a method for evaluation research:
Understanding merits and limitations. VOLUNTAS: International Journal of Voluntary and
Nonprofit Organizations,26(5), 1805-1830. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11266-014-9490-x
Polonsky, M. J., Landreth Grau, S., & McDonald, S. (2016). Perspectives on social impact
measurement and non-profit organisations. Marketing Intelligence & Planning,34(1), 80-98.
https://doi.org/10.1108/MIP-11-2014-0221
Rawhouser, H., Cummings, M., & Newbert, S. L. (2019). Social impact measurement: Current
approaches and future directions for social entrepreneurship research. Entrepreneurship Theory
and Practice,43(1), 82-115. https://doi.org/10.1177/1042258717727718
Tödtling, F., & Trippl, M. (2005). One size fits all? Towards a differentiated regional innovation
policy approach. Research Policy,34(8), 1203-1219.
338
Review on the digitalization of occupational welfare
services in Italy before and after the COVID-19
pandemic
Marino Pezzolo
Department of Economy, Society, Politics
University of Urbino
University Address Via Saffi 42 Urbino 61029 (PU) Italy
E-mail: m.pezzolo@campus.uniurb.it
Mara Del Baldo
Department of Economy, Society, Politics
University of Urbino
University Address Via Saffi 42 Urbino 61029 (PU) Italy
E-mail: mara.delbaldo@uniurb.it
Ugo Ascoli
Department of Economics and Social Science
University of Politecnico delle Marche
University Address Piazzale R. Martelli 8 Ancona 60121 (AN) Italy
E-mail: ugo.ascoli@libero.it
Keywords occupational welfare, providers, digital technology, web-based portal
Paper type Long abstract
1. Objectives
One of the most interesting trends in the work Western world, which characterized the
last fifty years is the growth of occupational welfare (OW) (Farnsworth, 2012; Halkos et
al., 2022; Halkos & Nomikos, 2021; Nica, 2013). The main reasons behind the growth of
the OW are attributed, on the one hand to the difficulties of public welfare and on the
other to the prevalence of neo-liberal ideologies (Greve, 2008).
Other reasons are then grafted onto these roots, including greater awareness and
sensitivity on issues such as work-life balance, stress management and the relationship
between employee satisfaction and the evident increase in work productivity with the
consequent affirmation of successful companies.
339
Based on this assumption, the aim of this Systematic Literature Review (SLR) is to
demonstrate how digital technology has altered the OW landscape in Italian SMEs. The
study's central research question is based on SMEs' welfare practices and the phenomenon
of digitalization. The depth of both advantages and disadvantages will be analyzed.
Additionally, using digital service providers that furnish welfare services will receive
attention. In social systematic reviews, generalizing effectiveness studies is necessary to
make meaningful statements about effectiveness. For this purpose, gathering contextual
and procedural data from primary studies is necessary. Therefore, the PICOC model
(Petticrew & Roberts, 2008; Walker, 2007) outlined in Table 1 is used to develop the RQ.
The in-depth study carried out in this paper is derived from the first study on “Digital
welfare: web-based platforms and personal social service use” (Pesenti et al., 2021)
presented at the ISIRC 13th international social innovation research conference. The
proliferation of web-based platforms for accessing a variety of goods and services is
changing the traditional model of distribution and use of welfare services. These
platforms primarily use technology to connect people, organizations, and resources to
create an ecosystem of value. Producers, distributors, and consumers engage and trade
(often without intermediaries) tangible or intangible goods and services leveraging on
user-friendly tools of the (welfare) platform (Bonomi et al., 2020; Iannotta et al., 2014).
Table 1: PICOC model
Variable
Data
Population
SMEs in Italy
Intervention
Digitalization in the role of OW
Comparison
Between SMEs with different features
Outcomes
Level of implementation of OW through the digitalization system
Context
OW from 2012 to 2022
2. Approach/Method
Four electronic databases were selected to ensure the comprehensive literature search:
Web of Science, Google Scholar, Scopus, and ProQuest. Furthermore, given the type of
RQ, only studies published between 2012 and 2022 are considered. A combination of
keywords is considered in the investigation as shown in Table 2.
340
Table 2: Keyword family
keyword family
Keywords used in the research
welfare
corporate welfare; occupational welfare,
social policy
Welfare service
welfare service company, portal, provider,
web-based, intranet
Covid-19
pandemic, Covid-19, SARS-CoV-2
Companies
SMEs. company, firm, organization
digitalization
digitalization, digital service, technology,
information technology, innovative
In the initial phase, the search for keywords was concentrated exclusively on the
abstracts. Subsequently, it was necessary to extend the search to the whole text, as only
the abstracts offered a poor result in terms of numbers. This database exploration resulted
in an initial number of ninety-eight paper across all four databases. Then, in the first
selection round, there was no screened by reading their titles.
The second round of selection comprised removing duplicate paper and reading
abstracts. Furthermore, the grey literature search yielded one Ph.D. dissertation that
explored the topic of interest. It was included in the final list of paper. In total,
twenty-eight studies were thoroughly read and analyzed.
The study is categorized using three different quality rating systems. A checklist with
fourteen questions was used to evaluate the quantitative studies' research design,
sampling, measurements, and statistical analysis (Kmet et al., 2004). Moreover, the paper
adapts a tool suggested by Spencer et al. (2003) for qualitative studies. The framework is
based on a set of guiding principles that can be used to frame and organize appraisal
questions that might be posed to evaluate a piece of work critically. Finally, the checklist
suggested by EFSA (2015) is chosen for the review's quality rating.
It serves as a Critical Appraisal Tool (CAT) that makes it possible to evaluate the
methodological soundness of a study or process, which in turn affects the validity of the
evidence generated by that study or process.
In total, five paper used a qualitative method, twenty used a mixed method or review,
and three used a quantitative method. Most qualitative studies applied thematic analysis,
whereas others used different methods (e.g., survey and focus group). The quantitative
paper used descriptive and regressive analysis to interpret the data.
341
In the last step, the paper are divided into three categories of SLR: information
technology, work-related and Covid-19. Some paper of SLR are included in both
categories.
3. Results/Findings
The SLR analyzed three categories of digitization (information technology,
work-related and Covid-19) about the OW in Italy with an eye to the SMEs which
representing 99.80% of the workforce (EUROSTAT, 2022).
The first category considered, information technology, offered a reasonably clear
overview. In this direction, information technology has undoubtedly simplified access to
the OW. The benefit is that the provider has greatly simplified the delivery of welfare
plans and transformed the management phase into a digital process. Moreover, it adapted
to the changing nature of work under Industry 4.0, a process revolution that is affecting
areas like business organization and people management (Di Paolo, 2021). From this
point of view, as underlined by Bonomi et al. (2020), there are several examples of
suppliers who have approached the world of OW and the employees of companies that
offer this service through “welfare budgets” ranging from the health sector to corporate
welfare (food stamps, fuel vouchers and online purchases). The “welfare budget” makes it
possible to clarify how information technology has undoubtedly eliminated the barriers to
accessing these services not only with platforms but with a real “online world.” Accessing
these services through any device, regardless of position, is possible since the latter can
be viewed online.
The second category taken into consideration concerns the aspect of work and the role
of digitalization. In this case, the SLR underlined, in the first instance, that there is a low
level of collaboration on territorial agreements for the diffusion of the OW about SMEs
(Maino & Rizza, 2018). Apart from some rare examples documented in the paper of Piras
et al., 2018, it is highlighted how most of the SMEs that use OW are headquartered in the
Centre-North.
In this region local welfare is more successful than in the South SMEs (Maino &
Rizza, 2018). Despite the low level of territorial agreements, also in this case it can be
highlighted how digitization could play a key role in the diffusion of the OW through
these projects (Piras et al., 2018).
342
Another major issue the paper addressed in the second category is the role of remote
working. This element straddles two factors: work and covid-19. The pandemic has
wholly revolutionized the paradigm of the use of remote working. If we examine this
element only in relation to the work factor, we can highlight how in the SLR the low use
of forms of flexibility is highlighted in only one paper (Viganò & Lallo, 2020). On the
contrary, other studies underline its importance as a form of work-life balance (Arlotti,
2019; Bonomi et al., 2020).
As previously mentioned, remote working allows the introduction of the third
category of the SLR: Covid-19. In this sense, It is essential to highlight how remote
working has been fundamental during the pandemic in order not to stop all work
activities; in this sense, the companies with a high level of digitization have been able to
offer this service in the best possible way and move all work activities remotely (Delfino
& van der Kolk, 2021). Remote working can be seen as a service included in corporate
welfare since it allows an increase in work-life balance and this perspective, SMEs seem
to favour a policy of mixing remote activities and on-site activities for their employees
(Barabaschi et al., 2022; Delfino & van der Kolk, 2021). The SLR has highlighted
another element of the Covid-19 category, which is related to relations with the
Municipalities. In this direction, during the pandemic emergency, various corporate
welfare programs have changed, which allow employees to apply directly online for
public subsidies (such as solidarity contributions, family allowances, maternity
allowances and Covid-19 shopping vouchers) and social purchase services for children,
the elderly and people with disabilities offered by cooperatives (Santoni & Maino, 2021).
Finally, as regards the health system with the Covid-19 factor, the SLR highlighted a
limited level of association due to the need for specialist solutions to adapt the social and
health services already provided in the territorial business platforms to the complications
imposed by the emergency pandemic (Pesenti & Scansani, 2020; Santoni & Maino,
2021).
Going back to the RQ, with the analysis carried out of the 28 paper object of the SLR
it is possible through the three categories studied (information technology, work, and
covid-19) to affirm that there is an important contribution of digital technology in
changing the landscape of OW in Italian SMEs. From this point of view, it is possible to
mention each element of the three factors under study which had significant relevance in
SLR. Simplification and the online world due to the factor of information technology.
343
Form of territorial aggregation and Work-life balance for the work factor. Finally,
relations with municipalities and remote working for Covid-19. Moreover, it is possible to
underline how the level of digitalization influenced the Covid-19 category. The
companies with a high digitization rate were the ones most ready during the pandemic to
implement remote working with a willingness to maintain it through a structured policy
even after the pandemic emergency. In this vein, the methodological choice of the
systematic literature review sought to highlight some possible gaps in the literature and
propose innovative ideas for future research paths in this field.
In addition, there were definite limitations to this study. Even though the initial phase
of the search produced ninety-eight results, about three-fourths of the studies were
disregarded since they failed to provide any information regarding the digitalization
system and its relationship to the OW throughout the qualification-level screening
process. Secondly, the study found a problem in how study quality was assessed. Some
studies only obtained moderate grades since the authors omitted important information
(such as how to handle outliers or a brief description of the methods section). It is
important to point out that these elements might have been covered in the studies but left
out for space considerations. As a result, the evaluation of research quality may have
produced poor outcomes. Finally, the study conducted an SLR rather than a
meta-analysis. A systematic review is part of every meta-analysis, although not every
systematic review is a meta-analysis. A meta-analysis is a statistical technique for
examining the quantitative findings of a thorough literature study.
4. Value & Implications
This review systematically evaluated the existing literature published between 2012
and 2022 on the multidimensional influencing factors of the digitization system related to
OW in Italy. The paper aims to offer a contribution to the existing literature on OW and
expand studies in terms of the digitalization of the phenomenon.
The contribution built its action through the analysis of the literature on the
development of the digital aspect of SMEs for the provision of welfare services. In this
sense, the research aims to help focus attention on the growth of the role of suppliers
within the selection of corporate welfare paths. The paper sought to increase knowledge
of the subject by drawing on the state-of-the-art of previous research and a detailed
picture of the current situation. The paper also wants to be a starting point for the
344
adoption of managerial techniques that have had a positive impact on corporate welfare
on other entrepreneurial realities. Digitalization can be a useful tool for simplifying and
accessing occupational welfare tools for all employees, even in SMEs that have
traditionally lacked resources for their welfare systems.
References
Barabaschi, B., Barbieri, L., Cantoni, F., Platoni, S., & Virtuani, R. (2022). Remote working in
Italian SMEs during COVID-19. Learning challenges of a new work organization. Journal of
Workplace Learning, 34(6), 497–512. https://doi.org/10.1108/JWL-10-2021-0132/FULL/PDF
Bonomi, S., Piccinelli, N., Rossignoli, C., & Ricciardi, F. (2020). Web Platform and Corporate
Welfare: An Inclusive Organizational Solution. Lecture Notes in Information Systems and
Organisation, 35, 75–91. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-34269-2_6/COVER
Delfino, G. F., & van der Kolk, B. (2021). Remote working, management control changes and
employee responses during the COVID-19 crisis. Accounting, Auditing and Accountability
Journal, 34(6), 1376–1387. https://doi.org/10.1108/AAAJ-06-2020-4657/FULL/PDF
Di Paolo, L. (2021). Il welfare aziendale e il mercato dei provider. Università degli studi di
Bergamo.
EFSA. (2015). Tools for critically appraising different study designs, systematic review and
literature searches. EFSA Supporting Publications, 12(7).
https://doi.org/10.2903/SP.EFSA.2015.EN-836
EUROSTAT. (2022). Annual enterprise statistics by size class for special aggregates of activities.
https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/databrowser/view/SBS_SC_SCA_R2__custom_2973113/bookma
rk/bar?lang=en&bookmarkId=d829b56c-b622-4f2d-991b-7438fc97bfd0
Farnsworth, K. (2012). Social versus Corporate Welfare: Competing Needs and Interests within the
Welfare State. In Social Versus Corporate Welfare: Competing Needs and Interests within the
Welfare State. Palgrave Macmillan. https://doi.org/10.1057/9780230361539/COVER
Greve, B. (2008). Occupational welfare; winners and losers. In Reference &amp; Research Book
News (Issue 1). Ringgold, Inc.
https://go-gale-com.pros2.lib.unimi.it/ps/i.do?p=AONE&sw=w&issn=08873763&v=2.1&it=r
&id=GALE%7CA174601321&sid=googleScholar&linkaccess=fulltext
Halkos, G., & Nomikos, S. (2021). Corporate social responsibility: Trends in global reporting
initiative standards. Economic Analysis and Policy, 69, 106–117.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.eap.2020.11.008
Halkos, G., Nomikos, S., & Tsilika, K. (2022). Evidence for Novel Structures Relating CSR
Reporting and Economic Welfare: Environmental Sustainability—A Continent-Level Analysis.
Computational Economics, 59(2), 415–444. https://doi.org/10.1007/S10614-020-10091-5
Iannotta, M., Gatti, M., & Giordani, F. (2014). Emerging Models for Corporate Welfare and HR
Management in the Service-dominant Logic. In L. Mola, A. Carugati, A. Kokkinaki, & N.
Pouloudi (Eds.), Proceedings of the 8th Mediterranean Conference on Information Systems.
Kmet, L. M., Cook, L. S., & Lee, R. C. (2004). Standard quality assessment criteria for evaluating
primary research papers from a variety of fields. Health Technology Assessment Unit Alberta
Heritage Foundation for Medical Research.
https://www.crd.york.ac.uk/CRDWeb/ShowRecord.asp?ID=32004000313&ID=32004000313
345
Maino, F., & Rizza, R. (2018). Le piccole e medie imprese incontrano il welfare: nuove
opportunità; di tutela dei lavoratori e di crescita per l’azienda e il territorio? Stato e Mercato,
XXXVIII(2), 197–224. https://doi.org/10.1425/90960
Nica, E. (2013). Social responsibility, corporate welfare, and business ethics. Psychosociological
Issues in Human Resource Management, 1(1), 9–14.
Pesenti, L., & Scansani, G. (2020). Welfare aziendale : e adesso? Un nuovo patto tra impresa e
lavoro dopo la pandemia. Vita e Pensiero.
https://www.vitaepensiero.it/scheda-ebook/giovanni-scansani-luca-pesenti/welfare-aziendale-e
-adesso-9788834343067-370088.html
Pesenti, L., Visentin, M., Lodigiani, R., & Colarusso, S. (2021). “digital welfare”: web-based
platforms and personal social service use, ISIRC 13the international social innovation
research conference, Milan, Italy.
https://www.weplat.it/isirc-13th-international-social-innovation-research-conference/
Petticrew, M., & Roberts, H. (2008). Systematic reviews in the social sciences: A practical guide.
John Wiley & Sons.
Piras, E. M., Rossi, P., & Miele, F. (2018). La promozione della salute come forma di welfare
aziendale: la co-costruzione di un’iniziativa di WHP tra prevenzione primaria e processi di
simbolizzazione. Sociologia Del Lavoro, 150, 202–217.
https://doi.org/10.3280/SL2018-150011
Santoni, V., & Maino, F. (2021). Co-progettazione e ibridazione organizzativa per l’imprenditoria
sociale ai tempi del Covid-19. Da cgmwelfare a welfareX, tra digitalizzazione e innovazione di
prossimità. 2WEL WORKING PAPER, 4–28.
Spencer, L., Ritchie, J., Lewis, J., & Dillon, L. (2003). Quality in qualitative evaluation: A
framework for assessing research evidence. A quality framework.
Viganò, F., & Lallo, C. (2020). Il paradosso del non uso delle misure di conciliazione
famiglia-lavoro. Uno studio empirico italiano. Polis, XXXV(2), 363–390.
https://doi.org/10.1424/97777
Walker, J. J. (2007). Systematic Reviews in the Social Sciences: a Practical Guide - by Petticrew,
M. and Roberts, H. Sociology of Health & Illness, 29(2), 318–319.
https://doi.org/10.1111/J.1467-9566.2007.498_4.X
346
347